JP7200011B2 - slot machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention includes a variable display section capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable, and after variably displaying the variable display section, stops variably displaying the variable display section to derive a display result. , relates to a slot machine in which a prize can be awarded according to the display result.

A slot machine is generally equipped with a variable display unit having reels on which a plurality of types of symbols are drawn as identification information on the outer periphery. When the reels start rotating and the stop switch is operated to stop the rotation of the reels, a predetermined symbol combination on the pay line (for example, 7-7-7, hereinafter, the symbol combination is a combination of display results, or Winning occurs by deriving a winning combination.

As the types of winnings, there are types such as small winnings, special winnings, and replay winnings. Here, when the display result corresponding to the minor combination is drawn on the winning line, the number of medals determined for each type of minor combination is paid out. When the display result corresponding to the special combination is drawn on the winning line, the state can be shifted to a special state such as a regular bonus (RB) or a big bonus (BB) that is advantageous to the player. When the display result corresponding to the replayed combination is drawn on the winning line, the next game can be played without consuming new medals for setting the number of bets.

As such a slot machine, there is a slot machine that uses a stepping motor to control the rotation and stoppage of reels to derive predetermined symbols according to the operation of a stop switch (Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-100810

The slot machine described above has room for improvement in terms of smooth progress of the game.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been devised in view of such circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a slot machine that allows a game to progress smoothly.

(1) Equipped with variable display units (e.g., reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information (e.g., symbols) each identifiable,
In a slot machine (e.g., slot machine 1) in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit after the variable display unit is variably displayed, and a prize can be awarded according to the display result,
Predetermining means for determining display results that allow derivation (for example, processing for performing an internal lottery by the main control unit 41 (Sb15 shown in FIG. 13));
derivation operation means (for example, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated to derive display results ;
a start operation means operated to start the variable display of the variable display unit ;
Advantageous state data is set when controlled to an advantageous state,
executing a process related to the advantageous state based on the fact that the advantageous state data is set when the start operation means is operated;
determining whether or not a condition for ending the advantageous state is satisfied when the display result is derived, and executing setting processing for setting an advantageous state ending flag when it is determined that the condition for ending the advantageous state is satisfied;
After executing the setting process, if the derived display result is a display result that accompanies the giving of game value, a giving process of giving game value is executed;
After executing the granting process, it is determined whether or not the advantageous state end flag is set, and if it is determined that the advantageous state end flag is set, the advantageous state including the advantageous state data is determined. Execute the initialization process to initialize the data,
In a game in which the determination result of the pre-determining means is a predetermined determination result (e.g., special replay winning), an operation mode corresponding to the predetermined determination result (e.g., timing of reverse pressing and drawing 7 symbols onto the pay line LN) When a predetermined display result (for example, 7 sets) is derived by operating the derivation operation means , specific processing (for example, lighting of the section display LED 19) can be executed (for example, shown in FIG. 69 Example of pattern 1),
In a game in which the decision result of the pre-decision means is the predetermined decision result, power supply to the slot machine is stopped even though the derivation operation means is operated in an operation mode corresponding to the predetermined decision result. If the predetermined display result is not derived as a result, the specific processing can be executed (for example, pattern 2 (power failure 1) shown in FIGS. 70 and 72),
In a game in which the determination result of the pre-determining means is a determination result different from the predetermined determination result (e.g., a lost winning), when the predetermined display result is derived by stopping the power supply to the slot machine , the specific process can not be executed (for example, pattern 4 (power failure 1) shown in FIGS. 74 and 76),
The identification process is a process of lighting an advantageous lighting section (eg, section display LED 19) related to the advantageous state (eg, AT),
After the power supply to the slot machine is restarted and before an operation relating to progress of the game becomes effective, a process of lighting the advantageous lighting unit based on the operation before the power supply is stopped can be executed. slot machine.

1 is a front view of a slot machine according to this embodiment; FIG. It is a figure which shows the pattern arrangement|sequence of a reel. 1 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a slot machine; FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating a medal selector. It is a figure which shows the memory map of ROM of a main-control part, and RAM. It is a figure which shows the relationship between a game area and a non-game area. It is a figure for demonstrating a game state. It is a figure for demonstrating a ball-out state. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining types of winning combinations, symbol combinations for winning combinations, and awarding at the time of winning; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a combination of winning combinations read out as a lottery target combination for each gaming state; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining reel control when winning a push-in order; FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing the control content of initial setting processing performed by a main control unit; FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing the details of control of main processing performed by a main control unit; FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing the details of control of main processing performed by a main control unit; FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing the details of control of main processing performed by a main control unit; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing the control contents of continuous data processing performed by a main control unit; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing the control contents of continuous data processing performed by a main control unit; It is a figure for demonstrating a continuous data processing table. It is a flow chart showing the control contents of the game start waiting process performed by the main control unit. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the contents of control of medal insertion signal processing performed by a main control unit; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the contents of control of medal sensor processing performed by a main control unit; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the contents of control of medal sensor check processing performed by a main control unit; FIG. 4 is a timing chart for explaining the state transition of a medal insertion signal for determining normal passage of medals in medal insertion signal processing and medal sensor check processing; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the ball output control process which a main control part performs. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing control details of operation information output processing performed by a main control unit; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the details of reel stop control processing performed by a main control unit; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the control contents of data processing for role ratio monitoring performed by a main control unit; FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing the control contents of each state counting process performed by the main control unit; FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing the control contents of timer interrupt processing performed by a main control unit; FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing the control contents of time monitoring update processing performed by a main control unit; FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing the control contents of sensor monitoring processing performed by a main control unit; FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing the control contents of sensor monitoring processing performed by a main control unit; FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing the details of control of test signal output processing performed by a main control unit; FIG. 10 is a flow diagram showing the details of control of timer update processing performed by a main control unit; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the control contents of display monitor output data selection processing performed by a main control unit; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the control contents of display monitor output data selection processing performed by a main control unit; FIG. 10 is a flow diagram showing the control contents of counter update processing performed by a main control unit; It is a timing chart for demonstrating the execution timing of notification during lighting of area display LED. 6 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing (sub) performed by a sub control unit; 10 is a flowchart of payout number counter setting processing performed by a sub-control unit; 9 is a flowchart of number display control processing performed by a sub-controller; 7 is a flowchart of number display update control processing performed by a sub-controller; 6 is a flowchart of a light-off control process performed by a sub-controller; 10 is a flow chart of a prize effect execution process performed by a sub-controller; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of operation timing on the left reel; It is a figure which shows an example of reel control at the time of forward pushing during CB. It is a figure which shows an example of reel control when reverse pushing is carried out during CB. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of reel control when forward pressing is performed during BB; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of reel control when reverse pressing is performed during BB; It is a figure which shows an example of setting suggestion production|presentation (1st mode) in CB. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a setting suggestion effect mode determination table; It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation at the time of CB rushing. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an effect when a CB effect is selected; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of the flow of effects and various displays during CB; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of the flow of effects and various displays during CB; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of the flow of effects and various displays during CB; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of the flow of effects and various displays during CB; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of the flow of effects and various displays during CB; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of the flow of effects and various displays during CB; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of the flow of effects and various displays during CB; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the effect when a result is announced during freezing; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the effect when a result is announced during freezing; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an effect when an RT effect is selected; It is a figure which shows an example of prize-winning production|presentation. It is a figure which shows an example of prize-winning production|presentation. It is a figure which shows an example of prize-winning production|presentation. 4 is a timing chart of processing by a main control unit and a sub control unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining various patterns related to effects and processes depending on the presence or absence of power failure; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining effects and processes in pattern 1; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining effects and processes in pattern 2; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining effects and processes in pattern 2; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining effects and processes in pattern 2; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining effects and processes in pattern 3; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining effects and processing in pattern 4; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining effects and processing in pattern 4; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining effects and processing in pattern 4; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining effects and processes in pattern 5; FIG. 10 is a timing chart for explaining the start timing of a winning notification effect in a game in which power failure has not occurred; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining effects and processing in pattern 6; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining effects and processing in pattern 6; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining effects and processing in pattern 6; FIG. 10 is a timing chart for explaining the start timing of the winning notification effect after the recovery from the power failure in the game in which the power failure occurred; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining effects and processing in pattern 7; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining effects and processes in pattern 8; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining effects and processes in pattern 8; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining effects and processes in pattern 8; FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining effects and processing in pattern 9; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining effects and processes in pattern 10; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining effects and processes in pattern 10; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining effects and processes in pattern 10; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining effects and processes in pattern 11; FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining effects and processes in pattern 12; FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining effects and processes in pattern 12; FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining effects and processes in pattern 12;

A mode for carrying out the slot machine according to the present invention will be described based on the following embodiments. The slot machine 1 is configured to achieve the purpose of smoothly progressing the game, and the various configurations, various processes, or various effects described below enable the smooth progress of the game. Effective. A specific description will be given below.

[Configuration of slot machine 1]
FIG. 1 is a front view of a slot machine 1 according to this embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a pattern arrangement on reels. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the slot machine.

As shown in FIG. 1, the slot machine 1 includes a front door 1b rotatably pivoted on a side end of a housing 1a having an open front. Inside the slot machine 1, reels 2L, 2C, and 2R (hereinafter referred to as left reel, middle reel, and right reel) on which a plurality of mutually identifiable symbols are arranged in a predetermined order and in equal numbers are arranged horizontally. Three consecutive symbols out of the symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are arranged side by side, and are arranged in upper, middle, and lower three stages in a see-through window 3 provided approximately in the center of the front of the slot machine 1. It is arranged so that it can be displayed and seen from the player's side.

Each of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is rotated by a correspondingly provided reel motor. As the reel 2 is rotated by the reel motor, the symbols arranged on the reel 2 are displayed (variably displayed) in the see-through window 3 while continuously changing. Further, when the rotation of the reel motor is stopped and the rotation of the reel 2 is stopped, three consecutive symbols are derived and displayed on the see-through window 3 as a display result. When all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, a plurality of display results are derived, and a display result combination, which is a combination of the plurality of display results, is derived and displayed in the see-through window 3. Hereinafter, the display result combination and the display result derived and displayed on the see-through window 3 will also be referred to as a stop roll and a symbol combination, respectively. Further, among the display results derived and displayed through the see-through window 3, the pattern arrangement seen at the top is also called the upper stage, the pattern arrangement seen at the center is called the middle stage, and the pattern arrangement seen at the bottom is called the lower stage.

In this embodiment, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are divided into 21 areas divided by the number of steps (8 steps) in which one symbol moves. One of these 21 areas is called "1 frame", and the number of symbol movements (number of fluctuations) associated with rotation of the reel is called "number of frames". Each of these 21 areas is assigned a symbol number from 0 to 20 from a predetermined "reel origin position" on the reel, and the types of symbols shown in FIG. 2 are arranged in each area. In addition, the number provided in the left column in FIG. 2 is a pattern number. For example, the number 20 symbol on the left reel 2L is "7".

Each of the reels 2L, 2C and 2R rotates so that each symbol is variably displayed from the upper stage to the lower stage. Specifically, the design No. 20 in FIG. 2 passes through the upper stage of the see-through window 3, then through the middle stage and the lower stage. In other words, while the reel 2 is rotating, symbols 1, 2, 3, . . . Patterns pass through.

The rotation of the reel motor is controlled by operating a left stop switch 8L, a middle stop switch 8C, and a right stop switch 8R (hereinafter collectively referred to as stop switch 8 or stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R) provided on the front door. stop by In other words, the stop switch 8 functions as lead-out operation means operated when stopping the rotation of the reels. The stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are associated with the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, respectively. When the left stop switch 8L is operated, the left reel 2L is stopped and the middle stop switch 8C is operated. Then, the middle reel 2C is stopped, and when the right stop switch 8R is operated, the right reel 2R is stopped.

In this embodiment, a configuration using three reels is exemplified, but a configuration using only one reel, a configuration using two reels, and a configuration using four or more reels are also possible. good. In the present embodiment, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R constitute the variable display portion for variably displaying the symbols, but the variable display portion may be other than the reels. It is also possible to variably display the patterns by moving the belt on which the patterns are arranged. Further, in the present embodiment, the variable display section is configured with a physical reel, but the variable display section may be configured with an image display device such as a liquid crystal display.

On the front of the slot machine 1, as shown in FIG. 1, there are a medal inserting section 4 into which medals can be inserted, a medal payout opening 9 from which medals are paid out, and credits (the number of medals stored as gaming value owned by the player). ) is used to set the maximum number of bets out of the specified number of bets (in this embodiment, 3) determined according to the gaming state within that range, the MAXBET switch 6, the credit Settlement switch 10 operated when settling the medals stored as and the medals used for setting the bet amount (returning the credits and the medals used for setting the bet amount), and when starting the game The start switch 7 to be operated, the stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R to be operated when stopping the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C and 2R, respectively, and the production switch 56 to be operated by the player during production are operated by the player. provided for each possible.

A side lamp 27 made up of a plurality of LEDs is provided in front of the slot machine 1 beside the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. In the vicinity of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, there are provided reels corresponding to the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, respectively, and irradiating the respective reels 2L, 2C, and 2R with light from the back side or the side of the reels. Backlights 28L, 28C, 28C (hereinafter also simply referred to as "reel backlights 28") are provided. Furthermore, a speaker 53 for outputting sound is provided above the liquid crystal display 51 .

Further, the front door 1b is provided above the liquid crystal display 51 with an advantage medium lamp 60 indicating that bonuses (CB, BB, which will be described later) are being controlled. The lighting and extinguishing of the advantageous lamp 60 is controlled by the sub-controller 91 .

On the front of the slot machine 1, as shown in FIG. 1, a credit indicator 11 for displaying the number of medals stored as credits, the number of medals paid out due to the occurrence of a prize, and the content of an error is displayed. A game auxiliary display 12 that displays an error code, operation information (navigation display) corresponding to the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, etc., a 1 BET LED 14 that lights up to notify that the number of bets is set to 1, 2BET LED 15 lights to indicate that the number of bets has been set to 2; 3BETLED 16 lights to indicate that the number of bets has been set to 3; A state display LED 17 that notifies by lighting that the control is in the middle state, a start effective LED 18 that notifies by lighting that the game start operation by operating the start switch 7 is effective, and the section state is an advantageous section (advantageous section AT A game display unit 13 is provided that includes a section display LED 19 that lights up to indicate that the game is being controlled to a special zone or advantageous section, and a replaying LED 20 that lights up to indicate that a replay game is in progress.

Inside the MAXBET switch 6, there is provided a BET switch valid LED 21 (see FIG. 3) for notifying by lighting that the setting operation of the number of bets by operating the MAXBET switch 6 is valid. Left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R (see FIG. 3) are provided inside the 8R, respectively, to notify by lighting that the operation to stop the reels by the corresponding stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is effective. is provided.

Inside the front door 1b of the slot machine 1, there is a reset switch 23 for detecting a reset operation for releasing an error state from the outside of the slot machine 1 by operating a predetermined key. A setting value display 24 that displays the setting value at that time, a door open detection switch 25 that detects the open state of the front door 1b, a flow path of medals inserted from the medal insertion part 4, A channel switching solenoid 30 for selectively switching to either the hopper tank side or the medal payout port 9 side provided in the , detects the medals that have been inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 and flowed down to the hopper tank side. A medal selector 29 having inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is provided.

Further, inside the slot machine 1, a reel unit 34 for rotating or stopping the aforementioned reels 2L, 2C, and 2R according to a control signal from the main control section 41, a control unit 34 from the main control section 41 are provided. A hopper unit 35 is provided for paying out medals from the medal pay-out port 9 according to a signal.

Also, inside the slot machine 1, there is a setting key switch 37 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, and normally functions as a reset switch for canceling an error state. A reset/setting switch 38 that functions as a setting switch for changing the set value of the probability of winning the internal lottery (percentage of winning balls), and a power switch (not shown) that is operated when turning the power ON/OFF are provided. there is

Inside the slot machine 1, in a state in which the game control board 40 is attached to a predetermined position inside the housing 1a, a 7-segment display is arranged below the front side (player side) of the game control board 40. A gaming machine information display 50 is arranged. The gaming machine information display device 50 has a state in which the game control board 40 is enclosed in a board case (not shown), and the display contents can be visually recognized from the outside of the board case. The store clerk or the like can recognize the game information based on the game history in the slot machine 1 displayed on the game machine information display device 50. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 3, the slot machine 1 is provided with a game control board 40 and an effect control board 90. A game is controlled by the game control board 40, and a game state is controlled by the effect control board 90. Control of the production according to is performed.

The game control board 40 includes the aforementioned MAXBET switch 6, start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, checkout switch 10, reset switch 23, insertion medal sensor 31, reel sensor (not shown) of reel unit 34, hopper A payout sensor and a full tank sensor (not shown) of the unit 35, a setting key switch 37, and a reset/setting switch 38 are connected, and detection signals from these connected switches are input.

In addition, the game control board 40 includes the aforementioned credit display 11, game auxiliary display 12, 1-3 BET LEDs 14-16, status display LED 17, start effective LED 18, section display LED 19, replay LED 20, BET switch effective LED 21, left , Middle and right stop valid LEDs 22L, 22C, 22R, set value display 24, flow path switching solenoid 30, reel unit 34, hopper unit 35 are connected, and these electrical components and game control board 40 The game machine information display 50 is driven under the control of the main control section 41 mounted on the game control board 40 .

The game control board 40 is equipped with a main control section 41 which is composed of a microcomputer having a main CPU 41a, a ROM 41b, a RAM 41c, and an I/O port 41d (none of which is shown) and which controls games.

The main control unit 41 includes a plurality of registers used by the main CPU 41a for calculation. The plurality of registers includes registers such as accumulator registers, flag registers, general purpose registers, index registers, interrupt registers, refresh registers, and program counters. Among these registers, the accumulator register, flag register, and general-purpose register each include a front register and a back register that are paired (hereafter, the front register and back register may be simply referred to as registers). be). The main CPU 41a executes various instructions such as calculation instructions and readout instructions included in the program, thereby updating the values of predetermined registers and storing data in the RAM specified by the values (addresses) of predetermined registers. It is possible to update the values (data) stored in the area.

In addition, the flag register among the registers provided in the main control unit 41 is configured so that its state changes so as to indicate the operation result by the instruction executed by the main CPU 41a. Then, the main CPU 41a can be made to perform processing according to the result of calculation by the preceding instruction.

In addition, the flag register is composed of a plurality of bits (8 bits in this embodiment), and in order to reduce the processing load of the main CPU 41a, the flag register has an arithmetic instruction executed by the main CPU 41a. The state changes according to the result, but the first bit (hereinafter referred to as the first zero flag) is configured so that the state does not change in a specific instruction (for example, read instruction LD (hereinafter sometimes referred to as LD instruction)). Z), and a second bit (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a second zero flag TZ) whose state changes according to the result of the operation of an operation instruction, and whose state changes even with a specific instruction. ) and so on. It should be noted that each process included in the game program, which will be described later, refers to the value of bits other than the second zero flag included in the flag register when proceeding with the process based on the instruction, and makes a decision. , and second zero flag bit values are not referred to for determination.

The main control section 41 also transmits various commands to the sub-control section 91 . A command sent from the main control section 41 to the sub-control section 91 is sent only in one direction, and no command is sent from the sub-control section 91 to the main control section 41 .

The I/O port 41d includes output ports 0 to 9, and the main control unit 41 can output control signals for the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R from the output ports 0 and 1. Control signals for the left/middle/right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R and control signals for the passage switching solenoid 30 can be output from the output port 3, and control signals for the hopper motor 34b and external output signals can be output from the output port 3. , the control signals of the credit indicator 11, game auxiliary indicator 12, 1-3 BETLEDs 14-16, status display LED 17, start effective LED 18, section display LED 19, replaying LED 20, and BET switch effective LED 21 are sent from output port 4 and output port 5. A test signal can be output from an output port 6, a test signal and an external output signal can be output from an output port 7, and a command can be output from an output port 8 and an output port 9.

In addition, the main control unit 41 repeatedly loops the processing corresponding to the control state until the detection state of the various switches connected to the game control board 40 changes as the main processing, and changes the detection state of the various switches. Execute the process to migrate step by step according to the situation. The main control unit 41 also executes timer interrupt processing (main) at regular time intervals (about 0.56 milliseconds in this embodiment). Note that the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (main) is set to a time longer than the sum of the time taken for the process to be repeated according to the control state in the main process and the execution time of the timer interrupt process (main). This means that at least one cycle of processing that is always repeated according to the control state will be performed between the current and next timer interrupt processing (main).

In this embodiment, an instruction that can be executed by the main control unit 41 is a save instruction that saves the values of the registers that the main control unit 41 has in a stack area of the RAM 41c indicated by the stack pointer SP in a predetermined order. , the values of the registers saved in the stack area of the RAM 41c by the save instruction are sequentially read from the stack area in the reverse order of saving, and set in the register corresponding to the order, so that the corresponding register and a return instruction for returning the state of the state to the state when it was saved by the save instruction.

The save instructions are the first save instruction (PUSH ALL) for saving the values of all the registers provided in the main control unit 41 to the stack area of the RAM 41c, and the first save instruction (PUSH ALL) for saving the values of all the registers provided in the main control unit 41, and and a second save instruction (PUSH AF) for saving the value of the flag register to the stack area of the RAM 41c. The first save instruction is an instruction requiring a program capacity of 2 bytes, and the second save instruction is an instruction requiring a program capacity of 1 byte. By executing the save instruction in the game program, it is possible to save the value of the register in the game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP set for the game program, and executing the save instruction in the non-game program. , it is possible to save the value of the register in the non-game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP set for the non-game program.

The return instruction includes a first return instruction (POP ALL) that sets and restores the values saved in the stack area of the RAM 41c for all the registers that the main control unit 41 has, and Among them, a second return instruction (POP AF) for setting and restoring the value saved in the stack area of the RAM 41c is included for the flag register in which the calculation result is stored. The first return instruction is an instruction requiring a program capacity of 2 bytes, and the second return instruction is an instruction requiring a program capacity of 1 byte. By executing a return instruction in the game program, the value of the register saved from the game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP set for the game program can be called, set in the corresponding register, and returned. It is possible, and by executing a return instruction in a non-game program, call the value of the register saved from the non-game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP set for the non-game program, and store it in the corresponding register It is possible to set and restore.

The production control board 90 is connected to production devices such as the liquid crystal display 51, the speaker 53, the reel backlights 28L, 28C, 28R, the side lamps 27, and the advantage lamp 60. Outputs of these production devices The state can be controlled by a sub-control section 91 mounted on the effect control board 90 . The sub control unit 91 receives commands transmitted from the main control unit 41 and performs various controls for effecting.

The liquid crystal display 51 has a liquid crystal panel that is transparent when no voltage is applied to the liquid crystal element, and is located in front of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R of the front door 1b (player side). is provided so that the display area is arranged in the The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R on the back side of the liquid crystal display 51 can be visually recognized from the player side through the transmission area corresponding to the see-through window 3 in the display area of the liquid crystal display 51 and through the see-through window 3.

The slot machine 1 of this embodiment has a configuration in which the payout rate of medals changes according to the set value. More specifically, the payout rate of medals is changed by using a winning probability corresponding to a set value in a lottery such as an internal lottery that affects the degree of advantage for a player. The set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6. 6 is the highest payout rate, and the payout rate becomes lower as the value decreases in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the degree of advantage for the player is the highest, and as the value decreases in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the degree of advantage decreases stepwise.

In order to change the setting value, it is necessary to turn on the power switch 39 of the slot machine 1 after turning on the setting key switch 37 . When the setting key switch 37 is turned on and the power is turned on, the setting value read from the RAM 41c is displayed on the setting value display 24, and the setting value can be changed by operating the reset/setting switch 38. Move to the setting change state. When the reset/setting switch 38 is operated in the setting change state, the display value displayed on the setting value display 24 is updated by 1 (when the operation is further performed from the setting value 6, the setting value is changed to 1). return). Then, when the start switch 7 is operated, the displayed value is determined as the set value. Then, when the setting key switch 37 is turned off, the determined display value (set value) is stored in the RAM 41c of the main control section 41, and the state shifts to a state in which the game can proceed.

The setting key switch 37 and the reset/setting switch 38 are provided inside the slot machine 1 and cannot be operated unless the front door 1b, which can be opened by operating a predetermined key, is opened. Only the store clerk who has a predetermined key among the store clerk of the installed amusement shop can operate. In particular, since the setting key switch 37 requires further key operation, it can be operated only by a store clerk who has a key for operating the setting key switch 37, even among game store clerks. Further, the reset switch 23 does not need to open the front door 1b, but requires key operation using a predetermined key, so that it can be operated only by a store clerk who has a predetermined key. Also, the reset/setting switch 38 normally functions as a reset switch for canceling an error state. In this embodiment, operating the start switch 7 to rotate the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is also called "start operation". Further, when the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are rotated by operating the start switch 7, the rotation of the first reel is stopped by the first operation (first operation) among the stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R. "first stop operation" to stop the rotation of the second reel by the second operation (second operation), "second stop operation" to stop the rotation of the second reel by the second operation (second operation), and 3 by the third operation (last operation) Stopping the rotation of the second reel is also referred to as a "third stop operation". In addition, releasing the depression of the third stop switch (third stop operation) (that is, releasing the stop switch) is also referred to as "third stop release". Also, operating the left stop switch 8L, the middle stop switch 8C, and the right stop switch 8R in this order is "forward pressing", and operating the right stop switch 8R, the middle stop switch 8C, and the left stop switch 8L in this order is "reverse pressing". ” is also called.

When a game is played on the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, first, medals are inserted from the medal insertion portion 4 or the MAXBET switch 6 is operated to set the bet amount using credits. When the prescribed number of bets determined according to the gaming state is set, a predetermined winning line LN (see FIG. 1, in this embodiment, is horizontally aligned in the middle of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R). ) is enabled, and the operation of the start switch 7 is enabled, that is, the game can be started. When the maximum number of medals among the specified number corresponding to the game state is exceeded, the amount is added to the credits. Also, in this embodiment, only one pay line is applied, but a plurality of pay lines may be applied.

When the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are rotated and the symbols on the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are continuously varied. When one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated while the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are rotating, the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R are controlled to stop, and the rotation of the reels is stopped. The game is stopped, and the symbols on the relevant reel are derived and displayed on the see-through window 3 as a display result. The rotation of the reels 2L, 2C and 2R is stopped on condition that the respective stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R are manually depressed. That is, after each stop switch is manually depressed, even if the depression is maintained without being released, the rotation of each reel is stopped and the pattern is led out to the see-through window 3 .

In the stop control, when the winning of the special winning combination (BB and CB in this embodiment) is carried over, the small winning combination is won by the internal lottery, and the special winning combination and the small winning combination are won at the same time. When , it is possible to control so as to preferentially draw the constituent symbols of the winning minor combination to the winning line LN within the aforementioned drawing range, and draw the constituent symbols of the winning minor combination to the winning line LN. When it is not possible, control is performed so that the constituent symbols of the winning special combination are pulled into the winning line LN. Therefore, in a game in which a special role and a minor role are won at the same time, it is difficult to win the winning special role.

In addition, in the stop control, when the winning of the special role (BB, CB in this embodiment) is carried over, the replay role is won by internal lottery, and the special role and the replay role are won at the same time. When it is in the state of being in a winning state, the constituent symbols of the winning replaying combination are preferentially drawn to the winning line LN. The symbols constituting the replay combination in each of the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are arranged within a predetermined drawing range, and when the replay combination is won, the symbols constituting the replay combination are always drawn into the winning line LN. Become. Therefore, in a game in which a special role and a replay role are won at the same time, the winning special role cannot be awarded.

In addition, in the stop control, in a game in which winning of a special combination (BB, CB in this embodiment) is carried over and a prescribed number of bets corresponding to the winning special combination is set, Although it is possible to draw the constituent symbols of the winning special role into the winning line LN, in a game in which a prescribed number of bets is set that does not correspond to the winning special role, the winning special role is controlled so as not to draw the constituent symbols of , into the winning line LN. Therefore, in a game in which a special role is won, if the specified number of bets corresponding to the winning special role is not set, the special role is not won. .

When all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, one game is finished, and a combination of symbols of a predetermined winning combination is displayed on each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R and stopped on the winning line LN. In this case, a winning occurs, and the number of medals determined according to the winning is given to the player and added to the credits. Also, when the number of credits reaches the upper limit (50 in this embodiment), medals are paid out directly from the medal payout port 9 (see FIG. 1). Further, when a combination of symbols accompanied by a transition of the game state on the winning line LN stops as a result of the display of the respective reels 2L, 2C and 2R, the game state is shifted to a game state corresponding to the combination of symbols. there is

In this embodiment, the game starts when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected while the operation of the start switch 7 is valid, and the game ends when all the reels are stopped. In addition, one unit of control (game control) for executing the game starts when all the controls associated with the end of the previous game are completed, and when all the controls associated with the end of the game are completed. finish.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the type of winning combination (hereinafter referred to as winning combination) is determined according to the gaming state, and there is no need to set a small combination involving the payout of medals and the number of bets. There are a replay combination in which a replay that enables the start of the next game is given to the player, and a special combination that involves a transition to a game state (special state) that is advantageous to the player. In the following, the small combination and the replay combination are collectively referred to as a general combination. In order to generate a prize for each combination determined according to the game state, it is necessary to win the internal lottery and set the win flag for the combination. In the internal lottery, the main control unit 41 decides whether or not to allow the winning of each of the above-mentioned combinations before the display results of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are derived (specifically, a specified number of When the operation of the start switch 7 is detected with the number of bets set, a random number is used for determination.

Of the winning flags for each role, the winning flags for the small winning combination and the replaying combination are valid only in the game in which the flag is set, and are invalid in the next game. It is valid until the combination of roles allowed by the flag is complete, and is invalid in the game in which the combination of roles allowed is complete. That is, once the winning flag of the special combination is won, even if the combination of combinations allowed by the flag cannot be arranged, the winning flag is not invalidated and is carried over to the next game. It's becoming

In addition, in the internal lottery, when the stop operation is performed in a predetermined operation manner (for example, the stop operation order (push order), operation timing), the stop operation is performed in another operation manner. Advantageous small winnings and replaying winnings (hereinafter sometimes referred to as navigable winnings) can be won. The navigable role includes, for example, a role in which the stop mode is more advantageous than the stop mode in which the stop operation is performed in a predetermined operation mode, rather than the stop mode in which the stop operation is performed in another operation mode. , and a winning combination in which, when the stop operation is performed in a predetermined predetermined operation mode, the rate of stopping in an advantageous stop mode is higher than in the case where the stop operation is performed in another operation mode. In addition, the advantageous stop mode includes not only the stop mode accompanied by awarding of medals, but also the stop mode accompanied by a transition to an advantageous game state, a stop mode in which a transition to a disadvantageous game state is avoided, and the like.

The main control unit 41 executes navigation information that can identify the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R that is advantageous to the player according to the result of the internal lottery by the lighting mode of the game auxiliary display 12. It is possible to control the assist time (AT), which is a possible notification period. When the right to be controlled by the AT is granted to the player, the main control unit 41 starts controlling the AT and controls the AT. Then, when the AT is controlled, by winning the navigation target role, the navigation notification is executed, and the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R (for example, pressing order, operation timing, etc.) are notified using the game auxiliary display device 12, and a command capable of specifying an operation mode advantageous to the player is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, whereby the operation mode is displayed on the liquid crystal display. 51 or the like is used to execute a navigation effect. By operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R in an operation mode notified by the navigation notification and the navigation effect, the navigation target role won by the internal lottery can be surely won.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 includes a game auxiliary display 12 capable of displaying the number of medals to be paid out, an error code, and navigation information. Although it is a configuration to notify the navigation information, it may be configured to provide a dedicated display capable of displaying only the navigation information, and to notify the navigation information using the dedicated display in the control of the navigation notification.

[About Medal Selector]
The structure of the medal selector 29 arranged inside the front door 1b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the medal selector 29. As shown in FIG. In the following description, the front side of the medal selector 29 is defined as the medal selector 29 viewed from the rear side of the front door 1b.

The medal selector 29 is configured in a rectangular parallelepiped shape as shown in FIG. The left side wall of the main body is provided with an outflow port 142 through which medals can flow out from the inside of the main body to the outside of the hopper tank 34a side, and the lower side wall of the main body is provided with a medal payout port from the inside of the main body. A discharge port 143 capable of discharging medals to the outside on the 9 side is provided. Inside the main body of the medal selector 29, there is formed a substantially L-shaped medal flow path communicating from the inflow port 141 to the outflow port 142 when viewed from the front. As shown in FIGS. 4(b) and 4(c), the side walls of this medal flow channel are inclined forward from bottom to top so that the upper end of the flowing medals is tilted more forward than the lower end. there is Further, a substantially S-shaped token flow downstream passage is formed in communication from the inflow port 141 to the discharge port 143 . Hereinafter, among the medal flow downstream channels inside the main body of the medal selector 29, the flow channel on the inlet 141 side is the medal inflow channel 29a, the flow channel on the outflow port 142 side is the medal receiving channel 29b, and the medal receiving channel 29b is on the outlet 143 side. The channel is called a medal return channel 29c.

The medal selector 29 is designed to determine the authenticity (shape, size, thickness, etc.) of inserted medals. After being detected by the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c by flowing down the medal inflow channel 29a and the medal receiving channel 29b inside and passing through the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, the outflow port 142 is drained from The medals are guided to the hopper tank 34a via the medal chute 142a (not shown). On the other hand, after flowing in from the inflow port 141 , the fake medal is dropped into the medal return channel 29 c while flowing down the medal inflow channel 29 a , flows down the medal return channel 29 c , and is discharged from the discharge port 143 . be. The medals are returned to the lower tray from the medal payout port 9 (see FIG. 1) through a medal return passage (not shown) provided below the medal selector 29 .

At the confluence of the medal inflow channel 29a, medal receiving channel 29b, and medal return channel 29c, a channel switching solenoid 30 (see FIG. 3) provided on the front side of the main body of the medal selector 29 is excited. In conjunction, before the medal flowing down the medal inflow channel 29a flows into the medal receiving channel 29b, the medal is forcibly dropped downward from the medal inflow channel 29a, and the medal is returned. A channel switching plate 147 is swingably provided for allowing the flow to flow into the channel 29c.

The flow path switching plate 147 opens the lower side of the medal inflow flow path 29a as shown in FIG. It is possible to swing so that the medal inflow channel 29a and the medal return channel 29c are in communication with each other. When the channel switching solenoid 30 is energized, that is, when medal reception is permitted, the upper part of the channel switching plate 147 is directed leftward in the figure (arrow A direction), the upper end surface of the flow path switching plate 147 forms the bottom surface of the medal inflow flow path 29a, the lower side of the medal inflow flow path 29a is closed, and the medal inflow flow path 29a is closed. and the medal return channel 29c are configured to be able to swing so as not to communicate with each other. With such a configuration, when the flow path switching solenoid 30 is energized, medals flowing from the inlet 141 and flowing down the medal inflow flow path 29a flow down along the upper end surface of the flow path switching plate 147, It flows into the medal receiving channel 29b and flows out from the outlet 142. As shown in FIG.

Further, on the upstream side of the medal inflow channel 29a, an insertion port sensor 26 for detecting passage of medals that have flowed in from the inflow port 141 is provided. Inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c are provided for detecting passage of ejected medals.

Among the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, the inserted medal sensors 31a and 31c detect the passage of medals when the medals pass between the light projecting section and the light receiving section, and the light receiving section detects that the light from the light projecting section is blocked. The inserted medal sensor 31b detects the passage of the medal by detecting the movement of a movable piece (not shown) that operates in conjunction with the passage of the medal with a detector (not shown). sensor. Hereinafter, the inserted medal sensor 31a may be referred to as the inserted medal sensor 1, the inserted medal sensor 31b may be referred to as the inserted medal sensor 2, and the inserted medal sensor 31c may be referred to as the inserted medal sensor 3. Further, the range in which passage of medals is detected by the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c may be referred to as a detection range A in some cases.

Next, the configuration of the inserted medal sensor 31b, which is a physical sensor, will be described. A movable piece of the inserted medal sensor 31b is provided on the side wall of the lower part of the medal selector 29 on the downstream side of the medal receiving channel 29b so as to be able to appear and retract into the medal receiving channel 29b. Further, a detector is installed at a position corresponding to the movable piece outside the medal receiving channel 29b. The detector is provided with a light projecting part and a light receiving part in the detection part. When the medal passes through the medal receiving flow path 29b, the movable piece moves the tip of the movable piece away from the medal receiving flow path 29b. is made to enter between the light projecting part and the light receiving part of the detection part, the light emitted from the light projecting part to the light receiving part is blocked, and the passage of the medal is detected by the detector. It's becoming On the other hand, the movable piece is biased so that the tip of the movable piece protrudes into the medal receiving passage 29b when no medal is passing through the medal receiving passage 29b. In this state, the detected part of the movable piece does not enter between the light projecting part and the light receiving part of the detecting part, and the light emitted from the light projecting part of the detecting part to the light receiving part is not blocked. The passage of medals is not detected by the device.

[Regarding the memory area and program of the main control part]
The main control unit 41 includes a ROM 41b and a RAM 41c having memory areas for storing predetermined programs and data.

FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a memory map of the ROM 41b and RAM 41c of the main control section 41. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 5(a), the program/data area in the ROM 41b includes a game program area for storing a game program related to the progress of a game, a game data area for storing game data used by the game program, and a non-programming area. It includes a use area 1, a non-game program area storing non-game programs not related to the progress of the game, a non-game data area storing non-game data used by the non-game program, and an unused area 2.

It should be noted that the progress of the game means the progress of a series of processes that constitute the game, and in the case of a slot machine, at the stage when the bet number is set and the game can be started, the game is started and the reels are rotated. a step of stopping the reels and deriving the display result; and a step of giving a value such as a medal according to the display result.

As shown in FIG. 5(b), the usable area of the RAM 41c includes a game RAM area used as work by the game program, a non-game RAM area used by the non-game program as work, and an unused area 4. , the game RAM area includes a special work, an important work, a general work, an unused area 3, and a game stack area where the game program saves data, and the non-game RAM area contains the game program. It includes an area that can be referred to, an area that cannot be referred to by the game program, and a non-game stack area where the non-game program saves data. In this embodiment, the game stack area and the non-game stack area are separately provided in different areas, but the game program and the non-game program may share one stack area.

The unused area 3 is an area that is not used by either the game program or the non-game program, and is an area that is surplus with respect to the game RAM area having a predetermined capacity.

The unused area 4 is an area of 16 bytes or more that is not used by either the game program or the non-game program. Since the game RAM area and the non-game RAM area are allocated to discontinuous areas with the unused area 4 interposed therebetween, the game RAM area used by the game program related to the progress of the game and the non-game RAM area not related to the progress of the game are allocated. The non-game RAM area used by the game program can be easily identified according to the difference in storage area.

Hereinafter, the game program area, the game data area, and the game RAM area may be collectively referred to as the game area, and the non-game program area, the non-game data area, and the non-game RAM area may be collectively referred to as the non-game area. There is Also, unused area 1 and unused area 2, unused area 3 and unused area 4 may be collectively referred to as unused areas.

[Instructions used by the program]
The program executed by the main control unit 41 includes a main routine that manages the progress of the entire program and subroutines that are called during execution of other programs.

Also, the call instruction for calling and executing the program stored in the program/data area in the main control unit 41 includes a CALL instruction, a CALLV instruction, an RST instruction, and the like.

A CALL instruction is an instruction to call and execute a subroutine stored at an address specified in a main routine or subroutine. When calling a subroutine by a CALL instruction, the main control unit 41 stores the address of the caller in the stack area, and calls and executes the subroutine stored at the designated address. After the end of the subroutine, the caller address stored in the stack area, that is, the program of the caller main routine or subroutine that executed the CALL instruction is returned.

CALL instructions include normal CALL instructions and CALLV instructions, which are special CALL instructions. A normal CALL instruction is an instruction that calls a subroutine by specifying both a high-order address and a low-order address. This is an instruction to call a subroutine by specifying an address based on a preset high-order address and a specified low-order address in the vector table area of the ROM 41b. can be called.

The RST instruction is an instruction for specifying values corresponding to a plurality of predetermined specific addresses to call and execute a subroutine stored at a specific address corresponding to the specified values. A subroutine can be called with a smaller amount of data compared to an instruction or CALLV instruction. When calling a subroutine by the RST instruction, the main control unit 41 stores the address of the caller in the stack area, and calls and executes the subroutine stored at the specific address corresponding to the specified value. After the end of the subroutine, the caller address stored in the stack area, ie, the main routine or subroutine that executed the RST instruction, is returned to.

A jump instruction is an instruction to move to a program stored at an address specified in a main routine or subroutine. The main control unit 41 moves to the program stored at the address specified by the jump instruction, and executes the program at the move destination. In this case, unlike the CALL instruction and the RST instruction, even if the program after movement ends, the original program will not be restored.

Of the game programs stored in the ROM 41b, subroutines that are used particularly frequently are stored in areas of the game program area of the ROM 41b whose start address is a specific value (for example, 00H). On the other hand, in the vector table area of the ROM 41b, a specific value is set as the upper address of the subroutine called by the CALLV instruction. Then, when calling a subroutine in which the upper address of the start address is a specific value, the main control unit 41 uses the CALLV instruction to specify only the lower address, thereby using the specific value set in the vector table area as the upper address. A lower address specified as a lower address is specified, and a subroutine stored at the combined address of the upper and lower addresses is called and executed. For this reason, upper addresses constituting part of the addresses used when calling subroutines that are used particularly frequently in the game program are set in the vector table in advance as specific values, and based on the specific values set in the vector table. Since the address is specified by the It is possible to reduce the waste of programs for specifying addresses.

In this embodiment, the vector table area of the ROM 41b used by the CALLV instruction and the specific address area of the ROM 41b used by the RST instruction store the beginning of the subroutine of the game program. Since it is possible to call a subroutine with a smaller amount of data compared to the CALL instruction, the data volume of the game program can be reduced by using the CALLV instruction and RST instruction in the game program. there is In addition, in the vector table area and the specific address area of the ROM 41b, the top of the subroutine of the game program is stored, and the top of the non-game program is not stored. will be called, and the reduction of the data volume of the game program will not be hindered.

Of the non-game programs stored in the ROM 41b, subroutines with a particularly high frequency of use are stored in a non-game program area of the ROM 41b in which the first address is a specific value, and a CALLV instruction is stored in the vector table area of the ROM 41b. By setting a specific value as the upper address of the subroutine to be called by the CALLV instruction and specifying only the lower address using the CALLV instruction when the main control unit 41 calls the subroutine in which the upper address of the starting address is the specific value, these subroutines , it is possible to call a subroutine with a smaller amount of data compared to a normal CALL instruction that calls a program by specifying both an upper address and a lower address. It is possible to reduce the waste of the program for specifying the address when calling.

Also, the high-order address used when calling with the CALLV instruction may be set in a specific register of the main control unit 41 instead of the vector table area.

Also, not limited to the CALLV instruction, a part of the address is specified using a value stored in the vector table area, a value set in a specific register, or the like, and by specifying the remaining part of the address, the subroutine With a configuration using a special CALL instruction that can specify the storage address of the subroutine, it is possible to reduce the waste of the program for specifying the address when calling the subroutine. In addition, by assigning an identification value smaller in data volume than an address to each of the plurality of areas that make up the vector table area, setting the subroutine storage address to each of these areas, and specifying the identification value, the identification Even with a configuration that uses a special CALL instruction that makes it possible to specify the storage address of a subroutine stored in an area corresponding to a value, it is possible to reduce program waste for specifying an address when calling a subroutine. .

The main control unit 41 is activated by the occurrence of a system reset by the input of a system reset signal, a WDT reset by a WDT (watch dog timer, not shown), and the aforementioned illegal access reset. The value set in the area, that is, the upper address of the subroutine of the CALLV instruction and the start address of the timer interrupt processing (main) is a value indicating the area where the program etc. are actually stored in the program area, or FFFFH (value set in unused vector table area). It is designed not to start up, and it is possible to prevent in advance from executing unintended processing due to the occurrence of an interrupt or the like.

An LD instruction is included as a read instruction for causing the main control unit 41 to read data stored in the program/data area. The LD instruction is an instruction to read data stored at an address specified in a main routine or subroutine to a specified register. The main control unit 41 reads the data stored at the address specified by the LD instruction, and stores the read data in the register specified by the LD instruction.

LD instructions include normal LD instructions and LDQ instructions, which are special LD instructions. A normal LD instruction is an instruction to read data stored in a specific area of the ROM 41b or RAM 41c by specifying both a high-order address and a low-order address. By designating only the lower address, the ROM 41b or the RAM 41c is specified by the upper address preset in the special register (Q register) in the internal function register area of the RAM 41c and the specified lower address. This is an instruction to read data stored in a specific area and store the read data in a specified register. Compared to a normal LD instruction, the specified data can be stored in a specified register with a smaller amount of data. It becomes possible.

When reading data stored in a specific area of the ROM 41b or RAM 41c in the main routine or subroutine, the LDQ instruction, which is a special LD instruction, can be used to read all addresses (upper part and lower part) indicating the specific area. It is possible to read the data in the specific area by specifying only the lower part of the address instead of specifying it. By using the LDQ instruction, it is possible to read data with a smaller amount of data compared to the normal LD instruction that reads data by specifying both the upper address and the lower address, and the address is specified when reading data. It is possible to reduce the waste of the program for

Among the game data stored in the game RAM area of the RAM 41c, the game data with a particularly high frequency of use is stored in an area having a specific value in the top address of the game RAM area, and the specific value is stored in a special register ( Q register) as the upper address of the game data, and when the main control unit 41 reads out the game data, by specifying only the lower address using the LDQ instruction, the game data is read out. A program for reading game data with a smaller amount of data compared to a normal LD instruction for reading data by specifying both an address and a lower address, and for specifying an address when reading these game data. waste can be reduced.

In addition, the main control unit 41 can change the value set in a special register (Q register) in the main routine or subroutine. In setting, a specific value is set in a special register (Q register), which indicates the top address of game data that is frequently used by the game program. Also, when calling a non-game program from a game program, the value set in the special register (Q register) is saved, and when returning to the game program, the value set in the special register (Q register) is saved. It is set again to the value it was previously set to. As a result, when the game program is running, a specific value indicating the head address of game data frequently used by the game program is set in a special register (Q register). Using the LDQ instruction, it is possible to read game data with a high frequency of use.

As a special LD instruction, the high-order address used for reading by the LDQ instruction may be set in a predetermined storage area other than a special register (eg, Q register), such as a vector table area. Part of the address is specified using a value stored in a predetermined storage area such as With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the wastefulness of programs for specifying addresses when reading data. Also, for example, by allocating an identification value with a smaller amount of data than an address to each of a plurality of areas that make up the vector table area, setting a data storage address for each of these areas, and specifying an identification value, To reduce the waste of a program for specifying an address when reading data, even in a configuration using a special LD instruction that can specify the storage address of data stored in an area corresponding to an identification value. can be done.

In this embodiment, the Q register is configured to store the same value as the value used in the specific program as the specific value, but it may be configured to store a value different from the value used in the specific program. For example, when a non-special program is called, a value different from the value used in the specific program as a specific value in the Q register, which is the value of the top address of the storage area where data with high frequency of use in the non-game program is stored and using the LDQ instruction when calling data in a non-specific program, the data capacity of the non-specific program can be reduced.

A game program is a program related to the progress of a game, and is a program for executing a process that hinders the progress of the game if the process based on the program is not executed. On the other hand, the non-game program is a program that does not relate to the progress of the game, and even if it is called from the game program and returns to the game program without executing the processing based on the program, the game can be progressed. It is a program for executing processing.

In the game program, any instruction including special CALL instructions such as CALLV instruction and RST instruction, and special LD instruction such as LDQ instruction may be used for the CALL instruction and LD instruction described above. can be used to specify an address and call a subroutine, and a special LD command can be used to read specific game data and non-game data in the ROM 41b and RAM 41c.

In the non-game program, the normal CALL instruction is used for the aforementioned CALL instruction, but the CALLV instruction, which is a special CALL instruction, is not used, and the address is specified using the normal CALL instruction. Although a subroutine may be called, a special CALL command is not used to call the subroutine, so that the game program area in the ROM 41b is not accessed by the non-game program.

In addition, in the non-game program, the normal LD instruction and the LDQ instruction, which is a special LD instruction, may be used for the above-mentioned LD instruction. It is also possible to read subroutines and data using special LD instructions.

Thus, in this embodiment, the head of the subroutine of the game program is stored in the vector table area and the specific address area of the ROM 41b used by the special CALL instructions such as the CALLV instruction and the RST instruction. A game program can be called by using a special CALL instruction. When it is possible to call only the game program by the special CALL instruction in this way, the game program is called by the non-game program by using the special CALL instruction by the non-game program, and an unintended game is played. or the game data may be rewritten by an unintended game program. On the other hand, the non-game program calls the program by the normal CALL instruction without using the special CALL instruction, so that the vector table area and the area of the specific address are not used. progress can be prevented.

Also, in this embodiment, the LDQ instruction, which is a special LD instruction, specifies the game RAM area using a specific value stored in a special register (Q register), and can read predetermined game data. By using a special LD instruction even in a non-specific program, game data can be easily read while reducing the data capacity of the non-specific program.

In addition, the LDQ instruction, which is a special LD instruction, specifies the game RAM area using a specific value stored in a special register (Q register), making it possible to read predetermined game data. However, when reading the game data with a special LD command, if the specific value of the special register (Q register) is damaged, the game RAM area cannot be specified normally, and unintended data There is a risk that it will be read out. On the other hand, by making the non-game program read data by the normal LD instruction instead of the LDQ instruction which is a special LD instruction, the specific value was damaged when the game program was switched to the non-game program. Even in this case, data is read from the non-game program by specifying the game RAM area, so that unintended data can be prevented from being read.

In this embodiment, an instruction executable by the main control unit 41 is a save instruction that saves the values of the registers provided in the main control unit 41 in a predetermined order in the stack area of the RAM 41c indicated by the stack pointer SP. , the values of the registers saved in the stack area of the RAM 41c by the save instruction are sequentially read from the stack area in the reverse order of saving, and set in the registers corresponding to the order, so that the corresponding register and a return instruction for returning the state of the state to the state when it was saved by the save instruction.

The save instructions are the first save instruction (PUSH ALL) for saving the values of all the registers provided in the main control unit 41 to the stack area of the RAM 41c, and the first save instruction (PUSH ALL) for saving the values of all the registers provided in the main control unit 41, and and a second save instruction (PUSH AF) for saving the value of the flag register to the stack area of the RAM 41c. The first save instruction is an instruction requiring a program capacity of 2 bytes, and the second save instruction is an instruction requiring a program capacity of 1 byte. By executing the save instruction in the game program, it is possible to save the value of the register in the game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP set for the game program, and executing the save instruction in the non-game program. , it is possible to save the value of the register in the non-game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP set for the non-game program.

The return instruction includes a first return instruction (POP ALL) that sets and restores the values saved in the stack area of the RAM 41c for all the registers that the main control unit 41 has, and Among them, the second return instruction (POP AF) for setting and restoring the value saved in the stack area of the RAM 41c is included for the flag register in which the calculation result is stored. The first return instruction is an instruction requiring a program capacity of 2 bytes, and the second return instruction is an instruction requiring a program capacity of 1 byte. By executing a return instruction in the game program, the value of the register saved from the game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP set for the game program can be called, set in the corresponding register, and returned. It is possible, and by executing a return instruction in a non-game program, call the value of the register saved from the non-game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP set for the non-game program, and store it in the corresponding register It is possible to set and restore.

[Regarding the relationship between the game area and the non-game area]
As shown in FIG. 6, the main CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 calls a non-game program in the process based on the game program, executes the process based on the non-game program, and executes the process based on the non-game program. Return to processing based on FIG. 6 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game area and the non-game area.

As shown in FIG. 6, in principle, the main CPU 41a refers to the game data in the game data area to execute the process based on the game program, and also uses the game RAM area as a work. It is possible to refer to and update the contents of the game RAM area. In principle, the main CPU 41a executes processing based on the non-game program by referring to the game data in the non-game data area and using the non-game RAM area as work. , it is possible to refer to and update the contents of the non-game RAM area.

Further, the main CPU 41a does not refer to the non-game data area and does not update the non-game RAM area when executing processing based on the game program, but can refer to the non-game RAM area. Yes, in executing the processing based on the non-game program, the game data area is not referred to and the game RAM area is not updated, but the game RAM area can be referred to.

In addition, the processing based on the game program can refer to only a specific area required for the game program (for example, an error flag setting area indicating detection of an abnormality) in the non-game RAM area. Based processing can refer to only specific areas of the game RAM area required for non-game programs (eg, internal winning flag setting area, game state setting area, RT setting area, etc.). In addition, a specific area of the non-game RAM area that can be referred to by the process based on the game program, and a specific area of the game RAM area that can be referred to by the process based on the non-game program can be assigned to consecutive address areas. Although it is preferable, it may be configured such that a part or all of it is assigned to discontinuous address areas.

As described above, in this embodiment, there are provided a game program area for storing a game program relating to the progress of a game, a game data area for storing readable game data referred to by the game program, and work data referred to by the game program. is stored in a readable and writable manner, a non-game program area that stores a non-game program that is called by the game program and is not related to the progress of the game, and a non-game program that the non-game program refers to. A non-game data area in which data is readable and a non-game RAM area in which work data referred to by the non-game program is stored in a readable and writable manner are allocated separately. The data and the work data of the game program, the non-game program, the non-game data and the work data of the non-game program can be easily specified according to the difference in the storage area.

In addition, by dividing the game program area and game data area and the non-game program area and non-game data area, the area occupied in the ROM 41b can be compactly managed according to each function. It becomes easier to identify the data to be used.

Further, in this embodiment, when executing the game program, it is possible to refer to the non-game RAM area, and when executing the non-game program, it is possible to refer to the game RAM area. To easily use data used by a non-game program when executing the game program, and to easily use data used by the game program when executing the non-game program. On the other hand, it is impossible to update the non-game RAM area when executing the game program, and it is impossible to update the game RAM area when executing the non-game program. does not affect the processing of the non-game program, and the non-game program does not affect the processing of the game program.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the process based on the game program can refer to only a specific area required for the game program (for example, an error flag setting area indicating detection of an abnormality) in the non-game RAM area. In the processing based on the non-game program, it is possible to refer only to specific areas (for example, internal winning flag setting area, game state setting area, RT setting area, etc.) necessary for the non-game program in the game RAM area. Therefore, since the data that the game program can refer to in the non-game RAM area and the data that the non-game program can refer to are restricted to a specific area, it is possible to easily specify the reference destination of the game program or the non-game program. be able to.

[Game state]
FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining the game state. As shown in FIG. 7, in the slot machine 1, as game states that can be controlled, normal state, inside CB, inside CB, inside BB, BB, and RT states are provided. The main control unit 41 controls the game state to any one of the plurality of game states, and functions as state control means. The probability of winning a role differs for each game state. Odds of winning include 0% and 100%. That is, depending on the gaming state, it is possible that a predetermined combination is not won or that a predetermined combination is won every game.

The normal state is a game state that is controlled immediately after finishing the setting change, and is a state with a high staying rate. The normal state is disadvantageous to the player compared to CB and BB. Specifically, in a normal state, an internal lottery is performed so that the probability of winning a small combination is lower than that of CB or BB. As will be described later, in the normal state, any one of CB, BB, cherry, watermelon, bell 1, bell 2, pushing order bell, technical intervention, normal replay, and special replay can be won. . In addition, during the normal state, a pay line LN set across the symbols horizontally arranged in the middle row is determined as a pay line (see FIG. 1).

The normal state and RT state are also called non-internal state because they are states in which CB or BB is not won. When CB is won in the normal state or RT state and CB is won in the winning game, the state is controlled to CB from the next game. On the other hand, if CB is won in the normal state or RT state and the CB is not won in the winning game, the state is controlled inside the CB where the winning of CB is carried over. When the CB wins inside the CB, the state is controlled to the CB from the game next to the game in which the CB wins. As will be described later, in CB, all small wins (all small wins) including cherry, watermelon, bell 1, bell 2, pushing order bell, technical intervening bell, and BB middle bell can be won every game. , does not win the replay. In the case of CB, since the technical intervening role is won every game, the player can win the technical intervening role every game. In this embodiment, during the CB, the winning line LN is set over the middle stage, similarly to other game states.

The CB ends on the condition that 150 or more medals are paid out after being controlled by the CB. For example, after being controlled by the CB, if you do not win a technical intervening role that causes a payout of 14 coins, and you win only a winning combination that causes a payout of 15 coins, 10 times (15 coins x 10 times = 150 coins) The control over the CB ends when the prize is won. On the other hand, after being controlled by the CB, when the player wins the technical intervention role once and wins the winning role with the payout of 15 medals nine times, the number of medals to be paid out is 149 and does not reach 150. For this reason, it is controlled by CB until it wins a small winning combination once more. In other words, the number of medals that can be acquired during CB becomes the largest when the technical intervention role is won once during CB. Therefore, when controlled by the CB, by operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R so that the technical intervening hand wins only once and the hand that pays out 15 coins in the remaining games wins, the CB You can maximize the number of medals you can get inside. Therefore, when the player is controlled by the CB, the player first plays the game aiming at winning the technical intervening role that pays out 14 medals, and after the technical intervening role wins once, the number of paid out medals increases to 15. There is a tendency to aim for the prize of the role of the number.

When BB is won in the normal state or RT state, and BB is won in the winning game, the state is controlled to BB from the next game. On the other hand, if BB is won in the normal state or RT state and the BB is not won in the winning game, the state is controlled inside the BB where the winning of BB is carried over. When BB wins inside BB, the state is controlled to BB from the game next to the game in which BB wins. In BB, it is possible to win bells during BB (bell 1 and technical intervening role), and other roles cannot be won. In the case of BB, unlike CB, the player cannot win Bell 1 or a technical intervention role unless Bell is won during BB in an internal lottery.

The BB ends under the condition that 345 or more medals are paid out after being controlled by the BB. For example, after being controlled by BB, if you do not win a technical intervention role that causes 14 payouts, and you win only Bell 1 that causes 15 payouts, 23 times (15 x 23 times = 345) The control over the BB ends when the prize is won. On the other hand, after being controlled by the BB, when the technical intervening role is won once and the payout of 15 medals is awarded 22 times to Bell 1, the number of medals to be paid out is 344 and does not reach 345. For this reason, it is controlled by BB until it wins a small winning combination once more. That is, the number of medals that can be obtained during the BB becomes the largest when the technical intervention role is won once during the BB. Therefore, when controlled by BB, by operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R so that the technical intervening hand wins only once and the hand that pays out 15 coins in the remaining games wins, It is possible to maximize the number of medals that can be acquired during BB. Therefore, when the player is controlled by the BB, the player first plays the game aiming at winning the technical intervening role whose payout number is 14, and after the technical intervening role wins once, the payout number of medals is reduced to 15. There is a tendency to aim for the prize of 1 bells.

As described above, the main control unit 41 shifts the state from the CB to the RT state on the condition that 150 or more medals have been paid out during the CB, and 345 or more medals have been paid out during the BB. The state is shifted from the BB state to the RT state on the condition that it has been done. In this way, the number of payouts, which is a condition for ending CB, is smaller than the number of payouts, which is a condition for ending BB. Therefore, the control period of CB is shorter than the control period of BB.

The RT (replay time) state is a state in which the probability of winning a replay role in an internal lottery is higher than in a non-RT state (for example, a normal state), and in the RT state replay games are executed with a higher probability than in the non-RT state. As a result, the player can easily proceed with the game without consuming the medals that he/she owns. In this embodiment, after the bonus ends, the state is controlled to the RT state for a predetermined period (for example, 30 games). The state can be controlled by CB or BB without going through . In this case, since the game does not go through the normal state, the game can be played without reducing the number of medals and credits owned by the player as much as possible.

[Ball status]
FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining the ball-out state. In this embodiment, the ball payout states managed by the main control unit 41 are: ball payout state = 0, ball payout state = 1, ball payout state = 2, ball payout state = 3, ball payout state = 4, and five types of ball-out states, ie, ball-out state=5, are provided. Ball output state = 0 is called "normal", ball output state = 1 is called "advantageous section normal", ball output state = 2 is called "advantageous section CZ", ball payout state = 3 is called "advantage section AT , the ball output state=4 is referred to as an "advantageous section specialized zone", and the ball output state=5 is referred to as an "advantageous section ending".

Usually, it is also called a normal section. Advantageous Zones Normally, Advantageous Zones CZ, Advantageous Zones AT, Advantageous Zone Specialized Zones, and Advantageous Zone Endings are collectively also referred to as Advantageous Zones.

The normal section (normal) is a state in which navigation is not executed, and is a non-notification state in which navigation information cannot be notified. The advantageous section is a state in which navigation can be performed, and is a notification state in which navigation information can be notified. In this embodiment, of the advantageous sections, navigation is not executed for the normal advantageous section and the advantageous section CZ. can be It should be noted that navigation may also be executed in the advantageous section normal and the advantageous section CZ, but for example, in the advantageous section AT, the leading role is won at the time of winning the order in favor of the advantageous section normal and the advantageous section CZ. The execution probability of the navigation for making it is high.

The ball-out state and the RT state undergo state transitions independently of each other. In the present embodiment, control can be made to each ball output state both during the non-internal state and during the internal state. On the other hand, during the BB, there is no payout state.

For example, when the RT state is non-inside and the ball payout state is normal in the advantageous section, when the BB is won, the RT state shifts to inside but the ball payout state is maintained as normal in the advantageous section. When the BB prize is won in the case where the RT state is internal and the ball payout state is normal in the advantageous section, the RT state is controlled to BB, but there is no ball payout state during the BB. After that, when the BB ends, the RT state shifts to the non-internal state, and the ball-out state is again controlled to the original advantageous section normal.

In addition, when the RT state is non-internal and the ball payout state is in the advantageous section AT, when the BB is won and the BB prize is won, the RT state is controlled to BB, but there is no ball payout state during the BB. . After that, when the BB ends, the RT state shifts to the non-internal state, and the ball-out state is again controlled to the original advantageous section AT.

For example, when winning an advantageous section while the RT state is internal and the ball payout state is normal, the ball payout state is controlled to be normal in the advantageous section while the RT state is maintained as internal. Also, when AT is won while the RT state is inside and the ball payout state is in the advantageous interval CZ, the ball payout state is controlled to the advantageous interval AT while the RT state is maintained inside.

Normally, when winning the advantageous section transition lottery (advantageous section winning), the state is controlled to the state of putting out balls in the advantageous section. In the present embodiment, winning of most of the combinations that can be won normally is a condition for winning an advantageous section, so the normal stay in the game is about 1G. The condition for winning the advantageous section may be established when any one of all the combinations that can be won normally is won.

Normally, navigation is not executed in the game in which the player wins the top prize, so the net increase in the number of medals that the player can obtain per game is 0 or minus when the number of medals used to set the bet amount is taken into consideration. become. The net increase in number per game is the number of medals paid out per game minus the number of medals used for setting the bet amount per game.

Advantageous section Normally, navigation is not executed in the game in which the player wins the order, so the net increase in the number of medals that the player can obtain per game is 0, considering the number of medals used to set the bet amount. or become negative.

The advantageous section CZ has a higher probability of being controlled to the advantageous section AT than the normal advantageous section, and is located on the route from the normal advantageous section to being controlled to the advantageous section AT.

In the advantageous section CZ, as in the normal advantageous section, navigation is not executed in the game in which the player wins the order, so the net increase in the number of medals that the player can obtain per game is the number of medals used to set the bet amount. Considering the number of sheets, it becomes 0 sheets or a negative number. Thus, in the advantageous section CZ, the payout rate is 1 or less (100% or less) or less than 1 (less than 100%). Note that the advantageous zone CZ has the same ball payout rate as the normal advantageous zone, but the probability of being controlled to the advantageous zone AT per game is set higher than the normal advantageous zone.

Advantageous section AT is in a state in which control is possible from both the normal advantageous section and the advantageous section CZ. In the advantageous section AT, since navigation is executed in the game in which the player wins the order, the net increase in the number of medals that the player can obtain per game is the number of medals used to set the number of bets. , becomes a plus. In this embodiment, the payout rate of the advantageous section AT is set to 200%. Thus, in the advantageous section AT, the payout rate exceeds 1 (100%). Advantageous section AT is in a more advantageous state than both normal advantageous section and advantageous section CZ.

The advantageous section specialized zone is in a state that can be controlled from the advantageous section AT. In the zone specializing in the advantageous section, since navigation is executed in the game in which the player wins the order, the net increase in the number of medals that the player can obtain per game takes into account the number of medals used to set the bet amount. but it will be a plus. In the present embodiment, the payout rate of the advantageous section specialized zone is set to 200%. In this way, the ball payout rate exceeds 1 (100%) in the advantageous zone specialized zone. Furthermore, the number of AT games may be increased in the advantageous section specialized zone. For this reason, when controlled to the advantageous zone specialization zone, the period controlled by the AT is likely to be extended. Therefore, the advantageous section specialized zone is in a more advantageous state than any of the advantageous section normal, the advantageous section CZ, and the advantageous section AT.

Normally, when the advantageous section is won, the state is controlled in the advantageous section normal. Advantageous section Normally, when CZ is won, the state is controlled to the advantageous section CZ. Also, in the normal advantageous section, when the AT is won, the state is controlled to the advantageous section AT. In addition, in the present embodiment, it is possible to win AT by winning a special replay, which will be described later, in the normal advantageous section. In the advantageous interval CZ, the state is controlled to the advantageous interval AT when AT is won. In the advantageous section AT, when the specialized zone is won, the state is controlled to the advantageous section specialized zone.

Control to the advantageous section CZ is managed, for example, by the number of games, and the advantageous section CZ ends on condition that the number of games played during the advantageous section CZ reaches a predetermined upper limit number of games. .

The control over the advantageous interval AT is managed by, for example, the number of games, and the advantageous interval AT ends on condition that the number of games played during the advantageous interval AT reaches a predetermined upper limit number of games. . Note that the advantageous section AT is not limited to those managed by the number of games. , and the number of payouts or the number of net increase numbers reaching a predetermined upper limit number, or other conditions.

Control to the advantageous zone specialization zone is, for example, managed by the number of games, and on the condition that the number of games played in the advantageous zone specialization zone reaches a predetermined upper limit number of games, the advantageous zone End of specialization zone. In addition, the advantageous section specialized zone is not limited to those managed by the number of games. It may be managed based on other conditions, such as reaching the upper limit number of times, and reaching the upper limit number of payouts or the number of net increases set in advance.

When the advantageous section specialized zone ends, the state is controlled again to the advantageous section AT. When the advantageous section AT ends, the state is controlled to the advantageous section CZ again, and when AT wins in the advantageous section CZ, the state is controlled to the advantageous section AT again. On the other hand, when the number of games played reaches the upper limit number of games without winning AT in the advantageous section CZ, the normal state in the normal section is controlled.

In this way, the state is controlled from the normal advantageous section to the advantageous section AT or the advantageous section specialized zone via the advantageous section CZ, and the state is changed between the advantageous section CZ and the advantageous section AT. Become. In the advantageous section CZ, the total net increase number is 0 or negative, and in the advantageous section AT, the total net increase number is 0 or greater than the negative amount in the advantageous section CZ. Therefore, it is designed so that the total number of net increases continues to increase when the state alternates between the advantageous section CZ and the advantageous section AT. On the other hand, in the normal advantageous section, the total number of net increase is 0 or negative, so the number of games staying in the normal advantageous section is greater than the number of games staying between the advantageous section CZ and the advantageous section AT. As it grows, the total number of net additions continues to decrease.

In the ball-out state during the advantageous interval, the state is controlled to the advantageous interval ending when the total number of games played during the advantageous interval, which is updated based on the progress of the game, reaches a predetermined number of games to transition to the ED. The advantageous section ending is, for example, until the total value of the net increase number reaches the upper limit number (for example, 2400), or until the number of games played during the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games (for example, 1500G). This is a state in which it is determined that control to the ball state will continue. The ED transition game number is set when the state shifts from the normal state to the ball-out state in the advantageous section. In addition, the number of ED transition games may be determined by lottery, or may be determined in advance.

When the limiter condition is established in the state of the ball being put out in the advantageous section, or if any termination condition is established, the state is normally controlled from the state of the ball being put out in the advantageous section. Specifically, in the ball-out state during the advantageous section, when the total number of games played (the number of games in the advantageous section) updated based on the progress of the game reaches a predetermined upper limit number of games (for example, 1500 G). , the advantageous section ends, and the ball output state is normally controlled. Alternatively, in the ball-out state during the advantageous interval, the advantageous interval ends when the total number of net increase in the advantageous interval updated based on the progress of the game reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 2400). , the ball output state is controlled normally.

In addition, for example, the optional end conditions are that a predetermined end condition is satisfied without CZ winning in the normal advantageous section, or that a predetermined ending condition is satisfied without AT winning in the advantageous section CZ. etc.

[Winner]
A special combination, a small combination, and a replay combination are provided as a winning combination (also referred to as a "winning combination"). The special combination is a combination in which the game state is controlled to a bonus state in which the probability of winning a small combination is higher than that in the non-bonus state, and is accompanied by transition to the bonus state. A small winning combination is a winning combination for which a medal is awarded. The replay combination (replay) is a combination that enables the next game to be started without consuming medals owned by the player by winning a prize. FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining types of winning combinations, symbol combinations for winning combinations, and awarding at the time of winning. In addition, in FIG. 9, "-" is shown for a combination that does not win in that state.

In this embodiment, the special award includes a challenge bonus (CB) and a big bonus (BB). When CB is won, the state is controlled by CB. During the CB, every game, the drawable range of at least one reel becomes narrower than during the non-CB, and a challenge time (CT) is set in which all small wins are allowed. When BB wins, the state is controlled by BB. During BB, the probability of winning a small winning combination is higher than during non-bonus (non-inside such as normal or RT, inside CB, inside BB). (In the present embodiment, only Bell 1 and technical intervention are won during BB, and Bell 1 or technical intervention can be won. The number of bets during non-bonus is 3 BET, The number of bets in medium and the number of bets in BB are 2BET.

Minor hands include Cherry, Watermelon, Bell 1, Bell 2, Single Hand 1, Single Hand 2, Single Hand 3, and Technical Intervention. During non-bonus, 8 medals are paid out when winning any of cherry, watermelon, bell 1, bell 2, and technical intervention, 1 medal 1, 1 medal 2, and 1 medal One medal is paid out when one of the winning combinations 3 is won. During the CB, 15 medals are paid out when one of Cherry, Watermelon, Bell 1, Bell 2, 1 piece role 1, 1 piece role 2, and 1 piece role 3 is won, and the technical intervention role 14 medals are paid out when the player wins. During the BB, 15 medals are paid out when winning Bell 1, and 14 medals are paid out when winning the technical intervention role. A technical intervening hand can win only when it is won during CB or BB and is pushed backwards. Further, the replay combination includes a normal replay and a 7-matched replay. In this embodiment, there is no chance of winning a replay during the bonus.

[Lottery target role]
FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining combinations of winning combinations that are read out as a lottery target combination for each gaming state. The win number column in FIG. 10 shows the win number determined for each lottery target role, the lottery target win column shows the name of the winning combination, and the winning combination column contains the winning combination included in each lottery target role. The RT state column indicates that the lottery target combination is a lottery target with a circle mark for each RT state, and the advantageous section winning column indicates whether or not the advantageous section is won. It is

As shown in FIG. 10, BB and CB are provided as special bonus lottery bonuses. The lottery target roles for the small roles are cherry, watermelon, bell 1, bell 2, 123-choice bell, 132-choice bell, 213-choice bell, 231-choice bell, 312-choice bell, 321-choice bell, technical intervention, and BB. A middle bell is provided. A normal replay and a special replay are provided as a lottery target role for the replay role. Note that the 123-choice bell, the 132-choice bell, the 213-choice bell, the 231-choice bell, the 312-choice bell, and the 321-choice bell, and the special replay, are roles that can be executed when navigation is won, Also called Oshijunyaku.

As for small wins, it is possible to win any combination except BB middle bell in the non-internal middle, but since the winning of CB or BB has already been carried over in the inner middle, CB, BB, and BB middle bell are won. It has become impossible to win.

Cherries, watermelons, and special replays will also win an advantageous section when they are won in the internal lottery.

[Reel control for push order]
11A and 11B are diagrams for explaining reel control at the time of winning a pushing first hand. As described above, in the present embodiment, navigation is executed in a game in which a winning combination is won in the advantageous section AT or the advantageous section specialized zone, and the correct procedure is notified to the player. By operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R according to the correct procedure according to the navigation, the player can win a winning combination advantageous to the player.

For example, as shown in FIG. 11, in a game in which one of the 123-choice bell, the 132-choice bell, the 213-choice bell, the 231-choice bell, the 312-choice bell, and the 321-choice bell is won, When the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated in the correct procedure associated with each, Bell 1, which is the leading player, wins. When the bell 1 wins, the bell patterns are aligned on the winning line LN on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. Such a pattern combination is also called bell matching. On the other hand, when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated in an incorrect procedure different from the correct procedure, the one-piece role that is the secondary role wins, or if the one-piece role is also missed, no prize is awarded. does not occur.

In addition, in a game in which a special replay is won, when the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated by reverse pressing (right-center-left) associated with the special replay, 7 replays are won. When the 7-aligned replay wins, the 7 symbols are aligned on the winning line LN on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. Such a pattern combination is also called 7 sets. On the other hand, when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated in a pressing order other than reverse pressing, a normal replay wins.

[Reel control]
In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 operates based on an operation mode including the order (operation order) and timing (operation timing) of operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and a winning flag indicating the result of the internal lottery. function as derivation control means for performing stop control of the reels.

In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, after the game is started and the reels 2L, 2C, 2R rotate and the symbols start to change, when one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated Then, the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R corresponding to the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is stopped, and the symbols are stopped and displayed.

During non-CB, the maximum stop delay time from the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R until the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R corresponding to the stop switches is stopped is 190 ms (milliseconds). .

The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate 80 times per minute, and the symbols for 80 x 21 (number of symbol frames per reel) = 1680 frames are changed, so a maximum of 4 symbols are drawn in during 190 ms. It will be possible. That is, the symbols that can be selected as the stop symbols are the symbols displayed when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated and the symbols up to four frames ahead, which are five frames in total. For this reason, for example, when one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is operated, when the symbol displayed in the middle of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R corresponding to the stop switch is used as a reference, from the symbol The pattern up to 4 frames ahead can be displayed in the middle row.

For example, when the CB is won, if the left stop switch 8L is operated at the timing when the symbols 0 to 3 or 11 to 20 of the left reel 2L pass through the middle row, the symbol "7" is displayed in the middle row. is drawn in. For example, when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the timing when the number 0 symbol of the left reel 2L passes through the middle stage, the main control unit 41 changes the timing to stop the left reel 2L to the timing at which the left stop switch 8L is operated. After spinning for three frames, the left reel 2L is stopped and the number 3 "7" pattern is stopped in the middle row.

During CB, it is controlled by CT every game. In CT, at least one reel (also referred to as CT reel) has a narrower retractable range than usual. In this embodiment, during CT, the drawable range of the left reel 2L is narrower than usual. Specifically, the maximum stop delay time from the operation of the left stop switch 8L to the stop of the rotation of the left reel 2L is 75 ms (milliseconds). The maximum stop delay time until the rotation of 2C or the right reel 2R is stopped is 190 ms (milliseconds).

In other words, the symbols that can be selected as stop symbols when the left stop switch 8L is operated are the symbols displayed when the left stop switch 8L is operated and the symbols up to one frame ahead, for a total of two frames. It is a pattern of Therefore, for example, when the pattern displayed in the middle stage of the left reel 2L when the left stop switch 8L is operated is used as a reference, the patterns up to one frame ahead from the relevant pattern can be displayed in the middle stage. As described above, the retractable range of the left reel 2L is limited during the CT as compared to the normal time. During CT, the drawable range of the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R other than the left reel 2L is the same as during non-CB, and a maximum of 4 symbols can be drawn.

[Initial setting process]
The start-up processing and initial setting processing performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG. 12 . FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the initial setting process performed by the main control section 41. As shown in FIG. The start-up process and initial setting process are subroutines included in the game program.

When the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, the main control unit 41 is activated in a state in which the timer interrupt is disabled due to the occurrence of a reset, and performs various processes according to the programs stored in the ROM 41b. . After start-up, first, the start-up setting process included in the game program is performed to initialize all the output ports 0 to 9, and the internal registers provided in the main control unit 41 are set in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 41b. Initial setting processing included in the game program initialized based on the built-in register initialization table is performed.

As shown in FIG. 12, in the initial setting process, timer interrupt is first prohibited (Sa01). After that, the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 29 is prohibited until the timer interrupt is permitted again. Thereafter, in the initial setting process, the predetermined area of the input port is referred to (Sa1), and it is determined whether or not the power failure detection signal output from the power failure detection circuit 48 is in the ON state (Sa2). Then, when the power failure detection signal is in the ON state, it waits until the power failure detection signal is in the OFF state. After that, after the power supply voltage of the slot machine 1 becomes normal and the power failure detection signal is turned off, the parity of the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is calculated (Sa3), and a predetermined initial address is set in the stack pointer. (Sa4). Then, it is determined whether or not the parity calculated in step Sa3 is normal (Sa5), and if the parity is normal, fixed data for RAM breakdown diagnosis set in a predetermined area of RAM 41c at the time of power failure is acquired. Then (Sa6), it is diagnosed whether or not the memory contents of the RAM 41c are destroyed based on the fixed data for RAM destruction diagnosis (Sa7).

If it is determined that the parity is normal in step Sa5, and if the stored content of the RAM 41c is diagnosed in step Sa7, the parity in the RAM 41c calculated in step Sa3 and the result of the diagnosis in step Sa7 are stored in the RAM 41c. It is determined whether or not there is an abnormality (Sa8). The case where the RAM 41c has an abnormality is the case where the parity is not normal, or the case where the parity is normal but it is diagnosed that there is an abnormality in the stored contents.

Then, when there is an abnormality in the RAM 41c, the value of the flag register storing the calculation result among the registers provided in the main control unit 41 is stored in the game stack area of the game RAM area using the second save instruction. After saving by storing in a predetermined order (Sa9), the non-game RAM area initialization process included in the non-game program is called using the aforementioned CALL instruction (Sa10).

In the non-game RAM area initialization process, first, using the aforementioned LD instruction, the value of the address indicated by the current stack pointer SP is transferred from the game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP used by the calling game program. It is read out, stored in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area, and saved. After that, using the LD instruction, the value stored as the address indicated by the stack pointer SP at the end of the previous non-game program is read from a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area and set as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP. Thus, the stack pointer SP is set for the non-game program. Then, using the above-described first save instruction, the values of all the registers (accumulator registers, flag registers, general-purpose registers, index registers, interrupt registers, refresh registers, program counters, etc.) provided in the main control unit 41 including the flag registers are saved in a predetermined order in the non-game stack area of the non-game RAM area specified by the stack pointer SP. In addition, when the non-game RAM area initialization process included in the non-game program is called from the game program, the LD instruction is used when changing the stack pointer SP from the game program to the non-game program. , the second zero flag TZ of the flag register is changed, and the state of the flag register may change before and after the LD instruction is executed. That is, when the non-game RAM area initialization process is called from the game program, the state of the register saved after the stack pointer SP for the non-game program is set by the non-game RAM area initialization process is It may differ from the state of the register when the program calls the non-game RAM area initialization process.

After that, specify the start address (the first address of the unused area 4) and the end address (the last address of the non-game RAM area) of the RAM to be initialized, and use the start address as the initial value of the specified address. is cleared, and then the specified address is updated to the next address until the specified address reaches the end address. area from the beginning of the unused area 4 to the end of the non-game RAM area) is initialized. In addition, in the non-game RAM area initialization process, by specifying the start address and end address of the initialization target RAM, the capacity of the initialization target RAM is calculated, and the RAM area corresponding to the capacity is transferred to the initialization target RAM. A configuration may be adopted in which the area from the start address to the end address of the initialization target RAM is initialized by sequentially clearing from the start address.

Then, using the above-mentioned first return instruction, when the non-game RAM area initialization process is started, the values of the registers that have been stored and saved in the non-game stack area are saved in the reverse order of saving. By sequentially reading from the game stack area and setting in the registers corresponding to the order, all the registers are restored to the state when the non-game RAM area initialization processing was started. After that, using the aforementioned LD instruction, read out the value of the stack pointer SP saved in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area when the non-game RAM area initialization process is started, and set it as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP. Thus, the stack pointer SP is returned to the state when the non-game RAM area initialization process was started, and the non-game RAM area initialization process is terminated. In addition, in order to end the non-game RAM area initialization process included in the non-game program and return to the game program, the values of all registers that were saved at the start of the non-game RAM area initialization process are restored. After that, when the stack pointer SP is changed from the non-game program to the game program, the second zero flag TZ of the flag register is changed by using the LD instruction, and the LD instruction is executed. The state of the flag register may change before and after That is, the state of the register when the non-game RAM area initialization process is terminated may differ from the state of the register saved when the non-game RAM area initialization process is started.

Perform non-game RAM area initialization processing in the step of Sa10, initialize the non-game RAM area of the RAM41c, when returning to the initial setting processing, using the second return instruction described above, the game in the step of Sa9 By sequentially reading the value of the flag register saved in the stack area from the game stack area in the reverse order of saving and setting it in the flag register, the flag register is restored to the state before the non-game RAM area initialization processing is performed. state is restored (Sa11). By performing save processing and return processing of all registers inside the non-game RAM area initialization processing in step Sa10, and save processing and return processing of flag registers in steps Sa9 and Sa11, the non-game RAM area After the initialization process is performed, the states of all the registers provided in the main control unit 41 are completely restored to the states before the process was performed.

If it is determined that there is no abnormality in the RAM 41c in step Sa8, and if the register is restored in step Sa11, the fixed data for RAM breakdown diagnosis set in the RAM 41c is cleared (Sa12), If there is, an initialization start address for RAM destruction is set for designating the address of the game RAM area to be initialized (Sa13). After that, referring to the input port 2, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 37 is in the ON state (Sa14).

If it is determined in step Sa14 that the setting key switch 37 is ON, setting change processing is performed. In the setting change process, the reset/setting switch 38 and the start switch 7 are operated in a predetermined procedure to confirm the set value, and the setting key switch 37 is turned off. and move the game to a state where it can be progressed. In the setting change process, when starting the setting change process, a setting command (start) indicating the start of the setting change process is transmitted to the sub-controller 91, and when ending the setting change process, A setting command (end) indicating the end of the setting change process is issued. In the setting change process, when ending the setting change process, the start address of the RAM area to be initialized at the time of setting change is designated, and the process returns to step Sb47 of the main process. And, by performing RAM initialization processing in step Sb47, the area from the top address of the initialization object RAM area at the time of setting change to the end address of the game RAM area, that is, all game RAM areas are initialized. It has become so. In addition, it is good also as a structure which initializes all the game RAM areas except the stack area in use of RAM41c. In the RAM initialization process that is performed after the setting change process is completed, the area to be initialized includes a storage area for storing information on the advantageous section, and the information on the advantageous section is initialized. The area to be initialized does not include the storage area for storing the information on the carryover state in which winning of the special combination (BB or CB) is carried over, and the information on the carryover state is not initialized. .

If it is determined in step Sa14 that the setting key switch 37 is not in the ON state, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the RAM 41c based on the parity of the RAM calculated in step Sa3 and the diagnosis result in Sa7 (Sa15). , when it is determined that there is no abnormality in the RAM 41c, the output buffer for outputting the external output signal is cleared (Sa16). Also, a reel error counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c and counts the number of reel rotation errors detected in the main processing described later, is cleared (Sa17). After that, by setting the address at the time of the power failure to the stack pointer SP based on the contents of the RAM 41c, the stack pointer is restored to the state at the time of the power failure (Sa18), and the port input processing is performed twice consecutively (Sa19). , Sa20).

Port input processing includes input state data (input data indicating the current input state of various switches, input data indicating the current input state of the various switches input to the parallel input port 511, such as detection signals of various switches, and This is a process of updating the confirmed data indicating that the confirmed data is changed from the previous time). Input buffers 0 to 2 for storing input state data of various switches are provided in a predetermined area of the game RAM area of the RAM 41c. , input data, definite data, and edge data) are stored in predetermined bits of an input buffer predetermined for each type of switch and each type of input state data. In the port input process, by storing the detection state (ON state or OFF state) of the various switches among the input state data of the various switches as input data in the input port 0 of the parallel input port 511, the input of the various sensors can be performed. Update the data to the detected state at the execution timing of the current port input process. Input data of various switches are stored in predetermined bits of input port 0 corresponding to each switch. In the port input process, when input data is stored in the input buffer 0, the input data stored in the input buffer by the previous port input process and the input data to be stored in the input buffer by the current port input process are By comparing each sensor type, the current input data detection state (ON state or OFF state) is created and stored in a predetermined bit of the input buffer 1, while the current and previous input data are different (previous ON state and this time OFF state or previous OFF state and this time ON state) state), create fixed data so as to maintain the detection state of the previous input data, and store it in a predetermined bit of the input buffer 1, so that the various sensors stored in the input buffer 1 update the confirmed data of In addition, in the port input process, when storing the finalized data in the input buffer 1, the finalized data of this time and the last time are compared, and the finalized data of various sensors whose finalized data changed from the OFF state to the ON state is turned OFF. ON edge data indicating that the state has changed from the ON state to the ON state is stored in a predetermined bit of the input buffer 2, and the determined data changes from the ON state to the OFF state for various sensors whose determined data has changed from the ON state to the OFF state. The edge data of various sensors stored in the input buffer 2 are updated by storing the OFF edge data indicating that it has been done in a predetermined bit of the input buffer 2 . The input data, fixed data, and edge data of various switches stored in the port input buffers 0-2 can be referred to from game programs and non-game programs.

In addition, in the initial setting process, by performing the port input process twice in succession, when the port input process is subsequently performed, the input state of the various switches after the initial setting process, that is, the slot machine 1 Since the input state data regarding the input state such as the detection signal of each switch is created based on the input state of each switch after the power supply to the is resumed, an unintended input state may be specified. can be prevented. Further, in the port input process, the final data may be created based on the input data acquired by the port input process three times or more (for example, the input data of the current time, the previous time, and the time before last). In such a configuration, the initial setting process is performed by continuously performing the port input process in the initial setting process a number of times less than the number of times of the port input process required to create the finalized data. When the port input processing is performed after the initial setting processing is performed, the input state data can be created based on the input states of the various switches after the initial setting processing is performed.

After performing port input processing in steps Sa19 and Sa20, a predetermined input port is referenced (Sa21) to determine whether or not the reset/set switch 38 is in the ON state (Sa22). When the switch 38 is in the ON state, that is, when the power of the slot machine 1 is turned on while the reset/setting switch 38 is pressed and kept in the ON state, the advantageous section information related to the advantageous section is initialized. Section information initialization processing is performed (Sa23). In the advantageous interval information initialization processing, information related to the advantageous interval (output buffer for the signal during the advantageous interval, flag during the advantageous interval, output buffer for the interval display LED 19, number of games in the advantageous interval, net addition of medals in the advantageous interval) in the storage area of the RAM 41c. number of sheets, etc.) is initialized. In the advantageous zone information initialization process, an area where information about the internal winning flag (non-winning: 0, BB winning: 1, CB winning: 2) and setting values (1 to 6) for the special combination is stored. is not initialized, and the information on the internal winning flag of the special role and the set value (1 to 6) is maintained with the contents when the power supply to the slot machine 1 was stopped last time. It will be done.

In this embodiment, in the initialization process, when the reset/setting switch 38 is in the ON state, that is, when the power of the slot machine 1 is turned on while the reset/setting switch 38 is pressed and kept in the ON state, is a configuration for initializing the information about the advantageous interval stored in the RAM 41c by the advantageous interval information initialization processing, but the power of the slot machine 1 is turned on while the reset/setting switch 38 is pressed and turned on. In this case, of the information stored in the RAM 41c, the information on the internal winning status and the information on the set values are maintained without being initialized, while at least the information on the advantageous section is initialized. The configuration may be such that information other than the information on the internal winning status and the information on the setting value can be initialized together with the information on the advantageous section.

When it is determined in step Sa22 that the reset/setting switch 38 is not in the ON state, and after the advantageous section information initialization processing is executed in step Sa23, a return command indicating that the control state before the power interruption has been restored is issued. After the transmission to the sub-controller 91 (Sa24), in the command transmission processing of the timer interrupt processing (main), the door command transmission flag indicating the transmission of the door command indicating the detection state of the door open detection switch 25 is stored in the RAM 41c. It is set in a predetermined area (Sa25). In command transmission processing, a door command is normally transmitted when the detection state of the door open detection switch 25 changes. A door command indicating the detection state of the door open detection switch 25 is transmitted regardless of whether or not the detection state of the door open detection switch 25 has changed.

After setting the door command transmission flag in step Sa25, all the registers are restored to the state before the power interruption stored in the RAM 41c (Sa26). As a result of this processing, a power failure recovery flag indicating that the power has been recovered from the power failure is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. After that, the timer interrupt is enabled (Sa27), the initial setting process is terminated, and the timer interrupt process (main) is started. It returns to the processing in the main processing that was being performed. As a result, the timer interrupt that was prohibited in Sa01 is permitted, and the processing that was being executed before the power failure is performed again. For example, if a power failure occurs during the execution of the reel stop control process (Sb48) in the main process, which will be described later, after the power failure is restored, the reel stop control process (Sb48) in the main process is performed again through the initialization process. is executed. At this time, since the timer interrupt is prohibited while the initial setting process is being executed after the power failure, the counter update process by the timer interrupt, which will be described later, is not executed, and the one game time management timer is not updated. It will be.

On the other hand, in the step of Sa15, when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the RAM41c, a game RAM initialization process is performed (Sa28), and the game RAM area of the RAM41c is started from the initialization start address at the time of RAM destruction set in the step of Sa13. Initialize the area to the end of . After that, in the same manner as the processing from Sa9 to Sa11, after saving the value of the flag register in which the flag is set among the registers to the game stack area of the game RAM area (Sa29), the non-game program included in the After calling the game RAM area initialization process (Sa30) and initializing all the non-game RAM areas of the RAM 41c, it returns to the calling source and restores the register saved in the step of Sa29 (Sa31).

After restoring the register in step Sa31, the door command transmission flag is set (Sa32), the timer interrupt is set to allow (Sa33), and a RAM abnormality error code (E8) indicating that there is an abnormality in the RAM 41c. is prepared in a predetermined register (Sa34), the initialization process is ended, and the error process is started.

In the error processing, the game is controlled to an error state in which progress of the game is disabled. Also, an error command capable of identifying the error code (E8) prepared in a predetermined register is transmitted to the sub-controller 91, and the error code (E8) is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c for other processing (for example, It is set as an error flag that can be referred to in a sensor monitoring process, etc., which will be described later. Also, it controls to display the error code (E8) on the game auxiliary display 12 . After that, the error state is controlled until it is specified that the condition for canceling the error state according to the error code (E8) prepared in the predetermined register is satisfied. When the RAM abnormality error code (E8) is prepared in a predetermined register and the state is shifted to the error state, by turning on the power switch 39 while the setting key switch 37 is ON, the state is shifted to the setting change state. By initializing all the game RAM areas, the data abnormality in the RAM 41c can be reliably resolved and the error state can be released. On the other hand, when the power switch 39 is turned ON without turning the setting key switch 37 ON, the abnormality of the RAM 41c is detected again, and the error state is entered again.

As described above, the main control unit 41 first performs the initial setting process after the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started. Depending on the state of the main control unit 41 when the process is started, the process is shifted to any one of timer interrupt processing (main), setting change processing, and error processing. When shifting to these processes, a command capable of specifying the type of processing to be shifted is transmitted to the sub-controller 91. When shifting to timer interrupt processing (main), that is, slot When the control state before the power supply to the machine 1 is stopped is restored, a return command is transmitted to the sub-controller 91, and the setting change process is started to shift to the setting change state. , a setting command (start) is sent to the sub-controller 91, and an error command is sent to the sub-controller 91 when error processing is started due to an abnormality in the RAM 41c and the state shifts to an error state.

It should be noted that after the transition from the initial setting process to the setting change process, the main control unit 41 goes through the setting change state and then returns to the state in which the game can be progressed. When returning to the state, a setting command (end) that can specify that the setting change state is terminated is transmitted to the sub-controller 91, but the return command is not transmitted. In addition, after shifting to error processing due to an abnormality in the RAM 41c, the processing shifts to the setting change processing as described above and the error state is canceled, thereby returning to a state in which the game can be progressed. The return command is not transmitted to the sub-controller 91 even when the error processing is terminated and the game is returned to a state in which the game can be progressed.

As described above, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is activated when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, performs the activation setting process included in the game program, and performs all the settings according to the activation setting process. Output ports 0 to 9 are initialized.

Further, after performing the startup setting process, the main control unit 41 performs an initial setting process included in the game program. In the initial setting process, when it is determined that the RAM 41c has an abnormality, a non-game RAM area initialization process included in the non-game program is called to initialize a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c. Further, in the initial setting process, a RAM initialization process included in the game program is called to initialize a predetermined area of the game RAM area of the RAM 41c. The RAM area is configured to be initialized by a non-game program.

In the initial setting process, when the reset/setting switch 38 is in the ON state, the advantageous section information initialization process is executed to initialize the information on the advantageous section stored in the RAM 41c. . As a result, the output buffer of the section display LED 19 set in the RAM 41c is initialized as information on the advantageous section, and the slot machine 1 can be started with the section display LED 19 turned off. there is In addition, in the initial setting process, by executing the advantageous interval information initialization process, the output buffer for the advantageous interval signal and the advantageous interval flag as information on the advantageous interval are also initialized. The game state is controlled to the normal section and the section display LED 19 is maintained in the off state until the condition for shifting to the advantageous section is satisfied.

In addition, in the RAM initialization process that is performed after the setting change process is completed, the information on the advantageous section is initialized, but the information on the carryover state of the special combination is not initialized. is changed, the carry-over state of the special role before the setting value is changed is maintained.

[Main processing]
The details of control of the main processing performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 15. FIG. 13 to 15 are flowcharts showing the control contents of the main processing performed by the main control section 41. FIG. The main process is repeatedly executed for each unit of game. One cycle of the main processing corresponds to one unit of the game. Also, the main process is included in the game program and includes a plurality of processes. Hereinafter, processes that are not specifically indicated as being included in the non-game program are included in the game program. Some of the game programs called by the game program call non-game programs.

As shown in FIG. 13, the main control unit 41 first disables timer interrupts (Sb1), and then sets the final address value of a predetermined area of the RAM 41c to be initialized in the HL register (Sb2). ), the address one before the last address value of the predetermined area of the RAM 41c to be initialized is set in the DE register (Sb3). Then, the area of the RAM 41c specified based on the HL register value is initialized by writing 0 (Sb4), and a predetermined area of the RAM 41c specified based on the HL and DE registers is set by Sb58 or Sb87, which will be described later. 0 is written in each storage area of the RAM initialization object size to be initialized sequentially (Sb5).

After that, referring to the current game state set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, the value corresponding to the game state is read into the A register (Sb6), and a game end command that can specify that one game has ended is issued. The value is set in the D register (Sb7). Then, communication data storage processing is performed (Sb8). In the communication data storage process, a command is generated based on the values set in the A and D registers and set in the command queue. For example, if a game state is set in the A register and a game end command value is set in the D register, a game end command containing information that can specify the current game state is generated and set in the command queue. do. The commands set in the command queue are sequentially transmitted by command transmission processing included in subsequent timer interrupt processing.

After the communication data storage processing is performed in step Sb8, the value of the flag register storing the operation result is stored in the game stack area of the game RAM area in a predetermined order using the above-mentioned second save instruction. (Sb9), the RT information output process included in the non-game program is called using the aforementioned CALL instruction (Sb10).

In the RT information output process, first, using the LD instruction described above, the value of the address indicated by the current stack pointer SP is read from the game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP used by the calling game program, It is stored in a predetermined area of the game RAM area and saved. After that, using the LD instruction, the value stored as the address indicated by the stack pointer SP at the end of the previous non-game program is read from a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area and set as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP. Thus, the stack pointer SP is set for the non-game program. Then, using the above-described first save instruction, the values of all the registers (accumulator registers, flag registers, general-purpose registers, index registers, interrupt registers, refresh registers, program counters, etc.) provided in the main control unit 41 including the flag registers are saved in a predetermined order in the non-game stack area of the non-game RAM area specified by the stack pointer SP. As in the case of calling the non-game RAM area initialization process described above, when the RT information output process included in the non-game program is called from the game program, the stack pointer SP is moved from the game program to the non-game area. When changing for the program, the second zero flag of the flag register is changed by using the LD instruction, and the state of the flag register may change before and after the execution of the LD instruction. That is, when the RT information output process is called from the game program, the state of the register saved after the stack pointer SP for the non-game program is set by the RT information output process is determined by the RT information output process. may differ from the state of the registers when you call

After that, referring to the information about the game state of the slot machine 1 set in the predetermined area of the game RAM area, the information about the game state (for example, the state of RT) is sent to the test device connected to the slot machine 1. It is set to output from the output port 7 as a test signal to be output. Then, the values of the registers stored in the non-game stack area and saved when the RT information output process is started are sequentially read out from the non-game stack area in the reverse order of saving, and the values corresponding to the order are read out. By setting the register, all the registers are returned to the state when the RT information output process was started. After that, using the aforementioned LD instruction, by reading the value of the stack pointer SP saved in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area when starting the RT information output process, and setting it as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP, The stack pointer SP is returned to the state when the RT information output processing was started, and the RT information output processing is terminated. It should be noted that, in the same way as when the non-game RAM area initialization process is ended, the RT information output process included in the non-game program is ended, and the RT information output process is started in order to return to the game program. When the stack pointer SP is changed from the non-game program to the game program after restoring the values of all the registers that were saved at the time, the second zero flag TZ of the flag register is cleared by using the LD instruction. As a result, the state of the flag register may change before and after the LD instruction is executed. That is, the state of the register when the RT information output process ends may differ from the state of the register saved when the RT information output process is started.

After performing the RT information output process in the step of Sb10, using the above-mentioned second return instruction, the value of the flag register saved in the step of Sb9 is sequentially saved from the game stack area in the reverse order of saving. It is restored by reading out and setting in the flag register (Sb11). RT information output processing is performed by performing saving processing and restoring processing of all registers in the RT information output processing in step Sb10 and saving processing and restoring processing of flag registers in steps Sb9 and Sb11. After that, the states of all the registers provided in the main control unit 41 are completely restored to the states before the processing was performed.

After restoring the flag register in step Sb11, a value corresponding to a predetermined test signal standby time is set in the BC register (Sb12), and the system waits until timer interrupts are performed the number of times equal to the value of the BC register. Then, an interrupt BC wait process is performed (Sb13). In the interrupt BC wait process, the timer interrupt is set to enabled and waits until the timer interrupt process is performed. is repeated until the value of becomes 0. Then, when the value of the BC register becomes 0, the interrupt BC wait processing ends. In step Sb12, a value (29) corresponding to 16.24 milliseconds is set in the BC register as a value corresponding to the test signal waiting time, and in step Sb13, the interrupt BC wait processing is performed. Thus, at least the test signal waiting time (16.24 msec) is ensured from after the RT information output process of Sb10 to the next process.

In addition, by performing the interrupt BC wait process, the process to be performed after the interrupt BC wait process can be performed in a state in which the maximum time is secured until the next timer interrupt process is performed. , the timer interrupt is prevented from occurring unintentionally during a series of processes performed after the interrupt BC wait process. By performing the interrupt BC time waiting process in step Sb13, the timer interrupt is unintentionally performed during the processing from the step of Se1 to the step of Se10 of the game start waiting process performed after the interrupt BC time waiting process. The process from the step Se1 to the step Se10 can be performed as a series of processes to prevent it from being put away.

In addition, by performing the interrupt BC wait process, the timer interrupt process is reliably performed at least once, so that the interrupt BC wait process can be performed in the state after each process included in the timer interrupt process has been performed. A series of operations that occur after the can be performed. For example, by performing the interrupt BC wait process in the step of Sb13, the port input process included in the timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is performed, and the input data of various switches and sensors are updated. The process from step Se1 to step Se10 of the start waiting process can be performed.

After the timer interruption process is performed, the game start waiting process is performed (Sb14), and the process from the end of the control of the previous game to the start of the next game is performed. In the game start waiting process, the process of setting the bet amount according to the insertion of medals or the like is performed, and when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected in a state where the specified number of bets is set, the next game is started. Start processing.

Then, an internal lottery process is performed to determine (internal lottery) whether or not to allow the occurrence of a prize (Sb15). In the internal lottery process, winning is allowed based on preset values (1 to 6) in the slot machine 1 and random numbers for internal lottery obtained at the same time as the start of the game by detection of the start switch 7. An internal lottery is held to determine whether or not to allow the derivation of display results. Then, the winning combination number (including the winning number and losing combination) corresponding to the winning combination is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c so that the winning result in the internal lottery can be specified. Also, group information setting processing (general combination) is performed, and group information (general combination) capable of specifying the type of winning general combination based on the combination number (winning number) is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. In addition, if a special role is won in the internal lottery (including cases where the lottery is won in the internal lottery of the game and cases where the lottery is carried over to the game before the game), An internal winning flag indicating that a special combination (BB or CB) has been won is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Also, if a special role (BB1 or CB) is won in the internal lottery, it is determined whether or not BB has been won, and if it is determined that BB has been won, the A predetermined value (ON state value: 1) for controlling the lighting state is set in an output buffer (output buffer of the state display LED 17) set in a predetermined area for controlling the lighting state of the state display LED 17. do.

By setting the ON state value to the output buffer of the state display LED 17, the state display LED 17 is controlled to be in the lighting state by the LED dynamic display processing of the timer interrupt processing which is subsequently performed. After performing the internal lottery process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment performs the reel rotation process (Sb45) to be described later, thereby starting the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R so that all the reels are in a constant speed state. The operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is validated under the condition that it becomes, and the interrupt BC waiting process (Sb28 )I do. As a result, the timer interrupt process is performed at least once during the period, and when the ON state value is set in the output buffer of the status display LED 17, that is, when BB1 is won, the stop switch is activated. Before the operation of 8L, 8C, 8R is validated, the status display LED 17 is controlled to light up, and the status notification is reliably started before the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is validated. It is designed to be able to Also, when a special win (BB) is won by internal lottery, a predetermined value (ON state value: 1) is set in the output buffer of the status display LED 17, and the status display LED 17 is lit by subsequent timer interrupt processing. Since the state display is started immediately after winning the special combination (BB), the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is sufficient to confirm whether the state display is being performed. It is designed to ensure that it is sufficiently secured before it becomes effective.

Then, after the internal lottery process is performed, a ball output control process is performed to perform a process related to the game section and a process related to the navigation notification as will be described later (Sb16). In the ball output control process, it is determined whether or not it is an advantageous section based on the value of the output buffer of the advantageous section signal, and when it is determined that it is not an advantageous section, the number of bets is set to 3. In addition, advantageous section transition-related processing (for example, processing for determining whether or not an advantageous section transition combination has been won in an internal lottery, or an advantageous section When it is determined that the section transition hand has been won, the processing to shift to the advantageous section by setting the advantageous section flag indicating that control is being performed to the advantageous section by continuous data processing, and the transition to the advantageous section processing to perform various settings, etc.), and if it is determined to be an advantageous section, regardless of whether the number of bets is set to 3 or 2, the game after the advantageous section starts A process of adding one game to an advantageous zone game number counter that counts the number of advantageous zone games, and a process related to navigation notification (for example, an ED in which navigation notification is controlled until the end of the advantageous zone) Processing for updating the ED transition game number counter for specifying the game to be transitioned to control, and on the condition that it is controlled to a predetermined ball output state (for example, advantageous section AT or advantageous section specialized zone). A process of setting ON data (predetermined value: 1) for controlling the lighting state in the output buffer of the display LED 19; processing to set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, processing to perform various processing according to the currently controlled ball output state, etc.). The navigation number set in the ball output control process is referred to in the later-described game start command transmission process (Sb22), and a command capable of specifying the navigation number is transmitted to the sub-controller 91. In addition, the navigation number is also referred to in the reel stop control process (Sb48), and before the acceptance of the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is validated by the reel stop control process, Display data for displaying the navigation display is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 and the navigation display is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 . In addition, the number of advantageous zone games counter updated during the advantageous zone by the ball output control process indicates that the number of advantageous zone games has reached the specified number of games (second specified number) in the AT state management process (Sb60) described later. It will be referred to when determining whether or not.

After that, as in step Sb11, using the above-mentioned second save instruction, the value of the flag register storing the calculation result among the registers provided in the main control unit 41 is stored in the game stack area of the game RAM area in a predetermined order. (Sb17), disables timer interrupts (Sb18), and then uses the aforementioned CALL command to perform operation information signal output processing included in the non-game program (Sb19), As will be described later, an operation information signal designating the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R according to the winning result of the internal lottery is output from the output port to the testing device.

In the operation information signal output process, first, in the same way as in the RT information output process, the value of the stack pointer SP used by the calling game program is read out using the LD instruction described above, and stored in the non-game RAM area. to a predetermined area. After that, using the LD instruction, read out the value stored as the address indicated by the stack pointer SP at the end of the previous non-game program, and set it as the value indicated by the current stack pointer SP, thereby resetting the stack pointer SP. Set for non-gaming programs. Then, using the above-mentioned first save instruction, the values of all the registers provided in the main control unit 41 including the above-mentioned flag register are saved by storing them in the non-game stack area of the non-game RAM area in a predetermined order. Let In addition, when the operation information signal output processing included in the non-game program is called from the game program, the LD instruction is used when changing the stack pointer SP from the game program to the non-game program. The second zero flag TZ of the flag register is changed, and the state of the flag register may change before and after the LD instruction is executed. That is, when the operation information signal output process is called from the game program, the state of the register saved after the stack pointer SP for the non-game program is set by the operation information signal output process is determined by the game program. It may differ from the state of the register when the signal output processing is called.

After that, referring to the lottery result of the internal lottery set in the predetermined area of the game RAM area, the process of outputting the operation information signal designating the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R according to the winning result of the internal lottery is performed. conduct.

Then, in the same manner as in the RT information output process described above, using the first return instruction described above, the values of the registers that were saved when the operation information signal output process was started are sequentially read out from the non-game stack area, All registers are restored to the state when the operation information signal output processing was started. After that, by reading the value of the stack pointer SP saved in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area when the operation information signal output process is started using the LD instruction described above and setting it as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP, The stack pointer SP is restored to the state when the operation information signal output processing was started, and the operation information signal output processing is ended. In order to end the operation information signal output processing included in the non-game program and return to the game program, after restoring the values of all the registers that were saved at the start of the operation information signal output processing, When changing the stack pointer SP from the non-game program to the game program, the second zero flag TZ of the flag register is changed by using the LD instruction, and the flag is changed before and after the LD instruction is executed. Registers may change state. That is, the state of the register when the operation information signal output process ends may differ from the state of the register saved when the operation information signal output process is started.

The operation information signal output process is performed after the ball output control process of controlling the section display LED 19 to light up to display the section and setting the navigation number when a predetermined condition is established. In the signal output processing, the operation information signal is output to the test device after the section display is started.

After the operation information signal output processing is performed in step Sb19, the timer interrupt is set to be enabled (Sb20). Then, as in the step of Sb11, using the above-mentioned second return instruction, the value of the flag register saved in the game stack area in the step of Sb17 is sequentially read from the game stack area in the reverse order of saving. is set in the flag register, the flag register is restored to the state before the operation information signal output processing is performed (Sb21). The operation information signal output process is performed by performing the save process and restore process of all registers in the operation information signal output process in step Sb19 and the save process and restore process of the flag register in steps Sb17 and Sb21. After the process is performed, the states of all the registers provided in the main control unit 41 are completely restored to the state before the process was performed.

After restoring the register in step Sb21, a game start command transmission process is performed (Sb22), it is possible to specify that one game has started, and to specify various control states at the start of one game. A control state command group including a plurality of commands is set in a command queue and sequentially transmitted to the sub-controller 91 .

After executing the game start command process in step Sb22, the transmission data is set in the A register (Sb23), and the communication data storage process is executed (S24). After that, the number of the external output signal to be output at the start of the game is read into the A register (Sb25), and external output signal processing is performed to output the external output signal to external devices such as call lamps and hall computers (Sb26). In the external output signal processing, an external output signal corresponding to the value set in the A register is output from a predetermined output port when the external output signal processing is started.

After performing the external output signal processing in the step of Sb26, a value corresponding to a predetermined game start waiting time is set in the BC register (Sb27), and the timer interrupt is waited for the number of times corresponding to the value of the BC register. Then, an interrupt BC wait process is performed (Sb28). In the interrupt BC wait process, the timer interrupt is set to enabled and waits until the timer interrupt process is performed. is repeated until the value of becomes 0. Then, when the value of the BC register becomes 0, the interrupt BC wait processing ends. In step Sb27, a value (238) corresponding to 133.28 milliseconds is set in the BC register as a value corresponding to the game start waiting time, and in step Sb28, the interrupt BC time waiting process is performed. At least a game start waiting time (133.28 milliseconds) is ensured from after the external output signal processing of Sb26 to the next processing.

After the interrupt BC wait processing is performed in step Sb28, wait time effect determination processing is performed for controlling a freeze state that delays the progress of the game for a predetermined period of time (Sb29). In the waiting time effect determination process, based on the freeze flag set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the game is to be frozen when the start switch 7 is operated and the game is started. When it is determined that the control to the freeze state has been determined, a predetermined value is set in the BC register and the interrupt BC waiting process is performed to delay the progress of the game for a predetermined period. The freeze flag is set so as to be able to specify that control is to be performed in a freeze state, for example, when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the ball output control process. On the other hand, in the waiting time effect determination process, if it is determined that the control to the freeze state is not determined based on the freeze flag, wait without setting the BC register or performing the interrupt BC time waiting process. Terminate the time performance determination process.

After the waiting time effect determination processing is performed in step Sb29, external output signal processing is performed to output an external output signal from a predetermined output port to an external device such as a call lamp or a hall computer (Sb30). Then, it is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and whether or not it is determined to generate a short freeze (freeze state that delays the progress of the game for a predetermined short period, hereinafter sometimes referred to as SF) is determined. An identifiable SF flag value is read into the A register (Sb31), and based on the SF flag value, it is determined whether or not it is decided to generate an SF (Sb32). The SF flag is set so as to be able to specify that SF should be generated when, for example, a predetermined condition is satisfied in the payout control process.

In step Sb32, if it is determined that SF is to be generated, the head address of the SF time setting table in which the period for controlling SF is registered in advance is set in the HL register (Sb33). , addition processing is executed (Sb34). In addition processing, by adding the addition value (A) set in the A register at the start of the addition processing to the address value (HL) set in the HL register, the address value (HL) becomes the addition value ( A) Perform processing to advance by the minute. Further, in the addition process, the data stored in the storage area of the ROM 41b specified by the address value (HL) after adding the addition value (A) is acquired and set in the A register. . By setting the SF flag value in the A register, setting the address of the SF time setting table in the HL register, and performing addition processing, the period to control to SF based on the SF flag value and the SF time setting table is set. A set value for setting is acquired in the A register.

After performing the addition process in the step of Sb34, the set value of the SF control period acquired in the A register is set in the B register (Sb35). Then, a reel effect number that can specify the type of reel effect is set in the A register (Sb36), and reel rotation start processing is executed (Sb37). In the reel rotation start process, reel rotation control is started in a rotation mode specified based on the A register value. After that, the B register value is reset to the A register, and the waiting time execution process is performed (Sb37). The waiting time execution process waits until the timer interrupt process is performed a predetermined number of times specified based on the value of the A register.

In step Sb32, it is determined that it is decided to generate SF, wait time execution processing is performed, and after SF is performed, the RAM 41c is used to measure the elapsed time from the start of reel rotation in the previous game. is set in the HL register (Sb39), the one-game-time management timer is referred to based on the HL register value, and the one-game-time management timer is in operation (Sb40). After the initial value (value corresponding to the specified time (4.1 seconds) of one game) is set, the one-game-time management timer is decremented by a predetermined value each time a timer interrupt process is performed. is set to 1 or more until the prescribed time (4.1 seconds) for one game has elapsed since the initial value was set, while the prescribed time (4.1 seconds) for one game has elapsed since the initial value was set. After that, it becomes 0.

In step Sb40, if the one-game-time management timer value is not 0, it is determined that the one-game-time management timer is in operation; Determine that the timer is not running. When it is determined that the prescribed time has not passed since the game was started last time based on the one-game-time managing timer, the one-game-time prescribed time elapses based on the one-game-time managing timer. (Sb40).

As shown in FIG. 14, after the stipulated time for one game has elapsed based on the one-game-time management timer, timer interruption is set to be prohibited (Sb41), and then a preset set index at the start of the game is set (Sb41). Data is set in the A register (Sb42), and continuous data processing is performed (Sb43). In the continuous data processing, as will be described later, predetermined data is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c specified based on the value (A) set in the A register at the start of the continuous data processing and a continuous data processing table described later. It is a process that performs a process such as a process to By performing continuous data processing with the index data set at the start of the game set in the A register, the initial value (the value equivalent to the specified time (4.1 seconds) for one game) is set in the one-game-time management timer. ), setting an initial value (3 in this embodiment) to a stop switch operation counter that counts the number of times the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are effectively operated during one game, and setting each stop switch A process of setting an initial value to a stop switch operating state flag capable of specifying the operating state of 8L, 8C, and 8R is performed.

The initial value set in the one-game-time management timer by performing continuous data processing in step Sb43 is referred to in the subsequent timer interrupt processing, and the initial value is set in the one-game-time management timer. Based on this, the test signal output timer for managing the output time of the test signal newly starts counting the predetermined time. In addition, the timer for one game time management is decremented each time the counter update process (Sv20) performed by the timer interrupt process is performed so that the value becomes 0 after the time corresponding to the initial value has passed. updated. When the initial value of the one-game-time management timer is set based on the fact that the one-game-time management timer is set to 0, that is, when reel rotation start processing is started in the previous game, one game is completed. It can be specified that the specified time (4.1 seconds) has passed.

After performing continuous data processing in step Sb43, no reel effect data indicating that effect using reels is not performed is set in register A (Sb44), and reel rotation start processing is performed (Sb45). In the reel rotation start process, reel rotation control is started in a rotation mode specified based on the A register value, that is, in a normal game rotation mode. After that, after timer interrupt is set to be permitted (Sb46), a reel rotation start command that can be specified to start rotation control of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is transmitted to the sub-controller 91. A transmission process is performed (Sb47). On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa40 based on the timer for managing one game time that the specified time for one game has passed, the processing of steps Sb41 to Sb47 is immediately performed.

After the reel rotation start command transmission process is performed in step Sb47, a reel stop control process for performing reel stop control is performed (Sb48). In the reel stop control process, first, the navigation number set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is referred to, and display data for performing navigation display according to the navigation number (when the navigation number is 0, non-display data is displayed). data, and if the navigation number is 1 or more, navigation display data corresponding to the navigation number) is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 . As a result, the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled in a display mode according to the display data by subsequent timer interrupt processing. After the display data is set in the output buffer of the auxiliary game display 12, it is determined whether or not the reels under rotation control are rotating at a predetermined constant speed, and if there is a reel that is not rotating at a constant speed. detects a reel error, sets an excitation pattern for accelerating the relevant reel to constant speed rotation, and controls so that all the reels under rotation control are rotated at constant speed rotation. On the other hand, when all the reels under rotation control are rotating at a constant speed, the acceptance of the stop operation of the reels under rotation control is enabled, and until the player stops the reels with the stop switch. stand by. By enabling acceptance of the stop operation, the stop enable LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R of the corresponding stop switches are controlled to be lit by timer interrupt processing that is subsequently performed. Then, when a valid stop operation is detected for a reel on which a stop operation is valid (detection of ON edge data for a stop switch on which a stop operation is valid), a reel on which a valid stop operation is performed. , the reel stop control is performed to stop the reel at a predetermined stop position based on the information set in the reel stop initial setting process. Such reel stop control is repeatedly performed for the reels under rotation control to stop the rotation of all the reels, thereby terminating the reel stop control process.

Then, after finishing the reel stop control process, the prize determination process (Sb49) is performed. In the winning determination process, it is determined whether or not a winning has occurred based on the result of the internal lottery and the symbol combinations stopped on the reels 2L, 2C and 2R. More specifically, in the winning determination process, whether or not a winning has occurred based on the internal lottery result and the symbol combination to be stopped on the winning line LN determined when the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped. determine whether

Then, after performing the winning determination process in the step of Sa49, the process of waiting for one interrupt is performed (Sb50), and the process waits until the timer interrupt process is performed. Then, on the condition that the timer interrupt processing has been performed once, the one-interrupt wait processing is terminated.

After the one-interrupt wait process is performed in step Sb45, the operation result is stored in the registers of the main control unit 41 using the second return instruction as in steps Sb9 and Sb17. Save by storing the value of the flag register in the game stack area of the game RAM area in a predetermined order (Sb51), set the timer interrupt to disabled (Sb52), using the CALL instruction described above, non- Data processing for role ratio monitor included in the game program is performed (Sb53).

In this way, by performing the role ratio monitor data processing (Sb53) after performing the one-interrupt wait processing in the step of Sb50, the time until the next timer interrupt processing is performed is ensured as much as possible. The data processing for role ratio monitoring can be performed in a state where the data processing for role ratio monitoring is performed. In step Sb52, the timer interrupt is set to be prohibited, the role ratio monitor data processing is performed in a state in which the timer interrupt is prohibited, and the timer interrupt prohibition setting is canceled in the subsequent step Sb54. Therefore, unintentional timer interruption during the role ratio monitor data processing can be reliably prevented. Further, in step Sb50, before setting the timer interrupt to the disabled state to perform the role ratio monitor data processing, the timer interrupt wait processing is performed once to perform the timer interrupt processing. is prohibited (Sb52 to Sb54), the timer interrupt timing can be prevented, and when the timer interrupt is prohibited (Sb52 to Sb54), the timer interrupt can be prevented. Therefore, when the prohibition of the timer interrupt is released, the timer interrupt will be executed and the timer interrupt processing will not be executed at unintended timing. there is

Also, by setting the timer interrupt to be disabled in the step of Sb52, similarly to the case of setting the timer interrupt to be disabled in the step of Sb18 described above, the role ratio from when the flag register is saved in the step of Sb51 During the period from the start of monitor data processing until the processing to save the values of all registers is performed, timer interrupt processing is performed to change the state of the register from the state when the flag register was saved. It is designed so that it cannot be changed.

In the role ratio monitor data processing, first, in the same manner as in the RT information output processing described above, the value of the stack pointer SP used by the calling game program is read using the LD instruction described above, and the value of the non-game program is read out. Save to a predetermined area in the RAM area. After that, using the LD instruction, the value stored as the address indicated by the stack pointer SP at the end of the previous non-game program is read, and by setting the value indicated by the stack pointer SP, the stack pointer SP is set to the non-game program. set for the program. Then, using the above-described first save instruction, the values of all the registers of the main control unit 41 including the flag register are saved by storing them in the non-game stack area of the non-game RAM area in a predetermined order. In addition, when the role ratio monitor data processing included in the non-game program is called from the game program, the LD command is used when changing the stack pointer SP from the game program to the non-game program. , the second zero flag TZ of the flag register is changed, and the state of the flag register may change before and after the LD instruction is executed. That is, when the role ratio monitor data process is called from the game program, the state of the register saved after the stack pointer SP for the non-game program is set by the role ratio monitor data process is determined by the game program. The register status may differ from when the role ratio monitor data processing is called.

After that, each state count process included in the non-game program is performed, and a predetermined period (for example, a period of 6000 games before the current game, a period of 175000 games before the current game, etc.) Update the data regarding the number of medals to be paid out in the section controlled to be in an advantageous state (advantageous section, etc.).

Then, using the above-mentioned first return instruction, the values of the registers that had been saved in the non-game stack area when the role ratio monitor data processing was started are saved in the non-game order in the reverse order of saving. By sequentially reading from the stack area and setting in the registers corresponding to the order, all the registers are restored to the state when the role ratio monitor data processing was started. After that, using the aforementioned LD instruction, read out the value of the stack pointer SP saved in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area when the role ratio monitor data processing is started, and set it as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP. Then, the stack pointer SP is returned to the state when the data processing for role ratio monitoring was started, and the data processing for role ratio monitoring is ended. In addition, in order to terminate the role ratio monitor data processing included in the non-game program and return to the game program, the values of all the registers that had been saved at the start of the role ratio monitor data processing were restored. Later, when the stack pointer SP is changed from the non-game program to the game program, the LD instruction is used to change the second zero flag TZ of the flag register. may change the state of the flag register. That is, the state of the register when the data processing for role ratio monitoring ends may be different from the state of the register saved when the data processing for role ratio monitoring is started.

After performing the role ratio monitor data processing in step Sb53, timer interrupt is set to permitted (Sb54). Then, similarly to step Sb11 and step Sb21, using the above-described second return instruction, the value of the flag register saved in step Sb51 is sequentially read out from the game stack area in the reverse order of saving. is set in the flag register, the flag register is restored to the state before performing the data processing for the role ratio monitor (Sb55). By performing the save processing and restore processing of all registers in the role ratio monitor data processing in step Sb53, and the save processing and restore processing of the flag register in steps Sb51 and Sb55, the role ratio monitor data is obtained. After the processing is performed, the states of all the registers provided in the main control unit 41 are completely restored to the state before the processing was performed.

After restoring the flag register in step Sb55, the door command indicating the detection state of the door open detection switch 25 is set in the command queue (Sb56), and the door command is issued in the command transmission processing of the timer interrupt processing (main). It is made to transmit to the sub-control section 91 .

Thereafter, an illegal winning check process is performed (Sb57). In the fraudulent winning check process, it is determined whether or not fraudulent winning has occurred based on the combination of symbols stopped on the reel winning line LN and the winning result of the internal lottery, and if fraudulent winning has occurred. Then, the error code is set in the A register to end the fraudulent prize check processing, and when fraudulent prize winning does not occur, the fraudulent prize check processing is performed without setting the error code.

After performing the fraudulent winning check process at Sb57, the winning series end check process is performed (Sb58). In the winning series end check process, it is determined whether or not the player is in a special state (BB or CB), and if the special state is in effect, it is determined whether or not the conditions for ending the special state are satisfied in the game. . Then, when it is determined that the conditions for ending the special state are satisfied, processing such as setting an end flag indicating the end of the special state in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is performed.

After performing the combination end check process in Sb58, the game state setting process is performed (Sb59). In the game state setting process, it is determined whether or not BB or CB, which has been won by internal lottery, has won a prize, and if it is determined that BB or CB has won, the game state is changed to a special state of winning. , etc.

After the game state setting process is performed in Sb59, an AT state management process for performing a process regarding a game section and a process regarding navigation notification is performed (Sb60). In the AT state management process, a process for determining whether or not the game is in an advantageous section based on whether or not the above-mentioned advantageous section game number counter is a value other than the initial value (0), If it is determined, regardless of whether the number of bets is set to 3 or 2 in the game, update the net increase number counter that counts the net increase number of medals paid out in the advantageous section. processing, processing of setting an advantageous interval end flag indicating that the advantageous interval is terminated when it is determined that the number of net increases in medals exceeds a first specified number based on the updated net increase counter; A process of setting an advantageous interval end flag when it is determined that the number of advantageous interval games specified based on the above has reached a second prescribed number, and a state where the number of bets is 2 or a game state other than RT1 Processing related to navigation notification performed on conditions (for example, processing to set an ED transition flag indicating that ED control is to be performed when it is determined that the net increase number specified based on the net increase number counter exceeds the third specified number, ED Processing of setting an ED transition flag indicating that ED control is to be performed when it is determined that the number of ED transition games specified based on the number of transition games counter has reached the fourth specified number, and processing, etc.).

The advantageous interval end flag set by the AT state management process is referred to in the process (Sb70) described later in the main process, and when the advantageous interval end flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, Among them, information related to the advantageous interval (for example, advantageous interval game number counter, net increase number counter, ED transition game number counter, ball output status information, output buffer of interval display LED 19, output buffer of signal during advantageous interval, etc.) is stored. By performing the advantageous interval data initialization processing (Sb71 to Sb79) for initializing the predetermined area where the area is, the series of advantageous intervals is terminated. Advantageous section data initialization processing is performed based on the fact that the advantageous section end flag is set, and the output buffer of the section display LED 19 is initialized. is terminated. In addition, the advantageous section data initialization process is performed to initialize the output buffer for the advantageous section signal, so that the advantageous section signal is controlled to be in the OFF state.

After performing AT state management processing in Sb60, batch transmission data storage processing is performed (Sb61), and a plurality of commands to be transmitted to the sub-controller 91 at the end of one game are collectively set in the command queue. . A plurality of commands set by the batch transmission data storage process are sequentially transmitted by the subsequent timer interrupt process.

After performing batch transmission data storage processing in step Sb61, freeze processing during stop is performed (Sb62). In the freeze-while-stop process, it is determined based on the freeze flag set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c whether or not it is decided to control to the freeze state when the third stop operation is performed. When it is determined that the control is to be performed immediately, a predetermined value is set in the BC register and a process of waiting for the interrupt BC is performed to delay the progress of the game for a predetermined period. The freeze flag is set so as to be able to specify that control is to be performed in a freeze state, for example, when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the ball output control process. On the other hand, in the freeze during stop processing, if it is determined based on the freeze flag that it is not decided to control to the freeze state, the BC register is set and the interrupt BC wait processing is not performed. End the freeze process.

After the freeze-while-stop processing is performed in step Sb62, medal payout processing is performed to pay out the number of medals according to the winnings generated as a result of the game (Sb63). In the medal payout process, a predetermined number of medals that are predetermined for each winning combination are awarded to the player according to the winning that occurs, the number of medals to be awarded is added to the credits, and the credits reach the upper limit ( In this embodiment, when 50) is reached, the hopper motor 34b is driven and the medals not added to the credits are paid out from the medal payout opening 9. FIG.

After the medal payout process is performed in step Sb62, transmission data indicating completion of the medal payout process is set in the A register (Sb64), the value of the payout end command is set in the D register (Sb65), A communication data storage process is performed (Sb66). In the communication data storage process, a command is generated based on the values set in the A and D registers and set in the command queue. is set and the value of the payout end command is set in the D register, a payout end command indicating that the medal payout process has ended is generated and set in the command queue.

After the communication data storage process is performed in the step of Sb66, the address for setting the freeze at the end of the game is set in the HL register (Sb67), and the waiting time effect process is performed (Sb68). In the waiting time effect process, it is determined whether or not it is decided to control to the freeze state at the end of the game based on the data set in the setting address of the freeze at the end of the game in the RAM 41c, and the freeze state is controlled. When it is determined that it is decided to play, a predetermined value is set in the BC register and processing for waiting for the interrupt BC is performed to delay the progress of the game for a predetermined period. In the RAM 41c, the address for setting the freeze at the end of the game is set with data that can be specified to control to the freeze state, for example, when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the ball output control process. On the other hand, in the waiting time effect process, if it is determined that the data that can specify that the control to the freeze state is not set in the setting address of the freeze at the end of the game in the RAM 41c, the setting of the BC register and the interrupt BC To terminate waiting time presentation processing without performing waiting processing or the like.

After the waiting time effect is performed in the step of Sb68, a setting process at the end of the game is performed (Sb69). In the setting process at the end of the game, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination of the replay combination is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. A process of setting the bet amount for replay (in this embodiment, the replay medal counter set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is set to the same bet amount as the prescribed number of the game as replay medals). ), a process of setting a replaying flag in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, a process of controlling the replaying LED 20 to the ON state (lighting state), and the like.

Then, after the game end setting processing is performed in step Sb69, it is determined whether or not an advantageous interval end flag indicating that the advantageous interval is to be ended is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sb70). When it is determined that the section end flag is set, an advantageous section data initialization for ending the advantageous section by initializing a predetermined area in the storage area of the RAM 41c in which data related to control during the advantageous section is stored. conversion processing (Sb71 to Sb79).

In the advantageous interval data initialization process, first, the number of partitions of the storage area of the RAM 41c to be initialized in the process (2 in this embodiment) is set in a predetermined register (D) as the number of initialization area partitions (Sb71). . Then, the RAM initialization table (the value of the start address of the storage area of the RAM 41c to be initialized and the number of storage areas to be initialized (capacity, number of addresses included) correspond to the value indicated by the number of partitions. The address of the storage area of the ROM 41b storing the set table) is set in the predetermined register (HL) (Sb72). After that, the number of storage areas corresponding to the value indicated by the number of divisions of the predetermined register (D) is acquired from the storage area of the ROM 41b specified based on the address of the RAM initialization data table set in the predetermined register (HL). Then, the number of addresses of the area to be initialized is set in a predetermined register (B), and the value of the top address corresponding to the value indicated by the number of divisions in the predetermined register (D) is acquired and used as the RAM address to be initialized. Set in a predetermined register (C) (Sb73, Sb74).

After setting the initialization data (for example, 0) in the predetermined register (A), the predetermined register (A ), a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is initialized with the initialization data (Sb75). After that, by adding 1 to the value of the predetermined register (C), the RAM address to be initialized is advanced by one (Sb76).

Then, by subtracting 1 from the value of the predetermined register (B), 1 is subtracted from the number of remaining addresses, and then whether or not the number of remaining addresses is greater than 0 is determined to determine whether or not the range to be initialized has ended. is determined (Sb78). If it is determined in step Sd78 that the number of remaining initial addresses is greater than 0 and the range to be initialized has not ended, the process returns to step Sb75, and the processing of Sb75 to Sb78 is performed until the number of remaining addresses becomes 0. This is repeated until initialization target determination is completed. As a result, a memory area (initialization target range) corresponding to the number of memory areas to be initialized (the number of addresses) from the first address of the memory area of the RAM 41c to be initialized, which is predetermined in the RAM initialization data table, is expanded. , is initialized with initialization data.

If it is determined in step Sb78 that the number of remaining addresses is not greater than 0 and that the range to be initialized has ended, that is, if all the predetermined areas of the RAM 41c specified based on the RAM initialization data table have been initialized By subtracting 1 from the value of the predetermined register (D), 1 is subtracted from the value indicated by the number of partitions in the memory area of the RAM 41c to be initialized (Sb78), and whether or not the value indicated by the number of partitions after subtraction is 0 (Sb79), and if the value indicated by the number of partitions is not 0, the process returns to step Sb73. and sets it in a predetermined register (B) as the number of addresses of the area to be initialized, and obtains from the RAM initialization table the value of the top address corresponding to the value indicated by the number of divisions in the predetermined register (D). , after setting a RAM address to be initialized in a predetermined register (C) (Sb73, Sb74), initialize data (for example, 0) is set in a predetermined register (A), and set in a predetermined register (C). After initializing the predetermined area of the RAM 41c with the initialization data by setting the initialization data set in the predetermined register (A) in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c corresponding to the initialization target RAM address (Sb75) The process of incrementing the value of the predetermined register (C) by 1 to advance the RAM address to be initialized by one (Sb75) is repeated until it is determined that the number of addresses has become 0 in step Sb79. Thus, the memory area of the RAM 41c corresponding to the value indicated by the number of divisions of the memory area of the predetermined register (D) is initialized. By repeating the processing in steps Sb73 to Sb78 until the number of divisions of the storage area becomes 0, the predetermined storage area of the RAM 41c designated by the number of divisions is initialized. Then, when the value indicated by the number of divisions of the storage area of the predetermined register (D) becomes 0, the AT state management process is terminated and the process returns to the main process. The data related to the control during the advantageous interval includes data related to the control of the AT state, and a predetermined area in which the data related to the control during the advantageous interval is stored in the RAM 41c by the advantageous interval data initialization process. is initialized, data relating to control during the advantageous interval and data relating to control of the AT state are initialized, and the advantageous interval ends and the AT state ends.

In this embodiment, in the advantageous section data initialization process, the initial value of the number of sections is set to 2, and the storage areas of the predetermined two sections in the RAM 41c are initialized. A configuration may be employed in which a predetermined one segmented storage area or three or more segmented storage areas in the RAM 41c are initialized.

As shown in FIG. 15, after determining that the advantageous interval end flag is set in step Sb70 and performing advantageous interval data initialization processing (Sb71 to Sb79), and in step Sb70, the advantageous interval end flag is set. After determining that the flag is not set, the currently controlled game section is determined based on whether or not the advantageous section flag indicating that the advantageous section is being controlled is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. It is determined whether or not the vehicle is in an advantageous section (Sb80). The flag during the advantageous section is set when the prescribed number of bets is set to 3 by the ball output control process in step Sb16 described above, and when a predetermined advantageous section transition hand is made in an internal lottery in a game that is not controlled by the BB. It is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c under the condition that the game section is shifted to the advantageous section by winning the lottery.

If it is determined in step Sb80 that the advantageous interval end flag is set, data (1) indicating the ON state is set in the advantageous interval signal output buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sb81). ), and proceed to step Sb82. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sb80 that the advantageous interval end flag is not set, the process proceeds to step Sb82 without setting data indicating the ON state in the output buffer for the advantageous interval signal. If the data indicating the ON state is not set in the output buffer for the signal during the advantageous interval, the value of the output buffer for the signal during the advantageous interval is 0 (OFF state) when initialized by the above-described advantageous interval data initialization processing. data) is maintained.

Thereafter, in step Sb82, the output buffer for the signal during the advantageous interval is referenced to determine whether the value of the data set in the output buffer for the signal during the advantageous interval is the initial value (0: data indicating the OFF state). determine whether or not Then, in step Sb82, if it is determined that the value of the output buffer for the signal during the advantageous interval is the initial value (0), that is, if it is determined that the game interval is not controlled to the advantageous interval, the interval display LED is extinguished. The data number of the hour is set in the A register (Sb83), continuous data processing is performed (Sb84), and then the process proceeds to step Sb85. In the continuous data processing in Sb84, processing for setting the output state of the signal during the advantageous section to the OFF state is performed based on the data number when the section display LED is turned off and a continuous data processing table which will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sb82 that the value of the output buffer for the signal during the advantageous interval is not the initial value (0), that is, the predetermined value (1) is set, and the game interval is controlled to be the advantageous interval. If so, the process proceeds to step Sb85 without performing steps Sb83 and Sb84.

At step Sb85, after setting the capacity of the predetermined area of the RAM 41c to be initialized each time one game ends (RAM initialization object size) in the BC register (Sb85), the BB end flag is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. It is determined whether or not the special state (BB1, BB2) has ended in the game based on whether or not there is (Sb86). The BB end flag is a flag that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c when it is determined that the special state (BB1, BB2) has ended in the game by the aforementioned combination end check process.

Then, when it is determined in step Sb86 that the special state has ended in the game, the capacity of the predetermined area of the RAM 41c to be initialized each time the special state ends (RAM initialization object size) is set in the BC register. (Sb87), returning to the processing of step Sb1. On the other hand, if it is not determined in step Sb86 that the special state has ended in the game, the process returns to step Sb1 without performing step Sb87.

Thereafter, steps Sb1 to Sb87 are repeated. When the main process completes one unit of game control, the main process is repeatedly executed for each unit of game.

As described above, the initial setting process and the main process performed by the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment include processes included in the game program and processes included in the non-game program, such as non-game RAM area initialization process, RT information output, etc. processing, medal sensor processing, role ratio monitor data processing, and the like. Then, when calling a process included in a non-game program, each time the process of the corresponding non-game program is called, the value of the flag register among the registers provided in the main control unit 41 is changed to the game program on the calling game program side. It is stored in the stack area and saved, and the value of the stack pointer SP used in the game program is stored in the non-game RAM area and saved on the called non-game program side, and all the main control unit 41 has The value of the register is stored in the non-game stack area and saved. Then, processing according to the called non-game program (for example, processing to initialize the non-game RAM area in the non-game RAM area initialization process, medal sensor check processing in the medal sensor process described later, role ratio monitor to be described later) Each state count processing in data processing, etc.) is performed.

In addition, after the non-game program is processed, the main control unit 41 stores the values of all the registers saved in the non-game stack area at the start of the non-game program on the non-game program side. to restore the register to the state at the start of the non-game program, and set the value of the stack pointer SP stored in the non-game RAM area at the start of the non-game program to the stack pointer SP, The stack pointer SP is returned to the state at the start of the game program, and the value of the flag register stored in the game stack area before calling the non-game program on the calling game program side is transferred to the corresponding flag register. A process is performed to restore the register to the state before the non-game program is read and called.

Further, when performing various processes according to the non-game program, the main control unit 41 performs various processes according to the non-game program by calling the non-game program from the game program using the above-mentioned CALL command or the like. Upon completion of each process according to the non-game program, the program returns to the calling game program.

The main control unit 41 (main CPU 41a) of this embodiment can call RT information output processing, operation information signal output processing, role ratio monitor data processing, and the like included in the non-game program from the main processing included in the game program. It is possible, and the processes included in the non-game program called by the main process (RT information output process, operation information signal output process, role ratio monitor data process, etc.) First, using the LD instruction, the value of the stack pointer SP used by the main process, which is the calling game program, is read out and saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. By reading the value of the stack pointer SP saved at the end of the non-game program and setting it as the value indicated by the current stack pointer SP, the stack pointer SP is set for the non-game program.

Also, the non-game program called by the main process uses the LD instruction to set the stack pointer SP for the non-game program, and then uses the first save instruction (PUSH ALL) to store all the registers in the RAM 41c. A process of saving to a predetermined area is performed. At this time, in order to set the stack pointer SP for the non-game program, the LD instruction is used to change the second zero flag TZ of the flag register. , the state of the flag register when the non-game program stack pointer SP is set may differ from the state when the main process calls the non-game program. That is, on the non-game program side, among all the registers saved using the first save instruction, the registers other than the flag register are in the same state as when the main process calls the non-game program. , the flag register may differ from the state when the main process calls the non-game program.

In addition, the non-game program called by the main process, when ending the non-game program and returning to the main process included in the game program, the first return instruction (POP
ALL) to restore the values of all the registers that were saved at the start of the processing of the non-game program, then use the LD instruction to set the stack pointer SP for the game program, and proceed to the main process. bring back. At this time, by using the LD instruction, the second zero flag TZ of the flag register is changed, the state of the flag register changes before and after the execution of the LD instruction, and the game program shifts from the game program to the main process. The state of the flag register when returning may differ from the state when the main process calls the non-game program. That is, when returning from the non-game program to the main process, the registers other than the flag register are in the same state as when the main process called the non-game program, while the flag register , the state may differ from the state when the main process calls the non-game program.

Thus, the state of the flag register saved and restored by using the first save instruction and the first return instruction on the non-game program side is the state when the main process calls the non-game program, that is, the main process may be in a state different from the state of the flag register used by the non-game program side, the state of all registers including the flag register provided in the main control unit 41 is protected when the main process calls the non-game program. It is difficult to

On the other hand, in the main processing of the present embodiment, when calling the processing included in the non-game program (RT information output processing, operation information signal output processing, role ratio monitor data processing, etc.), the corresponding non-game program Each time the process is called, the main process side of the caller uses the second save instruction (PUSH AF) to store the state of the flag register among the registers provided in the main control unit 41 in the game stack area and save it. Then, when returning to the main processing from the processing included in the non-game program, the main processing side uses the second return instruction (POP AF) to save the state of the flag register to the game stack area. bring back. As a result, in the main processing, when returning from the processing included in the called non-game program, the state of the flag register can be restored to the state saved when the non-game program was called on the main processing side. , Of the registers returned by the non-game program, the registers other than the flag register are in the same state as when the main process calls the non-game program, while the flag register is in the same state as when the main process calls the non-game program. Even if the state differs from the state when calling , when returning from the non-game program to the main process, the state of all registers can be restored to the state when the main process called the non-game program. It's like

In addition, the process included in the non-game program called from the main process included in the game program uses the first save instruction (PUSH ALL) to save the state of all the registers provided in the main control unit 41 to the non-game stack area. Save, and use the first return instruction (POP ALL) to restore the state of all the registers provided in the main control unit 41 to the state saved in the non-game stack area, while the main process is performed by the second save instruction ( PUSH AF) is used to save the state of only the flag register among the registers provided in the main control unit 41 to the game stack area, and the second return instruction (POP AF) is used to save the state of the flag register to the game stack area. It is designed to return to the saved state. As a result, in the game program, the state of the flag register is saved and restored using the 1-byte second save instruction and the second restore instruction, so that the 2-byte first save instruction and the first restore instruction used in the non-game program The capacity of the game program can be reduced compared to saving and restoring the state of the register using instructions. In addition, in the game program, the state of only the flag register among the plurality of registers is saved in the game stack area using the second save instruction. The capacity of the game stack area can be reduced compared to the case of retracting the .

In the processing included in the game program such as the main processing of this embodiment, the value of the second zero flag in the flag register is not used for the determination for proceeding with various processing based on the program.

In the main processing of this embodiment, when calling the processing included in the non-game program (RT information output processing, operation information signal output processing, role ratio monitor data processing, etc.), the timer interrupt is set to disabled and called. By setting the timer interrupt to be enabled when returning to the main process from the last process, the timer interrupt is disabled during the period in which the process included in the non-game program is executed.

In the main processing of this embodiment, when calling the processing (operation information signal output processing, role ratio monitor data processing, etc.) included in the non-game program, after saving the flag register, the timer interrupt is disabled. Then, when returning from the called process to the main process, the timer interrupt is enabled and then the flag register is restored.

In the main processing included in the game program of this embodiment, it is possible to call operation information signal output processing, medal sensor processing, role ratio monitor data processing, etc. included in the non-game program. is executed by the main control unit 41 in a state in which sufficient time has been secured before the next timer interrupt process is performed, the process included in All the processes included in the process are completed within the time, but if the main control unit 41 executes the process in a state in which sufficient time is not secured before the next timer interrupt process is performed, All the processes included in the process are not completed within the time until the next timer interrupt process is performed, and there is a possibility that the next timer interrupt process will be performed during the execution of the process. It consists of a capacity program.

Then, in the game program (main processing, game start waiting processing, etc.) of the present embodiment, when calling the non-game program, after performing the one-time interrupt waiting processing and the timer interrupt processing is performed, the game program A series of processes including the process of calling the game program are performed, and the non-game program is called. That is, by calling the non-game program with the one-time interrupt waiting process as a trigger, the non-game program is executed in a state in which sufficient time is secured until the next timer interrupt process is performed. It's becoming

As described above, in the main processing of this embodiment, the advantageous interval end flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Advantageous section data initialization processing (Sb71 to Sb79) for initializing information related to the advantageous section including the buffer is performed, and the advantageous section signal output buffer is initialized to control the advantageous section signal to the OFF state. Continuous data processing is performed (Sb82 to Sb84) based on the fact that the signal output buffer during the advantageous section is set to the initial value (0), and OFF state data is set in the output buffer of the section display LED 19 to display the section. is designed to end the As a result, the segment display is terminated after the signal during the advantageous segment is turned off, so that it is possible to prevent the segment display from being terminated in a state in which the advantageous segment-related information is not initialized, and the advantageous segment display is completed. It is possible to prevent the end of the section display despite the fact that the signal during the advantageous section is output to the test device due to the medium signal output buffer not being initialized.

In the main processing of this embodiment, advantageous section data initialization processing (Sb71 to Sb79) for initializing information about the advantageous section is performed. When the initial value (0) shown is set, the signal during the advantageous section is controlled to be in the OFF state. Thus, by initializing the signal during the advantageous interval when the advantageous interval ends, the signal during the advantageous interval can be turned off without individually setting the output buffers of the signal during the advantageous interval to the OFF state.

In the main processing of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not it is in the advantageous section based on the flag in the advantageous section set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sb80), and if it is determined to be in the advantageous section, the signal in the advantageous section is output. A predetermined value (1) indicating the ON state is set in the buffer (Sb81), and if the predetermined value is set in the advantageous section signal buffer by timer interrupt processing that is performed thereafter, the advantageous section signal is turned ON. It is designed to be controlled by the state. As a result, it is determined whether or not the game is in the advantageous section each time the game ends. In spite of this, it is possible to prevent the signal from being turned off during the advantageous section. The main control unit 41 of this embodiment can execute a main process that is repeatedly executed for each unit of game, and a timer interrupt process that interrupts the main process at regular time intervals. Specific processing (processing by a game program) and special processing (processing by a non-game program) can be performed in the main processing. It is possible to perform timer processing (Sv20) for updating the timer value for use. During execution of specific processing (game program), timer interrupt processing may be executed, one game time management timer value is updated, while during execution of special processing (non-game program), timer Interrupt processing is not executed, and the one game time management timer value is not updated. Thus, by updating the one-game-time management timer value as much as possible, the game can be smoothly progressed, while the one-game-time management timer value is not updated during the period when special processing is being performed. As a result, the process of updating the one game time management timer value and the special process are not mixed. Thereby, the game can be progressed smoothly.

In the main processing of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12, in the initial setting processing performed after restoration from power failure, after the timer interrupt is prohibited at Sa01 and then until the timer interrupt is permitted at Sa27, Timer interrupt processing is not executed. Therefore, in the initial setting process, the timer value for one game time management is not updated by the counter update process. As a result, the one-game-time management timer value is not updated until the initial setting process is performed after the power is restored and the game can be progressed, so that the game can be smoothly progressed.

In the main processing of this embodiment, it is determined whether or not the one-game-time management timer value is a specific value (0) before reel rotation is started in one game (Sb40), and the one-game-time management timer value is determined. is not the specific value (0), the game is not progressed until it is determined that the one-game-time management timer value is the specific value (0), and the one-game-time management timer value is determined to be a specific value (0), the game is advanced. As a result, the game is not progressed until it is specified that the minimum time has passed based on the timer value for managing one playing time, and the game is progressed when the minimum time has passed, whereby the minimum time per game can be achieved. can be ensured.

In the main processing of this embodiment, when it is determined that the one-game-time management timer value is a specific value (0) (Sb40), execution of timer interrupt processing is prohibited (Sb41), and then continuous data processing is performed. By doing so (Sb43), an initial value (a value corresponding to 4.1 seconds) is set in the one game time management timer. As a result, timer interrupt processing is prohibited when the initial value is set to the one-game-time management timer. It is possible to prevent the timer value from being updated. Thereby, the progress of the game can be performed smoothly.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment executes, as a special process (non-game program), a medal sensor process (Sg9) for monitoring the passing status of medals flowing down the medal receiving channel 29b. As a result, during the period in which the medal sensor process to be monitored is being performed, the timer value for managing one game time is not updated, so that the processing for updating the timer value for managing one game time and the detection of fraud are performed. Medal sensor processing is not mixed.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment, as special processing (non-game program), performs the total cumulative payout number, the total cumulative payout number, the total cumulative A role ratio monitor data process for updating the number of continuous accessory payouts is executed. As a result, during the period in which the role ratio monitor data processing for updating the data for calculating the accessory payout ratio and the continuous accessory ratio is performed, the game time management timer value is not updated. The process of updating the game time management timer value and the role ratio monitor data process related to the performance display of the game machine are not mixed.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment performs an operation information signal output process (Sb19) for outputting a stop execution position signal to a testing device that tests the slot machine 1 as a special process (non-game program). It's becoming As a result, during the period in which the operation information signal output process for outputting the test signal to the testing device for testing the slot machine 1 is being performed, the game time management timer value is not updated. The process of updating the game time management timer value and the operation information signal output process related to the test of the slot machine 1 do not coexist.

In the main processing of this embodiment, when it is determined that the one game time management timer value is a specific value (0) (Sb40), the set index data at the start of the game is set in the A register (Sb42), and continuous data By performing the processing (Sb42), the continuous data processing sets the initial value to the one-game-time management timer value to start counting the minimum time, and sets the one-game-time management timer value to the initial value. is set, the test signal is output. As a result, the test signal is output when the initial value is set to the one game time management timer value. It is possible to identify whether time is secured.

[Continuous data processing]
The control contents of the continuous data processing performed by the main control unit 41 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 18. FIG. 16 and 17 are flowcharts showing the control contents of continuous data processing performed by the main control unit 41. FIG. FIG. 18 is a diagram for explaining a continuous data processing table. The continuous data processing is included in the game program, and is a subroutine called in the main processing included in the game program. Continuous data processing is called from the main processing or the like with the data number set in the A register. The data number is data indicating the type of processing performed in the continuous data processing.

As shown in FIG. 16, in the continuous data processing, first, it is determined whether or not the data number set in the A register when starting the continuous data processing is a number indicating that data setting processing is to be performed. (Sd1). If it is determined in step Sd1 that the data number set in the A register is a number indicating that a process other than the data setting process is to be performed, the process proceeds to step Sd18 to perform a 1-byte data lottery process. The 1-byte data lottery process is a process of performing a predetermined lottery specified based on the data number of the A register. After the 1-byte data lottery process is performed in step Sd18, the continuous data process is terminated and the process returns to the calling source.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd1 that the data number set in the A register is a number indicating that the data setting process is to be performed, the reference address of the index data of the continuous data processing table is set in the HL register. (Sd2), addition processing is performed (Sd3). In addition processing, the A register value is added to the HL register, and the data stored at the address specified by the HL register value after the addition is obtained in the A register. In the index data table, the relative distance from the reference address to the top address of the setting data table corresponding to the data number is stored in the address area of the index data table corresponding to the data number (see FIG. 18). By performing addition processing in step Sd3, the address area of the index data table corresponding to the data number is set in the HL register, and the address area of the set data table corresponding to the data number is set in the A register. A relative distance will be set. For example, when data number 1 is set in the A register and addition processing is performed, the index data address m2+1 (reference address m2+data number 1) of the continuous data processing table is set in the HL register as shown in FIG. and the relative distance data α(m6-(m2+1)) stored at the address m2+1 is set in the A register.

After performing addition processing in step Sd3, the value of the A register is added to the HL register (Sd4), and the address specified by the HL register value is advanced by the A register value. As a result, for example, when the data number is 1, the head address m6 of the setting data table corresponding to the data number 1 is set in the HL register.

After that, all the set counts stored in the area of the address specified by the HL register value are read into the B register, and the initialization count is read into the C register (Sd5). Then, after the HL register value is updated by adding 1 (Sd6), the HL register value is updated by adding 1 (Sd7). After that, the setting destination address value stored in the address of the HL register value is read into the E register (Sd8).

Then, it is determined whether or not the number of initializations of the C register is 0 (Sd9), and if it is determined that the number of initializations of the C register is 0, the HL register value is updated by adding 1 ( Sd10), the set data value stored at the address of the updated HL register value is read into the A register (Sd11), and it is determined whether or not the value of the A register is 0 (Sd12). If it is determined in step Sd12 that the A register value is not 0, the setting data set in the A register is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c at the address specified by the E register value (Sd13).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd9 that the C register value is not 0, after subtracting 1 from the number of initializations of the C register (Sd16), the exclusive OR of the A register values is calculated to obtain A Data (0) for initialization is set in the register (Sd17). Then, the data for initialization is set in the A register in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c at the address specified by the E register value (Sd13). The Rukoto.

After setting the A register value in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c at the address specified by the E register value in step Sd13, the B register is decremented by 1 to update the total set count by 1 (Sd14). After that, it is determined whether or not the total number of remaining set times is 0 based on the value of the B register (Sd15).

If it is determined in step Sd15 that the B register value is 0 and the total number of remaining settings is 0, then the continuous data processing is terminated and the process returns to the caller. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd15 that the B register value is not 0 and the total number of remaining setting times is not 0, the process returns to step Sd7, and the processing of steps Ad7 to Sd15 is specified based on the B register value. This is repeated until the total set number of times to be set becomes 0.

Also, as shown in FIG. 17, when it is determined that the value of the A register is 0 in step Sd12, after subtracting 1 from the total set count of the B register (Sd19), the BC register value is stored in the RAM 41c. Save to area (Sd20). After that, the setting destination address value specified based on the HL register value is read into the DE register (Sd21). Then, it is determined whether or not the E register value is a predetermined waiting time setting code value (Sd22). If it is determined that the E register value is not the predetermined wait time setting code value, port output processing is performed (Sd29). In port output processing, the output signal from the output port specified by the HL register is set to the state (ON state or OFF state) specified by the A register.

If it is determined in step Sd22 that the E register value is the predetermined waiting time setting code value, the determination code set in the predetermined bit of the E register value is deleted (Sd23), and DE After setting the register value in the BC register as the waiting time (Sd24), the interrupt BC waiting process is performed (Sd25). As a result, the timer interrupt processing is waited for the number of times set in the BC register.

After the interrupt BC count waiting process is performed in step Sd25, the total set count of the BC register saved in step Sd20 is restored (Sd26). If it is determined in step Sd22 that the E register value is not the waiting time code and port output processing is performed in step Sd29, the process proceeds to step Sd26 without performing steps Sd23 to Sd25. , Sd20 restores the total set count of the BC register saved in steps Sd20.

After restoring the total number of times set in the BC register in step Sd26, the B register is decremented by 1 and the total number of times set is decremented by 1 (Sd27). Then, it is determined whether or not the total remaining set count specified based on the B register value is 0 (Sd28), and if it is determined that the total remaining set count is not 0, the process returns to step Sd20, Each processing of steps Sd20 to Sd28 is performed until it is determined that all remaining set counts are zero. Then, in step Sd28, it is determined that the remaining set number of times is 0, so that the continuous data processing is terminated and the process returns to the calling source process.

In this way, in the continuous data processing, there is a process of initializing a predetermined area specified based on the data number and the continuous data processing table, and a predetermined area specified based on the data number and the continuous data processing table. A process of setting predetermined data specified based on the data processing table, and setting an output signal from a predetermined output port specified based on the data number and the continuous data processing table to an output state (ON state or OFF state). processing, etc.

For example, as shown in FIG. 18, when the data number is 1 (setting data when the start switch is operated), the maintenance permission flag and the number of payouts displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 are displayed based on the setting data table. (upper digits) and the payout number display (lower digits) are initialized. If the data number is 4 (setting data when the section display LED is turned off), output port processing is performed based on the port output code being set, and external output signals 1 and 2 are turned off. set, and set the signal during the advantageous interval to the OFF state. Also, if the data number is 27 (setting data for shifting to an advantageous interval), the advantageous interval (01) is set in the interval state information that can specify the game interval being controlled, A high probability state flag indicating the state is set to high probability state (1).

[Game start waiting process]
The control contents of the game start waiting process performed by the main control unit 41 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 19 . FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the game start waiting process performed by the main control unit 41. As shown in FIG. The game start waiting process is included in the game program and is a subroutine called in the main process included in the game program.

As shown in FIG. 19, in the game start waiting process, first, the inserted medal number display process is performed (Se1), and the 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16 corresponding to the number of medals inserted in the slot machine 1 are turned on (lit). to control. After that, an error number corresponding to an error code (E1) that can specify that the hopper tank 34a is full is prepared in a predetermined register (A) (Se2), and a predetermined port input buffer is referred to, It is determined whether or not the hopper tank 34a is full based on the determined data of the full tank sensor 35a (Se3).

If it is determined in step Se3 that the hopper tank 34a is full, error processing is performed (Se4). In the error processing, the game is controlled to an error state in which progress of the game is disabled. Also, an error command capable of specifying the error code (E1) prepared in a predetermined register is transmitted to the sub-controller 91, and the error code (E1) is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c and can be referred to in other processes. set as a valid error flag. Also, it controls to display the error code (E1) on the game auxiliary display 12 . After that, the error state is controlled until it is specified that the condition for canceling the error state according to the error code (E1) prepared in the predetermined register is satisfied. When the error code (E1) is set in the register and the error state is entered, the system waits until the finalized data of the full tank sensor 35a becomes OFF. , an error command (cancel) for canceling the error state is transmitted to the sub-controller 91, the error process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step Se5.

When it is determined in step Se3 that the hopper tank 34a is not full, and when the error processing in step Se4 is finished, the value of the replay medal counter set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is changed to a predetermined value. Read into the register (Se5). In the replay medal counter, a value corresponding to the result of the previous game is set by the game end setting processing in the previous main processing, and the replay is granted when the replay combination wins in the previous game. is set to a value (e.g., 3) corresponding to the prescribed number of bets required to play the game, while if no replay was granted in the previous game, 0 is set. is set.

Thereafter, the replay medal counter in the RAM 41c is cleared (Se6), and it is determined whether or not the value of the replay medal counter read in step Se5 is greater than 0, that is, whether or not replay is granted. (Se7) If a replay is given, a medal insertion execution process is performed (Se8). In the medal insertion execution process, the value of the medal counter for replay is set as the bet number, and the 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 are set to the ON state (lighting state) to set the prescribed number of bets (3 in this embodiment). is set. Also, it transmits to the sub-controller 91 a number-of-throws-in command capable of specifying the number of medals used for setting the number of bets.

When it is determined that the value of the replay medal counter is 0 in step Se7, that is, when it is determined that replay is not awarded, and after medal insertion execution processing is performed due to replay being awarded in step Se8. , performs medal maintenance permission setting processing (Se9). In the medal maintenance permission setting process, the credit value set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is referred to, and if the credit value does not reach the maximum value (50 in this embodiment), the medal insertion unit 4 A medal maintenance permission flag indicating that the insertion of medals is permitted is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c.

After the medal maintenance permission setting process is performed in the step of Se9, the process of waiting for one interruption is performed (Se10). By performing the one-interrupt wait process, the timer interrupt process (main) is performed and the detection state of various switches, the lighting state of LEDs, various timers, etc. are updated, and the detection of these various switches After the state is updated, subsequent processing (for example, medal insertion/payout error check processing, medal insertion signal processing, operation input acceptance processing, which will be described later) can be performed.

After the one-time interrupt waiting process is performed in the step of Se10 and the timer interrupt is performed once, the same input/disbursement error check process as in the step of Sb32 of the main process described above is performed (Se11). Then, based on whether an error execution flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, it is determined whether or not error processing has been executed in the error check processing (Se12).

If it is determined in step Se12 that error processing has been executed in the error check processing, the process returns to step Se10, and the processing of steps Se10 to Se12 is performed again. After that, each process of steps Se10 to Se12 is performed in a state where no abnormality is detected in the transition of the medal payout signal or the transition of the medal insertion signal, and in the state where the error execution flag is not set, the process of step Se12 is performed. Processing will be performed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the step of Se12 that the error execution flag is not set, medal insertion signal processing is performed (Se13). In the medal insertion signal processing, the state of medal insertion is determined based on the transition of the medal insertion signal. Then, when normal insertion of medals is detected, medals are accepted for setting the number of bets and credits, and the medal insertion signal processing is terminated. On the other hand, when an abnormal insertion of medals is detected, an error code (E5) is prepared and error processing is performed. After that, the error state is canceled and the error processing is terminated, thereby ending the medal insertion signal processing.

After the medal insertion signal processing is performed in step Se13, various switch operations are validated, and by operating a switch whose operation is validated, an operation input acceptance process is performed to accept an operation by the switch. (Se14).

In the operation input reception process, when medals are not passing based on the transition of the medal insertion signal, the total value of the credit set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c and the already set bet amount (set bet amount) is calculated. is equal to or greater than the value (3) required to set the number of bets of 3. When it is determined that the sum of the credits and the set number of bets is equal to or greater than the value (3) required to set the number of bets of 3, the edge data of the MAXBET switch 6 is referred to, and the ON edge Determines whether data is set. Then, when it is determined that the ON edge data is set, the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is effectively accepted, the number of medals is set as the bet amount so that the bet amount is 3, and the amount set in the bet amount is set. The number of medals is subtracted from the credit. When it is determined that the ON edge data is not set, the ON state data is set in the output buffer of the BET switch enable LED 21 to control the BET switch enable LED 21 to the ON state (lighting state). On the other hand, the total value of the credit set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c and the already set bet amount (set bet amount) is not equal to or greater than the value (3) required to set the bet amount of 3 cards. When it is determined that the ON edge data of the MAXBET switch 6 is set, neither the process of determining whether the ON edge data of the MAXBET switch 6 is set nor the process of controlling the BET switch valid LED 21 to the ON state is performed. When it is determined that the sum of the credits and the already set bet amount (set bet amount) is not equal to or greater than the value (3) required for setting the bet amount of 3 cards, the BET switch valid LED 21 remain off. As a result, in a situation where the remaining number of credits is sufficient to set the bet number of 3 coins, the player or the like operates the MAXBET switch 6 to set the bet number of 3 coins (first bet number). On the other hand, if the remaining amount of credits is insufficient to set the bet number of 3, the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is not effectively accepted, and only the number of bets of 2 (second bet number) can be set. Even if the MAXBET switch 6 is operated, the number of two bets is not set, so the game can be prevented from being played with the second number of bets as much as possible.

In addition, in the operation input reception process, when the medal is not passing based on the transition of the medal insertion signal, if the number of bets set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is the specified number (2 or 3), the start Acceptance of operation by the switch 7 is validated. Further, when medals are not passing based on the transition of the medal insertion signal, acceptance of operations by the adjustment switch 10 and the setting key switch 37 is validated.

In the operation input acceptance process, when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected while the operation of the start switch 7 is valid, a start flag indicating that the start switch 7 has been operated is set in a predetermined register. After that, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned off to switch the medal flow path to the medal payout port 9 side. Further, when the operation of the setting key switch 37 is detected while the operation of the setting key switch 37 is valid, the setting value display process for displaying the setting value on the setting value display 24 is performed. Further, when the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected while the operation of the settlement switch 10 is valid, the settlement processing of returning the medals stored in the credit to the player is performed. After performing a process corresponding to the switch or the like whose operation has been detected, the operation input acceptance process is terminated.

After performing the operation input acceptance process in step Se14, it is determined whether or not a valid operation of the start switch 7 has been detected based on the start flag (Se15). If it is determined that the start flag is not set in the predetermined register and the valid operation of the start switch 7 is not detected, the process proceeds to step Se16, and LED display processing for controlling the lighting state of the start valid LED 18 is performed. .

In the LED display process, when the operation of the start switch 7 is enabled by the operation input acceptance process of step Se14, and the operation of any switch other than the reset switch 23 is not detected, the start enable LED 18 is turned on. (lighting state) and the operation of the start switch 7 is set to be effective, and if the operation of any switch other than the reset switch 23 is detected, or if the operation of the start switch 7 is set to be effective. If not, the start valid LED 18 is controlled to be in the OFF state (extinguished state), and whether the operation by the start switch 7 is valid or invalid is informed by the lighting state of the start valid LED 18 .

In the step of Se15, when it is determined that a start flag is set in a predetermined register and a valid operation of the start switch 7 is detected, a random number for internal lottery is obtained from the random number circuit 42 and stored in the RAM 41c. A predetermined area is set (Se17). After that, the medal insertion state data that can specify the set number of bets is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Se18), the start enable LED 18 is set to the OFF state (extinction state) (Se19), and the medal maintenance permission flag is set. It clears from a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Se20), controls to clear the display of the number of payouts on the game auxiliary display 12 (Se21), terminates the game start waiting process, and returns to the main process. Thereafter, in the main process, an internal lottery is performed using the random number value obtained in step Se17, and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are started to rotate in response to detection of the operation of the start switch 7. Then, one game will be started.

Thus, in the game start waiting process included in the game program, it is possible to call the medal insertion signal processing included in the game program. After the one-time interrupt waiting process for waiting until one is performed, the medal insertion signal process is called. As will be described later, in timer interrupt processing (main), port input processing for updating input data of sensors including inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is performed, and game start waiting processing waits for one interrupt. By calling the medal insertion signal processing after performing the processing 1, the processing based on the latest input data updated by the timer interrupt processing (main) is executed in the medal sensor processing called by the medal insertion signal processing. It is possible to do it.

In addition, in the operation input acceptance process performed in the game start waiting process, the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is effectively accepted when the number of bets already set and credits can be added to set the number of bets of three. ing. As a result, when the remaining amount of credits is sufficient to set the number of bets of 3, the player or the like operates the MAXBET switch 6 to set the number of bets of 3 (first number of bets). On the other hand, when the credit balance is insufficient to set the bet number of 3, the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is not effectively accepted, and only the bet number of 2 (second bet number) can be set. Even if the MAXBET switch 6 is operated, two bets are not set.

In addition, in the operation input reception process performed in the game start waiting process, when the medal is not passing based on the transition of the medal insertion signal, the bet number set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is the specified number (2 or 3). In some cases, the reception of the operation by the start switch 7 is enabled, and when the number of bets of 3 is set and when the number of bets of 2 is set, the start switch is activated. By operating the switch 7, the game can be started.

[Medal insertion signal processing]
Next, the control contents of the medal insertion signal process called from the game start waiting process by the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing the control contents of medal insertion signal processing performed by the main control section 41. As shown in FIG. The medal insertion signal process is included in the game program, and is a subroutine called in the game start waiting process included in the game program.

As shown in FIG. 20, in the medal insertion signal processing, first, in the medal maintenance permission setting processing of the game start waiting processing, a medal maintenance permission flag indicating permission to insert medals from the medal insertion unit 4 is set. (Sg1). Then, if the medal maintenance permission flag is not set, the medal insertion signal processing is ended, and the game start waiting processing of the calling source is returned to. On the other hand, if the medal maintenance permission flag is set, reference is made to medal insertion signal state transition data set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sg2). The medal insertion signal state transition data is data capable of specifying the state transition of detection signals of the insertion medal sensors 31a to 31c (hereinafter sometimes referred to as medal insertion signals), and medal sensor check included in the non-game program. By the processing, it is updated at a predetermined timing based on the input data of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c and set in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c.

Then, based on the medal insertion signal state transition data referred to in step Sg2, the detection range A (see FIGS. 4 and 5) of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c in the medal selector 29 is changed from the inserted medal section 4. It is determined whether or not medals are passing (Sg3). When it is determined that the medals are not passing through the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, the passage switching solenoid 30 is controlled to the ON state (Sg4), and the medals inserted from the medal inserting section 4 are transferred to the medal selector. A hopper provided inside the housing 1a with a flow path for medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 so as to flow down the medal inflow flow path 29a and the medal reception flow path 29b in the 29 and be guided to the hopper tank 34a. It is controlled to switch to the tank 34a side. After that, the medal insertion signal ignoring timer is cleared (Sg6).

Here, when the medal insertion signal ignoring timer sets the flow path switching solenoid 30 to the OFF state, at least the output of the control signal for turning the flow path switching solenoid 30 to the OFF state is set. 30 operates to measure the elapse of the switching time until the flow path of the medal inserted from the medal insertion part 4 is actually switched to the medal payout port 9 side, and during the timing of the switching time, medals are processed in a predetermined process. A timer for controlling to ignore the input signal. When the output of the control signal of the flow path switching solenoid 30 is set in order to switch the flow path of the medals, the medal insertion signal ignoring timer is set to output the control signal of the flow path switching solenoid 30 at least. A predetermined time (504 milliseconds in this embodiment) is set until the medal flow path is switched to . After that, the medal insertion signal ignoring timer is decremented and updated by the counter update processing of the timer interrupt processing, and when it becomes 0, it can be specified that the switching time has passed.

When it is determined that medals are passing through the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c in step Sg3, and after clearing the medal insertion signal ignoring timer in step Sg6, the above-mentioned second evacuation command is used. Then, among the registers provided in the main control unit 41, the value of the flag register in which the calculation result is stored is stored in the game stack area of the game RAM area in a predetermined order and saved (Sg7). is prohibited (Sg8), and the aforementioned CALL command is used to call the medal sensor processing included in the non-game program (Sg9).

In medal sensor processing, first, in the same way as in the aforementioned RT information output processing, using the aforementioned LD instruction, the current stack pointer is extracted from the game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP used by the calling game program. The value of the address indicated by SP is read out, stored in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area, and saved. After that, using the LD instruction, the value stored as the address indicated by the stack pointer SP at the end of the previous non-game program is read from a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area and set as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP. Thus, the stack pointer SP is set for the non-game program. Then, using the above-described first save instruction, the values of all the registers (accumulator registers, flag registers, general-purpose registers, index registers, interrupt registers, refresh registers, program counters, etc.) provided in the main control unit 41 including the flag registers are saved in a predetermined order in the non-game stack area of the non-game RAM area specified by the stack pointer SP. It should be noted that when the stack pointer SP is changed from the one for the game program to the one for the non-game program as the medal sensor processing included in the non-game program is called from the game program, the LD instruction is used to set the flag register is changed, the state of the flag register may change before and after the LD instruction is executed. That is, when the medal sensor processing is called from the game program, the state of the register that is saved after the stack pointer SP for the non-game program is set by the medal sensor processing is the state of the register that is saved when the game program calls the medal sensor processing. may differ from the state of the register at that time.

After that, it is determined whether or not the medal insertion signal state transition data is normal. When the medal insertion signal state transition data is normal, the medal passing state reference data (normal passage) indicating that the medal has normally passed through the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c or the inserted medal Medal passing state reference data (medal detection) indicating that it has detected that the sensors 31a to 31c have begun to pass through the detection range A, and the passing state of the medal in the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is the previous determination. Medal passing state reference data (no change) indicating no change from time to time is set in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c. After that, the medal insertion signal state transition data is updated based on the input data of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c. On the other hand, when there is an abnormality in the medal insertion signal state transition data, medal-related error data capable of specifying an error code (E5) indicating that an abnormality regarding the medal insertion signal has been detected is stored in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area. Perform processing such as setting.

Then, in the same manner as in the RT information output process described above, using the first return instruction described above, the values of the registers that were saved when the medal sensor process was started are sequentially read out from the non-game stack area, and the medal sensor Restore all registers to the state they were in when the process started. After that, using the LD instruction described above, the value of the stack pointer SP saved in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area when the medal sensor process is started is read, and set as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP, so that the medal The stack pointer SP is returned to the state when the sensor processing was started, and the winning information output processing is terminated. In addition, in order to end the medal sensor processing included in the non-game program and return to the game program, after restoring the values of all the registers that were saved at the start of the medal sensor processing, the stack pointer SP is moved. When changing from a non-game program to a game program, the second zero flag TZ of the flag register is changed by using the LD instruction, and the state of the flag register changes before and after the execution of the LD instruction. Subject to change. In other words, the state of the register when the medal sensor process ends may be different from the state of the register saved when the medal sensor process is started.

After the medal sensor processing is performed in step Sg9, the timer interrupt is enabled (Sg10), and the value of the register saved in step Sg7 is saved using the second return command. By sequentially reading from the game stack area in the reverse order and setting them in the flag register, the flag register is restored to the state before the winning information output process (Sg11). After medal sensor processing is performed by performing save processing and restore processing of all registers inside medal sensor processing in step Sg9, and save processing and restore processing of flag registers in steps Sg7 and Sg11. , the states of all the registers provided in the main control unit 41 are completely restored to the states before the processing was performed.

Thereafter, referring to a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area, medal-related error data is read into a predetermined register (Sg12), and whether or not an error code (E5) is set is determined by medal sensor processing (medal sensor check processing). Determine (Sg13). Then, when an error code (E5) is set, that is, when the medal-related error data is read into a predetermined register and the error code (E5) is prepared in a predetermined register, error processing is performed. (Sg14), control to an error state that disables the progress of the game.

In the error processing, the game is controlled to an error state in which progress of the game is disabled. Also, an error command capable of specifying the error code (E5) prepared in a predetermined register is transmitted to the sub-controller 91, and the error code (E5) is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c and can be referred to in other processes. set as a valid error flag. Also, it controls to display the error code (E5) on the game auxiliary display 12 . After that, the error state is controlled until it is specified that the condition for canceling the error state according to the error code (E5) prepared in the predetermined register is established. When an error code (E5) is prepared in a predetermined register and the error state is shifted to, the detection state of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c must be OFF and the reset/setting switch must be in the OFF state as conditions for canceling the error state. Until it is established that 38 or the reset switch 23 is in the ON state, it waits without performing control to progress the game. Then, when the cancellation condition is established, an error command (cancel) for canceling the error state is transmitted to the sub-controller 91, the error processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the medal insertion signal processing.

When it is determined in step Sg13 that the error code (E5) is not set as the medal-related error data, and after the error processing in step Sg14 is completed, it is set in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area of RAM 41c. By referring to the medal passing state reference data (Sg15), the content of the medal passing state reference data is determined (Sg16, Sg17).

In the step of Sg16, when it is determined that the medal passing state reference data (no change) is set, the medal insertion signal processing is terminated and the game start waiting processing is returned to. In step Sg17, when it is determined that the medal passing state reference data (medal detection) is set, the process proceeds to step Sg18, and in step Sg17, the medal passing state reference data (normal passage) is set. If it is determined that the medal passing state reference data (medal detection) is not set, the process proceeds to step Sg21.

If it is determined in the step of Sg17 that the medal passing state reference data (medal passing) is set, an insertion state determination process is performed (Sg18). In the input status determination process, a credit counter that counts the current number of credits set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is referred to, and the value of the credit counter is the maximum credit value of the slot machine 1 (50 in this embodiment). It is determined whether or not the situation is one less, that is, the situation is that the medal to be received next is the final medal that can be added to the credit. Then, a final reception flag capable of specifying whether or not the medal to be received next is the final medal that can be added to the credit is set in a predetermined register, and the input status determination process is terminated.

After performing the input status determination process in step Sg18, if it is determined that the medal to be received next is the final medal that can be added to the credit based on the final reception flag set in the predetermined register, , the medal blocker is turned off (Sg20), and the passage switching solenoid 30 is set to the OFF state, so that the passage of medals inserted from the medal inserting section 4 is diverted from the hopper tank 34a side to the medal payout port 9 side. By switching, the medal inserted into the medal inserting section 4 after the medal detected by the inserted medal sensor 31c is controlled to be returned from the medal payout port 9 via the medal return passage 29c. In the medal blocker OFF process, after the passage switching solenoid 30 is set to the OFF state, the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is detected by referring to the medal insertion signal state transition data set in the game RAM area. , and if the medal is passing through the detection range A, a predetermined value (in this embodiment, a value corresponding to 504 ms ) is set to start timing of a predetermined time by a medal insertion signal ignoring timer. As a result, the sensor error reference data (inserted medal sensor) is set by judging that the medal insertion signal is abnormal regardless of the state of the medal insertion signal in the sensor monitoring processing described later for a predetermined period of time after the medal blocker OFF processing is completed. It is designed so that it will not be done.

After the medal blocker-off processing is performed in step Sg20, the medal insertion signal processing is ended and the game start waiting processing is returned to. On the other hand, when it is determined that the medal to be received next is not the final medal that can be added to the credit based on the final reception flag, the medal insertion signal processing is terminated without executing the medal blocker off processing, and the game start waiting processing is performed. back to

If it is determined in step Sg17 that the medal passage state reference data (normal passage) is set and the medal passage state reference data (normal passage) is not set, then a predetermined area of the port input buffer is referred to. , acquires the confirmed data of the inserted medal sensor 31b (Sg21), and determines whether or not the confirmed data is ON (Sg22). When it is determined that the finalized data of the inserted medal sensor 31b is ON, the input data of the inserted medal sensor 31c is obtained by referring to the predetermined area of the port input buffer (Sg23), and the input data is turned OFF. It is determined whether or not it is in the state (Sg24).

If it is determined in step Sg19 that the confirmed data of the inserted medal sensor 31b is not in the ON state, and if the confirmed data of the inserted medal sensor 31b is in the ON state, and if the input data of the inserted medal sensor 31b is not in the ON state in step Sg20. If it is determined that the medal is not in the OFF state, that is, if medals are passing through the medal receiving flow path 29b or if there are no medals in the medal receiving flow path 29b, the medal insertion signal processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sg22 that the finalized data of the inserted medal sensor 31b is in the ON state, and if it is determined in step Sg24 that the input data of the inserted medal sensor 31b is in the OFF state, that is, the medal receiving channel At 29b, when the inserted medal sensor 31c finishes passing the medal detection position where the medal can be detected, the medal insertion process is performed (Sg25).

In the medal insertion process, the currently set bet number stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is referenced to determine whether or not the prescribed number of bets has been set. If the prescribed number of bets has not been set, the current bet number is incremented by 1, and if the prescribed number of bets has already been set, the credit counter is incremented by 1.

After performing medal insertion processing in step Sg25, medal maintenance permission setting processing is performed (Sg26). , a medal maintenance permission flag indicating permission to insert medals from the medal insertion unit 4 is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c.

After the medal care permission setting process is performed in step Sg26, if the medal care permission flag is not set, a predetermined value (corresponding to 504 milliseconds in this embodiment) set in advance for the medal insertion signal ignoring timer is set. value) is set, and the medal insertion signal ignoring timer is started to count a predetermined time (Sg28), then the medal insertion signal processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the medal maintenance permission flag is set, the medal insertion signal processing is terminated without setting the medal insertion signal ignoring timer. Note that the medal insertion signal ignoring timer is set to a predetermined value (in this embodiment, a value corresponding to 504 milliseconds) in step Sg28. In this embodiment, it becomes 0 when 4.1 seconds) have elapsed, and it is possible to determine whether or not the predetermined time has elapsed based on whether or not the medal insertion signal ignoring timer is 0 or not. ing.

In this way, the medal insertion signal processing included in the game program can call the medal sensor processing included in the non-game program. When returning from medal sensor processing to medal insertion signal processing, the value of the flag register is restored to the value that was saved in the game stack area of RAM 41c.

In addition, in the medal insertion signal processing included in the game program, when calling the medal sensor processing included in the non-game program, the timer interrupt is set to be disabled, the medal sensor processing is performed, and then the medal sensor processing is performed. When returning to medal insertion signal processing, timer interruption is set to be permitted, thereby prohibiting timer interruption during execution of medal sensor processing included in the non-game program. .

In addition, in the medal insertion signal processing included in the game program, when calling the medal sensor processing included in the non-game program, after saving the value of the flag register, the timer interrupt is set to disabled and the medal sensor is activated. processing.

In addition, in the medal insertion signal processing included in the game program, after the medal sensor processing included in the non-game program is performed with the timer interrupt set to be prohibited, when returning from the medal sensor processing to the medal insertion signal processing, After enabling the timer interrupt, the value of the flag register is restored to the value saved in the game stack area of the RAM 41c.

The medal insertion signal process is a process called by the game start waiting process. As described above, the game start waiting process waits until the timer interrupt process (main) is performed once. , the medal insertion signal processing is called. In addition, in the medal insertion signal processing, after the medal insertion signal processing is started and predetermined processing is performed, the timer interrupt is set to be prohibited, and the medal sensor processing included in the non-game program is called and performed. ing. Thus, in the game machine start waiting process and the medal insertion signal process, after the game start waiting process performs the waiting process for one interruption, the medal insertion signal process is called, and the medal sensor processing is performed in the medal insertion signal process. A state in which the timer interrupt processing (main) is performed by at least one interrupt waiting processing in the game start waiting processing, and the input data of the sensors is updated by the port input processing included in the timer interrupt processing (main). , medal sensor processing is performed.

[Medal sensor processing and medal sensor check processing]
The contents of control of medal sensor processing and medal sensor check processing performed by the main control unit 41 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 23. FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing the control contents of medal sensor processing performed by the main control section 41. As shown in FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing the control details of medal sensor check processing performed by the main control section 41. As shown in FIG. FIG. 23 is a timing chart for explaining the state transition of the medal-insertion signal for determining normal passage of medals in the medal-insertion signal processing and the medal sensor check processing. The medal sensor process is included in the non-game program, and is a subroutine called in the medal insertion signal process included in the game program. The medal sensor check process is included in the non-game program, and is a subroutine called in the medal sensor process included in the non-game program.

As shown in FIG. 21, in the medal sensor process, first, using the aforementioned LD instruction, the value of the address indicated by the stack pointer SP used by the calling game program is stored in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area. and retreat (Sh1). After that, using the LD instruction described above, by setting a predetermined value of the non-game stack area (the value stored when the previous non-game program ended) as the value of the stack pointer SP, the stack pointer SP is set to the non-game Set for the program (Sh2). Then, using the above-described first save instruction, the values of all the registers provided in the main control unit 41 are saved by storing them in a predetermined order in the non-game stack area (Sh3). Thereafter, medal sensor check processing included in the non-game program is performed (Sh4).

After performing medal sensor check processing in step Sh4, using the above-mentioned first return instruction, the value of the register saved in step Sh3 is sequentially read out from the non-game stack area, and winning information output processing is executed. After returning all registers to the state at the time of start (Sh5), using the LD instruction, the value of the stack pointer SP that was stored and saved in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area in the step of Sh1 is By setting the stack pointer SP, the stack pointer SP is returned to the state when the medal sensor processing was started (Sh6), the medal sensor processing is terminated, and the process returns to the medal insertion signal processing of the caller.

As shown in FIG. 22, in the medal sensor check process, first, medal passing state reference data and medal related error reference data set in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c are cleared (Si1, Si2). The medal passing state reference data is data that can identify the passing state of medals in the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c as a processing result of the medal sensor check processing. Based on the input data of 31c, it is determined that the medals have normally passed through the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, or the medals have started to pass through the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c. It is possible to specify that it is determined that the detection state of the medals by the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c has not changed since the previous determination. The initial value of the medal passing state reference data is the medal passing state reference data (no change) indicating that the medal detection state has not changed since the previous determination. Also, in the medal-related error reference data, as a processing result of the medal sensor check processing, an abnormality (error code E5) related to the detection signals of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c (hereinafter sometimes referred to as medal insertion signals) was detected. It is data that can specify the effect. Further, the medal passing state reference data and the medal related error reference data are set in the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c, so that they can be referenced and updated by the non-game program, but can only be referenced by the game program. be.

After clearing the medal passing state reference data and the medal related error reference data in steps Si1 and Si2, the current data of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c are obtained by referring to a predetermined area of the port input buffer (Si3), and the medal is inserted. A predetermined area of the ROM 41b is referred to acquire correct/wrong data for determining whether or not the transition of the signal state is normal (Si4), and a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is referred to and the previous medal center check process is performed. (Si5).

Then, the medal insertion signal state transition data obtained in step Si5 and the correct/incorrect data obtained in step Si4 are compared to determine whether or not the medal insertion signal state transition data is correct (Si6).

When it is determined that the medal insertion signal state transition data is correct in step Si6, the medal insertion signal state transition data is updated based on the current data of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c acquired in step Si3, thereby creating new data. Create medal insertion signal state transition data and store it in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c (Si7).

Then, referring to the medal passage time timer set in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c (Si8), based on the medal insertion signal state transition data updated in step Si7, the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c It is determined whether or not the current and previous detection states are OFF (Si9, Si10). The medal passing time timer is a timer that counts the duration of the period during which it is determined that the medals are passing through the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c. As will be described later, based on the medal insertion signal state transition data, timing is started when the medal insertion signal is turned ON, and then updated by timer interrupt processing (main). .

In steps Si9 and Si10, if it is determined that the current detection state of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is the OFF state and the previous detection state is not the OFF state, that is, if the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is determined. If there is a possibility that the detection state of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c has changed from the ON state to the OFF state due to the medals that have been in the detection range, the medal passage time referred to in step Si8 The timer determines whether or not it is less than the shortest value (10.08 milliseconds in this embodiment) of the normal passage time range required for medals to pass normally through the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c. (Si11). The normal passing time range includes the actual measurement value of the time required for the medal to pass through the detection range of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, the shape of the medal receiving channel 29b of the medal selector 29, and the insertion in the medal receiving channel 29b. It is predetermined based on the arrangement of the medal sensors 31a-31c, the characteristics of the inserted medal sensors 31a-31c, etc. (in this embodiment, it is in the range of 10.08 milliseconds to 99.68 milliseconds).

Then, when it is determined in step Si11 that the medal passing time timer is not less than the shortest value of the normal passing time range, the stored medal insertion signal state transition data is cleared in step Si7 (Si12), and the medal passing time timer (Si13), medal passage state reference data (normal passage) indicating that medals have normally passed through the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is set in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c. to end the medal sensor check process. On the other hand, if the medal passing time timer is not less than the shortest value of the normal passing time range, the process proceeds to step Si19, which will be described later.

If it is determined in steps Si9 and Si10 that the current and previous detection states of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c are both OFF, that is, the medals have not passed through the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, If the detection state of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c has not changed since the previous determination, the state in which the medal passing state reference data has been initialized in step Si1, that is, the medal passing state reference data (no change). The medal sensor check process is terminated while maintaining the state set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c.

If it is determined in step Si9 that the current detection state of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is not the OFF state, that is, the medals are passing through the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, and the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c are detected. If it is ON, it is determined whether or not the medal passing time timer referred to in step Si8 has exceeded the maximum value of the normal passing time range (99.68 milliseconds in this embodiment) (Si15).

When it is determined in step Si15 that the medal passing time timer does not exceed the maximum value of the normal passing time range, it is determined whether or not the medal passing time timer is in operation (Si16). When the medal passage time timer is not in operation, that is, when a medal newly enters the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, the detection state of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c changes from the OFF state to the ON state. When the medal passing time timer has not yet started timing, the medal passing time timer is set to 0 and started (Si17), and the medals are detected by the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c. Medal passing state reference data (medal detection) indicating that it has been detected that the detection range A has started to be passed is set in a predetermined area of the non-game area of the RAM 41c, and the medal sensor check process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Si15 that the medal passing time timer has exceeded the maximum value of the normal passing time range, the process proceeds to step Si19, which will be described later. Further, when it is determined in step Si16 that the medal passing time timer is in operation, that is, the medals have passed through the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, and the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c continue to be ON. If the medal passing state reference data has been initialized in step Si1, that is, the state in which the medal passing state reference data (no change) is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, the medal Terminate the sensor check process. It should be noted that the medal passage time timer is set to 0 in step Si17 and started, and then incremented at predetermined time intervals by timer interrupt processing. , that is, the elapsed time from when it is determined that the medal insertion signal state transition is correct and that the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c are in the ON state is measured by the medal passage time timer. .

If it is determined that the medal insertion signal state transition data is not correct in step Si6, if it is determined that the medal passing time timer is less than the minimum value of the normal passing time range in step Si11, the medal passing time timer is activated in step Si15. exceeds the maximum value of the normal passage time range, medal-related error reference data (E5) indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the medal insertion signal is set in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c. (Si19), the medal insertion signal state transition data stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in step Si7 is cleared (Si20), the medal passage time timer is cleared to stop timing (Si21), and medal sensor check processing is performed. and return to medal sensor processing. If the medal-related error reference data (E5) is set in step Si19 and the process returns to the medal sensor check process, then the medal-related error is referenced in the medal insertion signal process of the game start waiting process included in the game program. By referring to the data (E5), the error state is controlled.

As shown in FIG. 23, in the determination of whether or not the medal insertion signal state transition is correct in step Si6 of the medal sensor check processing included in the non-game program, inserted medal sensors 1 to 3 (inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c) When it is detected that medals have started to pass through the detection range of the inserted medal sensors 1 to 3, the inserted medal sensor 1 (inserted medal sensor 31a) changes from the OFF state to the ON state, and then the inserted medals are detected. The transition of the sensor 2 (inserted medal sensor 31b) from the OFF state to the ON state and then the inserted medal sensor 3 (inserted medal sensor 31b) from the OFF state to the ON state is specified based on the medal insertion signal transition state data. In this case, it is determined that the medal insertion signal state transition is correct.

Further, when it is detected by the inserted medal sensors 1 to 3 that a medal has passed through the detection range of the inserted medal sensors 1 to 3, the inserted medal sensor 1 changes from the ON state to the OFF state. When the transition from the ON state to the OFF state of the sensor 2 and then from the ON state to the OFF state of the inserted medal sensor 3 is specified based on the medal insertion signal transition state data, and from the ON state of the inserted medal sensor 1 After entering the OFF state, the inserted medal sensor 3 changes from the ON state to the OFF state, and thereafter, when the transition from the ON state to the OFF state of the inserted medal sensor 2 is specified based on the medal insertion signal transition state data. , the medal insertion signal state transition is determined to be correct.

Then, in the medal sensor check process, it is determined that the medal insertion signal transition state data is correct, and that one of the inserted medal sensors 1 to 3 is in the ON state, so that the medal passage state reference data ( detection) is set. That is, when the inserted medal sensor 1 among the inserted medal sensors 1 to 3 first changes from the OFF state to the ON state, it is determined that the inserted medal signal transition state data is correct, so the inserted medal signal transition state data is correct. And when the inserted medal sensor 1 is turned ON, the medal passing state reference data (detection) is set.

Further, when it is determined that the medal insertion signal transition state data is correct and all of the inserted medal sensors 1 to 3 are in the ON state, the medal passage state reference data (normal passage) is set. It will happen. That is, when the inserted medal sensor 2 among the inserted medal sensors 1 to 3 is the last to change from the ON state to the OFF state, and when the inserted medal sensor 3 is the last to change from the ON state to the OFF state, the medal insertion signal transitions. Since it is determined that the state data is correct, the medal insertion signal transition state data is determined to be correct, and when the inserted medal sensors 2 and 3 are in the OFF state, the medal passage state reference data (normal passage) is changed. to be set.

In the medal insertion signal processing included in the game program, after it is determined that the medal passage state reference data (normal passage) is set in steps Sd16 and Sd17, the inserted medal sensors 1 to 3 are input in steps Sd21 to Sd24. When it is specified that the data has changed from the ON state to the OFF state, the process proceeds to the subsequent medal insertion process and the like. That is, when the medal passing state reference data (normal passage) is set by the medal sensor check process, normal medals are detected by detecting the falling of the inserted medal sensor 2 or 3 from the ON state to the OFF state. Input is detected.

[Ball output control process]
The control contents of the ball output control process performed by the main control section 41 will be described with reference to FIG. 24 . FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing the control contents of the ball output control process performed by the main control section 41. As shown in FIG. The ball output control process is included in the game program and is a subroutine called in the main process included in the game program.

As shown in FIG. 24, in the ball output control process, first, the output buffer for the signal during the advantageous interval set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is referred to, and the output buffer value for the signal during the advantageous interval is set to the initial value (OFF 0) indicating the state is determined (Sj1). If it is determined in step Sj1 that the output buffer value of the signal during the advantageous interval is the initial value (0) and the signal is not output during the advantageous interval, that is, the state is not controlled in the advantageous interval. , the number of bets in the game set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is acquired in the A register (Sj2), and it is determined whether or not the number of bets in the game is 3 (Sj3).

If it is determined in step Sj3 that the number of bets in the game is three, a game state determination process for determining the game state is performed (Sj4), and after obtaining the currently controlled game state, It is determined whether or not the game state being controlled is a special state (BB, CB) (Sj5). Then, if it is determined that it is not in the special state (BB, CB), the general role winning number that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c and can specify the winning result of the general role in the internal lottery is acquired in the A register ( Sj6), it is determined whether or not the general combination winning number is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (Sj7), and it is determined whether or not the advantageous section transition combination for shifting the game section to the advantageous section has been won by internal lottery.

Then, in step Sj7, when it is determined that the general combination winning number is equal to or greater than a predetermined value and that the advantageous section transition combination has been won, the data number for setting when winning the advantageous section is set in the A register (Sj8). , continuous data processing is performed (Sj9). By setting the data number for setting when winning the advantageous section in the A register and performing continuous data processing, processing such as setting an advantageous section flag indicating that control is being performed to the advantageous section in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is performed. It is designed to be Since the advantageous interval flag is set in step Sj9, the advantageous interval flag is referred to in the above-described main processing (Sb80), and a predetermined value (1 indicating ON state) is stored in the advantageous interval signal output buffer. After setting, the output of the signal during the advantageous section is started.

After performing continuous data processing in step Sj9, after performing advantageous interval transition-related processing for performing various settings related to the transition to advantageous interval (Sj10), ball output control processing is terminated and main processing is performed. back to

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sj3 that the number of bets in the game is 3 and an internal lottery is performed, and if it is determined in step Sj5 that the currently controlled gaming state is a special state (BB, CB), Sj7 If it is determined in the step 2 that the general combination winning number is less than the predetermined value and the advantageous section transition combination has not been won in the internal lottery, the processing related to the transition to the advantageous section in steps Sj8 to Sj10 is performed. First, the ball output control process is ended, and the process returns to the main process.

In step Sj1, the output buffer value of the signal during the advantageous interval is not the initial value (0, which is the OFF state), but a predetermined value (1, which indicates the ON state), and the signal is output during the advantageous interval, that is, the advantageous interval. is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c and counts the number of games in the advantageous interval, which is the number of games after the start of the advantageous interval. 1 is added (Sj11). The predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which the advantageous interval game number counter is set is included in the predetermined area initialized when it is determined that the advantageous interval end flag is set by the above-described main processing. The section game number counter is initialized and set to an initial value (0) at the end of the advantageous section.

After adding 1 to the advantageous section game number counter in step Sj11, the number of bets and game state determination processing are performed (Sj12), and the number of bets set in the game and the currently controlled game state are acquired. . Then, it is determined whether the number of bets set in the game is 2 or whether the currently controlled game state is a game state other than RT1 (Sj12).

If it is determined in step Sj12 that the number of bets set in the game is 2 or that the currently controlled game state is a game state other than RT1, the ball output control process is terminated and the process proceeds to the main process. return. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of bets set in the game is 2 or the currently controlled gaming state is not a gaming state other than RT1, that is, the number of bets set in the game is 3, In addition, when it is determined that the game state currently being controlled is RT1, 1 is added to the ED transition game number counter set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sj14).

The ED transition game number counter is performed in a predetermined state (the number of bets set in the game is 3 and the currently controlled gaming state is RT1) after the advantageous interval starts. A counter for counting the number of games played. The predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which the ED transition game number counter is set is included in the predetermined area that is initialized when it is determined that the advantageous section end flag is set by the above-described main processing, The ED transition game number counter is initialized and set to the initial value (0) at the end of the advantageous section, similarly to the above-described advantageous section game number counter. The ED transition game number counter is referred to in the AT state management process described later, and when the ED transition game number counter value reaches a specified value, navigation notification control is performed for the period until the advantageous section ends ED state. is to be migrated to

After adding 1 to the ED transition game number counter in step Sj14, freeze setting processing is performed (Sj15), and freeze control is performed to delay the progress of the game for a predetermined period based on the state of balls being played, the state of winning a minor combination, and the like. It is determined whether or not to perform the freeze control, and if it is determined to perform the freeze control, the setting for performing the freeze control is performed.

After the freeze setting process is performed in step Sj15, a predetermined area of the RAM 41c that stores the next ball payout state information set by the payout state processing described later and the payout state related processing in the AT state management processing is stored. The address is set in the HL register (Sj16), and the next-out ball state information stored in the address is acquired in the A register (Sj17). Then, the current ball-out state information indicating the ball-out state to be controlled in the game is updated to the next ball-out state information acquired in step Sj17 (Sj18), and the ball-out state to be controlled based on the current ball-out state information is updated. It is determined whether or not the player is in the ball-out state A or the ball-out state B in which navigation notification may be performed (Sj19). A value of 1 or more is assigned to the ball output status A and the ball output status B, and a value of 0 is assigned to the ball output status other than the ball output status A and the ball output status B. By judging whether or not the current ball-out state information is 1 or more, it is possible to determine whether or not the ball-out state to be controlled this time is the ball-out state A or the ball-out state B.

When it is determined in step Sj19 that the ball output state is the ball output state A or the ball output state B, the output buffer of the section display LED 19 is turned on to indicate that the game section is being controlled to be an advantageous section. After setting the status data (Sj20), the process of waiting for one interrupt is performed (Sj21). By setting the ON state data in the output buffer of the section display LED 19 and performing the one-interrupt wait process, the timer interrupt process is performed by the one-interrupt wait process, and the section is displayed by the LED dynamic display process of the timer interrupt process. The display LED 19 is controlled to be lit.

After performing the one-interrupt waiting process in step Sj21, the ball-out state information is acquired in the A register (Sj22), and after setting the initial value (1) of the external output signal number in the B register (Sj23), External output signal number correction processing is performed (Sj24). In the external output signal number correction process, the value of the B register is corrected to the external output signal number corresponding to the ball output state information set in the A register.

Thereafter, the corrected external output signal number set in the B register is set in the external output signal output buffer (Sj25). The external output signal number set in the external output signal output buffer is referred to when performing the external output signal processing in the above-described main processing (Sb25). An external output signal is output, and when the AT control is started, an AT signal indicating that the AT is being controlled is started to be output.

After setting the external output signal number in the external output signal output buffer in the step of Sj25, the ball-out status information is obtained again in the A register (Sj26), and the winning general winning number is obtained in the B register (Sj27). , navigation number identification processing is performed (Sj28). In the navigation number specifying process, a predetermined navigation number is specified according to the ball output state information and the general combination winning number (winning number).

After performing the navigation number specifying process in step Sj28, the navigation number specified by the navigation number specifying process is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sj29). If it is determined in step Sj19 that the ball output state is not the ball output state A or ball output state B, the process proceeds to step Sj29, where the value of the ball output state information, ie, 0, is stored as the navigation number. By setting 0 as the navigation number, the navigation notification is not performed and the navigation display is hidden. By setting 1 to 6 as the navigation numbers, the navigation display showing the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R corresponding to the navigation numbers is performed. The navigation number stored in step Sj29 is referred to in the game start command transmission processing (Sb22) in the main processing described above, and a push order command capable of specifying the navigation number is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. becomes.

After the navigation number is stored in the step of Sj29, ball output state processing is performed (Sj30). In the ball-out state processing, there is processing according to the current ball-out state specified based on the ball-out state information, processing to determine whether or not to shift the ball-out state based on the winning result of the internal lottery, etc. When it is determined that the ball state is to be shifted, processing for setting the next ball-out state information in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is performed.

In step Sj30, the payout state process is completed, so that the payout control process is completed and the process returns to the main process.

As described above, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment sets the value of the signal buffer during the advantageous period to the predetermined value (1) in the ball output control process (first process) that is called from the main process at the start of the game. If it is identified as an interval (Sj1), regardless of whether the number of bets is set to 3 or 2, the advantageous interval game number counter is updated by adding one game (Sj11). )do. Then, in the AT management process (second process) called from the main process at the end of the game, the value of the advantageous zone game number counter updated by the ball output control process in the game reaches the specified number of games (second specified number). It is determined whether or not the number of games has been reached, and if it is determined that the specified number of games has been reached, an advantageous section end flag is set. After that, in the main processing, by performing advantageous section data initialization processing based on the fact that the advantageous section end flag is set, the information regarding the advantageous section is initialized and the advantageous section is terminated.

The main control unit 41 updates the number-of-games counter for the advantageous interval when the number of bets of 3 is set or when the number of bets of 2 is set when the control is performed in the advantageous interval. Since the advantageous interval ends when the advantageous interval game number counter value reaches the specified number of games (second specified number), the predetermined game is played regardless of whether the number of bets of 3 is selected or the number of bets of 2 is selected. The number of games in the advantageous interval is limited so as not to be controlled in the advantageous interval for a long period of time equal to or greater than the number (in this embodiment, 1500 games). As a result, it is possible to prevent the gambling aspect of the slot machine 1 from becoming excessively high.

In the ball output control process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment determines whether or not the signal is being output during the advantageous interval based on whether the value of the signal buffer during the advantageous interval is the initial value. Determine whether or not it is in the interval. Then, when it is determined that it is in the advantageous interval, as the processing (Sj11 to Sj30) related to the advantageous interval in the ball output control processing, the processing for updating the advantageous interval game number counter, the state where the number of bets is 2, or the Processing related to navigation notification performed on the condition that it is a game state other than RT1 (for example, the number of ED transition games for specifying the game to transition to ED control in which navigation notification control is performed until the end of the advantageous section ON data (predetermined value : 1) processing to set, processing to specify the navigation number corresponding to the winning combination based on the navigation number based on the general combination winning number, and set it in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, currently controlled payout processing to perform various processing according to the state, etc.). As a result, it is possible to ensure that processing relating to the advantageous section is performed while the signal is being output during the advantageous section.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment, in the ball output control process called from the main process at the start of the game, when it is determined that the value of the advantageous interval signal buffer is not the predetermined value (1) and the advantageous interval is not ( Sj1), as the condition for starting the advantageous section, it is determined whether or not the winning of the advantageous section transition hand in the internal lottery is established (Sj6, Sj7), and it is determined that the condition for starting the advantageous section is established. If so, an advantageous interval flag indicating control to the advantageous interval is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sj9). In the subsequent main processing, it is determined whether or not the advantageous interval flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sb80). A predetermined value (data (1) indicating the ON state) is set in the signal buffer during the advantageous interval. After that, the LED dynamic display process is performed in the timer interrupt process, thereby outputting the signal during the advantageous section. This ensures that the processing (Sj8, Sj8) for shifting to the advantageous interval is performed in a state where the value of the advantageous interval signal buffer is not the predetermined value (1) and the advantageous interval signal is not being output. can.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment determines whether or not it is in the advantageous interval based on the value of the advantageous interval signal buffer in the ball output control process. This signal is output to a testing device that performs a performance test of the machine 1 . As a result, processing relating to the advantageous interval is performed in a state in which the advantageous interval signal used for the performance test is output, and processing to shift to the advantageous interval in a state in which the advantageous interval signal is not output is performed. can be guaranteed. Further, in the ball output control process, by determining whether or not the advantageous period is in effect based on the value of the advantageous period signal buffer, the There is no need to separately provide a flag, and the data capacity can be reduced.

When the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment determines that it is not an advantageous section based on the advantageous section signal buffer in the ball output control process (Sj1) and determines that the number of bets of 3 is set. In (Sj3), processing (Sj7, Sj8) for shifting to an advantageous interval is performed, and it is determined that the interval is not an advantageous interval based on the signal buffer during the advantageous interval (Sj1), but the number of bets of 3 is not set. When it is determined (Sj3), the processing for shifting to the advantageous section (Sj7, Sj8) is not performed, and the ball output control processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the main processing. As a result, in the ball output control process, when the number of bets of three (first number of bets) is not set, the process of shifting to the advantageous section is not performed. You can be prompted to play a game with a number (first bet number).

In the ball output control process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment determines that it is not an advantageous section based on the signal buffer during the advantageous section (Sj1) and that it is not controlled to the special state (BB1, BB2). If it is (Sj5), the processing (Sj7, Sj8) to shift to the advantageous section is performed, while it is determined that it is not the advantageous section (Sj1), but it is determined that it is controlled to the special state (BB1, BB2). In this case, the processing (Sj7, Sj8) for shifting to the advantageous section is not performed, and the ball output control processing is terminated to return to the main processing. As a result, in the ball output control process, when the game state is controlled to the special state (BB1, BB2), the process of shifting to the advantageous section is not performed, so that the special state (BB1, BB2) is given to the player or the like. BB2) can be urged to play the game.

In the ball output control process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment determines that it is not an advantageous section based on the signal buffer during the advantageous section (Sj1), and determines that the number of bets of 3 is set (Sj3). and when it is determined that the special state (BB1, BB2) is not controlled (Sj5), the process of shifting to the advantageous section (Sj7, Sj8) is performed, while it is determined that it is not the advantageous section (Sj1 ), when it is determined that the number of bets of 3 is not set, or when it is determined that the control is in a special state (BB1, BB2), the processing (Sj7, Sj8) to shift to the advantageous section is performed. The ball output control process is terminated without performing, and the process returns to the main process. As a result, in the ball output control process, when the number of bets of three (first number of bets) is not set, or when the gaming state is controlled to the special state (BB1, BB2), Since the transition processing is not performed, the player can be urged to play the game in a game state other than the special state (BB1, BB2) and with a bet number of three (first bet number).

In the ball output control process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment determines that the value of the signal buffer during the advantageous interval is a predetermined value (1) and that it is an advantageous interval (Sj1), and the number of bets of 3 is set. If it is determined (Sj13), the processing related to navigation notification (Sj14 to Sj30) is performed, while the value of the signal buffer during the advantageous section is a predetermined value (1) and it is determined that it is an advantageous section. However, (Sj1), if it is determined that the number of bets of 3 is not set (Sj13), the processing related to navigation notification (Sj14 to Sj30) is not performed, and the main control processing is terminated. It will return to processing. As a result, in the ball output control process, when the number of bets of 3 (the first number of bets) is not set, the processing related to the navigation notification is not performed. You can be prompted to play a game with a number (first bet number).

In the ball output control process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment determines that the value of the signal buffer during the advantageous interval is a predetermined value (1) and that it is an advantageous interval (Sj1), and the game state is BB1. When it is determined that RT1 is carried over (Sj13), the processing related to the navigation notification (Sj14 to Sj30) is performed, while the value of the signal buffer during the advantageous section is a predetermined value (1), and in the advantageous section Although it is determined that there is (Sj1), when it is determined that the game state is a game state other than RT1 (Sj13), the processing related to the navigation notification (Sj14 to Sj30) is not performed and the ball output control processing is performed. It terminates and returns to the main processing. As a result, in the ball output control process, when the game state is a game state other than RT1, the processing related to the navigation notification is not performed, so that the player or the like can be urged to play the game at RT1. can.

In the ball output control process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment determines that the value of the signal buffer during the advantageous interval is a predetermined value (1) and that it is an advantageous interval (Sj1), and the number of bets of 3 is set. When it is determined that the game state is RT1 in which the winning of BB1 is carried over (Sj13), the processing related to navigation notification (Sj14 to Sj30) is performed, while the value of the signal buffer during the advantageous section is When it is determined that the predetermined value (1) is in the advantageous section (Sj1), but it is determined that the number of bets of 3 is not set, or when it is determined that the game state is a game state other than RT1. , the process (Sj14 to Sj30) related to the navigation notification is not performed, and the ball output control process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process. Thus, in the ball output control process, when the number of bets of three (first number of bets) is not set, or when the game state is a game state other than RT1, a process related to navigation notification is performed. Therefore, the player or the like can be urged to play the game with the number of bets of three (first number of bets) and RT1.

In the ball output control process of this embodiment, in the game after the game in which the process (Sj1 to Sj10) for shifting the game section from the normal section to the advantageous section is performed, the external output signal number is set to the external output signal Each process of steps Sj11 to Sj30 including the process of setting the output buffer (Sj25) is performed, and when the output of the AT signal is started, the game in which the output of the AT signal is started Since the processing (Sj1 to Sj10) for shifting to the advantageous section is performed in the game before , the output of the AT signal is started while the section is being displayed.

In the ball output control process of the present embodiment, when the output of the AT signal is started, the ON state data (predetermined value 1) is set in the output buffer of the section display LED 19, and after performing the one-interrupt wait process , the process of storing the external signal number in the output buffer (Sj25) is performed, so that the AT signal is output after starting the section display. As a result, it is possible to prevent the external device that has received the AT signal from identifying that the advantageous section is being controlled before the section display is started.

In the ball output control process of the present embodiment, when the number of three bets (the first number of bets) is set, the process (Sj14 to Sj30) related to navigation notification is performed, while the number of bets of two ( If the second bet number) is set, the processing related to the navigation notification will not be performed, and either the multiple bells or the 3 bells will be won in the internal lottery in the advantageous section. In this case, when the number of bets of 3 (first number of bets) is set, the operating mode (order of correct answers) corresponding to the type of winning multi-bell and 3-piece hand is reported. , When the number of 2 bets (second bet number) is set, the operation mode (order of stop of the correct answer) corresponding to the type of winning multiple bells and 3 bets is not notified. ing. As a result, when the number of bets of 2 (second number of bets) is set, an operation mode advantageous to the player is not instructed by the navigation notification, so that the number of bets of 3 (second number of bets) is set. You can encourage them to play games.

[Operation information signal output processing]
The control contents of the operation information signal output process performed by the main control section 41 will be described with reference to FIG. 25 . FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing the control contents of the operation information output process performed by the main control section 41. As shown in FIG. The operation information signal output process is included in the non-game program and is a subroutine called in the main process included in the game program.

As shown in FIG. 25, in the operation information signal output process, first, using the aforementioned LD instruction, the current stack pointer SP is moved from the game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP used by the calling game program. The value of the indicated address is read, stored in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area, and saved (Sz501). After that, using the LD instruction, the value stored as the address indicated by the stack pointer SP at the end of the previous non-game program is read from a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area and set as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP. Thus, the stack pointer SP is set for the non-game program (Sz502). Then, using the above-described first save instruction, the values of all the registers (accumulator registers, flag registers, general-purpose registers, index registers, interrupt registers, refresh registers, program counters, etc.) provided in the main control unit 41 including the flag registers are saved in a predetermined order in the non-game stack area of the non-game RAM area specified by the stack pointer SP (Sz503). In addition, when the non-game RAM area initialization processing included in the non-game program is called from the game program, the LD instruction is used when changing the stack pointer SP from the game program to the non-game program. , the second zero flag TZ of the flag register is changed, and the state of the flag register may change before and after the LD instruction is executed. That is, when the non-game RAM area initialization process is called from the game program, the state of the register saved after the stack pointer SP for the non-game program is set by the non-game RAM area initialization process is It may differ from the state of the register when the program calls the non-game RAM area initialization processing.

After saving all registers in step Sz503, communication setting processing is performed (Sz504). In the communication setting process, the baud rate value of the communication signal and the signal transmission function of the main control unit 41 are set.

After performing the communication setting process in step Sz504, the navigation number set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is read into the A register (Sz505). Then, it is determined whether or not the navigation number is 0 and navigation notification is not performed (Sz506). When it is determined that the navigation number is 0, after reading the winning status of the general combination specified based on the general combination winning number set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c into the flag register Z (Sz507), A value (0) indicating the operation mode (recommended operation mode) of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R that minimizes the loss of the winning combination is set in the A register (Sz508). Then, it is determined whether or not the general role is not won based on the winning status of the general role read into the flag register Z in step Sz507 (Sz509).

In the step of Sz509, when it is determined that the general role has not been won and it is lost, the top address of the symbol stop signal pattern setting table is set in the HL register (Sz510), and the winning status of the special role can be specified. The value of the internal winning flag (non-winning: 0, BB1 winning: 1, BB2 winning: 2) is read into the A register (Sz11), and symbol stop signal pattern setting data acquisition processing is performed (Sz512). In the symbol stop signal pattern setting data acquisition process, the symbol stop signal pattern setting data is acquired in the A register based on the value of the symbol stop signal pattern setting table and the internal winning flag. The symbol stop signal pattern setting data is data for obtaining a reel number set value by addition processing (Sz516) described later according to the winning status of a special combination when none of the general combinations has been won.

When the symbol stop signal pattern setting data acquisition process is performed in step Sz512, and when it is determined in step Sz506 that the navigation number is not 0 and navigation notification is performed, a general role is won in step Sz509. If it is determined that there is, the process proceeds to step Sz513 to set the top address of the reel number signal data table in the HL register. Thereafter, the A register value is corrected by performing a predetermined correction process (Sz514), the values of the A register and the flag register are saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sz515), and addition processing is performed (Sz516). In addition processing, the value of the A register is added to the HL register value, and the reel number setting value stored at the address of the HL register value after the addition is obtained in the A register. Then, the A register value is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c as a reel number signal (Sz517).

If it is determined that the navigation number is not 0 in step Sz506 and the steps after Sz513 are to be processed, the navigation number (1 to 6) is set in the A register, and in step Sz517 A reel number signal indicating the stop order corresponding to the number is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Also, when it is determined that the general role has been won in step Sz509, and the processing of steps after Sz513 is performed, the DDT point value is set in the A register, and the stop order corresponding to the DDT point is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Further, in the case where the pattern stop signal pattern setting data acquisition processing is performed in step Sz512, and the processing of steps after Sz513 is performed, and when a special combination is won, the A register is selected. symbol stop signal pattern setting data for setting the reel number signal indicating the order of stopping that can win the winning special role is set, and the stop that can win the winning special role A reel number signal indicating the order is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Also, in the case where the symbol stop signal pattern setting data acquisition process is performed in the step of Sz512, and the processing of the steps after Sz513 is performed, and when the special combination is not won, the A register stores DDT points. The pattern stop signal pattern setting data for setting the reel number signal indicating the stop order corresponding to the DDT point is set so that the reel number signal indicating the stop order corresponding to the DDT point is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. It has become.

After setting the reel number signal in step Sz517, the values of the A register and flag register saved in step Sz515 are restored (Sz518), and the start address of the stop execution pattern number table is set in the HL register (Sz519). . Then, addition processing is performed. In the addition process, the value of the A register is added to the HL register value, and the stop execution symbol number stored at the address of the HL register value after the addition is obtained in the A register. Then, the A register value is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c as the stop execution symbol number (Sz521).

Thereafter, a stop execution step calculation process is performed to calculate a stop execution step based on the stop execution symbol number (Sz522), and the stop execution step acquired by the calculation is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c as a stop execution position signal that can be specified. (Sz523).

When it is determined that the navigation number is not 0 in step Sz506 and the steps after Sz518 are processed, the navigation number (1 to 6) is set in the A register, and in step Sz523, the navigation A stop execution position signal indicating a stop timing corresponding to the number is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Further, when it is determined that the general role has been won in step Sz509 and the processing of steps after Sz518 is performed, the DDT point value is set in the A register, and the stop timing corresponding to the DDT point is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Also, in the case where the symbol stop signal pattern setting data acquisition process is performed in the step of Sz512, and the processing of the steps after Sz518 is performed, and when the special combination is won, the A register is selected. Symbol stop signal pattern setting data for setting a stop execution position signal indicating the stop timing at which the winning special role can be won is set, and it is possible to win the winning special role. A stop execution position signal indicating stop timing is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Also, in the case where the symbol stop signal pattern setting data acquisition process is performed in step Sz512, and the process of steps after Sz518 is performed, and when the special combination is not won, the DDT point is stored in the A register. The data for setting the symbol stop signal pattern for setting the stop execution position signal indicating the stop timing corresponding to the DDT point is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. It has become so.

After the stop execution position signal is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in step Sz523, the value of the reel number signal set in step Sz517 is read into the A register (Sz524), and reel number signal output processing is performed (Sz525). In the reel number signal output process, a reel number signal capable of specifying the stopping order of each reel specified based on the A register value is output from a predetermined output port to the testing device.

After reel number signal output processing is performed in step Sz525, the value of the stop execution position signal set in step Sz523 is read into the A register (Sz526), and stop execution position signal output processing is performed (Sz527). In the stop execution position signal output process, a process of outputting a stop execution position signal capable of specifying the stop timing of each reel specified based on the A register value from a predetermined output port to the test device.

After performing the stop execution position signal output process in step Sz527, the values of all registers saved in step Sz503 are restored (Sz528), and the stack pointer values saved in step Sz501 are restored. to end the operation information signal output process and return to the main process.

As described above, in the operation information signal output process of the present embodiment, the stop execution position signal and the stop execution position signal are output to the test apparatus as the operation information signals specifying the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R. It is possible. In the ball output control process described above, when starting control of the AT, a predetermined value (1 indicating ON state) is set in the output buffer of the section display LED 19, and the section display LED 19 is controlled to light up by timer interrupt processing. After starting the section display indicating that control is being performed in the advantageous section, the operation information signal output processing is called in the main processing. An information signal is output to the test equipment. As a result, since the operation information signal is output to the test device after the section display is started, it is possible for the test device side to identify that the designated operation mode is in the state where the section display is being performed.

In the operation information signal output process of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not navigation information indicating the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is performed based on the navigation number set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. (Sz506) If it is determined that the navigation notification is to be performed, a process (Sz523) of outputting a stop execution position signal designating the operation mode instructed based on the navigation number is performed, and if the navigation notification is not to be performed If determined, the winning number indicating the winning result of the internal lottery is referred to (Sz509), and the process of outputting the stop execution position signal designating the operation mode corresponding to the winning number is performed (Sz509). there is Thus, in the operation information signal output process, when it is determined that the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is instructed, the process of specifying the winning result of the internal lottery can be omitted, so the operation mode can be specified. Processing for outputting the stop execution position signal can be simplified.

[Reel stop control process]
A reel stop control process performed by the main control section 41 in the main process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the details of the reel stop control process performed by the main control section 41. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 26, in the reel stop control process, first, the reel rotation process is performed (Sc1), and the number of sliding symbols can be specified for each timing when the stop operation is performed for all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. A stop control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. As a result, the stop control tables for the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are set during the acceleration control for the reels 2L, 2C and 2R by timer interrupt processing.

In the timer interrupt processing, the reel motor is excited so as to control rotation and stop of the reel motor in accordance with various requests (for example, acceleration request, stop request, etc.) set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. A pattern is set and the excitation state of each excitation phase is updated sequentially. Thus, for example, by setting an acceleration request in the RAM 41c, an excitation pattern for accelerating the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R is selected as an excitation pattern for the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R. is sequentially updated, and the control of starting the rotation of the reel and accelerating it to a predetermined constant speed state is started. Then, when the rotation state of each reel reaches the constant speed state, a reel speed state flag capable of specifying that the rotation state of the reel has reached the constant speed state is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c for each reel. Then, it is controlled so that the rotation in the constant speed state is maintained.

After the reel rotation process is performed in step Sc1, a timer interrupt wait process is performed (Sc2). In the timer interrupt waiting process, the timer interrupt is set to be enabled, and the process waits until the timer interrupt process is performed once.

After the timer interrupt wait processing in step Sc2 is completed, the timer interrupt is disabled (Sc3), and then the reel speed state flag updated by the timer interrupt processing and set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is set. Based on the reel speed state flag, it is specified for each reel whether or not the rotation state of the reel under rotation control is a constant speed state, and all the reels under rotation control are rotated at a constant speed. (Sc4). Then, in the step of Sc4, when it is determined that at least one reel is not rotating at a constant speed and all the reels under rotation control are not rotating at a constant speed, Sc2 , the processes of steps Sc2 to Sc4 are repeated, and the process waits until all the reels under rotation control are rotated at a constant speed.

Returning to the step of Sc2, after repeating the steps of Sc2 to Sc4 and waiting, the timer interrupt processing performed in the timer interrupt waiting processing of the step of Sc2 keeps the rotating state of all the reels under rotation control at a constant speed. By updating the reel speed state flag so as to be able to identify the state, in the subsequent step of Sc4, it is determined that all the reels under rotation control are rotating at a constant speed. Become.

On the other hand, in the step of Sc4, when it is determined that all the reels under rotation control for which the stop operation has not been completed are rotating at a constant speed, the stop switches corresponding to all the reels under rotation control is enabled (Sc5). If the reception of the stop operation has already been enabled for the reel for which the rotation control is being performed, the enabled state is maintained.

Then, after the acceptance of the stop operation is set to be valid in the step of Sc5, it is determined whether or not the valid stop operation by the stop switch is detected in the state where the acceptance of the stop operation is valid for the reel under rotation control. (Sc6). In determining whether or not the stop operation has been detected, the edge data of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R updated by the timer interrupt processing is referred to, and the determined data of the stop switches corresponding to the reel under rotation control is determined. If there is a change from the OFF state to the ON state, it is determined that a valid stop operation has been detected for that stop switch. As a result, on the condition that the ON state of the stop switch is continuously detected for a certain period of time (at least about 2.24 milliseconds), effective stop operation by the stop switch is detected, so static electricity, etc. This prevents erroneous detection of the ON state of the stop switch due to noise.

In this embodiment, it is detected that the determination data of the stop switch has changed from the OFF state to the ON state while the reception of the stop operation is valid for the reel under rotation control, that is, the predetermined number of consecutive times. By detecting the ON state of the stop switch in the timer interrupt processing, it is determined that an effective stop operation has been detected for the reel under rotation control. Specifically, when the ON state of the stop switch is continuously detected over four times (equivalent to about 2.24 milliseconds) by timer interrupt processing performed approximately every 0.56 milliseconds, rotation control is performed. It is configured to determine that a valid stop operation has been detected for the middle reel. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and it may be determined that a valid stop operation has been detected by detecting the ON state of the stop switch in one timer interrupt process.

If it is determined in step Sc6 that a valid stop operation has not been detected, the process returns to step Sc2, repeats steps Sc2 to Sc6, and waits until a valid stop operation is detected. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sc6 that a valid stop operation has been detected, reel stop processing is performed (Sc7) to stop rotation of the reel corresponding to the valid stop operation detected in step Sc6. control for Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the relevant reel for which the stop control was performed in the step of Sc7 has stopped (Sc8), and if it is determined that the relevant reel has not stopped, it waits until the relevant reel stops, When it is determined that the relevant reel is stopped, it is determined whether or not all the reels 2L, 2C and 2R have been stopped by an effective stop operation (Sc9), and all the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are stopped. is not stopped, the process returns to step Sc2, and controls of steps Sc2 to Sc9 are performed for the remaining reels that are not stopped.

Then, effective stopping operation is performed for all reels 2L, 2C, 2R, and all reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped in step Sc9, that is, excitation of all reels 2L, 2C, 2R is lost When determined, after initializing a predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which a power failure recovery flag indicating that power failure recovery is set (Sc10), timer interrupt wait processing is performed (Sc11). After that, whether or not the third stop switch is being operated, that is, whether or not the third stop switch has been depressed (released) and the determination data of the stop switch is in the OFF state. is determined (Sc12), and if the determination data of the stop switch is in the ON state and is being operated, the process returns to step Sc10, and while performing each process of steps Sc10 to Sc12, the third stop stop Wait until the switch operation is finished.

Then, in step Sc12, the operation of the stop switch for the third stop is terminated, and by the timer interrupt waiting processing in Sc11, the confirmation data of the stop switch is updated to the OFF state. It is determined that the switch is not being operated. After that, a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is referenced to determine whether or not the power interruption return flag is set (Sc13).

As described above, the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which the power failure recovery flag is set is initialized in step Sc10. That is, when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped and the power supply is restarted and the initial setting process is performed during the period in which the pressing operation of the stop switch for the third stop is continued, the initial setting It follows that the power failure return flag is set in step Sa26 of the process. On the other hand, if the power supply to the slot machine 1 is not stopped during the period in which the operation of pressing the third stop stop switch is continued, the power interruption return flag is not set. Further, after the initialization process performed when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, the timer interrupt process is performed and before the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped. The power supply to the slot machine 1 is interrupted during the period in which the operation of pressing the stop switch for the third stop is continued (the period in which the steps from Sc10 to Sc12 are performed). When it is stopped and the power supply is restarted, the main process is restarted from step Sc11 of the reel stop control process. When the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted, if the operation (depression) of the third stop stop switch is continued, the timer interrupt process performed after the initial setting process ends. Definite data for the ON state of the stop switch is created. Then, in step Sc12, it is determined that the third stop switch is being operated based on the determined data, and the processing of steps Sc10 to Sc12 is repeated until the operation of the third stop switch is completed. It will be done. Further, when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted, if the depression of the third stop stop switch has been completed, the timer interrupt processing performed after the initial setting processing ends will stop the stop switch. Definitive data indicating the OFF state is created, and when it is determined in step Sc12 that the stop switch for the third stop is not being operated, the process proceeds to step Sc13.

In the step of Sc13, when it is determined that the power interruption recovery flag is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, timer interrupt predetermined number of times waiting processing is performed (Sc14), and the timer interrupt processing is performed a predetermined number of times (this implementation In this example, it waits until the timer interrupt process is performed a predetermined number of times, and then initializes a predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which the power failure recovery flag is set, and clears the power failure recovery flag (Sc15 ), terminate the reel stop control process and return to the main process. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sc13 that the power failure recovery flag is not set, the reel stop control process is terminated without performing the processes in steps Sc14 and Sc15, and the process returns to the main process.

In the main process after the reel stop control process is finished, the winning determination process is performed as shown in Sb49 of FIG.

In this way, in the reel stop control process, the excitation of all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is lost and all the reels are stopped, and the depression of all the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is released, and the stop switch 8L is released. , 8C and 8R, the process returns to the main process and the winning judgment process is performed.

[Data processing for role ratio monitor]
The control contents of the role ratio monitor data processing performed by the main control unit 41 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28. FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the role ratio monitor data processing performed by the main control unit 41. As shown in FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the control contents of each state counting process performed by the main control section 41. As shown in FIG. The role ratio monitor data processing is included in the non-game program, and is a subroutine called in the main process included in the game program. In addition, the role ratio monitor data processing calls each state count process, which is a subroutine included in the non-game program. A material ratio update process and an instructed role ratio update process are further called.

The main control unit 41 displays the character item payout ratio for the past 6000 games and the character item payout ratio to the total cumulative number of payouts as a ratio display, the credit indicator 11 composed of a two-digit 7-segment display, and the game auxiliary display. Control to display on the device 12 is performed. The credit display device 11 and the game auxiliary display device 12 are display devices that display information according to the progress of the game, and the ratio display cannot be displayed all the time. A ratio display is displayed when a predetermined operation is performed by a store clerk or the like.

Specifically, when the game is not being played, the front door 1b, which is normally locked, is unlocked with a key possessed by the store clerk to open it, and then the front door 1b is provided inside the housing 1a. When the reset/setting switch 38 is operated, the main control unit 41 switches the current display contents on the credit display device 11 and the game auxiliary display device 12 to start displaying the ratio display.

In addition, the ratio display is composed of four alphanumeric characters consisting of the upper two digits of alphanumeric characters that form an abbreviation indicating the type of ratio display and the lower two digits that indicate the ratio. The display contents are displayed on a credit display device 11 and the display contents of the lower two digits are displayed on a game auxiliary display device 12, and the ratio display is displayed by switching at predetermined time intervals in a predetermined display order from the start of the ratio display.

With the ratio display displayed on the credit display 11 and the game auxiliary display 12, the closing of the front door 1b, the insertion of medals into the slot machine 1, the occurrence of an error, the operation of the setting key switch 37, and the adjustment switch 10. , or stoppage of the power supply to the slot machine 1 is detected, the ratio display is terminated by switching to the original display contents displayed before displaying the ratio display.

The main control unit 41 performs a process of determining whether or not a prize has been won according to the display results drawn to the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R in the winning determination process (Sb49 in FIG. 14) of the main process, After performing the one-interrupt waiting process (Sb50), the flag register value is saved (Sb51), the timer interrupt is set to disabled (Sb52), and the role ratio monitor data process included in the non-game program is executed. Run.

As shown in FIG. 27, in the role ratio monitor data processing, first, using the aforementioned LD instruction, the value of the address indicated by the stack pointer SP used by the calling game program is transferred to a predetermined non-game RAM area. Store in the area and save (Sk1), then use the LD instruction to set a predetermined value of the non-game stack area (the value stored at the end of the previous non-game program) as the value of the stack pointer SP. Thus, the stack pointer SP is set for the non-game program (Sk2). Then, using the above-described first save instruction, the values of all the registers provided in the main control unit 41 are saved by storing them in a predetermined order in the non-game stack area (Sk3). Then, after executing each state count process (Sk4) included in the non-game program, the values of the registers saved in the step of Sk3 are sequentially read out from the non-game stack area using the above-mentioned first return instruction. , After returning all the registers to the state when the role ratio monitor data processing was started (Sk5), using the LD command, in the step of Sk1, store it in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area and save it. By setting the value of the stack pointer SP to the stack pointer SP, the stack pointer SP is returned to the state when the data processing for role ratio monitoring was started (Sk6), and the data processing for role ratio monitoring is ended. Return to the calling main process and proceed to step Sb54. A timer interrupt is permitted in step Sb54 of the main processing, and the flag register value saved before execution of the subsequent role ratio monitoring data processing is restored (Sb55).

As shown in FIG. 28, in each state counting process, it is determined whether or not the total cumulative number of games can be added (Sp1). The total cumulative number of games is stored in a 3-byte storage area, and can be counted up to 16777215 games as the upper limit.

If the total cumulative number of games cannot be added, the process proceeds to step Sp22. If the total cumulative number of games can be added, 1 is added assuming that a game has been played (Sp2 to Sp4). As described above, since the microcomputer used in the gaming machine can only perform calculations between values of maximum 2 bytes, this addition is executed by calling the 3-byte data addition & storage processing (Sp4) subroutine. Then, as a result of the addition, it is determined whether or not the total cumulative number of games has reached the upper limit (Sp4). If the total cumulative number of games has not reached the upper limit, the process proceeds to step Sp7. When the total cumulative number of games has reached the upper limit, a value indicating that the total cumulative count stop flag has reached the upper limit is set (Sp5, Sp6), and the process proceeds to step Sp7. In step Sp1 described above, it is determined whether or not the total cumulative number of games can be added by referring to the total cumulative count stop flag.

In steps from Sp7, it is determined whether the total accumulated number of games is in the range of 0 to 5999 games, in the range of 6000 to 174999 games, or in the range of 175000 games or more (Sp7 to Sp20). Depending on the result of determination, a value indicating being within each range is set as a lighting identification segment (Sp8, Sp18, Sp19). The set lighting identification segment is stored in the display monitor completion game determination flag. Then, after successively executing the role ratio update processing (Sp22), the continuous role ratio update processing (Sp23), and the commanded role ratio update processing (Sp24) included in the non-game program, it returns to the role ratio monitor data processing. do.

In the accessory ratio update process, the accessory payout ratio to the total accumulated payout number is calculated from the updated total accumulated payout number and total accumulated accessory payout number. Then, the calculated value is stored as the accessory payout ratio with respect to the total accumulated payout number. The total cumulative payout number is the total number of medals awarded to the player. The total cumulative payout number of accessories is the total number of medals given in the special state (BB, CB) with respect to the total number of medals given to the player (total cumulative payout number).

The character item payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative number of payouts and the character item payout ratio for the past 6000 games are referred to in the display monitor data selection process described later, and are displayed on the gaming machine information display together with an abbreviation indicating the type of displayed ratio display. 50 will be displayed sequentially.

Next, the control content of the continuous role product ratio update process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described. In the continuous accessory ratio update process, the address of the continuous accessory payout number counter (6000G total) that counts the number of medals paid out during the special state (BB, CB) is set in the HL register, and the aforementioned accessory ratio update process is performed. The address of the payout number counter (6000G total) for counting the total number of payout medals paid out in the slot machine 1 updated by is set in the DE register, and division processing is performed. In division processing, the value of the quotient obtained by dividing the value of the HL register by the DE register is set in the A register. Then, the value of the quotient calculated by the division process is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c as the continuous role ratio for the past 6000 games.

The accessory payout ratios for the past 6000 games are referred to in the display monitor data selection process described later, and displayed on the gaming machine information display 50 together with an abbreviation indicating the type of displayed ratio display.

Next, the control contents of the instructed winning ratio update process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described. In the instructed role ratio update process, the address of the instructed role payout number counter (total total) for counting the total number of medals paid out in the game in which navigation notification is performed and in the game in the special state is set in the HL register. Then, the address of the payout number counter (total total) updated by the above-described continuous accessory ratio update process is set in the DE register, and the division process is performed. In division processing, the value of the quotient obtained by dividing the value of the HL register by the DE register is set in the A register. Then, the value of the quotient calculated by the division processing is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c as an instructed bonus payout ratio with respect to the total accumulated payout number.

The instructed accessory payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative number of payouts is referred to in the display monitor data selection process, which will be described later, and is displayed on the gaming machine information display device 50 together with an abbreviation indicating the type of displayed ratio display. .

[Timer interrupt processing]
The control contents of the timer interrupt processing (main) performed by the main control unit 41 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing the control contents of the timer interrupt process performed by the main control section 41. As shown in FIG. Note that the timer interrupt process (main) is a subroutine included in the game program.

As shown in FIG. 29, in the timer interrupt processing (main), first, after all front registers and back registers are exchanged (Sv1), timer interrupts are disabled (Sv2), and The value of the set voltage drop state counter is obtained (Sv3). Then, the input port to which the voltage drop signal is input from the power interruption detection circuit 48 is referred to (Sv4), and it is determined whether or not the voltage drop signal is input (Sv5). When the voltage drop signal is input, it is determined whether or not the voltage drop state counter has reached a predetermined upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (Sv6), and the voltage drop state counter reaches the upper limit. If the value has been reached, power-off processing (main) is performed (Sv7).

In the power-off process, all the front registers and back registers are exchanged, and the values of all the registers provided in the main control unit 41 are stored in a predetermined order in the game stack area of the game RAM area, thereby saving the stack pointer. The current address of the game stack area indicated by SP is saved by storing it in a predetermined area of the game RAM area. It should be noted that a predetermined area of the game RAM area, including a game stack area of the game RAM area in which the main control unit 41 stores the value of the register and a predetermined area of the game RAM area in which the value of the address indicated by the stack pointer SP is stored, is backed up. It is backed up by a power supply, and even if the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped, the contents stored in the game RAM area are preserved as long as power is supplied by the backup power supply.

Then, among the parallel output ports provided in the main control unit 41, the output port 3 to which the drive signal for the hopper motor 34b is output is initialized, and the output state is turned off. As a result, when medals are being paid out by the hopper unit 35, the payout of medals is preferentially stopped. After that, among the parallel output ports, the output ports 0 and 1 to which drive signals for the reel motors 32L, 32C and 32R are output are initialized, and when the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are under rotation control, the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are controlled to rotate. Stop the rotation of 2C and 2R.

After that, out of the parallel output ports, output port 2 to which control signals for the left, middle, and right stop valid LEDs 22L, 22C, 22R and flow path switching solenoid 30 are output, control signals for the credit indicator 11, and the game auxiliary indicator 12 are output. The output ports 4 and 5 that output, the output ports 6 and 7 that output test signals, and the output ports 8 and 9 that transmit commands to the sub-controller 91 are sequentially initialized, and control signals to various switches are generated. to stop output such as

After initializing the output ports 0 to 9, the destruction diagnosis data (5A(H) in this embodiment) is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and the parity adjustment data set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is set. clear. Then, new parity adjustment data of the RAM 41c is calculated so that the exclusive OR of all storage areas of the RAM 41c becomes 0, the parity adjustment data is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and access to the RAM 41c is performed. is set to prohibited, and loop processing is entered.

The loop processing waits while monitoring the output status of the voltage drop signal. In this state, when the voltage drop signal is no longer input, the recovery of the voltage is determined, and the program is started from the startup process (main). On the other hand, if the voltage drops while the voltage drop signal is being input, the operation is stopped internally.

By the above processing, when the power supply of AC100V is stopped, the power interruption process (main) is executed, the value of the register before the power interruption is saved in the game stack area of the game RAM area, and the game Since the contents of the predetermined area of the game RAM area of the RAM 41c including the stack area are also held by the supply of the backup power, in the startup process (main) executed when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted, , it is possible to return to the control state before the power failure. Furthermore, it is possible to identify whether the stop operation was effective in the control state before the power failure.

If it is determined in step Sv5 of the timer interrupt processing that the voltage drop signal has not been input, and if it is determined in step Sv6 that the voltage drop state counter has not reached the upper limit value, proceed to step Sv8, Update brownout condition counter. When proceeding from step Sv5 to step Sv8, the current value is maintained by adding 0 to the voltage drop counter, while when proceeding from step Sv5 to step Sv8, the voltage Update the degraded state counter to add 1.

Then, the detected states of various switches are input from the input port, and port input processing is performed to generate input data, fixed data, and edge data (ON edge data and OFF edge data) (Sv9). After that, using the above-mentioned second saving instruction, the value of the flag register in which the calculation result is stored among the registers provided in the main control unit 41 is saved in the game stack area of the game RAM area in a predetermined order. After that (Sv10), time monitoring update processing included in the non-game program is performed (Sv11). After that, using the above-mentioned second return instruction, the value of the flag register saved in the game stack area in step Sv10 is sequentially read from the game stack area in the reverse order of saving and set in the flag register. Then, the flag register is returned to the state before the time monitoring update process is performed (Sv12).

In the time monitoring update process, first, using the aforementioned LD instruction, the value of the address indicated by the current stack pointer SP is read from the game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP used by the calling game program, and It is stored in a predetermined area of the game RAM area and saved. After that, using the LD instruction, the value stored as the address indicated by the stack pointer SP at the end of the previous non-game program is read from a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area and set as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP. Thus, the stack pointer SP is set for the non-game program. Then, using the above-described first save instruction, the values of all the registers (accumulator registers, flag registers, general-purpose registers, index registers, interrupt registers, refresh registers, program counters, etc.) provided in the main control unit 41 including the flag registers are saved in a predetermined order in the non-game stack area of the non-game RAM area specified by the stack pointer SP. In addition, when the time monitoring update process included in the non-game program is called from the game program, the LD instruction is used when changing the stack pointer SP from the game program to the non-game program. The second zero flag TZ of the register is changed, and the state of the flag register may change before and after the LD instruction is executed. That is, when the time monitoring update process is called from the game program, the state of the register saved after the stack pointer SP for the non-game program is set by the time monitoring update process is determined by the game program. may differ from the state of the registers when you call

After that, sensor monitoring processing for detecting abnormalities in the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c and payout sensor 34c, test signal output processing for outputting test signals generated in relation to game results, and various timers used by non-game programs are updated. A timer update process and a role ratio monitor output data selection process for selecting output data to be displayed on the role ratio monitor are sequentially performed. In addition, in the sensor monitoring process, when an abnormality related to the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c or the payout sensor 34c is detected, sensor error reference data capable of specifying the type of detected abnormality is stored in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c. It is designed to be set.

Then, using the above-mentioned first return instruction, the values of the registers that were saved in the non-game stack area when the time monitoring update process was started are saved in the non-game stack area in the reverse order of saving. , and set in the registers corresponding to the order, all the registers are restored to the state when the time monitoring update process was started. After that, using the LD instruction described above, by reading the value of the stack pointer SP saved in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area when the time monitoring update process is started and setting it as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP, The stack pointer SP is returned to the state when the time monitoring update process was started, and the time monitoring update process is terminated. In addition, in order to end the time monitoring update processing included in the non-game program and return to the game program, after restoring the values of all the registers that were saved at the start of the time monitoring update processing, When changing SP from non-game program to game program, the second zero flag TZ of the flag register is changed by using the LD instruction, and before and after the execution of the LD instruction, the flag register Conditions may change. That is, the state of the register when the time monitoring update process ends may differ from the state of the register saved when the time monitoring update process is started.

After restoring the flag register in step Sv12, refer to the sensor error reference data set by the time monitoring update processing in step Sv11 (Sv13), and refer to the sensor error reference data set by the time monitoring update processing in this timer interrupt. A logical sum of the sensor error reference data and the sensor error reference data set by the time monitoring update process in the previous timer interrupt is calculated (Sv14). Then, a sensor error flag, which is set in a predetermined area of the game RAM area of the RAM 41c and can specify whether or not an abnormality related to the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c and the payout sensor 34c is detected, is calculated in step Sv14. Update based on disjunction. By performing steps Sv13 to Sv15, if it is specified that an abnormality has been detected based on the sensor error reference data, it is determined whether the sensor error flag is in a state indicating that an abnormality has been detected. The sensor error flag is updated to indicate that the abnormality is detected regardless of whether the abnormality is detected. On the other hand, when it is specified that no abnormality is detected based on the sensor error reference data, the state of the sensor error flag is maintained. That is, when it is specified that an abnormality is detected based on the sensor error reference data, the content of the sensor error reference data is reflected in the sensor error flag, and the abnormality is detected based on the sensor error reference data. If it is specified that the error has not occurred or that the abnormality has been resolved, the contents of the sensor error reference data are not reflected in the sensor error flag.

After updating the sensor error flag in step Sv15, a random value update process is performed to update the random value in the random number circuit provided inside the main control unit 41 (Sv16). Clear the watchdog timer (WDT) register (Sv17). After that, the value of the branch counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c for branching the processing included in the timer interrupt is read into a predetermined register and updated by adding a predetermined value (1 in this embodiment). , the updated value is set as the value of the branch counter in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sv18). In the process of updating the branch counter, when the branch counter is 0 to 2, 1 is added, and when the branch counter is 3, it is initialized and reset to 0. Update. That is, the value of the branch counter loops in the order of 0→1→2→3→0 . . . each time the timer interrupt process (main) is executed. The value of the branch counter is referenced in each process executed in the timer interrupt process (main). control is branched.

After updating the branch counter in step Sv18, it is determined whether or not the branch counter is 4 (Sv19). Counter update processing (Sv20) for updating various predetermined timers, indicators such as various LEDs connected to the output port (credit indicator 11, game auxiliary indicator 12, 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16, status display LED 17, start valid LED 18, section display LED 19, replaying LED 20, etc.) is controlled to set and transmit a lighting signal for dynamically lighting the lighting state of each processing such as the main processing (Sv21 )I do.

When it is determined that the branch counter is not 4 in step Sv19, and after the LED dynamic display process is performed in step Sv21, a medal insertion signal indicating that medals have been inserted among external output signals and medals are paid out. A medal insertion payout signal transmission process (Sv22) for transmitting to the outside of the slot machine 1, a security signal (door open signal, setting change signal , insertion error signal, payout error signal), security signal transmission processing (Sv24) to be transmitted to the outside of the slot machine 1, and various commands such as the door command and operation end command set in the command queue. A command transmission process (Sv25) for transmitting is sequentially performed.

After that, the branch counter is referenced to determine whether or not the branch counter is 2. If the branch counter is 2, if there is an abnormality related to the reel (reel error), Based on whether or not the set reel error flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, it is determined whether or not there is a reel error (Sv26). If there is no reel error, reel control processing is performed to control the rotation and stop of the reels by setting the excitation patterns of the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R according to the progress of the game (Sv27). .

Then, when it is determined that the branch timer is not 2 in step Sv25, when it is determined that a reel error is occurring in step Sv26, and when the reel control processing in step Sv27 ends, setting is made by the reel control processing. A reel motor drive signal output process ( Sv29), a process of transmitting a control signal to the solenoid drive circuit 46, a process of updating the lighting state of the left/middle/right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R, and a process of setting the advantageous section signal to the OFF state. After sequentially performing the port output update processing (Sv30), the output buffer for the signal during the advantageous interval set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is referred to, and a predetermined value indicating the ON state is set in the output buffer (in this embodiment, 1) is set (Sv31). By setting the flag during the advantageous period by the ball output control process of the main process, a predetermined value (this embodiment 1) is set.

In step Sv31, if it is determined that a predetermined value (in this embodiment, 1) indicating an ON state is set in the output buffer for the signal during the advantageous interval, controlling the signal during the advantageous interval to the ON state, After starting to output the signal during the advantageous interval to the test device (Sv32), the process proceeds to step Sv33. On the other hand, in step Sv31, an initial value (0 in this embodiment) indicating the OFF state is set in the output buffer for the signal during the advantageous section, and a predetermined value (1 in this embodiment) indicating the ON state is set. If it is determined that it is not set, the process of step Sv32 is not performed, and the process proceeds to step Sv33.

In step Sv33, all front registers and back registers are exchanged (Sv33), timer interrupts are set to enabled (Sv34), timer interrupt processing (main) is terminated, and the timer interrupt processing is executed. Return to the main processing when (main) was started.

Thus, in the timer interrupt process of the present embodiment, the counter update process (Sv20) for updating a plurality of timer values used in the specific process (game program) including the one game time management timer value, and the special process ( A time monitoring update process (Sv11) for updating the timer value used in the non-game program) is performed separately. This prevents the time monitoring update process for updating the timer value used by the special process from being mixed with the counter update process for updating the timer value used by the specific process.

In the timer interrupt process of this embodiment, the time monitoring update process including the process of outputting the test signal is performed before the counter update process of updating the timer value for one game time management. As a result, the timer value for managing one game time is started to be updated after the output of the test signal is started, so that the time interval at which the test signal is output can be surely set to be equal to or longer than the minimum time of one game. .

[Time monitoring update process]
The control contents of the time monitoring update process performed by the main control unit 41 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the control details of the time monitoring update process performed by the main control unit 41. As shown in FIG. The time monitoring update process is a subroutine included in the non-game program and called by the timer interrupt process (main) included in the game program. Further, the time monitoring update process sequentially calls the sensor monitoring process, the test signal output process, the medal passing time timer update process, and the display monitor output data selection process included in the non-game program.

As shown in FIG. 30, in the time monitoring update process, first, using the aforementioned LD instruction, the value of the current address of the game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP used by the calling game program is changed to It is stored in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area and saved (Sv201). After that, using the LD instruction, a predetermined value of the non-game stack area as the value of the stack pointer SP (stored in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area as an address indicated by the stack pointer SP at the end of the previous non-game program) By setting the current value), the stack pointer SP is set for the non-game program (Sv202). Then, using the above-mentioned first save instruction, the values of all the registers provided in the main control unit 41 including the flag register are stored in the non-game stack area of the non-game RAM area specified by the stack pointer SP in a predetermined order. Save by storing (Sv203). Thereafter, sensor monitoring processing (Sv204), which is included in the non-game program and determines whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the detection signals of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c and the payout sensor 34c, is connected to the slot machine 1. Test signal output process (Sv205) for outputting a test signal to the test device, medal passing time timer update process (Sv206) for updating the timer for measuring the passing time of medals within the detection range of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, role ratio A role ratio monitor display data selection process (Sv207) for selecting role ratio data to be displayed on the monitor is sequentially performed.

After performing the role ratio monitor display data selection process in step Sv207, the value of the register stored in the non-game stack area and saved in step Sv203 is returned to By sequentially reading from the non-game stack area in the reverse order of saving and setting in the registers corresponding to the order, all the registers are restored to the state when the time monitoring update process was started (Sv208). After that, using the above-mentioned LD instruction, by reading the value of the stack pointer SP for the game program saved in the predetermined area of the non-game RAM area in the step of Sv201 and setting it as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP, the time The stack pointer SP is restored to the state when the monitor update process was started (Sv209), the time monitor update process is terminated, and the caller timer interrupt process (main) is returned to.

Thus, the main control unit 41 performs various processes (sensor monitoring process, test signal output process, medal passing time timer update process, role ratio monitor display data selection process) in accordance with the time monitoring update process included in the non-game program. In this case, by calling the time monitoring update process from the timer interrupt process (main) (Sv11) included in the game program, various processes of the time monitoring update process are performed. It returns to the original timer interrupt processing (main).

In addition, in the time monitor update process, after being called from the timer interrupt process (main) which is the game program, first, the process of saving the stack pointer SP and the register is performed, and then the sensor monitor process and the test signal output process are performed. , medal passing time timer update processing, role ratio monitor display data selection processing, and the like. After all these processes are completed, the stack pointer SP and registers saved when called from the game program are restored, and the timer interrupt process (main) of the calling source is returned to. In such a configuration, that is, in the non-game program called by one call process from the game program, a plurality of processes (for example, sensor monitoring process, test signal output process, medal passing time timer update process, role ratio monitor display data selection processing, etc.), the process of saving the stack pointer SP and the register and the process of restoring them are not performed for each of a plurality of processes performed in the non-game program, and can be collectively processed once.

Also, when calling a non-game program (for example, time monitoring update processing) from a game program (for example, timer interrupt processing (main)), the calculation result is stored in the register of the main control unit 41 on the game program side. after saving the value of the flag register to be stored in the game stack area of the game RAM area, calling the non-game program, saving before calling the non-game program after the non-game program is terminated. By sequentially reading the value of the flag register that has been set from the game stack area and setting it in the corresponding flag register, the flag register is restored to the state before calling the non-game program. As a result, by calling the non-game program, the game program uses the flag register to perform calculations, and even if the non-game program changes the value of the flag register, when returning to the game program Then, the value of the flag register is returned to the state before calling the non-game program, and the subsequent processing can be performed.

Also, in the non-game program (for example, time monitoring update processing), when called by a game program (for example, timer interrupt processing (main)), first, the stack pointer SP used by the calling game program The value of the current address of the game stack area indicated by is stored and saved in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area. After performing a predetermined process according to the non-game program, when terminating the non-game program, the value of the stack pointer SP saved in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area when the non-game program is started is set in the stack pointer SP, the stack pointer SP is returned to the state when the non-game program was started. As a result, even if the non-game program uses the stack pointer SP in the non-game program to change the stack pointer SP, when the non-game program ends, the With the stack pointer SP returned to the state, it can be returned to the calling game program.

Further, in the non-game program (for example, time monitoring update processing), when called by the game program (for example, timer interrupt processing (main)), the values of all the registers provided in the main control unit 41 are It is saved by storing it in the non-game stack area of the RAM area. Then, after performing a predetermined process according to the non-game program, when terminating the non-game program, the value of the register stored and saved in the non-game stack area when the non-game program was started are sequentially read out from the non-game stack area and set in the corresponding registers, thereby returning all registers to the state when the non-game program was started. As a result, even if the non-game program uses a register to perform various processes in the non-game program and changes the value of the register, when the non-game program ends, the non-game program It is possible to return to the calling game program in a state in which the values of all registers are returned to the state when the is started.

Further, in the non-game program, when called by the game program, the values of all the registers provided in the main control unit 41 are saved by storing them in the non-game stack area of the non-game RAM area, and the non-game program By setting the value of the register that was stored and saved in the non-game stack area to the corresponding register when terminating the program, all registers are restored to the state when the non-game program was started. It's becoming The values of the registers used by the game program are stored and saved in the non-game stack area of the non-game RAM area, and are returned to the registers from the non-game stack area. Since it is not necessary to provide an area for saving, and only an area for saving the value of the flag register may be provided in the game stack area, the capacity of the game stack area can be reduced.

Also, while the main control unit 41 requires a 1-byte program capacity for an instruction to save the value of the flag register, a 2-byte program capacity is required for an instruction for the main control unit 41 to save the values of all registers. do. Then, when calling the non-game program from the game program, the value of the flag register among the registers provided in the main control unit 41 is saved in the game stack area of the game RAM area on the game program side, and then the non-game program is called. On the calling and non-game program side, the values of all registers are saved in the non-game stack area of the non-game RAM area, and the game program program is easier than when all the registers are saved on the game program side. Capacity can be reduced.

[Sensor monitoring process]
31 and 32 are flow charts showing the control details of the sensor monitoring process performed by the main control unit 41. FIG. As shown in FIG. 31, in the sensor monitoring process, the branch counter of the timer interrupt process (main) is updated in the timer interrupt process (main) and set in a predetermined area of the game RAM area of the RAM 41c. It is determined whether or not it is the timing (timing when the branch timer is 0) to perform processing related to the payout sensors for monitoring whether or not there is an abnormality in the detection states of the payout sensors 34c and 34d (Sz101). Then, when it is time to perform the processing related to the payout sensor, the process proceeds to step Sz102. On the other hand, if it is not the timing for processing regarding the payout sensor, the process proceeds to step Sz117 to perform processing regarding the insertion sensor for monitoring whether or not there is an abnormality in the detection state of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c.

When it is determined that it is time to perform processing related to the payout sensor in the step of Sz101, a sensor error set in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c in order to transmit the monitoring result of the sensor monitoring process to the game program Clear the reference data (Sz102). Then, referring to the error flag that is set in a predetermined area of the game RAM area of the RAM 41c and that can specify whether or not an abnormality of the error codes E1 to E5 has occurred (Sz103), the error codes E2, E3, It is determined whether or not an E4 abnormality has occurred (Sz104).

If it is determined in step Sz104 that an error code E2, E3, or E4 has occurred, the process proceeds to step Sz117. If it is determined that an error code E2, E3, or E4 has not occurred, , after referring to a predetermined area of the port input buffer in which the fixed data of the payout sensors 34c and 34d are stored (Sz105), a predetermined area of the game RAM area of the RAM 41c is referred to, and the hopper unit 35 pays out medals. It is determined whether or not a payout flag indicating that control is being performed is set (Sz106).

If it is determined in step Sz106 that the during-payout flag is set, it is determined whether one of the payout sensors 34c and 34d is in the ON state based on the fixed data of the payout sensors 34c and 34d referred to in step Sz105. (Sz107), and if one of the payout sensors 34c and 34d is ON, a predetermined area of the port input buffer storing the edge data of the payout sensors 34c and 34d is referred to (Sz108), and the edge It is determined whether data (ON edge data or OFF edge data) is set (Sz109).

Then, when it is determined in step Sz107 that one of the payout sensors 34c and 34d is ON and edge data is set in step Sz107, that is, one medal paid out from the hopper unit 35 When it begins to pass through the detection range of the payout sensors 34c and 34d, or when one medal paid out from the hopper unit 35 finishes passing through the detection range of the payout sensor, the non-game RAM of the RAM 41c. A sensor check timer 1 set in a predetermined area of the area is initialized and set to 0 (Sz110), and timing of passage time of a new medal is started. If it is determined in step Sz109 that the edge data has not been set, and after the sensor check timer 1 is initialized in step Sz110, the sensor check timer 1 is updated by adding 1 (Sz111).

The sensor check timer 1 is set for the time from when the medals start to pass through the detection range of the payout sensors 34c and 34d until it finishes passing, and from the time when the medals finish passing through the detection range of the payout sensors 34c and 34d. A timer for counting the time until the next medal starts passing. By being updated in step Sz111 in the sensor monitoring process, the sensor check timer 1 is set to the payout sensor during the period during which the payout flag is set, that is, during the period during which the hopper unit 35 is performing medal payout control. It is updated every time the process is performed (every four timer interrupt processes (main), 2.24 milliseconds).

One of the payout sensors 34c and 34d is ON in step Sz107, and if it is determined that the edge data is not set in step Sz109, that is, the medal payout control is performed on the medal paid out from the hopper unit 35. When medals are passing through the detection range of the payout sensors 34c and 34d, or during payout control, after one medal is paid out, if it is a period until the next medal is paid out, the sensor The check timer 1 is updated by adding one unit time (2.24 milliseconds in this embodiment) (Sz111).

Then, after updating the sensor check timer 1 in step Sz111, it is determined whether or not the value of the sensor check timer 1 exceeds a predetermined maximum monitoring time (11.20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Determine (Sz112).

Here, the maximum value of the monitoring time of the sensor check timer 1 is at least the maximum value of the time required for medals paid out by the hopper unit 35 to start passing through the detection range of the payout sensors 34c and 34d until they finish passing. After the medals paid out by the hopper unit 35 have passed through the detection range of the payout sensors 34c and 34d, the next medal is paid out by the hopper unit 35 and passes through the detection range of the payout sensors 34c and 34d. It is set to the longer time or more of the time required for it to start running. As a result, during the period in which the payout control for paying out medals is being performed, based on the sensor check timer 1, at least the time during which the detection state of the payout sensors 34c and 34d can continue in the ON state and the payout sensors 34c and 34d It is determined whether or not a period longer than the time during which the detection state of is allowed to continue in the OFF state has passed.

When it is determined in step Sz112 that the value of the sensor check timer 1 has exceeded the maximum value of the monitoring time, sensor error reference data (payment sensor ) is set in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area of the RAM 14c (Sz113), the sensor check timer 1 is initialized and set to 0 (Sz114), the clocking of the passing time of a new medal is started, and Sz114 The value (0) of the sensor check timer 1 set in step is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sz115), and the process proceeds to step Sz117. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sz112 that the value of the sensor check timer 1 does not exceed the maximum monitoring time, the value of the sensor check timer 1 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sz115), and Sz117. Proceed to step .

Also, if it is determined in step Sz106 that the payout flag is set, and if it is determined in step Sz107 that one of the payout sensors 34c and 34d is not in the ON state, the processing of steps Sz108 to Sz113 is performed. By proceeding to step Sz114 without doing so, the sensor error reference data is maintained in a state cleared in step Sz102, proceeding to step Sz114, initializing the sensor check timer 1 and setting it to 0, The value (0) of the sensor check timer 1 set in step Sz114 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sz115), and the process proceeds to step Sz117.

If it is determined in step Sz106 that the during-payout flag is not set, both of the payout sensors 34c and 34d are in the OFF state based on the fixed data of the payout sensors 34c and 34d referred to in step Sz105. (Sz116), and if both the payout sensors 34c and 34d are in the OFF state, the process proceeds to step Sz107. When it is determined in step Sz107 that one of the payout sensors 34c and 34d is not in the ON state, the process proceeds to step Sz117 without setting the sensor error reference data (payout sensor).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sz106 that the payout flag is not set, and if it is determined in step Sz116 that both of the payout sensors 34c and 34d are not in the OFF state, the process proceeds to step Sz113, After setting the sensor error reference data (payout sensor) in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area of the RAM 14c, the sensor check timer 1 is initialized (Sz114), and the value of the sensor check timer 1 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. (Sz115), proceed to step Sz117.

By performing the processing of steps Sz11 to Sz116 above, processing relating to the payout sensor for determining whether or not there is an abnormality relating to the payout of medals based on the detection state of the payout sensors 34c and 34d is performed. After this process is performed, the processes after step Sz117 are performed, so that the process regarding the input sensor is performed following the process regarding the payout sensor.

As shown in FIG. 32, in the processing relating to the insertion sensor in the sensor monitoring processing, first, whether or not a medal maintenance permission flag indicating that insertion of medals from the medal insertion unit 4 is permitted is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. is determined (Sz117), and if the medal maintenance permission flag is not set, the sensor monitoring process is ended and the process returns to the calling time monitoring update process.

If it is determined in step Sz117 that the medal maintenance permission flag is set, then the predetermined area of the game RAM area of the RAM 41c is referred to (Sz118), and an abnormality related to the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c and the payout sensor 34c (hereinafter referred to as medal It is determined whether or not a medal sensor error is occurring based on whether or not a sensor error flag capable of identifying whether or not a sensor error has been detected is set (Sz119). Then, if the medal sensor error is occurring, the sensor monitoring process is ended, and the time monitoring update process of the calling source is returned to.

If it is determined that there is no medal sensor error in step Sz119, the current state of inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c (in FIG. 32, inserted medal sensors 1, 2, and 3) set in the port input buffer in the game RAM area is determined. The data is referred to (Sz120), and it is determined whether or not the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c are in the ON state (Sz121).

If it is determined in step Sz121 that the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c are in the ON state, the ON state of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is saved in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c (Sz122), and the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c is saved. By referring to the sensor check timer 2 set in a predetermined area of the game RAM area, it is determined whether or not the sensor check timer 2 is 0 (Sz123).

The sensor check timer 2 is a timer for measuring the time from when medals start to pass through the detection range of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c to when they finish passing. By being updated in step Sz127 in the sensor monitoring process, the sensor check timer 1 is set at the timing when the sensor monitoring process is performed (every timer interrupt process (main)) while the inserted medal sensor 31a is in the ON state. , 0.56 milliseconds).

If it is determined in step Sz123 that the sensor check timer 2 is 0, it is determined whether the inserted medal sensors 31b and 31c referred to in step Sz120 are in the ON state (Sz124), and the inserted medal sensors 31b and 31c are determined. is not ON state, based on the medal insertion signal ignoring timer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c by the medal insertion signal processing, within the medal insertion signal ignoring time (in this embodiment, flow path switching 504 milliseconds after the start of switching control of the flow path of medals by the solenoid 30) (Sz125). Time (in this embodiment, 0.56 milliseconds) is added and updated (Sz126). It is determined whether or not the maximum value of the required normal passage time range (99.68 m in this embodiment) has been exceeded (Sz127). The normal passage time range includes the actual measurement value of the time required for the medal to pass through the detection range of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, the shape of the medal receiving channel 29b of the medal selector 29, and the insertion in the medal receiving channel 29b. It is determined in advance based on the arrangement of the medal sensors 31a-31c, the characteristics of the inserted medal sensors 31a-31c, etc. (in this embodiment, it ranges from 10.08 milliseconds to 99.68 milliseconds).

If it is determined in step Sz127 that the value of the sensor check timer 2 exceeds the maximum value of the normal passing time range, and if it is determined in step Sz124 that the inserted medal sensors 31b and 31c are ON, the inserted medal After setting the sensor error reference data (inserted medal sensor) indicating that an abnormality has been detected based on the detection states of the sensors 31a to 31c in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area of the RAM 14c (Sz128), the sensor check timer 2 is started. It is initialized and set to 0 (Sz129) to start counting the passing time of a new medal. Then, the sensor monitoring process is terminated and the caller's time monitoring update process is returned to.

If it is determined in step Sz121 that the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c are not in the ON state, and if it is determined in step Sz126 that the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c are not in the medal insertion signal ignoring time based on the medal insertion signal ignoring timer, then in step Sz127 the sensors When it is determined that the value of the check timer 2 does not exceed the maximum value of the normal passage time range, the value of the sensor check timer 2 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sz130), and the sensor monitoring process is terminated. Return to the caller's time monitoring update process.

In this way, in the sensor monitoring process, the process of steps Sz101 to Sz116 is performed, and the process related to the payout sensor is performed. By performing the processing of steps Sz117 to Sz130, it is determined based on the detection state of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c whether or not there is an abnormality related to the insertion of medals. It's like

Further, in the sensor monitoring process, by performing a process related to the payout sensor, after determining whether or not an abnormality related to the payout of medals has occurred, regardless of the determination result, the process related to the insertion sensor is continuously performed, and the medals are monitored. It is determined whether or not there is an abnormality related to the input of the

[Test signal output processing]
The test signal output processing performed by the main control section 41 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing the control contents of the test signal output process performed by the main control section 41. As shown in FIG. After performing the above-described sensor monitoring process, the main control unit 41 subsequently performs test signal processing.

As shown in FIG. 33, in the test signal output process, first, the one-game-time management timer set in a predetermined area of the game RAM area of the RAM 41c by the main process is referred to (Sz201), and the one-game-time management timer is set. It is determined whether or not the value is a predetermined value (in this embodiment, it is a value when starting time counting by the timer for one game time management and corresponds to 4.1 seconds) (Sz202). In addition, when step Sb43 of the main process is performed before the timer interrupt process (main), which is the caller of the time monitoring update process that calls the test signal output process, is performed, one game time A management timer value is set to a predetermined value.

When it is determined in step Sz202 that the one-game-time management timer is the initial value, the branch counter set in a predetermined area of the game RAM area of the RAM 41c by timer interrupt processing (main) is referred to (Sz203). , when the branch counter is a predetermined value (3 in this embodiment), a predetermined value (output to the test apparatus) set in a test signal output timer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c It is a value corresponding to the number of output data, and in this embodiment, the time ((22.4 milliseconds) x the number of output data (4)) for continuing to output a test signal that can specify one output data is set. to start timing (Sz204). On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sz202 that the one game time management timer is not the initial value, if it is determined that the branching timer is not 3 in step Sz203, after setting the test signal output timer in step Sz204, The initial address of the output data address for specifying the predetermined area of the RAM 41c storing the output data to be output as the test signal is obtained (Sz205). It should be noted that the output data is data capable of specifying the winning status of the special role and the winning status of the general role in the internal lottery.

After that, the value of the test signal output timer is referred to (Sz206), and it is determined whether or not the test signal output timer has finished counting the predetermined time (Sz207). Then, if the test signal output timer is not 0 and the test signal output timer has not finished counting the predetermined time, it is determined whether or not the output data fixing mode is set (Sz208). The output data fixed mode is set when the output data set by the RT information output process performed in step Sb2 of the main process is output as a test signal.

If the output data fixed mode is not set, the test signal output timer is updated by subtracting one unit time (0.56 milliseconds in this embodiment) (Sz209), and then in step Sz206 When the value of the referenced test signal output timer is divided by a predetermined value (in this embodiment, a value corresponding to the time (22.4 milliseconds) for continuing to output a test signal that can specify one output data) It is determined whether or not the remainder value is 0 (Sz210). Then, if the remainder value is 0, the process returns to step Sz205, and the processing of steps Sz205 to Sz210 is performed based on the value of the test signal output timer updated in step Sz209. On the other hand, if the remainder value is not 0, the value of the test signal output timer referred to in step Sz206 is set to a predetermined value (in this embodiment, the time to continue outputting a test signal that can specify one output data (22. 4 milliseconds)), add the quotient to the output data address of the initial address obtained in step Sz205 (Sz211), and proceed to step Sz212. Then, the output data address is further advanced by one address, and the output data stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c specified based on the output data address is acquired (Sz213).

If it is determined in step Sz208 that the output data fixed mode is set, the process proceeds to step Sz212, advances the output data address of the initial address set in step Sz206 by one address (Sz212), and The output data stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c specified based on the output data address is obtained (Sz213).

After that, the output data obtained in step Sz213 is set as the test signal output (Sz214), and the test signal output is set to the output port 6 and output (Sz215). If it is determined in step Sz207 that the value of the test signal output timer referred to in step Sz206 is 0, the test signal output is set to the OFF state (Sz216), and the test signal is output to output port 6. Set and output (Sz215). After setting the output of the test signal in step Sz215, the test signal output process is terminated and the process returns to the caller's time monitoring update process.

By such control, the main control unit 41 operates when the one game time management timer is set to the initial value and started, that is, when the rotation control of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started as a game, A test signal is output from the output port 6 for a predetermined period (89.6 milliseconds (22.4 milliseconds×4) in this embodiment).

In addition, the main control unit 41 sequentially outputs four pieces of output data that can specify the winning status of the general role and the special role in the internal lottery as a test signal every predetermined time (22.4 milliseconds in this embodiment). It is switched to output from the output port 6 .

[Timer update process]
A timer update process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the details of timer update processing performed by the main control unit 41. As shown in FIG. After performing the above-described test signal output processing, the main control unit 41 continuously performs timer update processing.

As shown in FIG. 34, in the timer update process, first, the medal passing time timer set in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c is referenced by the medal sensor process included in the non-game program, and the medal passing time is determined. It is determined whether or not the value of the time timer is 0 (Sz301).

When the value of the medal passing time timer is 0, that is, when the medal sensor processing does not measure the time for the medals to pass through the detection range of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, the timer update processing is terminated, and the caller terminates the timer update processing. return to the time monitoring update process.

On the other hand, if the value of the medal passing time timer is not 0, that is, if the medal sensor processing measures the time for medals to pass through the detection range of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, a predetermined value is added to the medal passing time timer. After updating by doing (Sz302), the timer update process is terminated, and the process returns to the time monitoring update process of the caller.

[Display monitor output data selection process]
Display monitor output data selection processing performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36. FIG. 35 and 36 are flowcharts showing the control contents of the display monitor output data selection process performed by the main control section 41. FIG. After performing the timer update process described above, the main control unit 41 subsequently performs the display monitor output data selection process.

The display monitor output data selection process is started after the port input process in the timer interrupt process (main) performed by the main control unit 41 every 0.56 milliseconds. This is a process for setting the lighting data of the LED used in .

As shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, in the display monitor output data selection process, first, the address of the display monitor selection timer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is set in the HL register (Sz401), and the address is displayed. The monitor selection timer value is updated by adding 1 (Sz402). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer value for display monitor selection has reached the upper limit (8928) (Sz403), and if it is determined that the timer value for display monitor selection has reached the upper limit (8928), The display monitor selection timer value is initialized and set to 0 (Sz403). The display monitor display content vector is updated by adding 1 (Sz405). The display monitor display content vector is updated within the range of 0 to 4 by correcting it to 0 when the value exceeds 4 by adding 1 to it.

If the display monitor display content vector is updated in step Sz405, and if it is determined in step Sz403 that the timer value for display monitor selection has not reached the upper limit value, proceed to step Sz406 and refer to the gaming state. (Sz406), and determines whether or not it is in the setting confirmation state (Sz407). If it is determined in step Sz407 that the setting confirmation state is in progress, the processing of steps Sz447 to Sz463 to be described later is performed to display the display test pattern on the 7-segment display of the gaming machine information display 50. FIG.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sz407 that it is not in the setting confirmation state, the address of the display monitor identifier output data table is set in the HL register (Sz408), and the value of the display monitor display content vector is set in the A and B registers. Read (Sz409). Then, based on the A register value and the HL register value, the address storing the identifier output data corresponding to the value of the display monitor display content vector is calculated (Sz410), and the identifier output data stored at the address is calculated. Read to DE register (Sz411).

After that, after adding 1 to the value of the display monitor display content vector read into the B register in step Sz409 and updating it (Sz412), the number of games played in the slot machine 1 is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. A played game number determination flag that can specify whether or not the specified number of games has been exceeded is read into the A register (Sz413), and the determination is made. The determination value contained in the number-of-games determination flag is extracted to the C register (Sz414).

Then, based on the determination value extracted to the C register, it is determined whether or not the number of games played in the slot machine 1 exceeds the specified number of games (Sz415).

If it is determined in step Sz415 that the number of games played in the slot machine 1 does not exceed the prescribed number of games, the address of the display monitor selection timer is set in the HL register (Sz416), and the predetermined area of the ROM 41b is set. is read into the BC register (Sz417). Then, the timer value for display monitor selection in the HL register is divided by the calculation constant 1 in the BC register (Sz418), and it is determined whether the value of the least significant bit of the quotient is 0 (Sz419). If it is determined in step Sz419 that the value of the least significant bit of the quotient is not 0, the DE register is cleared and 0 is set to output data that makes the display of the 7-segment display blank (non-display). Set in the DE register (Sz420) and proceed to step Sz421.

Further, when it is determined in step Sz415 that the number of games played in the slot machine 1 exceeds the prescribed number of games, the processing proceeds to step Sz421 without performing the processing of steps Sz416 to Sz420. If it is determined in step Sz419 that the value of the least significant bit of the quotient obtained by dividing the display monitor selection timer value by the calculation constant 1 is 0, the processing in step Sz420 is not performed. , Sz421.

In step Sz421, the DE register value is set as identifier display data in the output buffer of the gaming machine information display 50 (Sz421).

After that, display data for displaying "--" on the gaming machine information display 50 is set in the DE register (Sz422). Then, the head address of the display monitor threshold data table is set in the HL register (Sz423), the value of the display monitor display vector is read in the A register (Sz424), and the display monitor display vector is generated based on the A register value and the HL register value. The address where the threshold data corresponding to the value is stored is calculated (Sz425). Then, by referring to the role ratio monitor display valid data stored in a predetermined area corresponding to the value of the display monitor display vector and capable of specifying whether or not the role ratio display is valid, the role ratio display is valid. It is determined whether or not there is (Sz426).

If it is determined in step Sz426 that the role ratio display is not valid, the process proceeds to Sz446, which will be described later. Terminate the monitor output data selection process and return to the time monitor update process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sz426 that the display of the winning role ratio is valid, the data stored at the address specified by the HL register value is read into the B register as a threshold value (Sz427), and the display monitor role ratio The top address of the output data table is set in the HL register (Sz428), and the address storing the output data corresponding to the value of the display monitor display vector is calculated based on the A register value and the HL register value (Sz429). Then, the output data stored at that address is read into the A register (Sz430). After that, the output data of the A register and the threshold of the B register are compared, and the value indicating the comparison result is set in the C register (Sz431).

After that, data indicating that the display mode is non-blinking is temporarily set in the B register (Sz432), and it is determined whether or not the output data is less than the threshold based on the value of the C register (Sz433). If it is determined in step Sz433 that the output data is not less than the threshold value, data indicating that the display mode is blinking is provisionally set in the B register (Sz434), and the process proceeds to step Sz435. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sz433 that the output data is less than the threshold, the process proceeds to step Sz435 without performing the processing in step Sz434. In step Sz435, the quotient obtained by dividing the output data of the A register by 10 is set in the A register, and the remainder is set in the E register (Sz435).

After the output data of the A register is divided by 10 in step Sz435 and the quotient and remainder are set in predetermined registers, the top address of the display data table is set in the HL register (Sz436), and the HL register value is set to The display data stored at the address of the value obtained by adding the A register value is read into the D register, and the tens place display of the role ratio display is set (Sz437).

After that, the E register value is read into the A register (Sz438), and the display data stored at the address of the value obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value is read into the E register to display the role ratio of 1. The digit display is set (Sz439).

Thereafter, it is determined whether blinking is set based on the value of the B register (Sz440), and if it is determined that blinking is set, the display monitor selection timer value is read into the HL register (Sz441). A predetermined timer reference value (in this embodiment, a value corresponding to 0.3 seconds) is read into the BC register (Sz442), and the quotient obtained by dividing the HL register value by the BC register value is set in the HL register. and sets the remainder in the DE register (Sz443). After that, it is determined whether or not the least significant bit of the quotient set in the HL register is 0 (Sz444). is set to 0 (Sz445), and the process proceeds to step Sz446.

Further, if it is determined in step Sz440 that blinking is not set based on the value of the B register, the process proceeds to step Sz446 without performing the processing in steps Sz441 to Sz445. If it is determined in step Sz444 that the least significant bit of the quotient is 0, the process proceeds to step Sz446 without performing the processing in step Sz445.

In the step of Sz446, the DE register value is set in the output buffer of the gaming machine information display 50 as a role ratio display (Sz446). After that, the display monitor output data selection process is terminated, and the process returns to the time monitoring update process.

If it is determined in step Sz407 that the setting is being confirmed, the process proceeds to step Sz447, sets 0 as the display data (DE register value) (Sz447), displays the DE register value as an identifier, It is set in the output buffer of the gaming machine information display device 50 as the role ratio display (Sz448, Sz449).

After that, after reading the display monitor selection timer value into the HL register (Sz450), the HL register value is corrected (Sz451), and the calculation constant 2 registered in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 41b is read into the BC register (Sz452). ). Then, the quotient obtained by dividing the display monitor selection timer value of the HL register by the calculation constant 2 of the BC register is set in the HL register, and the remainder is set in the BC register (Sz453). After that, the calculation constant 3 registered in advance in the predetermined area of the ROM 41b is read into the BC register (Sz454), and the HL register value (quotient value set in step Sz453) is divided by the calculation constant 3 of the BC register. The resulting quotient is set in the HL register, and the remainder is set in the BC register (Sz455).

Then, the value of the L register is read into the A register (Sz456), the address of the output buffer of the game machine information display 50 for displaying the role ratio is read into the HL register (Sz457), and the A register value is added to the HL register. Correct (Sz458). Thereafter, the C register value is read into the A register (Sz459), the address of the display test pattern data of the gaming machine information display 50 is read into the DE register (Sz460), and the A register value is added to the DE register for correction (Sz461). ).

Thereafter, the output data of the display test pattern stored at the address specified by the DE register value is read into the A register (Sz462), and the output of the gaming machine information display device 50 for displaying the role ratio specified by the HL register value. The A register value is stored in the buffer (Sz463). After that, the display monitor output data selection process is terminated, and the process returns to the time monitoring update process.

[Counter update process]
A counter update process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing the control contents of the counter updating process performed by the main control unit 41. As shown in FIG. The counter update process is included in the game program, and is a subroutine called in the timer interrupt process included in the game program.

As shown in FIG. 37, in the counter updating process, first, a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is set with a medal insertion signal ignoring timer for measuring the medal insertion signal ignoring time that does not refer to the medal insertion signal by the above-described medal insertion signal processing. An address is set in the HL register (Sv301). Then, referring to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c corresponding to the address set in the HL register, it is determined whether or not the medal insertion signal ignoring timer value is 0, that is, whether or not the medal insertion signal ignoring time is being measured. is determined (Sv302), and if it is determined that the medal insertion signal ignoring timer value is not 0 and the medal insertion signal ignoring time is being clocked, the medal insertion signal ignoring timer value is updated by subtracting 1 ( Sv303).

After that, as described above, the address of the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which the one game time management timer for measuring the minimum time of one game is set is set in the HL register (Sv304). Then, referring to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c corresponding to the address set in the HL register, it is determined whether or not the one game time management timer value is 0, that is, whether or not the minimum time for one game is being counted. (Sv305), and when it is determined that the one-game-time management timer is not 0 and that the minimum time for one game is being measured, the one-game-time management timer value is updated by subtracting 1. (Sv306). After that, the counter update process is ended, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

Thus, in the counter update process, the medal insertion signal ignoring counter, which is a counter that counts the time (the medal insertion signal ignoring time, the minimum time for one game, etc.) managed by the game program (main processing, medal insertion signal processing, etc.) The timer and one game time management timer are updated. On the other hand, a medal passing time timer that measures the time (medal sensor monitoring time, test signal output time, medal passing time, etc.) managed by a non-game program (medal sensor check processing, sensor monitoring processing, test signal output processing, etc.), The sensor check timer 1, sensor check timer 2, and test signal output timer are not updated in the counter update process included in the game program, and various processes included in the non-game program (sensor monitoring process, test signal output process , timer update processing).

[Information during section display LED lighting]
The section display LED lighting notification performed by the sub-controller 91 will be described with reference to FIG. 38 . FIG. 38 is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of the section display LED lighting notification.

As described above, the main control unit 41 controls the section display LED 19 to light up when starting control of the AT after controlling to the advantageous section, and performs section display indicating that control is being performed in the advantageous section. It is possible. Then, when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped while the interval display is being performed, and the power supply is resumed according to the normal procedure, the main control unit 41 performs the interval display. It is designed to return to the state where it is.

Further, after controlling the advantageous section, the main control section 41 sends to the sub-control section 91 a command capable of specifying that the section display is to be performed when the section display is started along with the start of AT control. to send. Further, when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is resumed and the state before the power supply is stopped is restored, when the interval display is to be resumed, the sub-control unit 91 outputs a command capable of specifying that the interval display is to be performed. Send to

On the other hand, when the sub-controller 91 detects that the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped, the sub-controller 91 changes the time specified based on the RTC (real time clock) provided in the sub-controller 91 to the sub-controller. 91 is stored in the storage means. Further, when it is specified that the main control section 41 side will display the section based on the command from the main control section 41 when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted, the RTC is referred to. The current time is specified, the current time is compared with the time stored in the storage means when the power supply is stopped, and the slot machine 1 is transferred to the slot machine 1 over the specified time (in this embodiment, 4:00 am). It is determined whether or not the power supply has been restarted. Then, when it is determined that the power supply to the slot machine 1 has resumed over a specific time (in this embodiment, 4:00 am), the fact that the section display is being performed on the main control unit 41 side. Using the liquid crystal display 51 and the effect LED 57, the section display LED lighting notification is performed.

In the section display LED lighting notification, a notification image (a character indicating that the section display LED 19 is in a lighting state ("section display LED lighting middle"), an image suggesting the position of the section display LED 19 in the slot machine 1, and an image of a predetermined character) are displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and are installed on the player side of the front door 1b of the slot machine 1. By controlling the LEDs 57L and 57R for presentation to be lit in a lighting mode different from that during a normal game, it is notified that the lighting state is controlled.

As shown in FIG. 38(a), the main control unit 41 controls the game section to be an advantageous section, starts the section display when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and controls the section display LED 19 to light up. Then, it is notified that the control is being performed in the advantageous section. At this time, the sub-control unit 91 does not give the section display LED lighting notification. In this state, the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped, and after that, when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is resumed according to the normal procedure in which the section display LED extinguishing operation described later is not performed, the main control unit 41 controls the section display LED 19 to be lit. On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 performs control so as to perform notification during lighting of the section display LED. Then, when a predetermined specific period elapses after the section display LED lighting notification is started, or when a game start operation is performed before the specific period elapses, the section display LED lighting section notification is performed. control to terminate.

Also, as shown in FIG. 38(b), when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped while the main control unit 41 is displaying the interval, and then the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted. Then, when the section display LED is turned off, the main control unit 41 initializes the information about the advantageous section and returns to a state in which the game can be played. As a result, the section display is not performed, and the section display LED 19 is returned to the lighting state. At this time, since the main control unit 41 does not perform segment display, it does not transmit to the sub-control unit 91 a command that can specify that segment display is to be performed. On the other hand, when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted, the sub-control unit 91 does not receive a command that specifies that the interval display is to be performed from the main control unit 41, so that the interval display LED is turned on. Control is performed so as to resume the control of performance without performing medium notification.

Further, as shown in FIG. 38(c), the main control unit 41 does not display the section even when the game section is controlled to be the advantageous section if the predetermined start condition is not satisfied. In this state, the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped, and even when the power supply is restarted after that, the interval display is not performed until a predetermined start condition is satisfied. At this time, since the main control unit 41 does not perform segment display, it does not transmit to the sub-control unit 91 a command that can specify that segment display is to be performed. On the other hand, when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted, the sub-control unit 91 does not receive a command that specifies that the interval display is to be performed from the main control unit 41, so that the interval display LED is turned on. Control is performed so as to resume the control of performance without performing medium notification.

Note that the sub-controller 91 of this embodiment has a configuration that includes an RTC (real-time clock) and can specify the time, but the sub-controller 91 may have a configuration that does not include the RTC. In a configuration in which the sub-controller 91 does not have an RTC, when it is specified that a section display is to be performed on the main control section 41 side when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted, the section display is always performed. The configuration may be such that notification is given during LED lighting.

As described above, the sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment performs the section display LED lighting notification for a certain period of time after the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, and after the predetermined period of time has elapsed, the section display LED is turned on. The intermediate notification is terminated. As a result, when the section display returns to the state where the section display is performed when the power supply is started, the section display LED lighting notification is performed to that effect. can be made to recognize that the section is being displayed. On the other hand, since the section display LED lighting notification is terminated after a certain period of time, the section display LED lighting section notification is continued after the amusement arcade is opened, which may cause players, etc., to feel uncomfortable. can be prevented.

After the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped while the interval display is being performed on the main control unit 41 side, the sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment performs a specific time outside the business hours of the amusement arcade (this implementation). For example, when the power supply starts across 4:00 a.m. and returns to the state where the section display is performed, the section display LED is lit to indicate that the section display has been restored. While the notification is performed using the liquid crystal display 51, when the power supply starts before the specific time and the state in which the section display is performed is restored, the section display LED lighting-up notification is not performed. It's becoming As a result, it is possible to prevent players from feeling uncomfortable even if power is cut off temporarily during business hours.

The sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment is designed to end the section display LED lighting notification without waiting for the elapse of a predetermined period of time when the game is started while the section display LED lighting section notification is being performed. there is As a result, even if a certain period of time has not elapsed since the start of the section display LED lighting notification, the section display LED lighting section notification can be terminated by starting the game.

In the sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment, after the power supply is stopped in the interval before the start of AT in which the interval display is not performed on the main control unit 41 side, the power supply is started and the interval display is not performed. When the state is restored, the notification during lighting of the section display LED is not performed. As a result, it is possible to make the amusement arcade clerk aware that the amusement arcade will be opened while the section is being displayed only when the state is controlled to the advantageous section and the section is being displayed. can.

[Timer interrupt processing (sub)]
Next, timer interrupt processing (sub) executed by the sub control unit 91 at intervals of 1.12 ms based on the count value of the internal clock will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing (sub) performed by the sub control unit 91 .

As shown in FIG. 39, in the timer interrupt process (sub), the sub-control unit 91 first saves the registers in use to the stack area (Sp101). Next, the sub-controller 91 performs power failure determination processing (Sp102). In the power failure determination process, the sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not a voltage drop signal is input from the power failure detection circuit. It is determined whether or not a voltage drop signal has been input, and if a voltage drop signal has been input in the previous power failure determination process, it is determined that a power failure has occurred, and a power failure flag indicating that fact is set.

After the power failure determination process in step Sp102, the sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not the power failure flag is set (Sp103), and if the power failure flag is set, power failure processing (sub) transition to In the power-off processing (sub), the sub-control unit 91 sets the backup flag used in the startup processing (sub) after the backup data is created, and calculates the checksum by calculating the exclusive OR of the backup data. and so on.

The sub-control unit 91 executes command analysis processing when the power interruption flag is not set (Sp104). In the command analysis process, the sub-controller 91 determines whether or not a command is stored in the command buffer, and acquires the command from the command buffer if the command is stored in the command buffer. Then, the sub-controller 91 executes processing according to the acquired command.

The sub-control unit 91 executes a payout number counter setting process (Sp105). In the payout number counter setting process, the sub-control unit 91 executes a process of setting the payout number counter to the number of payouts when medals are paid out during a bonus. The sub-control unit 91 updates the display of the number of won medals and the display of the total number of won medals on the liquid crystal display 51 based on the number of medals set in the payout number counter.

The sub-controller 91 executes the number display control process (Sp106). In the number display control process, the sub-controller 91 controls various displays on the liquid crystal display 51 during the bonus. Specifically, the sub-control unit 91 displays the number of obtainable medals indicating the number of medals that can be obtained in the bonus being controlled (that is, the number of medals that can be obtained by the end of the bonus), and the bonus display that is being controlled. , the number of medals obtained by the player during the predetermined period before the bonus under control is started, and the number of medals obtained by the player in the bonus under control. A display of the total number of medals obtained by adding the number of medals is displayed.

In addition, in the display of the total number of won medals, when the bonus is newly controlled within 100 games from the end of the bonus (so-called continuous play), the number of medals obtained by the player in the previous bonus is newly controlled. The number of medals obtained by the player in the given bonus is added and displayed. In addition, in the display of the total number of medals obtained, the number of medals obtained by the bonus is accumulated and displayed as long as the bonus is controlled within 100 games. Therefore, the predetermined period before the bonus under control is started is the control period of the previous bonus that was controlled within 100 games going back in time from the start of the bonus under control.

In this embodiment, two types of bonuses, CB and BB, are provided as bonuses. The display of the total number of won medals indicates the total number of medals the player has won in the previous BB when the player is newly controlled by the BB within a predetermined period (100 games) after the previous BB ends (so-called continuous chan). The number of medals acquired by the player in the newly controlled BB may be added to the number and displayed, or the CB is newly controlled within a predetermined period (100 games) after the previous CB ends. (so-called consecutive chan), the number of medals obtained by the player in the newly controlled CB may be added to the number of medals obtained by the player in the previous CB and displayed. . Also, between CB and BB, in the case of so-called consecutive chances, the total number of medals obtained in these bonuses may be displayed as the total number of medals obtained.

Also, for example, BB ends when 345 or more medals are paid out. Therefore, when the BB is started, the display of the number of obtainable coins is 345. Then, the BB ends in the game when the display of the number of obtainable coins becomes 0. When the BB starts, the display of the number of obtainable medals starts from 345, but the BB may end when 345 or more medals are paid out. Therefore, the display of the number of acquired coins or the addition of the total number of acquired coins may end after the subtraction of the display of the number of available coins ends.

The sub-controller 91 executes a light-off control process (Sp107). In the extinguishing control process, the sub-controller 91 executes control for extinguishing the advantageous lamps 60 that have been lit during the bonus and the reel backlights 28 that illuminate the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R from behind. The reel backlight 28 consists of 12 LEDs corresponding to three consecutive symbols on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and each symbol can be illuminated independently. Then, the sub-control unit 91 changes the lighting mode of the mid-advantage lamp 60 from the lighting mode of the mid-bonus mode to the result reporting mode when executing the result notification with the end of the bonus. Then, after the reel backlight 28 is turned off, the advantage lamp 60 is turned off. The advantageous lamp 60 is controlled so as to be extinguished before the game next to the final game of the bonus can be started. A game can be started is a state in which the operation of the start switch 7 is validated according to the bet number setting.

The sub-control unit 91 executes a winning effect execution process (Sp108). In the winning effect execution process, the sub-control unit 91 executes a winning effect according to the type of winning generated during the bonus. The winning effect is executed by lighting or flashing of the reel backlight 28. - 特許庁The winning effects include a first winning effect and a second winning effect. The flashing modes of the reel backlights 28 are different between the first winning effect and the second winning effect. Specifically, the second winning effect blinks (flashes) violently at a faster blinking speed than the first winning effect. The aspect of the second winning effect is not limited to this, and may be other aspects such as changing the brightness when the reel backlight 28 is blinked.

[Payout number counter set process]
Next, the payout number counter setting process executed by the sub-controller 91 in the timer interrupt process (sub) will be described. FIG. 40 is a flow chart of payout number counter setting processing performed by the sub-controller 91 .

As shown in FIG. 40, in the payout number counter setting process, the sub-control section 91 first determines whether or not a bonus is in progress based on a command from the main control section 41 (Sa101). The sub-controller 91 terminates the process when the bonus is not in progress.

The sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not the payout of medals has occurred based on the command from the main control unit 41 during the bonus (Sa102). The sub-control unit 91 ends the process when the payout of medals has not occurred.

When the payout of medals occurs, the sub-control unit 91 sets the payout number of medals in the payout number counter (Sa103), sets a payout flag that can specify that the payout of medals has occurred, in the RAM 91c, and executes processing. End (Sa104).

[Number of sheets display control process]
Next, the number display control process executed by the sub-controller 91 in the timer interrupt process (sub) will be described. FIG. 41 is a flow chart of the number display control process performed by the sub-controller 91 .

As shown in FIG. 41, in the number display control process, the sub-controller 91 first determines whether or not a bonus is in progress based on a command from the main controller 41 (Sb101). The sub-controller 91 terminates the process when the bonus is not in progress.

The sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not the payout flag has been set at Sa104 in FIG. 40 during the bonus (Sb102). When the payout flag is set, the sub-control unit 91 performs a number display update control process (see FIG. 42) for updating various displays (acquirable number display, total number of acquired number display, acquired number display) during the bonus. Execute (Sb103).

On the other hand, when it is determined in Sb102 that the payout flag has not been set, the sub-control section 91 determines whether or not the number of bets has been set (Sb104). The sub-control unit 91 ends the process when the number of bets is not set. When the number of bets is set, the sub-control unit 91 subtracts two coins corresponding to the number of bets during the bonus from the display of the number of wins and the display of the total number of wins (Sb105). At this time, two sheets are collectively subtracted at once. For example, 345 is reduced to 343 without going through 344.

[Number of sheets display update control process]
Next, the number display update control process executed by the sub-controller 91 in the number display control process will be described. FIG. 42 is a flow chart of the number display update control process performed by the sub-controller 91 .

As shown in FIG. 42, in the number display update control process, the sub-controller 91 determines whether or not the display update time has elapsed (Sc101). The display update time is the time for updating the obtainable number display, the obtained number display, and the total obtained number display. The display update time is measured by subtracting the time set in the timer. The display update time is the timing of subtracting the display of the number of acquisitions, the timing of adding the number of acquisitions in the display of the number of acquisitions, and the total number of acquisitions in the display of the total number of acquisitions. is specified by measuring the display update time. In this way, by continuing to display for a certain period of time while measuring the display update time and updating the display when the display update time elapses, it is possible to secure the time to display the number of sheets indicated by each display. The display can be made easier to recognize. For example, when the obtainable number display becomes 0, it is possible to make it easier to recognize that fact.

When the display update time has elapsed, the sub-control section 91 determines whether or not the payout number counter has reached 0 (Sc102). When the payout number counter is not 0, the sub-control section 91 subtracts one from the payout number counter (Sc103).

Then, the sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not the display of the number of obtainable coins has become 0 (Sc104). The sub-control unit 91 ends the process when the obtainable number display is not 0. When the obtainable number display becomes 0, the sub-control unit 91 adds one to the display of the number of obtained cards, and adds one to the display of the total number of obtained cards at the same timing (Sc105). It should be noted that the main control unit 41 causes the display of the number of payouts (that is, the display of the number of acquired coins) to be added at the same timing as the addition of the display of the number of won coins.

Further, when the display of the number of obtainable sheets is not 0, the sub-control unit 91 adds one to the display of the number of sheets to be obtained, adds one to the display of the total number of sheets to be obtained at the same timing, and further adds one to the display of the total number of sheets to be obtained at the same timing. 1 is subtracted from the obtainable number display (Sc106). That is, the sub-controller 91 synchronizes the addition and subtraction of various displays. It should be noted that the main control unit 41 causes the display of the number of payouts (that is, the display of the number of acquired coins) to be added at the same timing as the addition of the display of the number of won coins.

On the other hand, when it is determined in Sc102 that the payout number counter has not reached 0, the sub-control section 91 clears the payout flag (Sc107). Then, the sub-control unit 91 executes result notification to finally display a result image that can specify the game result (Sc108).

[Lights-out control process]
Next, the light-off control process executed by the sub-controller 91 in the timer interrupt process (sub) will be described. FIG. 43 is a flow chart of the extinguishing control process performed by the sub-controller 91. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 43, in the light-off control process, the sub-controller 91 first determines whether or not a bonus is in progress based on a command from the main controller 41 (Sd101). The sub-controller 91 terminates the process when the bonus is not in progress. When the bonus is being played, the sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not execution of result notification has been started in Sc104 of FIG. 42 (Sd102). The sub-control unit 91 ends the process when the execution of result notification has not started. When the result notification is started, the sub-control unit 91 executes extinguishing control of the advantage lamp 60 (Sd103). Note that the processing of Sd102 and Sd103 is omitted when the extinguishing control is already being executed.

The sub-controller 91 determines whether it is time to turn off the reel backlight 28 (Sd104). The sub-control unit 91 proceeds to Sd106 when it is not the time to turn off the reel backlight 28 . The sub-control unit 91 turns off the reel backlight 28 when it is time to turn off the reel backlight 28 (Sd105).

The sub control unit 91 determines whether it is time to turn off the advantage lamp 60 (Sd106). The sub control unit 91 terminates the process when it is not the time to turn off the advantage lamp 60 . When it is time to turn off the advantageous lamp 60, the sub-control unit 91 turns off the advantageous lamp 60 and terminates the process (Sd107).

[Prize-winning effect execution processing]
Next, the winning effect execution process executed by the sub-controller 91 in the timer interrupt process (sub) will be described. FIG. 44 is a flow chart of a winning effect execution process performed by the sub-controller 91. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 44, in the winning effect execution process, the sub-control section 91 first determines whether or not a bonus is in progress based on a command from the main control section 41 (Se101). The sub-controller 91 terminates the process when the bonus is not in progress. During the bonus, the sub-control section 91 determines whether or not a winning combination of paying out 15 coins is won based on a command from the main control section 41 (Se102). That is, the sub-control section 91 determines whether or not 15 coins have been paid out. When 15 coins are paid out, the sub-control unit 91 executes the first winning effect and ends the process (Se103).

When the payout of 15 coins has not occurred, the sub-control portion 91 determines whether or not a win has been won based on the command from the main control portion 41 (Se104). That is, the sub-control section 91 determines whether or not 14 coins have been paid out. The sub-control section 91 terminates the process when 14 coins have not been paid out. When 14 coins are paid out, the sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not the bonus being controlled is the first win (Se105). The sub-control unit 91 executes the second winning effect when the winning is the first time (Se106). The sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not it is the final game of the bonus when it is not the first winning (Se107). The final game of the bonus here is a game in which the bonus ends when 14 coins are paid out. The sub-control unit 91 executes the first winning effect when the final bonus game is played (Se108). The sub-control unit 91 terminates the process when the bonus game is not the final game.

In this embodiment, the second winning effect is executed when 14 coins are paid out for the first time (Se106), and the first winning effect is performed when 14 coins are paid out in a game that can be the final game of the bonus. (Se108), and when the first payout of 14 coins is not generated and the game is not likely to be the final game of the bonus, the winning effect is not executed even if the payout of 14 coins is generated. The first winning effect may be executed when the 14 coins are paid out even when the 14 coins are not paid out and the game is not likely to be the final game of the bonus.

It should be noted that, when 14 coins are paid out once, the number of winning bonuses is maximized, and when 14 coins are paid out for the first time, the second winning effect is executed. , not limited to one time, but when 14 payouts occur in a specific time, the number of bonuses acquired is maximized, and when 14 payouts occur in the specific time, a second winning performance is executed. It may be configured to

[Example of operation timing]
Before describing an example of reel control during CB and BB, "first timing" and "second timing" in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 45 is a diagram for explaining an example of operation timing for the left reel 2L.

The "first timing" is the timing at which the cherry symbol can be drawn onto the winning line LN within the drawable range. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 45, the first timing is the timing of operating the left stop switch 8L when the number 1 orange or number 2 cherry is positioned in the middle stage, and the timing of operating the left stop switch 8L when the number 8 bell or number 9 cherry is positioned. There are provided a timing for operating the left stop switch 8L when the left stop switch 8L is positioned at the middle stage and a timing for operating the left stop switch 8L when the 13th bell or the 14th cherry is positioned at the middle stage. By operating the left stop switch 8L at such a first timing, even if the maximum stop delay time during CB is 75 ms, the pattern displayed when the left stop switch 8L is operated can be changed. , symbols from there to one frame ahead, and symbols for a total of two frames can be stopped on the middle line LN, so the cherry symbol will stop on the winning line LN.

"Second timing" is the timing at which the watermelon symbol can be drawn onto the pay line LN within the drawable range. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 45, the timing for operating the left stop switch 8L when the 18th bar or the 19th watermelon is positioned in the middle stage is provided as the second timing. By operating the left stop switch 8L at such a second timing, even if the maximum stop delay time during CB is 75 ms, the pattern displayed when the left stop switch 8L is operated can be changed. , a total of 2 frames of symbols up to one frame ahead can be stopped on the middle line LN, so the watermelon symbol will be stopped on the winning line LN.

[Example of reel control when pressed forward during CB]
FIG. 46 is a diagram showing an example of reel control when forward pressing is performed during CB. As shown in FIG. 46(A), when a start operation is performed during CB, the reels are spun and the game is started in a state in which all minor wins have been won.

After FIG. 46(A), as shown in FIG. 46(B1), as the first stop operation, when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the first timing (see FIG. 45), the middle stage on the pay line LN The cherry pattern stops at . As described above, during the CB, the left reel 2L is set to be the CT reel. You can stop the pattern.

After FIG. 46(B1), as shown in FIG. 46(C1), when the middle stop switch 8C is operated as the second stop operation, the bell pattern stops on the pay line LN regardless of the operation timing. do.

After FIG. 46(C1), as shown in FIG. 46(D1), when the right stop switch 8R is operated as the third stop operation, the bell pattern stops on the pay line LN regardless of the operation timing. do. In this case, a symbol combination corresponding to a cherry win is drawn out on the pay line LN, and 15 medals are paid out.

On the other hand, after FIG. 46(A), as shown in FIG. 46(B2), as the first stop operation, when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the second timing (see FIG. 45), a The watermelon pattern stops.

After FIG. 46(B2), when the middle stop switch 8C is operated as the second stop operation, as shown in FIG. A watermelon symbol stops on the LN. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 46 (C3), if the operation timing is outside the drawable range of the watermelon symbol, the replay symbol stops on the pay line LN.

After FIG. 46(C2), when the right stop switch 8R is operated as the third stop operation, as shown in FIG. A watermelon pattern stops on the winning line LN. As a result, the symbol combination corresponding to the watermelon win is drawn out on the pay line LN, and 15 medals are paid out. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 46 (D2-2), if the operation timing is outside the watermelon symbol pull-in range, the replay symbols stop on the pay line LN. In this case, no symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination is drawn on the winning line LN, and medals are not paid out.

After FIG. 46(C3), as shown in FIG. 46(D3), when the right stop switch 8R is operated as the third stop operation, the replay symbols stop on the pay line LN regardless of the operation timing. do. In this case, no symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination is drawn on the winning line LN, and medals are not paid out.

In this way, when the player operates the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R by forward pressing during the CB, if the left stop switch 8L can be operated at the first timing as the first stop operation, then the stop switch is stopped. Regardless of the operation timing of the switches 8C and 8R, a cherry prize can always be generated and 15 medals can be obtained.

On the other hand, when the player operates the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R by forward pressing during the CB, the left stop switch 8L is operated at the second timing as the first stop operation, and then the stop switches 8C, 8R are operated. A watermelon can be won depending on the operation timing, but no prize can be generated depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 8C and 8R.

[Example of reel control when reverse pressed during CB]
FIG. 47 is a diagram showing an example of reel control in the case of reverse pressing during CB. As shown in FIG. 47(A), when the start operation is performed during the CB, the reels are spun and the game is started with all the small wins won.

After FIG. 47(A), as shown in FIG. 47(B), when the right stop switch 8R is operated as the first stop operation, the replay symbols stop on the winning line LN regardless of the operation timing. do.

After FIG. 47(B), as shown in FIG. 47(C), when the middle stop switch 8C is operated as the second stop operation, the replay symbols stop on the pay line LN regardless of the operation timing. do.

After FIG. 47(C), as shown in FIG. 47(D1), as the third stop operation, the left stop switch 8L is operated at the first timing when the bell pattern is not drawn onto the middle line LN. Then, the cherry symbol stops on the winning line LN. Specifically, if the left stop switch 8L is operated when any one of the first orange, second cherry, ninth cherry, and fourteenth cherry is positioned in the middle stage of the first timing. , the cherry symbols stop on the winning line LN. In this case, a symbol combination corresponding to the winning of the technical intervention role is drawn on the winning line LN, and 14 medals are paid out.

On the other hand, after FIG. 47(C), when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the second timing as the third stop operation as shown in FIG. 47(D2), the replay symbols stop on the pay line LN. . In this case, no symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination is drawn on the winning line LN, and medals are not paid out.

After FIG. 47(C), as shown in FIG. 47(D3), as a third stop operation, when the left stop switch 8L is operated at a timing within the retractable range of the bell pattern, The bell symbol stops at Specifically, any of the 4th replay, 5th bell, 7th blank, 8th bell, 12th replay, 13th bell, 16th replay, and 17th bell is in the middle row. When the left stop switch 8L is operated at the position of , the bell pattern is stopped on the winning line LN. In this case, a symbol combination corresponding to the winning of Bell 2 is derived on the winning line LN, and 15 medals are paid out.

In this way, when the player operates the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R by reverse pressing during CB, if the left stop switch 8L can be operated at the first timing as the third stop operation, the technical intervention role Winning can be generated and 14 medals can be obtained.

On the other hand, when the player operates the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R by pressing them in reverse during the CB, if the left stop switch 8L is operated at the second timing as the third stop operation, no winning can occur. Can not.

Furthermore, when the player operates the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R by reverse pressing during the CB, as the third stop operation, the left stop switch 8L is operated at a timing within the retractable range of the bell pattern, and the bell 2 Winning can be generated and 15 medals can be obtained.

As described above, during the CB, the player wins 14 medals by making the technical intervening role win according to the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, cherry, watermelon, etc. , or 15 medals such as Bell 2 can be won to obtain 15 medals, and the number of medals to be obtained can be adjusted. Moreover, during the CB, unlike during the BB, the technical intervening hand wins every game, so the player can play such a game of adjusting the number of medals obtained every game.

[Example of reel control when pressed forward during BB]
FIG. 48 is a diagram showing an example of reel control when forward pressing is performed during BB. As shown in FIG. 48(A), when a start operation is performed during BB, an internal lottery is performed and the reels are rotated to start the game. This example shows a case in which Bell 1 and a technical intervening role are simultaneously won by an internal lottery.

After FIG. 48(A), as shown in FIG. 48(B), when the stop switch 8L is operated at the first timing or the second timing as the first stop operation, the bell pattern stops on the pay line LN. do. As described above, during the BB, unlike during the CB, a maximum of 4 symbols can be drawn on the left reel 2L.

After FIG. 48(B), as shown in FIG. 48(C), when the middle stop switch 8C is operated as the second stop operation, the bell pattern stops on the pay line LN regardless of the operation timing. do.

After FIG. 48(C), as shown in FIG. 48(D), when the right stop switch 8R is operated as the third stop operation, the bell pattern stops on the pay line LN regardless of the operation timing. do. In this case, a symbol combination corresponding to the winning of Bell 1 is drawn on the winning line LN, and 15 medals are paid out.

In this way, when the player operates the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R by forward pressing during the BB, as the first stop operation, whether the left stop switch 8L is operated at the first timing or the second timing. Regardless, you can always win a Bell 1 prize and earn 15 medals.

[Example of reel control when reverse pressed during BB]
FIG. 49 is a diagram showing an example of reel control in the case of reverse pressing during BB. As shown in FIG. 49A, when a start operation is performed during the BB, an internal lottery is performed and the reels are rotated to start the game. This example shows a case in which Bell 1 and a technical intervening role are simultaneously won by an internal lottery.

After FIG. 49(A), as shown in FIG. 49(B), when the right stop switch 8R is operated as the first stop operation, the replay symbols stop on the winning line LN regardless of the operation timing. do.

After FIG. 49(B), as shown in FIG. 49(C), when the middle stop switch 8C is operated as the second stop operation, the replay symbols stop on the pay line LN regardless of the operation timing. do.

After FIG. 49(C), when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the first timing as the third stop operation, the cherry symbols stop on the pay line LN as shown in FIG. 49(D1). In this case, a symbol combination corresponding to the winning of the technical intervention role is drawn on the winning line LN, and 14 medals are paid out. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 49 (D2), when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the second timing, the watermelon pattern stops on the pay line LN. In this case, no symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination is drawn on the winning line LN, and medals are not paid out.

In this way, when the player operates the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R by pressing them in reverse during the BB, if the left stop switch 8L can be operated at the first timing as the first stop operation, the player will surely win the technical intervention role. It can be generated and 15 medals can be obtained. On the other hand, if the player operates the left stop switch 8L at the second timing, no winning can occur.

As described above, during the BB, the player wins 14 medals by winning the technical intervening role according to the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, or wins the bell 1. It is possible to win a prize and obtain 15 medals, and the number of medals to be obtained can be adjusted during the BB. During the BB, unlike during the CB, the player can play such a game in which the number of medals to be obtained is adjusted only in the game in which the technical intervening role is won in the internal lottery. The control period of BB is longer than that of CB.

[Setting Suggestion Effect]
FIG. 50 is a diagram showing an example of setting suggestion effect (first mode) during CB. In the present embodiment, the sub-controller 91 uses the liquid crystal display 51 to execute setting suggestion rendering during CB. Specifically, the setting suggesting effect may be executed when the operation is performed at the first timing at which the winning is more likely to occur than at the second timing, while the setting suggesting effect is not executed when the operation is performed at the second timing. .

In the present embodiment, the sub-control unit 91, of the first timing, the left stop at the timing when the symbol No. 8 or No. 9 provided at a position away from the symbol No. 19 on the left reel 2L passes through the middle stage. When the switch 8L is operated and the 9th cherry on the left reel 2L is drawn to the middle stage, the setting suggesting performance is executed. On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 causes the left stop switch 8L to be turned on at the timing when the 1st, 2nd, or 13th or 14th symbols close to the 19th symbol on the left reel 2L pass through the middle row of the first timing. When operated, the setting suggestion effect is not executed.

As shown in FIG. 50(A), an image showing outer space is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 during CB. After FIG. 50(A), as the first stop operation, when the left reel 2L is operated at the first timing when the number 9 cherry symbol drawable range is reached, a winning line is displayed as shown in FIG. 50(B1). The number 9 cherry symbol stops on the LN.

After FIG. 50(B1), as shown in FIG. 50(C1), the display screen of the liquid crystal display 51 is temporarily rendered white, and no image is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 50(D1), the setting suggesting effect is executed, and an image of shooting stars is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. FIG. Note that the image shown in FIG. 50 (D1) corresponds to the image of the first mode in the setting suggestion effect.

On the other hand, after FIG. 50(A), as the first stop operation, when the left reel 2L is operated at the first timing within which the number 2 or number 14 cherry symbol can be pulled in, the left reel 2L is operated as shown in FIG. 50(B2). Thus, the second or fourteenth cherry symbol stops on the winning line LN.

When the 2nd or 14th cherry symbol stops on the pay line LN, after that, as shown in FIGS. The image shown is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 .

After FIG. 50(A), as the first stop operation, when the left reel 2L is operated at the second timing when the number 19 watermelon symbol can be pulled in, as shown in FIG. 50(B3), The 19th watermelon pattern stops on the winning line LN.

When the number 19 watermelon symbol stops on the pay line LN, after that, as shown in FIGS. It is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 .

Thus, during CB, the setting suggesting performance is sometimes executed when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the first timing, while the setting suggesting performance is not executed when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the second timing. Furthermore, the left stop switch 8L is operated at the first timing when the symbol No. 8 or No. 9 provided at a position away from the symbol No. 19 on the left reel 2L passes through the middle row, and the left reel 2L is operated. When the number 9 cherry is drawn to the middle stage, the setting suggestion effect is executed, while the number 1 or 2, or the number 13 or 14, which is close to the pattern of number 19 on the left reel 2L, is executed at the first timing. When the left stop switch 8L is operated at the timing when the number symbol passes through the middle stage, the setting suggesting effect is not executed.

FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a setting suggestion effect mode determination table. Processing for determining the mode of the setting suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIG. The sub-control unit 91 can execute a plurality of types of setting suggestion effects with different modes. Specifically, the sub-control unit 91 executes one of the setting suggestion effect of the first mode, the setting suggestion effect of the second mode, and the setting suggestion effect of the third mode. The sub-control unit 91 determines the mode of the setting suggestion effect to be executed based on the timing at which the left stop switch 8L is operated and the set value. Any of the first, second, and third aspects can be applied if each aspect is different, for example, the number of shooting stars and their speed are different. good too.

FIG. 51(A) is a first setting suggesting effect mode determination table showing the probabilities of the setting suggesting effect mode to be executed when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the timing when the symbol No. 9 passes through the middle stage. be. If the left stop switch 8L is operated at the timing when the pattern of number 9 passes through the middle stage, the number of sliding coma is zero.

As shown in FIG. 51(A), when the set value is 1 or 2, the sub-control unit 91 has a probability of 60% to execute the setting suggestion effect in the first mode, and a probability of 30% to execute the second mode. execution of the setting suggestion effect of the third mode is determined with a probability of 10%. That is, when the set value is 1 or 2, the probability that the setting suggesting effect of the first mode is executed is the highest, the probability that the setting suggesting effect of the second mode is executed is high, and the setting of the third mode is high. The probability that the suggestion production is executed is the lowest.

When the set value is 3, 4 or 5, the sub-control unit 91 executes the setting suggestion effect of the first mode with a probability of 20%, and executes the setting suggestion effect of the second mode with a probability of 60%. Execution of the setting suggestion effect of the third mode is determined with a probability of 20%. That is, when the set value is 3, 4 or 5, the probability of executing the setting suggestion effect of the second mode is the highest, and the probability of executing the setting suggestion effect of the first mode and the setting suggestion effect of the third mode are the highest. are equally likely to be executed.

When the set value is 6, the sub control unit 91 executes the setting suggestion effect of the first mode with a probability of 10%, the setting suggestion effect of the second mode with a probability of 30%, and the setting suggestion effect of the second mode with a probability of 60%. , the execution of the setting suggestion effect of the third mode is determined. That is, when the set value is 6, the probability that the setting suggesting effect of the third mode is executed is the highest, the probability that the setting suggesting effect of the second mode is executed next is high, and the setting suggesting effect of the first mode is highly likely to be executed. is the least likely to be executed.

FIG. 51(B) is a second setting suggesting effect mode determination table showing the probabilities of the setting suggesting effect mode to be executed when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the timing when the symbol No. 8 passes through the middle stage. be. When the left stop switch 8L is operated at the timing when the symbol No. 8 passes through the middle stage, the number of sliding coma is one.

As shown in FIG. 51(B), when the set value is 1 or 2, the sub-control unit 91 has a probability of 40% to execute the setting suggestion effect in the first mode, and a probability of 30% to execute the second mode. execution of the setting suggestion effect of the third mode is determined with a probability of 30%. That is, when the set value is 1 or 2, the probability that the setting suggestion effect of the first mode is executed is the highest, and the probability that the setting suggestion effect of the second mode is executed and the setting suggestion effect of the third mode are executed. are equally probable.

When the set value is 3, 4 or 5, the sub-control section 91 executes the setting suggestion effect of the first mode with a probability of 30%, and executes the setting suggestion effect of the second mode with a probability of 40%. Execution of the setting suggestion effect of the third mode is determined with a probability of 30%. That is, when the set value is 3, 4 or 5, the probability of executing the setting suggestion effect of the second mode is the highest, and the probability of executing the setting suggestion effect of the first mode and the setting suggestion effect of the third mode are the highest. are equally likely to be executed.

When the set value is 6, the sub control unit 91 executes the setting suggestion effect of the first mode with a probability of 30%, the setting suggestion effect of the second mode with a probability of 30%, and the setting suggestion effect of the second mode with a probability of 40%. , the execution of the setting suggestion effect of the third mode is determined. That is, when the set value is 6, the probability that the setting suggestion effect of the third mode is executed is the highest, and the probability that the setting suggestion effect of the first mode is executed and the setting suggestion effect of the second mode are executed. the odds are equal.

That is, among the first mode to the third mode, when the setting value is 1 or 2, the setting suggestion effect of the first mode is most likely to be executed, and when the setting value is 3 to 5, the second mode is performed. The mode of the setting suggestion performance is determined so that the probability of the setting suggestion performance being executed is the highest, and when the set value is 6, the probability of the setting suggestion performance of the third mode being executed is the highest. Therefore, the player can predict the set value that is set based on the aspect of the setting suggestion effect. In other words, the setting suggesting effect can also be said to be an effect suggesting which one of the plurality of setting values the set value is.

Further, as can be seen by comparing FIGS. 51(A) and 51(B), the bias of the execution probability is greater when the number of sliding coma is 0 than when the number of coma is 1. FIG. Therefore, when the number of slip coma is 0, the setting value suggestion is more accurate than when the number of coma is 1. For example, the possibility that the set value is 1 or 2 when the setting suggesting effect of the first mode is executed is higher when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the timing when the number of sliding frames becomes 0. becomes 1 when the left stop switch 8L is operated.

Although an example of executing the setting suggestion effect when the left stop switch 8L is operated for the first time has been shown, in the present embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 can be set regardless of the order in which the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated. Therefore, it is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect. For example, as shown in FIG. 47, even when the right stop switch 8R, the middle stop switch 8C, and the left stop switch 8L are operated in this order, the left stop switch 8L is activated at the timing when the pattern of number 8 or 9 passes through the middle stage. When is operated, a setting suggestion effect may be executed.

Further, when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the time of the second stop or the third stop, when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the timing when the pattern of No. 8 or No. 9 passes through the middle row, the left stop switch If the reel control is the same as when 8L is operated at the time of the first stop, the mode of setting suggestion effect may be determined according to the table shown in FIG. Specifically, when the left stop switch 8L is operated during the second stop or the third stop, the number of sliding frames is 0 when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the timing when the symbol No. 9 passes through the middle stage. Then, when the number of sliding frames is 1 when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the timing when the symbol No. 8 passes through the middle stage, the mode of the setting suggestion performance may be determined according to the table shown in FIG.

[Game characteristics in CB]
When controlled by the CB, the player first plays the game with the aim of winning the technical intervening role with the payout number of 14 medals, and after the technical intervening role wins once, the payout number of medals becomes 15. He tends to aim for prizes for roles. When the first stop operation is performed on the left reel 2L, as described with reference to FIG. 46, the symbol combination of the technical intervening hand that causes the payout of 14 symbols is not derived. On the other hand, when the first stop operation is performed on the right reel 2R, a technical intervening hand can be derived. Therefore, the player tends to perform the first stop operation on the right reel 2R. Even when the middle stop switch 8C, the left stop switch 8L, and the right stop switch 8R are operated in this order during CB, it is possible to derive the technical intervening role when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the first timing. may

Further, in the present embodiment, the probability of deriving a display result in which no winning occurs (probability of failure) is higher when the right reel 2R is first stopped than when the left reel 2L is first stopped. is lower. Here, the likelihood of winning a prize is determined depending on whether there are few or many timings (lost spots) at which a display result in which no winning occurs is derived among the timings at which the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the control to the CB is started, the player first stops the right reel 2R, and after the payout of 14 medals occurs, the left reel 2L is moved to the first stop. 1 tends to stop.

[Example of production]
Next, an example of effects executed by the slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 to 66. FIG.

(Production at the time of CB rush)
FIG. 52 is a diagram for explaining the effect at the time of entering the CB. As described above, in the present embodiment, CB is won by deriving 7 sets, and the state is controlled by CB based on the occurrence of CB winning. As shown in FIG. 52(A), in a game in which a CB is won and a symbol combination (“black 7-black 7-black 7”) corresponding to the CB can be derived, when a start operation is performed, An effect is performed to encourage the derivation of black 7 matching. For example, the liquid crystal display 51 displays an image of "Aim for 777!"

Although illustration is omitted, after that, when the player performs the first stop operation and the second stop operation at a timing at which the black 7 symbols can be stopped, the black 7 symbols are stopped on the reels 2L and 2C, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 52(B), when the player performs the third stop operation at a timing at which the black 7 symbols can be stopped, the reel 2R is stopped and the black 7 symbols are drawn out. At this time, the player's hand keeps pressing the stop switch 8R. That is, after the stop switch is manually depressed, the rotation of the reel is stopped and the pattern is led out to the see-through window 3 even if the depression is maintained without being released. Also, the loudspeaker 53 outputs a "bang" sound that effectively suggests that the reels have stopped. However, while the reels are stopped, the winning determination is not executed until the third stop release is performed and the stop switch 8R is not released.

As shown in FIG. 52(C), when the third stop release is performed and the stop switch 8R is released from being pressed, the main control unit 41 executes the winning determination process, thereby generating a CB winning. Further, freezing is started by the main control unit 41 . Due to the freeze control at this time, the bet number setting by the MAXBET switch 6 for starting the next game is invalidated for a predetermined delay period.

When the CB winning occurs, the sub-control unit 91 performs the CB winning effect. For example, as shown in FIGS. 52(C) and 52(D), the image "BONUS" is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 so as to stop at the center of the screen while changing from an enlarged state to a reduced state. At the same time, the loudspeaker 53 outputs a "pappara" sound that congratulates the winning of the CB. Furthermore, the lighting or blinking of the side lamps 27 and the reel backlights 28 effectively suggests a CB winning. Note that the prize-winning effect is not limited to the side lamps 27 and the reel backlights 28, and may be performed by lighting or blinking the lower panel located below the reels. In addition, if the lower panel is normally lit, the prize-winning effect may be performed by turning it off.

After that, as shown in FIG. 52(E), a character and an image of "CHALLENGE BONUS!" is output.

In this way, the reels are stopped by performing the third stop operation, and the winning determination process is executed by performing the third stop release, and the CB winning is based on the derivation of the black 7-matched symbol combination. At the same time, the state shifts to CB. In addition, when the black 7 pattern combination is derived, the freeze control is performed to start the freeze, and the CB winning performance is performed during the freeze.

(Production at the time of selection of CB production)
FIG. 53 is a diagram for explaining the effect when the CB effect is selected. After the effect shown in FIG. 52(E) suggests entering the CB, as shown in FIG. is done. Also, the loudspeaker 53 outputs a "swoosh" sound that matches the white-out.

With the above-described whiteout as a boundary, the liquid crystal display 51 is enlarged from the CB winning effect screen as shown in FIG. 53(E) to the CB effect selection screen as shown in FIG. The screen state changes. In addition, the freeze ends with the whiteout as a boundary. In other words, after the whiteout, the bet number setting by operating the MAXBET switch 6 becomes valid.

As shown in FIG. 53(G), on the CB effect selection screen, an image is displayed for the player to select the effect during the CB. Specifically, an image is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 for the player to select one of music A, music B, and music C as BGM corresponding to each of the three characters. The player can change the character image displayed in the front row by operating the effect switch 56, and each time the character image is changed, the music corresponding to the character displayed in the front row is output from the speaker 53. be. As a result, the player can select his or her favorite music while listening to the sound output from the speaker 53 .

Incidentally, in the selection of the CB effect, it is also possible to select a stage with different matters related to the effect during the CB, such as characters to appear, background images, music, sound effects, lighting modes, and the like. In addition, in the selection of the CB effect, it is possible to select a stage with different matters related to the notification effect during the CB, such as the mode of the winning announcement when winning a rare role such as cherry or watermelon and the probability of executing the winning announcement. may

As shown in FIG. 53(H), when the player operates the MAXBET switch 6, the music corresponding to the character displayed in the front row at that time is determined as the music in the CB, and the music is determined from the speaker 53. A "picone" sound is output, suggesting that Here, the speaker 53 and the speaker 54 have separate channels for sound output. In the example shown in FIG. 54 outputs a sound effect called "Picone". At this time, since the freeze has already ended, the number of bets is also set by operating the MAXBET switch 6 when the music is determined. It should be noted that the music is not limited to being determined by operating the MAXBET switch 6, but may be determined by other operations such as the start switch 7 or the effect switch 56, for example.

After the music in the CB is determined in the effect shown in FIG. 53(H), as shown in FIG. is done. Also, the loudspeaker 53 outputs a "swoosh" sound that matches the white-out.

With the above-described whiteout as a boundary, the screen of the liquid crystal display 51 is enlarged from the selection screen of the CB effect as shown in FIG. 53(H) to the effect screen during CB as shown in FIG. 53(J). state changes. During the CB, the screen during the CB is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 and the music selected by the player is output from the speaker 53 .

As shown in FIG. 53(K), when the start operation is performed, the game starts during the CB and the reels start rotating.

In this way, when the freeze starts when the CB wins, and the CB win effect is performed during the freeze, the freeze ends with the whiteout as a border, and then the effect that allows the player to select the effect state in the CB. executed. The player is suggested to control the CB by such an effect that allows the player to select the effect state in the CB. Then, when the effect of the CB is determined, the game during the CB is executed based on the determined effect state.

(Specific examples of various displays in CB)
Next, specific examples of various displays in the CB will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 to 60. FIG. 54 to 60 are explanatory diagrams of the flow of effects and various displays during CB.

As shown in FIG. 54(L), when the CB wins, the screen of the CB is displayed from the liquid crystal display 51. FIG. The display area of the liquid crystal display 51 is divided into a first area 51c and a second area 51d. The first area 51c is darker in brightness than the second area 51d. The effect image is displayed over the first area 51c and the second area 51d. Then, an obtainable number display 61 (display of "LAST ○○○" in the figure, ○○○ is the number of medals that can be obtained), a total number of obtainable number display 62 (display of "TOTAL ○○○" in the figure, ○○ ○ is the total number of won medals) and the number of won display 63 (display of “GET ◯◯◯” in the figure, ◯◯◯ is the number of won medals) are displayed in the dark first area 51c. Therefore, the player can easily recognize the obtainable number display 61, the total obtained number display 62, and the obtained number display 63. In addition, the total acquired number display 62 has a larger character size than the obtainable number display 61 and the acquired number display 63, and is displayed in a larger area than the obtainable number display 61 and the acquired number display 63. . It should be noted that the total obtainable number display 62 may not be displayed at the same time as the obtainable number display 61 and the obtained number display 63, but may be displayed at different timings. Even in this case, it is preferable to display the total acquired number display 62 in a larger area than the obtainable number display 61 and the acquired number display 63 .

An effect image is displayed on the screen during CB. In the present embodiment, a moving image background is displayed as the effect image. For example, during CB, the liquid crystal display 51 displays a background image of the night and a motion picture showing how the character moves. A part of the motion background (in this example, the moon image and the star image) is displayed in the first area 51c, and the remaining part is displayed in the second area 52d. A part of the moving character may be displayed in the first area 51c and the remaining part may be displayed in the second area 52d. As described above, the first area 51c is darker in brightness than the second area 51d. An obtainable number display 61, a total obtainable number display 62, and an obtainable number display 63 are displayed in the first area 51c. This makes it easier for the player to recognize the obtainable number display 61, the total obtained number display 62, and the obtained number display 63. Also, by not limiting the display of the moving image background to the second area 51d, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

In this example, CB or BB wins within 100 games after CB ends, and BB wins within 100 games after CB or BB ends. That is, it shows an example of a case where the bonus wins three times in a row. Therefore, the total number of medals obtained display 62 is 624, which is the number of medals obtained in the past two bonuses. Also, the obtainable number display 61 is 150, and the obtainable number display 63 is 0. In addition, under CB control, the mid-advantage lamp 60 lights in the mid-CB mode.

As shown in FIG. 54(L), it is assumed that Bell 1 wins and 15 medals are paid out by performing the third stop operation in the game. At this time, since a prize has been won, a prize effect is executed. The winning effect is executed by lighting or blinking the reel backlight 28. - 特許庁

In this case, as shown in FIG. 54(M), one card is subtracted from the obtainable number display 61, resulting in 149 cards. Also, at the same timing, the total acquired number display 62 is added by one to become 625. Also, at the same timing, the obtained number display 63 is added by one to become one. Also, the number of payout medals displayed by the game auxiliary display 12 at the same timing is added by one to become one.

In this way, since the timing at which the obtainable number display 61 is decremented for each medal is the same as the timing at which the total obtained number display 62 and the obtained number display 63 are added for each medal, only one medal can be obtained. It is possible to make it easy to understand that one medal has been subtracted by acquiring

In addition, since the timing at which the game auxiliary display 12 is added for each card is the same as the timing at which the total winning number display 62 and the obtained number display 63 are added for each card, the game auxiliary display 12 Since the display does not conflict with the total number-of-acquired-number display 62 and the number-of-acquired-number display 63, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused.

In addition, since the timing at which the total acquired number display 62 is added for each card and the timing at which the acquired number display 63 is added for each card are the same, both the acquired number and the total acquired number increase. You can make it easier to understand.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 55(N), the obtainable number display 61 is decremented by one, resulting in 148 sheets. Also, at the same timing, the total acquired number display 62 is added by one to become 626. Also, at the same timing, the obtained number display 63 is added by one to become two. Also, the number of payout medals displayed by the game auxiliary display 12 at the same timing is added by one to become two.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 55(O), the obtainable number display 61 is decremented by one, resulting in 147 sheets. Also, at the same timing, the total acquired number display 62 is added by one to become 627. Also, at the same timing, the obtained number display 63 is added by one to become three. Also, the number of payout medals displayed by the game auxiliary display device 12 at the same timing is added by one to become three.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 56(P), the obtainable number display 61 is decremented by one, resulting in 146 sheets. Also, at the same timing, the total acquired number display 62 is added by one to become 628. Also, at the same timing, the obtained number display 63 is added by one to become four. Also, the number of payout medals displayed by the game auxiliary display 12 at the same timing is added by one to become four.

As shown in FIG. 56(Q), similar processing is performed, and when the subtraction and addition of 15 in each display are completed, the obtainable number display 61 becomes 135. Also, the total acquired number display 62 becomes 637. Also, the obtained number display 63 becomes 13. In addition, the number of payout medals displayed by the game auxiliary display 12 is fifteen.

As shown in FIG. 57(R), when the start switch 7 is operated after the number of bets is set and the game is started, the two medals used for setting the number of bets are subtracted from the total winning number display 62 at once. It becomes 635 sheets. Also, the number of bets of 2 is collectively subtracted from the winning number display 63, resulting in 11 coins. Also, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R start rotating. Also, the payout number of medals displayed by the game auxiliary display 12 is reset to zero.

In this way, when the bet amount is set and the game is started, the number of medals required for setting the bet amount is collectively subtracted from the display of the total winning number display 62 and the winning number display 63. It is possible for the player to easily understand that the required number of medals has been subtracted.

As shown in FIG. 58(a), it is assumed that Bell 1 wins and 15 medals are paid out by performing the third stop operation in a game in which the obtainable number display 61 is one. At this time, the player's hand keeps pressing the stop switch 8R. That is, after the stop switch is manually depressed, the rotation of the reel is stopped and the pattern is led out to the see-through window 3 even if the depression is maintained without being released. However, although the reels are stopped, the winning judgment is not executed unless the third stop release is performed and the stop switch 8R is not released.

As shown in FIG. 58(b), when the third stop release is performed and the stop switch 8R is released from being pressed, the main control unit 41 executes the winning determination process, thereby generating a bell winning. When a bell win occurs, the sub-control unit 91 performs a bell win effect. For example, the liquid crystal display 51 displays an image of "15 sheets GET!!". Also, the speaker 54 outputs a prize-winning sound of "pyrrololin" suggesting a prize-winning bell. Further, lighting or blinking of the side lamps 27 and the reel backlights 28 effectively suggests a bell winning. The winning effect is continuously executed until the reel backlight 28 is turned off. Note that the prize-winning effect is not limited to the side lamps 27 and the reel backlights 28, and may be performed by lighting or blinking the lower panel located below the reels. Also, if the lower panel is normally lit, the prize-winning effect may be performed by turning it off.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 59(c), the obtainable number display 61 is decremented by one and becomes zero. At this point, the subtraction of the obtainable number display 61 ends. Also, at the same timing, the total acquired number display 62 is added by one to become 765. Also, at the same timing, the obtained number display 63 is added by one to become 130 sheets. Also, the number of payout medals displayed by the game auxiliary display 12 at the same timing is added by one to become one.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 59(d), one is added to the total acquired number display 62, resulting in 766 cards. Also, at the same timing, the obtained number display 63 is added by one to become 131 sheets. Also, the number of payout medals displayed by the game auxiliary display 12 at the same timing is added by one to become two.

As shown in FIG. 60(e), when the same processing is performed and the addition of 15 cards in the total number-of-acquired display 62 and the number-of-acquisition display 63 is completed, the total number-of-acquisition display 62 becomes 779 cards. Also, the obtained number display 63 becomes 144. In addition, the number of payout medals displayed by the game auxiliary display 12 is fifteen.

As shown in FIG. 60(f), when the addition of 15 cards in the total winning number display 62 and the winning number display 63 is finished, the winning effect and the notification of the number are finished. After the winning effect is performed, the image of "15 sheets GET!!" disappears from the liquid crystal display 51, no sound is output from the speaker 53, and the side lamps 27 and the reel backlights 28 are extinguished. Then, execution of result notification is started.

In this way, in the final game of the bonus, the third stop operation is performed to stop the reels, and the third stop release is performed to execute the winning determination process, thereby deriving the bell-aligned symbol combination. Based on this, Bell 1 wins a prize and a prize-winning effect is performed. In the prize-winning effect, the liquid crystal display 51 displays the image "Get 15 cards!" After that, the liquid crystal display 51 displays the image "15 sheets GET!!", the speaker 53 outputs sound, and the side lamps 27 and reel backlights 28 do not turn on or blink. Lighting or blinking by the lower panel is not performed even when the winning effect is performed by the lower panel. In addition, when the lower panel is normally lit, the lower panel may be turned on to return to the normal state after the prize effect is performed by turning off the light.

Although the details will be described later, the result images 51j and 51k in the result notification finally displayed as the image showing the result of the game and the door image 51b in the door closing effect (Fig. ) is displayed. Then, when the door closing effect is completed, the door image 51b is temporarily displayed as a still image (see FIG. 61(k)), and the spark image 51a ( (see FIG. 62(l)) is displayed. After the spark image 51a is displayed, result notification is performed, and result images 51j and 51k are displayed. When the result notification is started, extinguishing control of the advantageous lamp 60 is started, and the lighting mode of the advantageous lamp 60 changes from the bonus medium mode (see FIG. 60(f)) to the result reporting mode (see FIG. 61(g)). Change. Note that in the present embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 outputs the stop operation time SE, which is the sound related to the display of the related image, before the result notification is performed. Therefore, since the sound related to the display of the related image is output before the result notification is performed, it is possible to prevent the result notification from being hindered by the output of this sound.

(Production at the time of result notification during freeze)
FIG. 61 and FIG. 62 are diagrams for explaining the effect at the time of result notification during freezing. Bell 1 winning is suggested in the effects shown in FIGS. 58(b) to 60(e), and as shown in FIG. , freezing is started by the main control unit 41 . Due to the freeze control at this time, the bet number setting by the MAXBET switch 6 for starting the next game is invalidated for a predetermined delay period. Freezing may be started when the third stop release is performed.

During the freeze, result notification is performed to notify the result of the game during the CB. When the result notification starts, a result start notification that suggests the start of the result notification is performed. When the result notification is started, the speaker 53 outputs a "pillow" sound suggesting the start of the result notification, and the side lamps 27 and the reel backlights 28 are lit or blinked to indicate the start of the result notification. It is suggested. Further, when the result notification is started, control for extinguishing the advantageous lamp 60 is started, and the lighting mode of the advantageous lamp 60 is switched to the lighting mode for result notification.

As shown in FIG. 61(h), after the result start notification is given, no sound is output from the speaker 53, and the side lamps 27 and the reel backlights 28 are extinguished.

After the end of the result start notification as shown in FIG. 61(h), as shown in FIG. 61(i), a door closing effect is executed to display the door image 51b as a related image before the result notification. . In the door closing effect, a pair of door images 51b move toward the center of the screen from both ends (left end and right end) of the display area of the liquid crystal display 51, and an animation moving image is displayed in which the door closes. At this time, the effect image during the bonus is displayed on the back side of the door image 51b, but the effect image during the bonus disappears from the player's field of vision when the door is closed. In addition, the brightness or the like (brightness or luminance) of the door image 51b is lower than the brightness or the like of other images different from the door image 51b. For example, the brightness of the door image 51b is lower than the brightness of resultant images 51j and 51k, which will be described later. By making the brightness etc. of the door image 51b lower than the brightness etc. of the resultant images 51j and 51k, the resulting images 51j and 51k displayed in front of the door image 51b can be conspicuous.

As shown in FIG. 61(i), when the closing effect of the door starts, an animation video is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 in which the door image 51b begins to move from both ends on the front side of the effect image during the bonus. A "go..." sound like a closing door is output.

As shown in FIG. 61(j), in the middle of the door closing effect, an animation video is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 in which the door image 51b moves closer to the center of the screen. A beeping sound is output.

As shown in FIG. 61(k), at the end of the door closing effect, the door image 51b is completely closed at the center of the screen, and the effect image during the bonus displayed on the back side completely disappears from view. An animation moving image such as this is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the speaker 53 outputs a sound like a closed door. As a result, a still image with the door closed is displayed for a predetermined period of time.

After the door closing effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 62(l), a spark image 51a in the spark display is displayed as a special image. Specifically, after the door is completely closed by the movement of the door image 51b, a spark image 51a representing sparks is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 in front of the door image 51b in the central portion of the screen. The brightness or the like (brightness or brightness) of the spark image 51a is higher than the brightness or the like of other images different from the spark image 51a. For example, the brightness of the spark image 51a is higher than the brightness of the effect image during the bonus and the brightness of the door image 51b. By making the brightness of the spark image 51a higher than that of the door image 51b, the spark image 51a displayed on the front side of the door image 51b can be conspicuous. Also, when the spark image 51a is displayed, the loudspeaker 53 outputs a sound like sparks. Furthermore, the side lamp 27 lights or blinks in a manner (for example, color or lighting interval) for result notification. Note that the special image is not limited to the spark image 51a, and may be other forms such as a flash or a character.

After the spark display ends, the result notification starts as shown in FIG. 62(m). The result notification is performed using the area where the spark image 51a was displayed, and result images 51j and 51k indicating the game results during the bonus are displayed in the area. In the present embodiment, the number of won medals (the total number of medals paid out) during the bonus is displayed in the result image 51j. Also, in the result image 51k, the total winning number during the bonus is displayed. Furthermore, when the resulting images 51j and 51k are displayed, the loudspeaker 53 outputs a pinging sound that makes the resulting images 51j and 51k appear. The side lamp 27 keeps lighting or blinking in a manner (for example, color or lighting interval) for result notification. The spark image 51a, which is a special image, has a higher brightness than the resulting images 51j and 51k (that is, the spark image 51a is brighter than the resulting images 51j and 51k).

Thus, after the spark image 51a, which is a special image different from the result images 51j and 51k, is displayed in the predetermined area, the result images 51j and 51k are displayed in the predetermined area. can be conspicuously displayed, attention can be drawn to the resulting images 51j and 51k. Therefore, the resulting images 51j and 51k can be effectively displayed. In this example, the spark image 51a is brighter than the resultant images 51j and 51k. Therefore, attention can be drawn to the spark image 51a, and since the resulting images 51j and 51k are also displayed in the area where the spark image 51a is displayed, as a result, attention is drawn to the resulting images 51j and 51k. be able to.

As shown in FIG. 62(n), first, in the resulting images 51j and 51k, the first digit (in this example, the number "4" in the resulting image 51j and the number "9" in the resulting image 51k) are displayed. be. Accompanied by the display of the first digit, the speaker 53 outputs a "ping" sound. The side lamp 27 keeps lighting or blinking in a manner (for example, color or lighting interval) for result notification.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(o), the second digit (in this example, the number "4" in the result image 51j and the number "7" in the result image 51k) are displayed in the result images 51j and 51k. be done. Accompanied by the display of the second digit, the speaker 53 outputs a "ping" sound. The side lamp 27 keeps lighting or blinking in a manner (for example, color or lighting interval) for result notification.

As shown in FIG. 62(p), next, in the resulting images 51j and 51k, the third digit (in this example, the number "1" in the resulting image 51j and the number "7" in the resulting image 51k) are displayed. be done. Accompanied by the display of the third digit, the speaker 53 outputs a "ping" sound. The side lamp 27 keeps lighting or blinking in a manner (for example, color or lighting interval) for result notification.

By displaying the third digit in the result images 51j and 51k, the player is notified that the number of winning coins is 144 and the total number of winning coins is 799 as the final result.

After the final result is displayed in the result images 51j and 51k, as shown in FIG. 62(q), an attention calling display for calling the player's attention regarding the game is performed. When the attention calling display is performed, the attention calling image 51e is displayed above the result images 51j and 51k. The attention-calling image 51e displays the characters "Be careful not to get addicted" and the characters "Pachislot is a game to enjoy moderately." for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). By performing such a warning display, it is possible to prevent the player from playing excessively. Further, the advantage lamp 60 is turned off while the result images 51j and 51k are displayed. Note that the advantage lamp 60 is extinguished before the operation of the start switch 7 for the next game is validated.

In this way, the freezing starts after the bell winning is reported in the final bonus game, and the result is reported during the freezing. Furthermore, after the result notification is performed, a warning display is performed.

As described above, when the CB ends with the payout of 150 or more medals, after the subtraction of the obtainable number display 61 is finished, the addition of the total number of obtained number display 62 and the number of obtained number display 63 is finished, Since the result notification is executed after that, it becomes possible to perform the addition of the total obtained number display 62 and the obtained number display 63 after completing the subtraction of the obtainable number display 61, and the total obtained number display 62 and the obtained number display. It is possible to make the addition of 63 easy to understand, and it is possible to draw attention to the total number-of-acquired display 62 and the number-of-acquired-number display 63, so that attention can be paid to the mode of display until the result notification is executed. .

Further, when the result notification is being executed, control for extinguishing the advantageous lamp 60 is started, and since the advantageous lamp 60 is extinguished by the time the operation for starting the next game after the final game of the CB is validated, the advantageous lamp 60 is turned off. A lamp 60 may indicate the end of CB.

Further, the door image 51b is displayed as a related image different from the result images 51j and 51k, and the result images 51j and 51k are displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the door image 51b was displayed. Since the display of 51j and 51k can be conspicuous, attention can be drawn to the resultant images 51j and 51k. Therefore, the resulting images 51j and 51k can be effectively displayed.

Further, since an effect of turning on the advantageous lamp 60 in the result display mode is executed as an effect related to the display of the door image 51b until a predetermined period has elapsed after the door image 51b is displayed, the result images 51j and 51k are executed. Since the effect related to the display of the door image 51b is executed before the display of is performed, it is possible to prevent the display of the result images 51j and 51k from being hindered by the execution of this effect.

Further, a door closing effect is executed in which the door image 51b is displayed as a moving image as a related image, and then the door image 51b is displayed as a static background image as the related image. Since the resulting images 51j and 51k are displayed when the user is on, attention can be drawn to the resulting images 51j and 51k.

In this embodiment, after the subtraction of the obtainable number display 61 is completed, the display mode of the screen in the CB is changed. It is also possible to configure such that the display of the obtainable number display 61 is not changed until it is displayed. In this case, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand that the number of medals that the player has obtained during the CB has reached the obtainable number.

Moreover, it is possible to display a plurality of result images step by step as the result images 51j and 51k. For example, it is possible to display a result image 51k indicating the total acquired number and a result image 51j indicating the acquired number. In this case, it is possible to attract the player's attention to each of the plurality of result images.

Also, it is possible to display the related image with a brightness lower than the brightness of the image different from the related image. For example, it is possible to display a still background image with a lower brightness than a video in the door closing effect. In this case, the resulting images 51j and 51k can be conspicuous because the brightness of the related images is low. Therefore, it is possible to draw attention to the resulting images 51j and 51k.

Further, in the above example, as shown in FIG. 60(f), when the number notification is finished, the winning effect is finished and the reel backlight 28 is turned off. The backlight 28 may be lit. Furthermore, when the result notification is executed, the aspect of the winning effect may be changed. At this time, the winning effect is executed so that the blinking of the reel backlight 28 becomes brighter. The winning effect is continuously executed until the reel backlight 28 is turned off.

Further, after the result notification is executed, the reel backlight 28 is turned off (for example, the reel backlight 28 is turned off while the result images 51j and 51k are being displayed), and after the reel backlight 28 is turned off, the advantage lamp 60 is turned off. In this case, the end of the BB can be gradually suggested by turning off the reel backlight 28 and the advantage medium lamp 60 in this order.

In addition, since the control for extinguishing the advantageous lamp 60 is a control in which the advantageous lamp 60 is turned on in a result notification manner different from the lighting manner during BB, and then the advantageous lamp 60 is extinguished, a different lighting manner is employed. , it can be suggested that the lamp 60 is extinguished during the advantage. That is, it can gradually suggest that the BB is ending.

(Production when RT production is selected)
FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining an effect when the RT effect is selected. Here, RT (replay time) is a state in which the probability of winning a replay role in the internal lottery is higher than in non-RT (for example, normal state), and replay is performed more frequently in RT state than in non-RT state. Since the game is executed, it becomes easier for the player to proceed with the game without consuming the medals that he/she owns. In this embodiment, after the bonus is completed, the state is controlled to the RT state for a predetermined period (for example, 30 games), and the player can select the effect in the RT state. can.

After the warning display is performed in the effect shown in FIG. 62(q), as shown in FIG. done. Also, the loudspeaker 53 outputs a "swoosh" sound that matches the white-out.

With the above-described whiteout as a boundary, the screen for displaying the result notification and alerting display as shown in FIG. The screen state of the display 51 changes. In addition, the freeze ends with the whiteout as a boundary. In other words, after the whiteout, the bet number setting by operating the MAXBET switch 6 becomes valid. Furthermore, the display of the number "15" on the game auxiliary display 12 indicating that 15 medals have been paid out in the final game of the bonus also disappears.

As shown in FIG. 63(s), on the RT effect selection screen, an image for allowing the player to select the effect during RT is displayed. Specifically, an image is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 to prompt the player to select one stage from stage A, stage B, and stage C as the stage corresponding to each of the three characters. The player can change the character image displayed in the front row by operating the effect switch 56, and each time the character image is changed, the music of the stage corresponding to the character displayed in the front row is played from the speaker 53. output. As a result, the player can select his or her favorite stage while listening to the sound output from the speaker 53 .

A plurality of stages provided in RT differ in terms of RT. For example, the plurality of stages differ from each other in matters related to production during RT, such as appearing characters, background images, music and sound effects, and lighting modes. In addition, for example, the plurality of stages include the manner of winning notification and the probability of executing winning notification when winning a rare role such as cherry and watermelon, and the manner of winning notification and the probability of executing winning notification when winning a bonus. , and the matters related to the notification effect during RT are different. It should be noted that, for example, in multiple stages, when an advantageous section is added to the internal lottery, the number of medals during the RT, such as an up-down mode in which the probability of addition is likely to change, and a stable mode in which the probability of addition is difficult to change, etc. Matters relating to payout may differ.

As shown in FIG. 63(t), when the player operates the MAXBET switch 6, the stage corresponding to the character displayed in the front row at that time is determined as the stage during RT, and the stage is determined from the speaker 53. A "picone" sound is output, suggesting that Here, the speaker 53 and the speaker 54 have separate sound output channels, and in the example shown in FIG. 63(t), the speaker 53 outputs music corresponding to the determined stage. On the other hand, the speaker 54 outputs a sound effect called "picone". At this time, since the freeze has already ended, the number of bets is also set by operating the MAXBET switch 6 when the stage is determined. It should be noted that the stage is not limited to being determined by the operation of the MAXBET switch 6, and the stage may be determined by other operations such as the start switch 7 or the effect switch 56, for example.

After the stage during RT is determined in the effect shown in FIG. 63(t), as shown in FIG. is done. Also, the loudspeaker 53 outputs a "swoosh" sound that matches the white-out.

With the above-described whiteout as a boundary, the screen of the liquid crystal display 51 is enlarged from the selection screen of the RT effect as shown in FIG. 63(t) to the effect screen during RT as shown in FIG. 63(v). state changes. During RT, a screen during RT corresponding to the stage selected by the player is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 , and a musical piece corresponding to the stage selected by the player is output from the speaker 53 .

As shown in FIG. 63(w), when a start operation is performed, the game starts during RT and the reels start rotating.

In this way, the freezing starts after the bell winning notification is performed in the final game of CB, and when the result notification is performed during the freezing, the freezing ends with the whiteout as a boundary, and then at RT An effect is executed to allow the player to select the effect state. It is suggested that the state is controlled to RT after the end of the CB by the effect of allowing the player to select such an RT effect. Then, when the RT effect is determined, the game during RT is executed based on the determined effect state.

(Prize-winning performance)
Winning effect executed during bonus (CB, BB) will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66. FIG. 64 to 66 are diagrams showing an example of a winning effect. The winning effect is executed by blinking the reel backlight 28. - 特許庁The winning effects include a first winning effect and a second winning effect. The flashing modes of the reel backlights 28 are different between the first winning effect and the second winning effect. Specifically, the second winning effect blinks (flashes) violently at a faster blinking speed than the first winning effect.

As shown in FIG. 64(a), when Bell 1 wins (payout of 15 coins) during the bonus (CB, BB), the first winning effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 64(b), when the technical intervening role wins (14 coins are paid out) during the bonus, if the technical intervening role wins for the first time in the bonus under control, the second winning effect is executed. do. In the present embodiment, the maximum winning number is reached when the technical intervention role wins once, and the second prize effect is executed when the technical intervention role wins for the first time. When the number of wins reaches the maximum when the number of winning times of the technical intervention role is multiple times, the second winning effect is executed each time until the number of winning times of the technical intervention role reaches the multiple times. It is possible to

As shown in FIG. 65(a), when the technical intervening player has won once (14 payouts) in the past game during the bonus, and the game can be the final game of the bonus due to the occurrence of the winning, When the technical intervening role wins (payout of 14 cards), the first winning performance is executed. At this time, as shown in FIG. 65(b), the result notification is executed after the first winning effect is executed, and result images 51j and 51k are displayed. Although illustration is omitted, the same processing as in FIGS. 60(f) to 62(p) is performed after the technical intervening role wins and before the result images 51j and 51k are displayed. Also in this example, the subtraction of the obtainable number display 61 ends first, and while the obtainable number display 61 is maintained at 0, the total obtained number display 62 and the obtained number display 63 are added, and the addition ends. After that, result notification is executed.

As shown in FIG. 66(a), when only Bell 1 wins a prize (15 coins are paid out) during the bonus and the number of obtainable coins reaches 15, when Bell 1 wins a prize (15 coins are paid out), the first 1 Execute the winning effect. At this time, as shown in FIG. 66(b), after the first winning effect is executed, result notification is executed and result images 51j and 51k are displayed. Although illustration is omitted, the same processing as in FIGS. 60(f) to 62(p) is performed after Bell 1 wins and before the result images 51j and 51k are displayed.

In this embodiment, as described above, for example, CB ends when 150 or more coins are paid out. A maximum of 15 coins are paid out in one game, so multiple games are played in CB. Since 15 bells are paid out for Bell 1, if only Bell 1 wins in CB, the payout number becomes 150 when Bell 1 wins 10 times, and CB ends. In this case, the number of obtained medals in the CB becomes the minimum number. On the other hand, since the technical intervening player pays out 14 coins, Bell 1 wins 9 times and the technical intervening player wins once (149 coins are paid out at this point). (149 + 15), and the number of medals obtained in CB becomes the maximum number. Also, if the technical intervening role wins two or more prizes, the number of payouts exceeds 150 but does not reach the maximum number of 163.

After setting the obtainable number and the payout number in this way, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. . Also, as shown in FIG. 64(b), when the first winning of the technical intervention role occurs during the CB, the second winning effect is executed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 65, a game in which the technical intervention player has won once (14 payouts) in past games during the CB, and which can be the final game of the CB due to the occurrence of the winning (this embodiment Then, in a game in which the number of payouts is 149 and the number of winable coins is 1, when the technical intervention player wins, the first winning effect is executed. That is, when the technical intervening hand wins and the winning number does not reach the maximum number of 163, and the CB ends with 162, the first winning effect is executed. In this way, by executing the prize-winning effect, it is possible to prevent conspicuous mistakes made by the player who could not intervene technically so as to obtain the maximum number of medals to be obtained in the final game of the CB.

Also, as shown in FIG. 66, when Bell 1 wins in a situation where the technical intervening role has not won even once in a game that can be the final game of CB When (time), the flow is to execute the first winning effect and then execute the result notification. Therefore, even when the technical intervention for obtaining the maximum number of medals is not performed, the common first winning effect is executed in the final game of CB. can be prevented from standing out.

[Processing timing chart]
A timing chart of the processing of the main control section 41 and the processing of the sub-control section 91 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 67 is a timing chart of processing by the main control section 41 and the sub-control section 91. FIG.

At timing t1, when the third stop operation is performed in the final game during the bonus (for example, CB) and the stop switch is pressed, the main control unit 41 stops the reels based on the detected third stop operation. .

At timing t2, when the third stop release is performed and the stop switch is released, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not a prize has been won by performing a prize determination process. When a prize is won, the main control unit 41 pays out the number of medals corresponding to the prize, and transmits to the sub-control unit 91 a prize determination command capable of specifying the type of the prize that has occurred. On the other hand, when the sub-control unit 91 receives the winning determination command at timing t3, it performs a winning effect.

The sub-controller 91 also has a timer for measuring time. At timing t3, the sub-controller 91 starts measuring the predetermined period T. As shown in FIG. Here, the predetermined period T is the period from the start timing (timing t3) of the predetermined period T until the result images 51j and 51k are displayed by the result notification. In this embodiment, the predetermined period T is also a period during which the related images (moving and still images of the door image 51b in the door closing effect) and the special image (spark image 51a in the spark display) are displayed (Fig. 61 (i ) to FIGS. 61(k) and 62(l)). Note that at timing t3, the sub-control unit 91 outputs a stop operation time SE, which is a sound related to the display of the related image. Therefore, since the sound related to the display of the related image is output before the result images 51j and 51k are displayed, it is possible to prevent the display of the result images 51j and 51k from being obstructed by the output of the sound. .

In this way, the sub-control section 91 measures the elapse of the predetermined period T by the timer after receiving the winning judgment command, and displays the result images 51j and 51k when the elapse of the predetermined period T is measured by the timer. Therefore, since the sub-controller 91 measures the passage of the predetermined period, it is possible to easily manage the display timing of the result images 51j and 51k.

After the winning determination process, the main control unit 41 executes the game end process to perform freeze control, and transmits a freeze command to the sub-control unit 91 to perform the freeze control. On the other hand, based on the freeze command, the sub-controller 91 controls the liquid crystal display 51, the speaker 53, and the like in accordance with the execution time of the freeze control executed by the main controller 41, and executes a freeze effect.

For example, the sub-control section 91 executes the door closing effect shown in FIGS. 61(i) to (k) from timing t4 to timing t5. Next, the sub-controller 91 performs the spark display shown in FIG. 62(l) from timing t5 to timing t6. Next, the sub-control section 91 performs result notification shown in FIGS. 62(m) to (p) from timing t6 to timing t7. Then, the sub-control unit 91 performs the attention-calling display shown in FIG. 62(q) from timing t7 to timing t8 after the result notification. After that, the sub-control section 91 displays the RT effect selection screen shown in FIGS. 63(s) and (t) on the liquid crystal display 51 from the timing t8 to the timing t9. Note that the door closing effect, the spark display effect, and the result notification are executed by the sub-controller 91 over a predetermined period of time.

[Various patterns related to production and processing according to the presence or absence of power outages]
Various patterns relating to effects and processes depending on the presence or absence of power failure will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 to 94. FIG. FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining various patterns relating to effects and processes depending on the presence or absence of power failure. As shown in FIG. 68, patterns 1 to 12 are exemplified in this embodiment. In the example described below, power outage 1 and power outage 2 having different occurrence timings are exemplified. Power failure 1 is a state in which the third stop operation is maintained after the third stop operation is performed, and the symbols expected by the reel stop control based on the third stop operation are still on the winning line LN. It means a power failure such that the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped before it stops upward. Power failure 2 is a state in which the third stop operation is maintained after the third stop operation has been performed, and the symbols expected by the reel stop control based on the third stop operation are already displayed on the pay line LN. It means a power failure in which the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped after it stops upward.

(Pattern 1)
FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining effects and processing in pattern 1. FIG. As shown in FIG. 69, in pattern 1, it is assumed that AT is won in a game in which special replay is won in the normal advantageous section, and the state shifts to AT from the next game. Also, in the example shown in FIG. 69, in a game in which a special replay is won in the normal advantageous section, the derived numbers, presence or absence of payout (medal, replay), and presence or absence of winning effects are performed when power failure does not occur. , and extinguishing or lighting of the section display LED 19 are exemplified.

As shown in FIG. 69(a1), normal BGM corresponding to the normal advantageous section is output from the speaker 53 during the normal advantageous section. When the player wins the special replay in the normal advantageous section, an AT win suggesting performance is executed to suggest that the player wins the AT win. Specifically, on the liquid crystal display 51, a character image and an arrow image are displayed from right to left so as to prompt the user to reversely press the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R. A character image of "Aim for 7!" is displayed. In this example, the player operates the right stop switch 8R and the middle stop switch 8C at the timing of stopping the white 7 symbols on the pay line LN by reverse pressing, thereby causing the right reel 2R and the middle reel 2C to stop. White 7 patterns are stopped in each middle row.

As shown in FIG. 69(b1), the player performs the third stop operation of the left stop switch 8L at the timing when the 11th blank symbol is positioned on the pay line LN on the left reel 2L. After that, as shown in FIG. 69(c1), when the ON state of the third stop operation by the player is effectively detected by the timer interrupt processing, a preset timing is determined based on the operation timing of the third stop operation. Reel stop control is performed to stop the left reel 2L so as to stop the symbols on the winning line LN. For example, when the ON state of the third stop operation is detected four times (corresponding to about 2.24 milliseconds) by the timer interrupt processing, the left reel 2L is controlled to stop after at least 0.56 milliseconds. will be In this example, the reel stop control is performed to stop the left reel 2L so that the 15th white 7 symbols located four frames ahead of the 11th blank symbol on the left reel 2L are stopped on the pay line LN. .

As shown in FIG. 69(d1), by the reel stop control, when the left reel 2L slips by four frames from the 11th blank symbol located on the pay line LN when the third stop operation is performed, the left reel 2L slips. The 15th white 7 symbols are stopped on the winning line LN of the reel 2L. As a result, three white 7 symbols are drawn out together as a symbol combination corresponding to the 7 matching replay on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R.

As shown in FIG. 69(e1), when the player's hand is released from the left stop switch 8L, all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped (YES in Sc9), and all the stop switches 8L, 8C, Since it is determined that the pressing of the 8R has been released (NO in Sc12), the reel stop control process ends, and the winning determination process (Sb48) in the main process shown in FIG. 14 is performed. As a result, it is determined whether or not a prize has been won based on the result of the internal lottery and the symbol combination (7 sets) to be stopped on the prize line LN determined when the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are stopped. , 7 matching replay prizes will occur. Then, the setting process (Sb69) at the end of the game in the main process shown in FIG. Setting processing is performed.

On the other hand, as the control of the effect by the sub-control unit 91, the winning effect is executed based on the winning of the 7-match replay, so that the side lamps 27 and the reel backlights 28 are lit in a manner corresponding to the winning effect, and the speaker A winning sound is output from 53 . Further, a character image of "AT Winning" is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 together with the character image to notify that the AT has been won.

As shown in FIG. 69(f1), the LED dynamic display process (Sv21) in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 29 is performed, so that the section display LED 19 that was turned off lights up.

As shown in FIG. 69(g1), when the start switch 7 is operated to start the next game, the AT is started, and the character image "Let's go!" The image is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and advantageous BGM corresponding to AT is output from the speaker 53. FIG.

(Pattern 2)
70 to 72 are diagrams for explaining effects and processing in pattern 2. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 70 to 72, in pattern 2, it is assumed that AT is won in a game in which special replay is won in the normal advantageous section, and the state shifts to AT from the next game. Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 70 to 72, in a game in which a special replay is won in the normal advantageous section, when power failure occurs, the derived numbers, the presence or absence of payouts (medal, replay), and the winning effects are shown. , and whether the section display LED 19 is turned off or turned on.

First, with reference to FIGS. 70 and 72, an example of the case where power failure 1 occurs will be described. As shown in FIG. 70(a2-1), normal BGM is output from the speaker 53 in the normal advantageous section. When the player wins the special replay in the normal advantageous section, an AT win suggesting performance is executed to suggest that the player wins the AT win. In this example, the player operates the right stop switch 8R and the middle stop switch 8C at the timing of stopping the white 7 symbols on the pay line LN by reverse pressing, thereby causing the right reel 2R and the middle reel 2C to stop. White 7 patterns are stopped in each middle row.

As shown in FIG. 70(b2-1), the player performs the third stop operation of the left stop switch 8L at the timing when the 11th blank symbol on the left reel 2L is positioned on the pay line LN. After that, as shown in FIG. 70(c2-1), when the ON state of the third stop operation by the player is effectively detected by the timer interrupt process, based on the operation timing of the third stop operation, Reel stop control is performed to stop the left reel 2L so as to stop the determined symbols on the winning line LN. In this example, the reel stop control is performed to stop the left reel 2L so that the 15th white 7 symbols located four frames ahead of the 11th blank symbol on the left reel 2L are stopped on the pay line LN. .

As shown in FIG. 70 (d2-1), it is assumed that power failure occurs while the third stop operation is maintained and before symbols are stopped on the left reel 2L by the reel stop control. For example, it is conceivable that power failure occurs during the period from when the left stop switch 8L is operated to when the left reel 2L is controlled to stop after at least 0.56 milliseconds. Alternatively, even after 0.56 milliseconds after the start of stop control for the left reel 2L, the power outage occurred while the control for stopping the 15th white 7 symbols four frames ahead was not sufficient. can be assumed. In this case, no image is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the illumination of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is extinguished.

As shown in FIG. 70(e2-1), the above-described power failure causes the left reel 2L to no longer be excited, so that the left reel 2L rotates only by its own weight and eventually stops naturally. As described above, when power failure does not occur, on the left reel 2L, the 15th white 7 symbol, which is four frames ahead of the 11th blank symbol, is stopped on the pay line LN. Since the reel stop control is not performed, the 13th bell symbol located two frames ahead of the 11th blank symbol stops on the winning line LN. As a result, a symbol combination corresponding to a loss in which no winning occurs is derived on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R.

As shown in FIG. 70 (f2-1), the player's hand is released from the left stop switch 8L. After that, as shown in FIG. 70 (g2-1), when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is resumed and the power is restored with the player's hand released from the left stop switch 8L, the loading image is displayed on the liquid crystal display. is displayed on the device 51, and a start-up sound is output from the speaker 53.

As shown in FIG. 70 (h2-1), when the power is restored from the power failure, the main processing performed before the power failure occurred is resumed, and the reel stop control processing is executed again. In this reel stop control process, it is determined that all the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are stopped (YES in Sc9) and all the stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R are released from being pressed (NO in Sc12). , the reel stop control process ends.

As shown in FIG. 72(i2-1), when the loading after power failure recovery is completed, the winning determination process (Sb48) in the main process shown in FIG. 14 is performed. As a result, it is determined whether or not a prize has been won based on the result of the internal lottery and the symbol combination (7 sets) to be stopped on the prize line LN determined when the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are stopped. , 7 matching replay prizes will occur. Here, as described above, on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning line LN is derived. Instead, it is determined whether or not a prize is generated based on the combination of symbols (7 sets) that are stopped on the prize line LN determined when the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped. For this reason, as in this example, even if a losing pattern combination is derived due to an electrical interruption, if the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated at the operation timing for deriving 7 alignments, 7 alignments replay. of prizes will occur. Then, the setting process (Sb69) at the end of the game in the main process shown in FIG. Setting processing is performed.

On the other hand, as control of the effect by the sub-controller 91, the winning effect as shown in FIG. is not output. Further, neither the character image nor the character image “AT obtained” as shown in FIG. 71(e1) is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. For this reason, as in this example, the winning effect is executed even though the losing symbol combination is apparently derived due to the power failure. do not mislead anyone. In addition, when the power is restored from the power failure, the process after the power failure is restored can be smoothly advanced by not uniformly executing the prize-winning effect.

As shown in FIG. 72(j2-1), the LED dynamic display process (Sv21) in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 29 is performed, thereby turning on the section display LED 19 which had been turned off.

As shown in FIG. 72 (k2-1), when the start switch 7 is operated to start the next game, the AT is started, and the character image of "Let's go!" is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 together with the character image, and advantageous BGM corresponding to AT is output from the speaker 53 .

Next, with reference to FIGS. 71 and 72, an example of the case where power failure 2 occurs will be described. As shown in FIG. 71(a2-2), normal BGM is output from the speaker 53 in the normal advantageous section. When the player wins the special replay in the normal advantageous section, an AT win suggesting performance is executed to suggest that the player wins the AT win. In this example, the player operates the right stop switch 8R and the middle stop switch 8C at the timing of stopping the white 7 symbols on the pay line LN by reverse pressing, thereby causing the right reel 2R and the middle reel 2C to stop. White 7 patterns are stopped in each middle row.

As shown in FIG. 71(b2-2), the player performs the third stop operation of the left stop switch 8L at the timing when the 11th blank symbol on the left reel 2L is positioned on the pay line LN. After that, as shown in FIG. 71(c2-2), when the ON state of the third stop operation by the player is effectively detected by the timer interrupt process, based on the operation timing of the third stop operation, Reel stop control is performed to stop the left reel 2L so as to stop the determined symbols on the winning line LN. In this example, the reel stop control is performed to stop the left reel 2L so that the 15th white 7 symbols located four frames ahead of the 11th blank symbol on the left reel 2L are stopped on the pay line LN. .

As shown in FIG. 71(d2-2), when the reel stop control is performed and the left reel 2L is slid by 4 frames from the 11th blank symbol positioned on the pay line LN when the third stop operation is performed. , the 15th white 7 symbol stops on the winning line LN of the left reel 2L. As a result, three white 7 symbols are drawn out together as a symbol combination corresponding to the 7 matching replay on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R.

As shown in FIG. 71(e2-2), it is assumed that power failure occurs while the third stop operation is maintained and after symbols have already stopped on the left reel 2L by the reel stop control. In this case, no image is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the illumination of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is extinguished.

As shown in FIG. 71 (f2-2), the player's hand is released from the left stop switch 8L. After that, as shown in FIG. 71 (g2-2), when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is resumed with the player's hand released from the left stop switch 8L and the power is restored, the loading image is displayed on the liquid crystal display. is displayed on the device 51, and a start-up sound is output from the speaker 53.

As shown in FIG. 71 (h2-2), when the power is restored from the power failure, the main processing performed before the power failure occurred is resumed, and the reel stop control processing is executed again. In this reel stop control process, it is determined that all the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are stopped (YES in Sc9) and all the stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R are released from being pressed (NO in Sc12). , the reel stop control process ends.

As shown in FIG. 72 (i2-2), when the loading after power failure recovery is completed, the winning determination process (Sb48) in the main process shown in FIG. 14 is performed. As a result, it is determined whether or not a prize has been won based on the result of the internal lottery and the symbol combination (7 sets) to be stopped on the prize line LN determined when the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are stopped. , 7 matching replay prizes will occur. Then, the setting process (Sb69) at the end of the game in the main process shown in FIG. Setting processing is performed.

On the other hand, as control of the effect by the sub-controller 91, the winning effect as shown in FIG. is not output. Further, neither the character image nor the character image “AT obtained” as shown in FIG. 71(e1) is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Therefore, when the power is restored from the power failure, the processing after the power failure can be smoothly performed by not uniformly executing the prize winning effect.

As shown in FIG. 72(j2-2), the LED dynamic display process (Sv21) in the timer interruption process shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 72 (k2-2), when the start switch 7 is operated to start the next game, the AT is started, and the character image of "Let's go!" is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 together with the character image, and advantageous BGM corresponding to AT is output from the speaker 53 .

(Pattern 3)
FIG. 73 is a diagram for explaining effects and processing in pattern 3. FIG. As shown in FIG. 73, in pattern 3, it is assumed that the game is won in the normal advantageous section. Also, in the example shown in FIG. 73, in a game in which the winner is lost in the normal advantageous section, the derived numbers, the presence or absence of payout (medal, replay), the presence or absence of the winning effect, and and extinguishing or lighting of the section display LED 19 are exemplified.

As shown in FIG. 73(a3), in the normal advantageous section, the background image corresponding to the normal advantageous section is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the normal BGM corresponding to the normal advantageous section is output from the speaker 53. . In this example, the player operates the right stop switch 8R and the middle stop switch 8C at the timing of stopping the white 7 symbols on the pay line LN by reverse pressing, thereby causing the right reel 2R and the middle reel 2C to stop. White 7 patterns are stopped in each middle row.

As shown in FIG. 73(b3), the player performs the third stop operation of the left stop switch 8L at the timing when the number 1 orange symbol is positioned on the pay line LN on the left reel 2L. After that, as shown in FIG. 73(c3), when the ON state of the third stop operation by the player is effectively detected by the timer interrupt process, a preset timing is determined based on the operation timing of the third stop operation. Reel stop control is performed to stop the left reel 2L so as to stop the symbols on the winning line LN. For example, when the ON state of the third stop operation is detected four times (corresponding to about 2.24 milliseconds) by the timer interrupt processing, the left reel 2L is controlled to stop after at least 0.56 milliseconds. will be In this example, reel stop control is performed to stop the left reel 2L so that the bell symbol No. 5 located four frames ahead of the orange symbol No. 1 on the left reel 2L is stopped on the pay line LN.

As shown in FIG. 73(d3), by the reel stop control, when the left reel 2L slides by four frames from the number 1 orange symbol positioned on the pay line LN when the third stop operation is performed, the left reel 2L slides to the left. A 5th bell symbol is stopped on the winning line LN of the reel 2L. As a result, a symbol combination corresponding to a loss is derived from the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R.

As shown in FIG. 73(e3), when the player's hand is released from the left stop switch 8L, all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped (YES in Sc9), and all the stop switches 8L, 8C, Since it is determined that the pressing of the 8R has been released (NO in Sc12), the reel stop control process ends, and the winning determination process (Sb48) in the main process shown in FIG. 14 is performed. Thus, it is determined whether or not a prize has been won based on the result of the internal lottery and the symbol combination (losing) that is stopped on the prize line LN determined when the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are stopped. However, in this case, no winning occurs, so no payout is performed.

On the other hand, even when the sub-controller 91 controls the performance, no winning performance is executed because no winning occurs.

As shown in FIG. 73(f3), the section display LED 19 is kept turned off because the winning is a losing game.

As shown in FIG. 73 (g3), the BET operation is validated to start the next game, and the number of bets is set by performing the BET operation.

(Pattern 4)
74 to 76 are diagrams for explaining effects and processing in pattern 4. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 74 to 76, in pattern 4, it is assumed that a game is won in the normal advantageous section and the winning is lost. In addition, in the examples shown in FIGS. 74 to 76, in a game in which the winner is lost in the normal advantageous section, when power failure occurs, the derived numbers, the presence or absence of payouts (medal, replay), and the winning effects are shown. Exemplified are the presence/absence, and whether the section display LED 19 is turned off or turned on.

First, with reference to FIGS. 74 and 76, an example of the case where power failure 1 occurs will be described. As shown in FIG. 74(a4-1), in the normal advantageous section, a background image corresponding to the normal advantageous section is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and normal BGM is output from the speaker 53. FIG. In this example, the player operates the right stop switch 8R and the middle stop switch 8C at the timing of stopping the white 7 symbols on the pay line LN by reverse pressing, thereby causing the right reel 2R and the middle reel 2C to stop. White 7 patterns are stopped in each middle row.

As shown in FIG. 74(b4-1), the player performs the third stop operation of the left stop switch 8L at the timing when the number 1 orange symbol on the left reel 2L is positioned on the pay line LN. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 74(c4-1), when the ON state of the third stop operation by the player is effectively detected by the timer interrupt process, based on the operation timing of the third stop operation, Reel stop control is performed to stop the left reel 2L so as to stop the determined symbols on the winning line LN. In this example, reel stop control is performed to stop the left reel 2L so that the bell symbol No. 5 located four frames ahead of the orange symbol No. 1 on the left reel 2L is stopped on the pay line LN.

As shown in FIG. 74(d4-1), it is assumed that power failure occurs while the third stop operation is maintained and before symbols are stopped on the left reel 2L by the reel stop control. For example, it is conceivable that power failure occurs during the period from when the left stop switch 8L is operated to when the left reel 2L is controlled to stop after at least 0.56 milliseconds. Alternatively, even after 0.56 milliseconds after the start of stop control for the left reel 2L, if the power failure occurs while the control for stopping the bell symbol of number 5, which is four frames ahead, is not sufficient. can be assumed. In this case, no image is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the illumination of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is extinguished.

As shown in FIG. 74(e4-1), the power failure described above causes the left reel 2L to lose its excitation, so that the left reel 2L rotates only by its own weight, and eventually stops naturally. As described above, when power failure does not occur, on the left reel 2L, the 5th bell symbol, which is four frames ahead of the 1st orange symbol, is stopped on the pay line LN. Since stop control is not performed, 7 white symbols two frames ahead of the 1st orange symbol stop on the winning line LN. As a result, on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, 7 symbol combinations corresponding to the special replay are accidentally derived.

As shown in FIG. 74 (f4-1), the player's hand is released from the left stop switch 8L. After that, as shown in FIG. 74 (g4-1), when the power supply to the slot machine 1 resumes with the player's hand released from the left stop switch 8L and the power is restored, the loading image is displayed on the liquid crystal display. is displayed on the device 51, and a start-up sound is output from the speaker 53.

As shown in FIG. 74 (h4-1), when the power is restored from the power failure, the main processing performed before the power failure occurred is resumed, and the reel stop control processing is executed again. In this reel stop control process, it is determined that all the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are stopped (YES in Sc9) and all the stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R are released from being pressed (NO in Sc12). , the reel stop control process ends.

As shown in FIG. 76 (i4-1), when the loading after power failure recovery is completed, the winning determination process (Sb48) in the main process shown in FIG. 14 is performed. Thus, it is determined whether or not a prize has been won based on the result of the internal lottery and the symbol combination (losing) that is stopped on the prize line LN determined when the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are stopped. . Here, as described above, in the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, 7 sets are derived on the winning line LN, but in the winning determination process, the finally derived symbol combination is not referred to. It is determined whether or not a prize is generated based on the combination of symbols (losing) stopped on the prize line LN determined during the stop operation on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. For this reason, as in this example, even if a 7-match replay is apparently derived due to a power outage, the winning result is determined to be a loss, and no winning of the 7-match replay occurs, and payouts are also made. Absent.

On the other hand, as the control of the effect by the sub-controller 91, the winning effect is not performed, the side lamps 27 and the reel backlights 28 are kept turned off, and the winning sound is not output from the speaker 53 either. Therefore, when the power is restored from the power failure, the processing after the power failure can be smoothly performed by not uniformly executing the prize winning effect.

As shown in (j4-1) of FIG. 76, since the winning is a loss, the section display LED 19 also remains off.

As shown in FIG. 76 (k4-1), the BET operation is validated to start the next game, and the number of bets is set by performing the BET operation.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76, an example of the case where power failure 2 occurs will be described. As shown in FIG. 75(a4-2), in the normal advantageous section, a background image corresponding to the normal advantageous section is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and normal BGM is output from the speaker 53. FIG. In this example, the player operates the right stop switch 8R and the middle stop switch 8C at the timing of stopping the white 7 symbols on the pay line LN by reverse pressing, thereby causing the right reel 2R and the middle reel 2C to stop. White 7 patterns are stopped in each middle row.

As shown in FIG. 75(b4-2), the player performs the third stop operation of the left stop switch 8L at the timing when the number 1 orange symbol on the left reel 2L is positioned on the pay line LN. After that, as shown in FIG. 75(c4-2), when the ON state of the third stop operation by the player is effectively detected by the timer interrupt process, based on the operation timing of the third stop operation, Reel stop control is performed to stop the left reel 2L so as to stop the determined symbols on the winning line LN. In this example, reel stop control is performed to stop the left reel 2L so that the bell symbol No. 5 located four frames ahead of the orange symbol No. 1 on the left reel 2L is stopped on the pay line LN.

As shown in FIG. 75(d4-2), when the reel stop control is performed and the third stop operation is performed, the left reel 2L slides by four frames from the orange symbol No. 1 positioned on the pay line LN. , the bell symbol No. 5 stops on the winning line LN of the left reel 2L. As a result, a symbol combination corresponding to a loss is derived from the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R.

As shown in FIG. 75(e4-2), it is assumed that power failure occurs while the third stop operation is maintained and after symbols have already stopped on the left reel 2L by the reel stop control. In this case, no image is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the illumination of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is extinguished.

As shown in FIG. 75 (f4-2), the player's hand is released from the left stop switch 8L. After that, as shown in FIG. 75 (g4-2), when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is resumed with the player's hand released from the left stop switch 8L and the power is restored, the loading image is displayed on the liquid crystal display. is displayed on the device 51, and a start-up sound is output from the speaker 53.

As shown in FIG. 75 (h4-2), when the power is restored from the power failure, the main processing performed before the power failure occurs is restored, and the reel stop control processing is executed again. In this reel stop control process, it is determined that all the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are stopped (YES in Sc9) and all the stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R are released from being pressed (NO in Sc12). , the reel stop control process ends.

As shown in FIG. 76(i4-2), when the loading after power failure recovery is completed, the winning determination process (Sb48) in the main process shown in FIG. 14 is performed. Thus, it is determined whether or not a prize has been won based on the result of the internal lottery and the symbol combination (losing) that is stopped on the prize line LN determined when the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are stopped. However, in this case, no winning occurs, so no payout is performed.

On the other hand, as the control of the effect by the sub-controller 91, the winning effect is not performed, the side lamps 27 and the reel backlights 28 are kept turned off, and the winning sound is not output from the speaker 53 either. Therefore, when the power is restored from the power failure, the processing after the power failure can be smoothly performed by not uniformly executing the prize winning effect.

As shown in FIG. 76(j4-2), the section display LED 19 is kept turned off because the player has lost.

As shown in FIG. 76 (k4-2), the BET operation is validated to start the next game, and the number of bets is set by performing the BET operation.

(Pattern 5)
FIG. 77 is a diagram for explaining effects and processing in pattern 5. FIG. As shown in FIG. 77, in pattern 5, in a game in which the bell is won in the order of pushing during AT, the total net increase in the advantageous section by winning bell 1, which is the main character, is the upper limit number (for example, 2400). is assumed to reach Also, in the example shown in FIG. 77, in a game in which the push-order bell is won during AT, the derived numbers, presence or absence of payout (medal, replay), presence or absence of winning effects are shown when power failure does not occur. , and extinguishing or lighting of the section display LED 19 are exemplified.

As shown in FIG. 77(a5), during the AT, the background image corresponding to the AT is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and advantageous BGM corresponding to the AT is output from the speaker 53. FIG. In addition, the advantageous medium lamp 60 is lit. When the push order bell is won during AT, navigation is executed, and a numerical image indicating the operation order (push order) of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 and the liquid crystal display 51. be. Specifically, when the 321st choice bell out of the pressing order bells is won, a number image is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 and the liquid crystal display 51 so as to prompt reverse pressing of the stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R. . In this example, the player reversely presses the right stop switch 8R and the middle stop switch 8C, respectively, thereby stopping the bell symbols in the middle stages of the right reel 2R and the middle reel 2C.

As shown in FIG. 77(b5), the player performs the third stop operation of the left stop switch 8L at the timing when the number 1 orange symbol is positioned on the pay line LN on the left reel 2L. At this time, the navigation display on the game auxiliary display 12 is erased.

After that, as shown in FIG. 77(c5), when the ON state of the third stop operation by the player is effectively detected by the timer interrupt process, a preset timing is determined based on the operation timing of the third stop operation. Reel stop control is performed to stop the left reel 2L so as to stop the symbols on the winning line LN. For example, when the ON state of the third stop operation is detected four times (corresponding to about 2.24 milliseconds) by the timer interrupt processing, the left reel 2L is controlled to stop after at least 0.56 milliseconds. will be In this example, reel stop control is performed to stop the left reel 2L so that the bell symbol No. 5 located four frames ahead of the orange symbol No. 1 on the left reel 2L is stopped on the pay line LN.

As shown in FIG. 77(d5), by the reel stop control, when the left reel 2L slides by four frames from the number 1 orange symbol positioned on the pay line LN when the third stop operation is performed, the left reel 2L slides to the left. A 5th bell symbol is stopped on the winning line LN of the reel 2L. As a result, three bell symbols are derived together as a symbol combination corresponding to the bell 1 on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R.

As shown in FIG. 77(e5), when the player's hand is released from the left stop switch 8L, all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped (YES in Sc9), and all the stop switches 8L, 8C, Since it is determined that the pressing of the 8R has been released (NO in Sc12), the reel stop control process ends, and the winning determination process (Sb48) in the main process shown in FIG. 14 is performed. As a result, it is determined whether or not a prize has been won based on the result of the internal lottery and the combination of symbols to be stopped on the prize line LN determined when the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are stopped. , Bell 1 wins. Then, by performing the medal payout process (Sb63) in the main process shown in FIG. 14, the process of paying out 8 medals is performed as the payout based on the winning of Bell 1. Further, on the game auxiliary display 12, a numerical image of "8" is displayed to notify the number of paid out medals.

On the other hand, as the control of the effect by the sub-control unit 91, the winning effect is executed based on the winning of the bell 1, so that the side lamps 27 and the reel backlights 28 are lit in a manner corresponding to the winning effect, and the speaker 53 Winning sound is output from. Also, a character image of "GET" is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 together with the bell image and the character image to notify that a medal has been obtained by winning the bell 1. FIG. Furthermore, in the first area 51c of the display area of the liquid crystal display 51, the total number of acquired sheets display 62 is updated from "TOTAL 2392 sheets" to "TOTAL 2400 sheets" by adding 8 sheets, and the acquired number display 63 changes from "GET 1012 sheets". 8 cards are added and updated to "GET 1020 cards".

As shown in FIG. 77(f5), the limiter condition is met when the total net increase in the number of cards during the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number (for example, 2400), so the section display LED 19 that has been lit is turned off.

As shown in FIG. 77 (g5), the result is announced, and the result images of "TOTAL 2400 sheets" and "GET 1020 sheets" are displayed together with the words "Be careful not to get addicted. Pachislot is a game to be enjoyed moderately." The alert image is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). At this time, the side lamps 27, reel backlights 28, and advantage lamps 60 are turned off.

Now, with reference to FIG. 78, the start timing of the winning determination process by the main control unit 41 will be described for games in which power failure has not occurred. FIG. 78 is a timing chart for explaining the start timing of the winning notification effect in a game in which power failure does not occur.

As shown in FIG. 78 , the main control unit 41 sets a prescribed number of bets during the game start waiting process, and when the start switch 7 is operated to start the game, reel stop control is performed. The processing is started, the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are started to rotate, and the corresponding reel is stopped each time the stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R are operated to stop. Then, after the stop switch related to the third stop operation is pressed to start the stop operation, the stop switch related to the third stop operation is released to end the stop operation, whereby reel stop control processing is performed. is terminated, and the winning determination process is performed.

Hereinafter, the period from the start of the third stop operation to the end of the third stop operation in a game in which power failure does not occur may be referred to as a first specific period. Also, the period from the end of the third stop operation to the execution of the winning determination process in a game in which power failure does not occur may be referred to as a second specific period.

In addition, the main control unit 41 controls the AT in the game, and when the push order bell is won in the internal lottery, the third bell is activated from the time the start switch 7 is operated to start the game. Control is performed so that the navigation notification is performed over the period until the stop operation is performed.

On the other hand, during a game in which reel stop control processing is performed on the main control unit 41 side, the sub-control unit 91 causes the liquid crystal display 51 to display an effect image displayed in the AT state, and plays advantageous BGM through the speaker. It is controlled to output from 53.

Further, when the navigation notification is performed by the main control unit 41, the sub-control unit 91 provides the navigation notification over the period from when the game start operation is performed by the start switch 7 to when the third stop operation is performed. control is performed so as to perform a navigation effect that notifies the operation modes of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R notified by .

Then, in the winning determination process, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not any winning combination has occurred, and issues a command capable of specifying the presence or absence of a winning and the symbol combination derived on the winning line LN. It is transmitted to the sub-controller 91 . After that, when it is determined that any of the small winnings has been won by the winning determination processing, the medal payout processing is performed, and a predetermined number of medals (in this embodiment, , 8 medals) are paid out from the hopper unit 35, and the number of medals to be paid out is controlled to be displayed on the game auxiliary display device 12.例文帳に追加After the payout process is completed, the game start waiting process is started to wait until the operation for starting the next game (operation of the start switch 7 in a state where the prescribed number of bets is set) is performed.

On the other hand, when it is specified based on the command received from the main control unit 41 that any winning combination has occurred, the sub-control unit 91 controls the liquid crystal display 51, the speaker 53, the reel backlight, and the like. 28 and side lamps 27 are used to perform a prize winning effect.

Further, the sub-control unit 91 stops the power supply to the slot machine 1 based on the command received from the main control unit 41, and stops the power supply to the slot machine 1 before it is specified that any winning combination has occurred. When the supply is started, after that, when it is specified based on the command received from the main control unit 41 that any winning combination has occurred, the power failure does not occur as described above. Similarly, control is performed so that the winning notification effect is performed in the first mode, and the fact that the winning has occurred is notified.

(Pattern 6)
79 to 81 are diagrams for explaining effects and processing in pattern 6. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 79 to 81, in pattern 6, in a game in which the winning order of the bell is won during the AT, the total net increase in the advantageous section by winning the bell 1, which is the main character, is the upper limit number (for example, 2400 sheets). In addition, in the examples shown in FIGS. 79 to 81, in a game in which the pressing order bell is won during AT, the derived numbers, the presence or absence of payout (medal, replay), and the winning performance are shown when power failure occurs. , and whether the section display LED 19 is turned off or turned on.

First, with reference to FIGS. 79 and 81, an example of the case where power failure 1 occurs will be described. As shown in FIG. 79(a6-1), during the AT, the background image corresponding to the AT is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and advantageous BGM corresponding to the AT is output from the speaker 53. FIG. In addition, the advantageous medium lamp 60 is lit. When the push order bell is won during AT, navigation is executed, and a numerical image indicating the operation order (push order) of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 and the liquid crystal display 51. be. Specifically, when the 321st choice bell out of the pressing order bells is won, a number image is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 and the liquid crystal display 51 so as to prompt reverse pressing of the stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R. . In this example, the player reversely presses the right stop switch 8R and the middle stop switch 8C, respectively, thereby stopping the bell symbols in the middle stages of the right reel 2R and the middle reel 2C.

As shown in FIG. 79(b6-1), the player performs the third stop operation of the left stop switch 8L at the timing when the number 1 orange symbol on the left reel 2L is positioned on the pay line LN. At this time, the navigation display on the game auxiliary display 12 is erased.

After that, as shown in FIG. 79(c6-1), when the ON state of the third stop operation by the player is effectively detected by the timer interrupt process, based on the operation timing of the third stop operation, Reel stop control is performed to stop the left reel 2L so as to stop the determined symbols on the winning line LN. In this example, reel stop control is performed to stop the left reel 2L so that the bell symbol No. 5 located four frames ahead of the orange symbol No. 1 on the left reel 2L is stopped on the pay line LN.

As shown in FIG. 79(d6-1), it is assumed that power failure occurs while the third stop operation is maintained and before symbols are stopped on the left reel 2L by the reel stop control. For example, it is conceivable that power failure occurs during the period from when the left stop switch 8L is operated to when the left reel 2L is controlled to stop after at least 0.56 milliseconds. Alternatively, even after 0.56 milliseconds after the start of stop control for the left reel 2L, if the power failure occurs while the control for stopping the bell symbol of number 5, which is four frames ahead, is not sufficient. can be assumed. In this case, no image is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the illumination of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is extinguished.

As shown in FIG. 79(e6-1), the above-described power failure causes the left reel 2L to no longer be excited, so that the left reel 2L rotates only by its own weight and eventually stops naturally. As described above, when power failure does not occur, on the left reel 2L, the 5th bell symbol, which is four frames ahead of the 1st orange symbol, is stopped on the pay line LN. Since the stop control is not performed, the number 3 white 7 symbols which are two frames ahead of the number 1 orange symbol stop on the winning line LN. As a result, a symbol combination corresponding to a loss in which no winning occurs is derived on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R.

As shown in FIG. 79(f6-1), the player's hand is released from the left stop switch 8L. After that, as shown in FIG. 79 (g6-1), when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is resumed with the player's hand released from the left stop switch 8L and the power is restored, the loading image is displayed on the liquid crystal display. is displayed on the device 51, and a start-up sound is output from the speaker 53.

As shown in FIG. 79 (h6-1), when the power is restored from the power failure, the main processing performed before the power failure occurred is restored, and the reel stop control processing is executed again. In this reel stop control process, it is determined that all the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are stopped (YES in Sc9) and all the stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R are released from being pressed (NO in Sc12). , the reel stop control process ends.

As shown in FIG. 81 (i6-1), when the loading after the recovery from the power failure is completed, the section display LED 19 is recovered and controlled to light up by the LED dynamic display processing in the timer interrupt processing. Further, the winning determination process (Sb48) in the main process shown in FIG. 14 is performed. As a result, it is determined whether or not a prize has been won based on the result of the internal lottery and the combination of symbols to be stopped on the prize line LN determined when the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are stopped. , Bell 1 wins. Here, as described above, on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning line LN is derived. Instead, it is determined whether or not a prize is generated based on the symbol combination (bell alignment) that is stopped on the prize line LN determined when the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped. For this reason, as in this example, even if a losing pattern combination is derived due to an electrical interruption, if the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated in the order of deriving the bell alignment, the bell 1 will be displayed. Winning occurs. Then, by performing the medal payout process (Sb63) in the main process shown in FIG. 14, the process of paying out 8 medals is performed as the payout based on the winning of Bell 1. Further, on the game auxiliary display 12, a numerical image of "8" is displayed to notify the number of paid out medals.

On the other hand, as control of the effect by the sub-controller 91, the winning effect shown in FIG. is not output. Furthermore, the character image of "GET", the bell image and the character image as shown in FIG. For this reason, as in this example, the winning effect is executed even though the losing symbol combination is apparently derived due to the power failure. do not mislead anyone. In addition, when the power is restored from the power failure, the process after the power failure is restored can be smoothly advanced by not uniformly executing the prize-winning effect. However, in the first area 51c in the display area of the liquid crystal display 51, the total acquired number display 62 is updated from "TOTAL 2392" to "TOTAL 2400" by adding 8, and the acquired number display 63 changes from "GET 1012". 8 cards are added and updated to "GET 1020 cards". It should be noted that the advantage lamp 60 is restored and controlled to light.

As shown in FIG. 81 (j6-1), since the limiter condition is met when the total number of net increase sheets in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number (for example, 2400 sheets), the lit section display LED 19 is extinguished. .

As shown in FIG. 81 (k6-1), the results are reported, and the result images of "TOTAL 2400 sheets" and "GET 1020 sheets" are displayed together with the words "Be careful not to get addicted. Pachislot is a game that is moderately enjoyable." is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). At this time, the advantage medium lamp 60 is also turned off.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81, an example of the case where power failure 2 occurs will be described. As shown in FIG. 80(a6-2), during the AT, the background image corresponding to the AT is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and advantageous BGM corresponding to the AT is output from the speaker 53. FIG. In addition, the advantageous medium lamp 60 is lit. When the push order bell is won during AT, navigation is executed, and a numerical image indicating the operation order (push order) of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 and the liquid crystal display 51. be. Specifically, when the 321st choice bell out of the pressing order bells is won, a number image is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 and the liquid crystal display 51 so as to prompt reverse pressing of the stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R. . In this example, the player reversely presses the right stop switch 8R and the middle stop switch 8C, respectively, thereby stopping the bell symbols in the middle stages of the right reel 2R and the middle reel 2C.

As shown in FIG. 80(b6-2), the player performs the third stop operation of the left stop switch 8L at the timing when the number 1 orange symbol on the left reel 2L is positioned on the pay line LN. At this time, the navigation display on the game auxiliary display 12 is erased.

After that, as shown in FIG. 80(c6-2), when the ON state of the third stop operation by the player is effectively detected by the timer interrupt processing, based on the operation timing of the third stop operation, Reel stop control is performed to stop the left reel 2L so as to stop the determined symbols on the winning line LN. In this example, reel stop control is performed to stop the left reel 2L so that the bell symbol No. 5 located four frames ahead of the orange symbol No. 1 on the left reel 2L is stopped on the pay line LN.

As shown in FIG. 80 (d6-2), when the reel stop control is performed and the reel 2L is slid by 4 frames from the orange symbol No. 1 positioned on the pay line LN when the third stop operation is performed, The 5th bell symbol is stopped on the winning line LN of the left reel 2L. As a result, three bell symbols are derived together as a symbol combination corresponding to the bell 1 on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R.

As shown in FIG. 80(e6-2), it is assumed that power failure occurs while the third stop operation is maintained and after symbols have already stopped on the left reel 2L by the reel stop control. In this case, no image is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the illumination of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is extinguished.

As shown in FIG. 80 (f6-2), the player's hand is released from the left stop switch 8L. After that, as shown in FIG. 80 (g6-2), when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is resumed and the power is restored while the player's hand is released from the left stop switch 8L, the loading image is displayed on the liquid crystal display. is displayed on the device 51, and a start-up sound is output from the speaker 53.

As shown in FIG. 80 (h6-2), when the power is restored from the power failure, the main processing performed before the power failure occurred is resumed, and the reel stop control processing is executed again. In this reel stop control process, it is determined that all the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are stopped (YES in Sc9) and all the stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R are released from being pressed (NO in Sc12). , the reel stop control process ends.

As shown in FIG. 81 (i6-2), when the loading after restoration from the power failure is completed, the section display LED 19 is restored by the LED dynamic display processing in the timer interrupt processing and controlled to be lit. Further, the winning determination process (Sb48) in the main process shown in FIG. 14 is performed. As a result, it is determined whether or not a prize has been won based on the result of the internal lottery and the combination of symbols to be stopped on the prize line LN determined when the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are stopped. , Bell 1 wins. Then, by performing the medal payout process (Sb63) in the main process shown in FIG. 14, the process of paying out 8 medals is performed as the payout based on the winning of Bell 1. Further, on the game auxiliary display 12, a numerical image of "8" is displayed to notify the number of paid out medals.

On the other hand, as control of the effect by the sub-controller 91, the winning effect shown in FIG. is not output. Furthermore, the character image of "GET", the bell image and the character image as shown in FIG. Therefore, when the power is restored from the power failure, the processing after the power failure can be smoothly performed by not uniformly executing the prize winning effect. However, in the first area 51c in the display area of the liquid crystal display 51, the total acquired number display 62 is updated from "TOTAL 2392" to "TOTAL 2400" by adding 8, and the acquired number display 63 changes from "GET 1012". 8 cards are added and updated to "GET 1020 cards". It should be noted that the advantage lamp 60 is restored and controlled to light.

As shown in FIG. 81 (j6-2), the limiter condition is met when the total number of net increases in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number (for example, 2400), so the section display LED 19 that has been lit is extinguished. .

As shown in FIG. 81 (k6-2), the results are announced, and the result images of "TOTAL 2400 sheets" and "GET 1020 sheets" are displayed together with the words "Be careful not to get addicted. Pachislot is a game to be enjoyed moderately." is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). At this time, the advantage medium lamp 60 is also turned off.

Now, with reference to FIG. 82, the start timing of the winning determination process by the main control unit 41 will be described for the game in which the power failure occurs. FIG. 82 is a timing chart for explaining the start timing of the winning notification effect after power failure recovery in a game in which power failure occurred.

As shown in FIG. 82, after power failure occurs while the game is being played and the third stop operation is being performed, the main control unit 41 controls the slot machine 1 to stop when the third stop operation is finished. By restarting the power supply and recovering from the power failure, the initial setting process is first performed, and then the reel stop control process is resumed. After waiting until the period elapses, the reel stop control process is ended, and the winning determination process is performed. Hereinafter, the period from when power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted to when the winning determination process is performed may be referred to as a third specific period.

In the third specific period from when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is resumed and restored from the power outage to when the main control unit 41 performs the winning determination process, the initial setting process is performed when the power is restored from the power outage. After that, in the reel stop control process, when the winning determination process is performed from the time when the third stop operation shown in FIG. is longer than the second specific period up to. As a result, the time required for the control to restore the state before the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped is sufficiently ensured, so that the symbol combinations that generate winnings are stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. Even if the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped before the winning determination process is performed after the winning determination process is performed, appropriate control can be performed.

In response to this, the sub-control unit 91 first controls the startup notification effect, displays the loading image on the liquid crystal display 51, and outputs the startup sound from the speaker 53 for a predetermined period. Although illustration is omitted, the side lamps 27 may be controlled to light up in the startup mode for a predetermined period.

In this state, the sub-control section 91 controls the winning effect when it is determined that the winning has occurred based on the command received from the main control section 41 . At this time, the liquid crystal display 51 continues to display the loading image until the liquid crystal display 51 finishes reading the data such as the image into the RAM, and the output of the start-up sound from the speaker 53 is the start-up notification. Control is continued until a predetermined period elapses after control of performance is started.

In the winning performance control, the speaker 53 is controlled so as not to output the winning sound due to the Bell 1 winning by prioritizing the control of the start-up notification performance previously performed. In addition, the liquid crystal display device 51 is not caused to display the winning image of the bell 1 winning, and the winning effect by the reel backlight 28 is not executed.

After that, when the reading of the data such as the image into the RAM on the liquid crystal display 51 is completed, the display of the loading image on the liquid crystal display 51 is ended, and the effect image corresponding to the control state before the power failure occurs. is displayed. At this time, as for the output mode of the speaker 53, the output of the start-up sound is continued if a predetermined period has not elapsed since the control of the start-up notification effect was started. After that, when the predetermined time has passed, the advantageous BGM is output from the speaker 53 .

(Pattern 7)
FIG. 83 is a diagram for explaining effects and processing in pattern 7. FIG. As shown in FIG. 83, in pattern 7, it is assumed that the winning game is lost during AT. Also, in the example shown in FIG. 83, in a game in which the player wins a losing match during AT, the derived numbers, the presence or absence of payout (medal, replay), the presence or absence of the winning effect, and the like, when power failure does not occur, Exemplified is the extinguishing or lighting of the section display LED 19 .

As shown in FIG. 83(a7), during the AT, the background image corresponding to the AT is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and advantageous BGM corresponding to the AT is output from the speaker 53. FIG. In this example, the player operates the right stop switch 8R and the middle stop switch 8C at the timing of stopping the white 7 symbols on the pay line LN by reverse pressing, thereby causing the right reel 2R and the middle reel 2C to stop. A bell pattern stops in the middle of each row.

As shown in FIG. 83(b7), the player performs the third stop operation of the left stop switch 8L at the timing when the number 3 white 7 symbol is positioned on the pay line LN on the left reel 2L. After that, as shown in FIG. 83(c7), when the ON state of the third stop operation by the player is effectively detected by the timer interrupt process, a preset timing is determined based on the operation timing of the third stop operation. Reel stop control is performed to stop the left reel 2L so as to stop the symbols on the winning line LN. For example, when the ON state of the third stop operation is detected four times (corresponding to about 2.24 milliseconds) by the timer interrupt processing, the left reel 2L is controlled to stop after at least 0.56 milliseconds. will be In this example, the reel stop control for stopping the left reel 2L is performed so that the blank pattern of number 7, which is four frames ahead of the number 3 white 7 pattern on the left reel 2L, is stopped on the pay line LN. .

As shown in FIG. 83(d7), when the reel stop control is performed and the left reel 2L is slid by 4 frames from the 3 white 7 symbols positioned on the pay line LN when the 3rd stop operation is performed, A blank symbol No. 7 is stopped on the winning line LN of the left reel 2L. As a result, a symbol combination corresponding to a loss is derived from the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R.

As shown in FIG. 83(e7), when the player's hand is released from the left stop switch 8L, all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped (YES in Sc9), and all the stop switches 8L, 8C, Since it is determined that the pressing of the 8R has been released (NO in Sc12), the reel stop control process ends, and the winning determination process (Sb48) in the main process shown in FIG. 14 is performed. Thus, it is determined whether or not a prize has been won based on the result of the internal lottery and the symbol combination (losing) that is stopped on the prize line LN determined when the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are stopped. However, in this case, no winning occurs, so no payout is performed.

On the other hand, even when the sub-controller 91 controls the performance, no winning performance is executed because no winning occurs.

As shown in FIG. 83(f7), the section display LED 19 also keeps lighting up because the winning has been lost.

As shown in FIG. 83 (g7), the BET operation is validated to start the next game, and the number of bets is set by performing the BET operation.

(Pattern 8)
84 to 86 are diagrams for explaining effects and processing in pattern 8. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 84 to 86, pattern 8 assumes a game in which a winning game is lost in the AT. Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 84 to 86, in a game in which the player wins in the AT, the derived numbers, presence or absence of payouts (medals, replay), and presence or absence of winning effects when power failure occurs. , and extinguishing or lighting of the section display LED 19 are exemplified.

First, with reference to FIGS. 84 and 86, an example of the case where power failure 1 occurs will be described. As shown in FIG. 84(a8-1), during the AT, the background image corresponding to the AT is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 and advantageous BGM is output from the speaker 53. FIG. In this example, the player operates the right stop switch 8R and the middle stop switch 8C at the timing of stopping the bell pattern on the pay line LN by reverse pressing, thereby causing the right reel 2R and the middle reel 2C to operate. The bell pattern is stopped in the middle of the .

As shown in FIG. 84(b8-1), the player performs the third stop operation of the left stop switch 8L at the timing when the number 3 white 7 symbol on the left reel 2L is positioned on the pay line LN. After that, as shown in FIG. 84(c8-1), when the ON state of the third stop operation by the player is effectively detected by the timer interrupt process, based on the operation timing of the third stop operation, Reel stop control is performed to stop the left reel 2L so as to stop the determined symbols on the winning line LN. In this example, the reel stop control for stopping the left reel 2L is performed so that the blank pattern of number 7, which is four frames ahead of the number 3 white 7 pattern on the left reel 2L, is stopped on the pay line LN. .

As shown in FIG. 84(d8-1), it is assumed that power failure occurs while the third stop operation is maintained and before symbols are stopped on the left reel 2L by the reel stop control. For example, it is conceivable that power failure occurs during the period from when the left stop switch 8L is operated to when the left reel 2L is controlled to stop after at least 0.56 milliseconds. Alternatively, even after 0.56 milliseconds after the start of the stop control of the left reel 2L, if the power failure occurs while the control for stopping the blank pattern of number 7, which is four frames ahead, is not sufficient. can be assumed. In this case, no image is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the illumination of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is extinguished.

As shown in FIG. 84(e8-1), the above-described electrical interruption causes the left reel 2L to no longer be magnetized, so that the left reel 2L rotates only by its own weight and eventually stops naturally. As described above, when power failure does not occur, on the left reel 2L, the blank symbol of number 7, which is four frames ahead of the white symbol of number 3, is stopped on the pay line LN. Since the reel stop control is not performed, the bell pattern two frames ahead of the 3rd white 7 pattern stops on the winning line LN. As a result, a bell-aligned symbol combination corresponding to the bell 1 is accidentally derived on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R.

As shown in FIG. 84 (f8-1), the player's hand is released from the left stop switch 8L. After that, as shown in FIG. 84 (g8-1), when the power supply to the slot machine 1 resumes with the player's hand released from the left stop switch 8L and the power is restored, the loading image is displayed on the liquid crystal display. is displayed on the device 51, and a start-up sound is output from the speaker 53.

As shown in FIG. 84 (h8-1), when the power is restored from the power failure, the main processing performed before the power failure is resumed, and the reel stop control processing is executed again. In this reel stop control process, it is determined that all the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are stopped (YES in Sc9) and all the stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R are released from being pressed (NO in Sc12). , the reel stop control process ends.

As shown in FIG. 86 (i8-1), when the loading after the recovery from the power failure is completed, the section display LED 19 is recovered and controlled to light up by the LED dynamic display processing in the timer interrupt processing. Further, the winning determination process (Sb48) in the main process shown in FIG. 14 is performed. Thus, it is determined whether or not a prize has been won based on the result of the internal lottery and the symbol combination (losing) that is stopped on the prize line LN determined when the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are stopped. . Here, as described above, in the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the bell alignment is derived on the winning line LN. It is determined whether or not a prize is generated based on the combination of symbols (losing) stopped on the prize line LN determined during the stop operation on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. For this reason, as in this example, even if the bells are apparently aligned due to a power outage, the winning result is determined to be a loss, and Bell 1 will not win and no payout will be made. .

On the other hand, as the control of the effect by the sub-controller 91, the winning effect is not performed, the side lamps 27 and the reel backlights 28 are kept turned off, and the winning sound is not output from the speaker 53 either. Therefore, when the power is restored from the power failure, the processing after the power failure can be smoothly performed by not uniformly executing the prize winning effect. It should be noted that the advantage lamp 60 is restored and controlled to light.

As shown in FIG. 86(j8-1), the section display LED 19 keeps lighting up because the player has lost.

As shown in FIG. 86 (k8-1), the BET operation is validated to start the next game, and the number of bets is set by performing the BET operation.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86, an example of the case where power failure 2 occurs will be described. As shown in FIG. 85(a8-2), during the AT, a background image corresponding to the AT is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 and advantageous BGM is output from the speaker 53. FIG. In this example, the player operates the right stop switch 8R and the middle stop switch 8C at the timing of stopping the bell pattern on the pay line LN by reverse pressing, thereby causing the right reel 2R and the middle reel 2C to operate. The bell pattern is stopped in the middle of the .

As shown in FIG. 85(b8-2), the player performs the third stop operation of the left stop switch 8L at the timing when the number 3 white 7 symbols on the left reel 2L is positioned on the pay line LN. After that, as shown in FIG. 85(c8-2), when the ON state of the third stop operation by the player is effectively detected by the timer interrupt process, based on the operation timing of the third stop operation, Reel stop control is performed to stop the left reel 2L so as to stop the determined symbols on the winning line LN. In this example, the reel stop control for stopping the left reel 2L is performed so that the blank pattern of number 7, which is four frames ahead of the number 3 white 7 pattern on the left reel 2L, is stopped on the pay line LN. .

As shown in FIG. 85 (d8-2), the reel stop control causes the left reel 2L to slide by 4 frames from the 3 white 7 symbols positioned on the pay line LN when the 3rd stop operation is performed. Then, the blank symbol No. 7 stops on the winning line LN of the left reel 2L. As a result, a symbol combination corresponding to a loss is derived from the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R.

As shown in FIG. 85(e8-2), it is assumed that power failure occurs while the third stop operation is maintained and after symbols have already stopped on the left reel 2L by the reel stop control. In this case, no image is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the illumination of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is extinguished.

As shown in FIG. 85 (f8-2), the player's hand is released from the left stop switch 8L. After that, as shown in FIG. 85 (g8-2), when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is resumed and the power is restored while the player's hand is released from the left stop switch 8L, the loading image is displayed on the liquid crystal display. is displayed on the device 51, and a start-up sound is output from the speaker 53.

As shown in FIG. 85 (h8-2), when the power is restored from the power failure, the main processing performed before the power failure occurred is resumed, and the reel stop control processing is executed again. In this reel stop control process, it is determined that all the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are stopped (YES in Sc9) and all the stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R are released from being pressed (NO in Sc12). , the reel stop control process ends.

As shown in FIG. 86 (i8-2), when the loading after the recovery from the power failure is completed, the section display LED 19 is recovered and controlled to light up by the LED dynamic display processing in the timer interrupt processing. Further, the winning determination process (Sb48) in the main process shown in FIG. 14 is performed. Thus, it is determined whether or not a prize has been won based on the result of the internal lottery and the symbol combination (losing) that is stopped on the prize line LN determined when the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are stopped. However, in this case, no winning occurs, so no payout is performed.

On the other hand, as the control of the effect by the sub-controller 91, the winning effect is not performed, the side lamps 27 and the reel backlights 28 are kept turned off, and the winning sound is not output from the speaker 53 either. Therefore, when the power is restored from the power failure, the processing after the power failure can be smoothly performed by not uniformly executing the prize winning effect. It should be noted that the advantage lamp 60 is restored and controlled to light.

As shown in FIG. 86 (j8-2), the section display LED 19 keeps lighting up because the player has lost.

As shown in FIG. 86 (k8-2), the BET operation is validated to start the next game, and the number of bets is set by performing the BET operation.

(Pattern 9)
FIG. 87 is a diagram for explaining effects and processing in pattern 9. FIG. As shown in FIG. 87, in pattern 9, in a game in which all small hands are won during CB, the total number of payouts during CB reaches the upper limit number (for example, 150) by winning Bell 1. Suppose. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 87, in the game in which all minor hands are won during the CB, the derived numbers, the presence or absence of payout (medal, replay), and the presence or absence of the prize presentation are performed when power failure does not occur. , and extinguishing or lighting of the section display LED 19 are exemplified.

As shown in FIG. 87(a9), during the CB, the background image corresponding to the CB is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the bonus BGM corresponding to the CB is output from the speaker 53. In addition, the advantageous medium lamp 60 is lit. In this example, the player sequentially presses the left stop switch 8L and the middle stop switch 8C, respectively, thereby stopping the bell symbols in the middle stages of the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2C.

As shown in FIG. 87(b9), the player performs the third stop operation of the right stop switch 8R at the timing when the 17th white 7 symbols on the right reel 2R are positioned on the pay line LN.

After that, as shown in FIG. 87(c9), when the ON state of the third stop operation by the player is effectively detected by the timer interrupt processing, a preset timing is determined based on the operation timing of the third stop operation. Reel stop control is performed to stop the right reel 2R so as to stop the symbols on the pay line LN. For example, when the ON state of the third stop operation is detected four times (equivalent to about 2.24 milliseconds) by the timer interrupt processing, the stop control of the right reel 2R is performed after at least 0.56 milliseconds. will be In this example, the reel stop control is performed to stop the right reel 2R so that the 0th bell symbol four frames ahead of the 17th white 7 symbol on the right reel 2R is stopped on the pay line LN. .

As shown in FIG. 87(d9), when the third stop operation is performed by the reel stop control, when the right reel 2R slips by 4 frames from the white 7 symbols of No. 17 positioned on the pay line LN, The 0th bell symbol stops on the winning line LN of the right reel 2R. As a result, three bell symbols are derived together as a symbol combination corresponding to the bell 1 on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R.

As shown in FIG. 87(e9), when the player's hand is released from the right stop switch 8R, all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped (YES in Sc9), and all the stop switches 8L, 8C, Since it is determined that the pressing of the 8R has been released (NO in Sc12), the reel stop control process ends, and the winning determination process (Sb48) in the main process shown in FIG. 14 is performed. As a result, it is determined whether or not a prize has been won based on the result of the internal lottery and the combination of symbols to be stopped on the prize line LN determined when the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are stopped. , Bell 1 wins. Then, by performing the medal payout process (Sb63) in the main process shown in FIG. 14, the process of paying out 15 medals is performed as the payout based on the Bell 1 win. Also, on the auxiliary game display 12, a numerical image of "15" is displayed to notify the number of paid out medals.

On the other hand, as the control of the effect by the sub-control unit 91, the winning effect is executed based on the winning of the bell 1, so that the side lamps 27 and the reel backlights 28 are lit in a manner corresponding to the winning effect, and the speaker 53 Winning sound is output from. In addition, a character image of "15 GET" is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 together with the character image to notify that a medal has been obtained by winning the bell 1. FIG. Furthermore, in the first area 51c of the display area of the liquid crystal display 51, the total number of acquired sheets display 62 is updated from "TOTAL 764 sheets" to "TOTAL 779 sheets" by adding 15 sheets, and the acquired number display 63 changes from "GET 129 sheets". 15 cards are added and updated to "GET 144 cards".

As shown in FIG. 87(f9), after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the effect for notifying the result during freezing shown in FIGS. 61 and 62 is executed, and then the result is notified as shown in FIG. 87(g9). , ``TOTAL 779 sheets'' and ``GET 1020 sheets'', as well as a warning image with the words ``Beware of getting addicted. are displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. At this time, the side lamps 27, reel backlights 28, and advantage lamps 60 are turned off.

(Pattern 10)
88 to 90 are diagrams for explaining effects and processing in pattern 10. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 88 to 90, in pattern 10, in a game in which all small wins are won during CB, the total number of payouts during CB reaches the upper limit (for example, 150) by winning Bell 1. It is assumed that the Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 88 to 90, in a game in which all minor wins are won during CB, the derived numbers, presence or absence of payouts (medals, replay), and winning effects when power failure occurs , and whether the section display LED 19 is turned off or turned on.

First, with reference to FIGS. 88 and 90, an example of the case where power failure 1 occurs will be described. As shown in FIG. 88(a10-1), during the CB, the background image corresponding to the CB is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the bonus BGM corresponding to the CB is output from the speaker 53. In addition, the advantageous medium lamp 60 is lit. In this example, the player sequentially presses the left stop switch 8L and the middle stop switch 8C, respectively, thereby stopping the bell symbols in the middle stages of the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2C.

As shown in FIG. 88(b10-1), the player performs the third stop operation of the right stop switch 8R at the timing when the 17th white 7 symbols on the right reel 2R are positioned on the pay line LN.

After that, as shown in FIG. 88(c10-1), when the ON state of the third stop operation by the player is effectively detected by the timer interrupt process, based on the operation timing of the third stop operation, Reel stop control is performed to stop the right reel 2R so as to stop the determined symbols on the pay line LN. In this example, the reel stop control is performed to stop the right reel 2R so that the 0th bell symbol four frames ahead of the 17th white 7 symbol on the right reel 2R is stopped on the pay line LN. .

As shown in FIG. 88 (d10-1), it is assumed that power failure occurs while the third stop operation is maintained and before symbols are stopped on the right reel 2R by the reel stop control. For example, it is conceivable that power failure occurs during the period from when the right stop switch 8R is operated to when the right reel 2R is controlled to stop after at least 0.56 milliseconds. Alternatively, even after the stop control of the right reel 2R is started after 0.56 milliseconds, if the power failure occurs while the control for stopping the number 0 bell symbol on the frame ahead is not sufficient. can be assumed. In this case, no image is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the illumination of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is extinguished.

As shown in FIG. 88(e10-1), the above-described electrical interruption causes the right reel 2R to stop being excited, so that the right reel 2R rotates only by its own weight and eventually stops naturally. As described above, when power failure does not occur, on the right reel 2R, the 0th bell symbol four frames ahead of the 17th white 7 symbol is stopped on the pay line LN. Since the reel stop control is not performed, the 19th replay a symbol which is two frames ahead of the 17th white 7 symbol stops on the pay line LN. As a result, a symbol combination corresponding to a loss in which no winning occurs is derived on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R.

As shown in FIG. 88 (f10-1), the player's hand is released from the right stop switch 8R. After that, as shown in FIG. 88 (g10-1), when the power supply to the slot machine 1 resumes with the player's hand released from the right stop switch 8R and the power is restored, the loading image is displayed on the liquid crystal display. is displayed on the device 51, and a start-up sound is output from the speaker 53.

As shown in FIG. 88 (h10-1), when the power is restored from the power failure, the main processing performed before the power failure occurred is restored, and the reel stop control processing is executed again. In this reel stop control process, it is determined that all the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are stopped (YES in Sc9) and all the stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R are released from being pressed (NO in Sc12). , the reel stop control process ends.

As shown in FIG. 90 (i10-1), when the loading after power failure recovery is completed, the winning determination process (Sb48) in the main process shown in FIG. 14 is performed. As a result, it is determined whether or not a prize has been won based on the result of the internal lottery and the combination of symbols to be stopped on the prize line LN determined when the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are stopped. , Bell 1 wins. Here, as described above, on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning line LN is derived. Instead, it is determined whether or not a prize is generated based on the symbol combination (bell alignment) that is stopped on the prize line LN determined when the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped. For this reason, as in this example, even if a losing pattern combination is derived due to an electrical interruption, if the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated at the timing of deriving the bell alignment, Bell 1 wins a prize. occurs. Then, by performing the medal payout process (Sb63) in the main process shown in FIG. 14, the process of paying out 15 medals is performed as the payout based on the Bell 1 win. Also, on the auxiliary game display 12, a numerical image of "15" is displayed to notify the number of paid out medals.

On the other hand, as control of the effect by the sub-controller 91, the winning effect shown in FIG. is not output. Furthermore, neither the character image nor the character image "GET 15 sheets" as shown in FIG. For this reason, as in this example, the winning effect is executed even though the losing symbol combination is apparently derived due to the power failure. do not mislead anyone. In addition, when the power is restored from the power failure, the process after the power failure is restored can be smoothly advanced by not uniformly executing the prize-winning effect. However, in the first area 51c in the display area of the liquid crystal display 51, the total acquired number display 62 is updated from "TOTAL 764 cards" to "TOTAL 779 cards" by adding 15 cards, and the acquired number display 63 is updated from "GET 129 cards". 15 cards are added and updated to "GET 144 cards". It should be noted that the advantage lamp 60 is restored and controlled to light.

As shown in FIG. 90 (j10-1), since the total number of payouts in the CB has reached the upper limit number (for example, 150) and an arbitrary termination condition has been met, the result is notified, and "TOTAL 779 ” and “GET 144 sheets” are displayed on the liquid crystal display for a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds). displayed on the device 51. At this time, the advantage medium lamp 60 is also turned off.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 89 and 90, an example of the case where power failure 2 occurs will be described. As shown in FIG. 89(a10-2), during the CB, the background image corresponding to the CB is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the bonus BGM corresponding to the CB is output from the speaker 53. In addition, the advantageous medium lamp 60 is lit. In this example, the player sequentially presses the left stop switch 8L and the middle stop switch 8C, respectively, thereby stopping the bell symbols in the middle stages of the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2C.

As shown in FIG. 89(b10-2), the player performs the third stop operation of the right stop switch 8R at the timing when the 17th white 7 symbols are positioned on the pay line LN on the right reel 2R.

After that, as shown in FIG. 89 (c10-2), when the ON state of the third stop operation by the player is effectively detected by the timer interrupt process, based on the operation timing of the third stop operation, Reel stop control is performed to stop the right reel 2R so as to stop the determined symbols on the pay line LN. In this example, the reel stop control is performed to stop the right reel 2R so that the 0th bell symbol four frames ahead of the 17th white 7 symbol on the right reel 2R is stopped on the pay line LN. .

As shown in FIG. 88 (d10-2), the reel stop control causes the right reel 2R to slide by 4 frames from the white 7 symbols of No. 17 positioned on the pay line LN when the third stop operation is performed. Then, the 0th bell symbol stops on the winning line LN of the right reel 2R. As a result, three bell symbols are derived together as a symbol combination corresponding to the bell 1 on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R.

As shown in FIG. 89(e10-2), it is assumed that a power failure occurs while the third stop operation is maintained and after symbols have already stopped on the right reel 2R due to the reel stop control. In this case, no image is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the illumination of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is extinguished.

As shown in FIG. 89 (f10-2), the player's hand is released from the right stop switch 8R. After that, as shown in FIG. 89 (g10-2), when the power supply to the slot machine 1 resumes with the player's hand released from the right stop switch 8R and the power is restored, the loading image is displayed on the liquid crystal display. is displayed on the device 51, and a start-up sound is output from the speaker 53.

As shown in FIG. 89 (h10-2), when the power is restored from the power failure, the main processing performed before the power failure occurred is restored, and the reel stop control processing is executed again. In this reel stop control process, it is determined that all the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are stopped (YES in Sc9) and all the stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R are released from being pressed (NO in Sc12). , the reel stop control process ends.

As shown in FIG. 90 (i10-2), when the loading after power failure recovery is completed, the winning determination process (Sb48) in the main process shown in FIG. 14 is performed. As a result, it is determined whether or not a prize has been won based on the result of the internal lottery and the combination of symbols to be stopped on the prize line LN determined when the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are stopped. , Bell 1 wins. Then, by performing the medal payout process (Sb63) in the main process shown in FIG. 14, the process of paying out 15 medals is performed as the payout based on the Bell 1 win. Also, on the auxiliary game display 12, a numerical image of "15" is displayed to notify the number of paid out medals.

On the other hand, as control of the effect by the sub-controller 91, the winning effect shown in FIG. is not output. Furthermore, neither the character image nor the character image "GET 15 sheets" as shown in FIG. Therefore, when the power is restored from the power failure, the processing after the power failure can be smoothly performed by not uniformly executing the prize winning effect. However, in the first area 51c in the display area of the liquid crystal display 51, the total acquired number display 62 is updated from "TOTAL 764 cards" to "TOTAL 779 cards" by adding 15 cards, and the acquired number display 63 is updated from "GET 129 cards". 15 cards are added and updated to "GET 144 cards". It should be noted that the advantage lamp 60 is restored and controlled to light.

As shown in FIG. 90 (j10-2), since the total number of payouts in the CB has reached the upper limit number (for example, 150) and an arbitrary termination condition has been met, the result is notified, and "TOTAL 779 ” and “GET 144 sheets” are displayed on the liquid crystal display for a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds). displayed on the device 51. At this time, the advantage medium lamp 60 is also turned off.

(Pattern 11)
FIG. 91 is a diagram for explaining effects and processing in pattern 11. FIG. As shown in FIG. 91, in pattern 11, it is assumed that a stop operation is performed to stop the left reel 2L at the first timing shown in FIG. 45 in a game in which all minor wins are won during CB. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 91, in a game in which all minor wins are won during CB, the derived numbers, the presence or absence of payout (medal, replay), and the presence or absence of winning effects when power failure does not occur. , and extinguishing or lighting of the section display LED 19 are exemplified.

As shown in FIG. 91(a11), during the CB, the background image corresponding to the CB is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the bonus BGM corresponding to the CB is output from the speaker 53. In addition, the advantageous medium lamp 60 is lit. When the player operates the start switch 7, the reels 2L, 2C and 2R start rotating.

As shown in FIG. 91(b11), it is assumed that the left reel 2L is subjected to the first stop operation. At this time, as shown in FIG. 45, the stop switch 8L is operated at the first timing when the 8th bell symbol is positioned on the pay line LN.

As shown in FIG. 91 (c11), when the ON state of the player's first stop operation is effectively detected by the timer interrupt process, a predetermined pattern is displayed based on the operation timing of the first stop operation. Reel stop control is performed to stop the left reel 2L so as to stop it on the pay line LN. For example, when the ON state of the first stop operation is detected four times (equivalent to about 2.24 milliseconds) by the timer interrupt processing, the left reel 2L is controlled to stop after at least 0.56 milliseconds. will be In this example, reel stop control is performed to stop the left reel 2L so that the ninth cherry symbol one frame ahead of the 8th bell symbol on the left reel 2L is stopped on the pay line LN. During the CB, the left reel 2L is determined to be the CT reel, so the symbols one frame ahead are stopped at the maximum.

Further, when the stop switch 8L is operated at the first timing, the setting suggestion effect is started. Specifically, the display screen of the liquid crystal display 51 is temporarily rendered white, and no image is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 91 (d11), by the reel stop control, when the left reel 2L slides by one frame from the bell symbol No. 8 positioned on the pay line LN when the first stop operation is performed, the left reel 2L slides to the left. A ninth cherry symbol is stopped on the winning line LN of the reel 2L. Note that the liquid crystal display 51 continues to produce a white-out effect.

As shown in FIG. 91(e11), when the player's hand is released from the left stop switch 8L, the setting suggesting effect is executed and an image of shooting stars is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

As shown in FIG. 91 (f11), after that, when all the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are stopped (YES in Sc9) and all the stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R are released (NO in Sc12). ), the reel stop control process is completed, and the winning determination process (Sb48) in the main process shown in FIG. 14 is performed. As a result, whether or not a prize has been won is determined based on the internal lottery result and the symbol combination (Cherry-Bell-Bell) to be stopped on the prize line LN determined when the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are stopped. is determined, and Cherry's winning occurs. Then, by performing the medal payout process (Sb63) in the main process shown in FIG. 14, the process of paying out 15 medals is performed as the payout based on the win of Cherry. Also, on the auxiliary game display 12, a numerical image of "15" is displayed to notify the number of paid out medals.

On the other hand, as the control of the effect by the sub-control unit 91, the side lamp 27 and the reel backlight 28 are lit in a manner corresponding to the winning effect by executing the winning effect based on the winning of the cherry, and Winning sound is output. Furthermore, in the first area 51c of the display area of the liquid crystal display 51, the total number of acquired sheets display 62 is updated from "TOTAL 156 sheets" to "TOTAL 171 sheets" by adding 15 sheets, and the acquired number display 63 changes from "GET 26 sheets". 15 cards are added and updated to "GET 41 cards".

(Pattern 12)
92 to 94 are diagrams for explaining effects and processing in pattern 12. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 92 to 94, in pattern 12, in a game in which all minor wins are won during CB, the stop operation for stopping the left reel 2L is performed at the first timing shown in FIG. Suppose. Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 92 to 94, in the game in which all the minor wins were won during the CB, the derived numbers, presence or absence of payout (medals, replay), winnings when power failure did not occur Exemplified are the presence or absence of effects, and whether the section display LED 19 is turned off or turned on.

First, with reference to FIGS. 92 and 94, an example of the case where power failure 1 occurs will be described. As shown in FIG. 92(a12-1), during the CB, the background image corresponding to the CB is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the bonus BGM corresponding to the CB is output from the speaker 53. In addition, the advantageous medium lamp 60 is lit. When the player operates the start switch 7, the reels 2L, 2C and 2R start rotating.

As shown in FIG. 92(b12-1), it is assumed that the left reel 2L is subjected to the first stop operation. At this time, as shown in FIG. 45, the stop switch 8L is operated at the first timing when the 8th bell symbol is positioned on the pay line LN.

As shown in FIG. 92(c12-1), when the ON state of the first stop operation by the player is effectively detected by the timer interrupt processing, a preset timing is determined based on the operation timing of the first stop operation. Reel stop control is performed to stop the left reel 2L so as to stop the symbols on the winning line LN. In this example, reel stop control is performed to stop the left reel 2L so that the ninth cherry symbol one frame ahead of the 8th bell symbol on the left reel 2L is stopped on the pay line LN. During the CB, the left reel 2L is determined to be the CT reel, so the symbols one frame ahead are stopped at the maximum.

Further, when the stop switch 8L is operated at the first timing, the setting suggestion effect is started. Specifically, the display screen of the liquid crystal display 51 is temporarily rendered white, and no image is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 92(d12-1), it is assumed that power failure occurs while the first stop operation is maintained and before symbols are stopped on the left reel 2L by the reel stop control. For example, after the left stop switch 8L is operated, the ON state of the first stop operation is detected by the timer interrupt processing for four times (corresponding to about 2.24 milliseconds), and at least 0.56 milliseconds It is conceivable that power failure occurs before the control for stopping the left reel 2L is performed later. Alternatively, even after the start of the stop control of the left reel 2L after 0.56 milliseconds, while the control for stopping the cherry symbol of number 9 one frame ahead is not sufficient (for example, 0.56 milliseconds It can be assumed that the power failure occurs immediately after the start of the stop control of the left reel 2L. In this case, no image is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the illumination of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is extinguished.

As shown in FIG. 92(e12-1), when the above-described power failure occurs, the left reel 2L is no longer excited, so that the left reel 2L rotates only by its own weight and eventually stops naturally. As described above, in the case where power failure does not occur, on the left reel 2L, the 9th cherry symbol one frame ahead of the 8th bell symbol is stopped on the pay line LN. Since stop control is not performed, the number 10 watermelon pattern two frames ahead of the number 8 bell pattern stops on the winning line LN. Furthermore, since the other middle reel 2C and right reel 2R are no longer excited, the middle reel 2C and right reel 2R rotate only by their own weights and eventually stop naturally. As a result, a symbol combination corresponding to a loss in which no winning occurs is derived on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R.

As shown in FIG. 92 (f12-1), the player's hand is released from the left stop switch 8L. After that, as shown in FIG. 92 (g12-1), when the power supply to the slot machine 1 resumes with the player's hand released from the left stop switch 8L and the power is restored, the loading image is displayed on the liquid crystal display. is displayed on the device 51, and a start-up sound is output from the speaker 53.

As shown in FIG. 92 (h12-1), when the power is restored from the power failure, the main processing that was being performed before the power failure occurred is restored, and the reel stop control processing is executed again.

As shown in FIG. 94 (i12-1), when the loading after the recovery from the power failure is completed, the background image in the CB in the game in which all the minor wins have been won is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 again. Further, the reel stop control process (Sb48) in the main process shown in FIG. 14 is performed, so that the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R, which have not yet been stopped, rotate again.

On the other hand, as the effect control by the sub-control section 91, the setting suggestion effect as shown in FIG. 91 (e11) is not performed.

As shown in FIG. 94 (j12-1), after that, when all the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are stopped (YES in Sc9) and all the stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R are released (Sc12 NO at ), the reel stop control process is terminated, and the winning determination process (Sb48) in the main process shown in FIG. 14 is performed. Thus, it is determined whether or not a prize has been won based on the result of the internal lottery and the symbol combination to be stopped on the prize line LN determined when the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are stopped. Here, as described above, on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning line LN is derived. Instead, it is determined whether or not a winning occurs based on the combination of symbols stopped on the winning line LN determined when the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped. That is, in the case of this example, winning determination is performed assuming that the cherry symbol is derived for the left reel 2L. As a result, even if apparently a losing symbol combination is derived due to a power failure, it is assumed that "Cherry-Bell-Bell" is derived, and Cherry wins. Then, by performing the medal payout process (Sb63) in the main process shown in FIG. 14, the process of paying out 15 medals is performed as the payout based on the win of Cherry. Also, on the auxiliary game display 12, a numerical image of "15" is displayed to notify the number of paid out medals.

On the other hand, as control of the effect by the sub-control unit 91, the winning effect shown in FIG. is not output. For this reason, as in this example, the winning effect is executed even though the losing symbol combination is apparently derived due to the power failure. do not mislead anyone. In addition, when the power is restored from the power failure, the process after the power failure is restored can be smoothly advanced by not uniformly executing the prize-winning effect. However, in the first area 51c in the display area of the liquid crystal display 51, the total acquired number display 62 is updated from "TOTAL 156 cards" to "TOTAL 171 cards" by adding 15 cards, and the acquired number display 63 is updated from "GET 26 cards". 15 cards are added and updated to "GET 41 cards".

Next, with reference to FIGS. 93 and 94, an example of the case where power failure 2 occurs will be described. As shown in FIG. 93(a12-2), during the CB, the background image corresponding to the CB is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the bonus BGM corresponding to the CB is output from the speaker 53. In addition, the advantageous medium lamp 60 is lit. When the player operates the start switch 7, the reels 2L, 2C and 2R start rotating.

As shown in FIG. 93(b12-2), it is assumed that the left reel 2L is subjected to the first stop operation. At this time, as shown in FIG. 45, the stop switch 8L is operated at the first timing when the 8th bell symbol is positioned on the pay line LN.

After that, as shown in FIG. 93(c12-2), when the ON state of the first stop operation by the player is effectively detected by the timer interrupt process, based on the operation timing of the first stop operation, Reel stop control is performed to stop the left reel 2L so as to stop the determined symbols on the winning line LN. In this example, reel stop control is performed to stop the left reel 2L so that the ninth cherry symbol one frame ahead of the 8th bell symbol on the left reel 2L is stopped on the pay line LN. During the CB, the left reel 2L is determined to be the CT reel, so the symbols one frame ahead are stopped at the maximum.

Further, when the stop switch 8L is operated at the first timing, the setting suggestion effect is started. Specifically, the display screen of the liquid crystal display 51 is temporarily rendered white, and no image is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 93 (d12-2), when the reel stop control is performed and the first stop operation is performed, the left reel 2L slips by one frame from the 8th bell symbol located on the pay line LN. , the 9th cherry pattern stops on the winning line LN of the left reel 2L.

As shown in FIG. 93(e12-2), it is assumed that power failure occurs while the first stop operation is maintained and after symbols have already stopped on the left reel 2L due to the reel stop control. In this case, the other middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R are no longer excited, so that the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R rotate only by their own weight, and then naturally stop. As a result, a symbol combination corresponding to a loss in which no winning occurs is derived on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. Also, no image is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the illumination of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is extinguished.

As shown in FIG. 93 (f12-2), the player's hand is released from the left stop switch 8L. After that, as shown in FIG. 93 (g12-2), when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is resumed and the power is restored with the player's hand released from the right stop switch 8R, the loading image is displayed on the liquid crystal display. is displayed on the device 51, and a start-up sound is output from the speaker 53.

As shown in FIG. 93 (h12-2), when the power is restored from the power failure, the main processing performed before the power failure occurred is restored, and the reel stop control processing is executed again.

As shown in FIG. 94 (i12-2), when the loading after the recovery from the power failure is completed, the background image in the CB in the game in which all the minor wins have been won is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 again. Further, the reel stop control process (Sb48) in the main process shown in FIG. 14 is performed, so that the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R, which have not yet been stopped, rotate again.

On the other hand, as the effect control by the sub-control section 91, the setting suggestion effect as shown in FIG. 91 (e11) is not performed.

As shown in FIG. 94 (j12-2), after that, when all the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are stopped (YES in Sc9) and all the stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R are released (Sc12 NO at ), the reel stop control process is terminated, and the winning determination process (Sb48) in the main process shown in FIG. 14 is performed. Thus, it is determined whether or not a prize has been won based on the result of the internal lottery and the symbol combination to be stopped on the prize line LN determined when the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are stopped. Then, by performing the medal payout process (Sb63) in the main process shown in FIG. 14, the process of paying out 15 medals is performed as the payout based on the win of Cherry. Also, on the auxiliary game display 12, a numerical image of "15" is displayed to notify the number of paid out medals.

On the other hand, as control of the effect by the sub-control unit 91, the winning effect shown in FIG. is not output. Therefore, when the power is restored from the power failure, the processing after the power failure can be smoothly performed by not uniformly executing the prize winning effect. However, in the first area 51c in the display area of the liquid crystal display 51, the total acquired number display 62 is updated from "TOTAL 156 cards" to "TOTAL 171 cards" by adding 15 cards, and the acquired number display 63 is updated from "GET 26 cards". 15 cards are added and updated to "GET 41 cards".

[Main effects]
Next, main effects obtained by the above-described embodiment will be described.

(1-1) Equipped with variable display units (eg, reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information (eg, symbols) each identifiable,
In a slot machine (e.g., slot machine 1) in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit after the variable display unit is variably displayed, and a prize can be awarded according to the display result,
Predetermining means for determining display results that allow derivation (for example, processing for performing an internal lottery by the main control unit 41 (Sb15 shown in FIG. 13));
Derivation operation means (for example, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated to derive the display result,
In a game in which the determination result of the pre-determining means is a predetermined determination result (e.g., special replay winning), an operation mode corresponding to the predetermined determination result (e.g., timing of reverse pressing and drawing 7 symbols onto the pay line LN) When a predetermined display result (for example, 7 sets) is derived by operating the derivation operation means, specific processing (for example, lighting of the section display LED 19) is executed (for example, pattern 1 shown in FIG. 69 example),
In a game in which the decision result of the pre-decision means is the predetermined decision result, power supply to the slot machine is stopped even though the derivation operation means is operated in an operation mode corresponding to the predetermined decision result. Thus, even when the predetermined display result is not derived, the specific processing is executed (for example, pattern 2 (power failure 1) shown in FIGS. 70 and 72),
In a game in which the determination result of the pre-determining means is a determination result different from the predetermined determination result (e.g., a lost winning), when the predetermined display result is derived by stopping power supply to the slot machine, The specific process is not executed (for example, pattern 4 (power failure 1) shown in FIGS. 74 and 76),
The specific process is a process of lighting an advantageous lighting section (for example, section display LED 19) relating to an advantageous state (for example, AT) controlled by game control means (for example, main control section 41) for controlling a game.

Specifically, as exemplified in pattern 1, in a game in which a special replay is won during the normal advantageous section and AT is won, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are activated in the pressing order and operation timing corresponding to the 7-matched replay. When 7 sets are derived by the operation, the section display LED 19 lights up. Also, as exemplified in pattern 2, in a game in which a special replay was won during the normal advantageous section and AT was won, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R were operated in the pressing order and operation timing corresponding to the 7-matched replay. In spite of this, the section display LED 19 lights up even when the 7 sets are not derived due to power failure. As a result, in a game in which a special replay is won during a normal advantageous interval and an AT is won, the interval display LED 19 uniformly lights regardless of whether there is a power failure, thereby notifying the player that the AT has been controlled. can be notified. On the other hand, as exemplified by pattern 4, in a game in which a winning game is lost during the normal advantageous section, when 7 matches are derived due to a power failure, the section display LED 19 does not light up and is kept turned off. As a result, in a game in which the winning is lost during the normal advantageous section, the section display LED 19 does not light up even if 7 sets are derived, so the section display LED 19 lights up even though the winning is lost. By putting it away, the player does not misunderstand that it is controlled by the AT. As described above, the game can be progressed smoothly.

(1-2) further comprising winning determination means (for example, winning determination processing by the main control unit 41) for determining whether or not a winning has occurred based on the derived display result;
The prize-winning determination means, in a game in which the determination result of the pre-determination means is the predetermined determination result (for example, winning a special replay), when the derivation operation means is operated in an operation mode corresponding to the predetermined determination result. In spite of this, when the predetermined display result (for example, 7 matching) is not derived due to the power supply to the slot machine being stopped, an error regarding the winning determination is not caused (for example, as shown in FIGS. 70 and 72). Example of pattern 2 (power outage 1)).

Specifically, as exemplified in pattern 2, in a game in which a special replay is won during the normal advantageous section and AT is won, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are pressed in the order and operation timing corresponding to the 7-matched replay. Even if 7 matches are not derived due to power interruption despite being operated, winning determination processing is performed without generating an error regarding the winning decision after the power is restored, and 7 matching replay wins occur. do. As a result, the winning of the 7-match replay is not canceled due to the power failure, and the game can be played smoothly.

(1-3) After the power supply to the slot machine is restarted and before the operation related to the progress of the game becomes effective, the lighting mode of the advantageous lighting portion is visually recognized based on the operation before the power interruption supply is stopped. A process for enabling is executed (for example, an example of pattern 2 (power interruption 1) shown in FIGS. 70 and 72).

Specifically, as exemplified in pattern 2, in a game in which a special replay is won during a normal advantageous section and AT is won, even if a power failure occurs and the power is restored from the power failure, as shown in FIG. As shown in (j-1), based on the AT winning by winning the special replay at the time of the start operation, the section display LED 19 that was turned off lights up, and then the start operation for starting the next game is valid. become. As a result, the winning of the AT is not canceled due to the power failure, and the player can be notified that the AT is controlled by lighting the section display LED 19 before the next game starts after the power failure is restored, and the game is smoothly performed. You can proceed with the game.

(2-1) A variable display section (eg, reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information (eg, symbols) that are individually identifiable;
In a slot machine (e.g., slot machine 1) in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit after the variable display unit is variably displayed, and a prize can be awarded according to the display result,
Predetermining means for determining display results that allow derivation (for example, processing for performing an internal lottery by the main control unit 41 (Sb15 shown in FIG. 13));
Derivation operation means (for example, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated to derive the display result,
In a game in which the determination result of the pre-determining means is a predetermined determination result (for example, winning the bell by pressing order), an operation mode corresponding to the predetermined determination result (for example, pressing order for winning the bell 1 shown in FIG. 11) ), when a predetermined display result (for example, the bells are aligned) is derived by operating the derivation operation means, specific processing (for example, turning off the section display LED 19) is executed (for example, the pattern shown in FIG. 77 5 example),
In a game in which the decision result of the pre-decision means is the predetermined decision result, power supply to the slot machine is stopped even though the derivation operation means is operated in an operation mode corresponding to the predetermined decision result. Thus, the specific processing is executed even when the predetermined display result is not derived (for example, pattern 6 (power failure 1) shown in FIGS. 79 and 81),
In a game in which the determination result of the pre-determining means is a determination result different from the predetermined determination result (e.g., a lost winning), when the predetermined display result is derived by stopping power supply to the slot machine, The specific processing is not executed (for example, pattern 8 (power failure 1) shown in FIGS. 84 and 86),
The specific process is a process of extinguishing an advantageous lighting section (for example, section display LED 19) relating to an advantageous state (for example, AT) controlled by game control means (for example, main control section 41) for controlling a game.

Specifically, as exemplified in pattern 5, in a game in which the winning order of pressing the bell is won during AT, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated in the pressing order corresponding to the winning pressing order of the bell. When the alignment is derived, the AT end condition is satisfied and the section display LED 19 is turned off. Also, as exemplified in pattern 6, in a game in which the winning order of pressing the bell is won during AT, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated in the pressing order corresponding to the winning pressing order of the bell, but the electric Even when the bell alignment is not derived by disconnection, the AT end condition is established and the section display LED 19 is turned off. Thus, in a game in which the pressing order bell is won during the AT, regardless of whether or not power is cut off, the section display LED 19 is uniformly turned off when the AT end condition is satisfied, thereby indicating that the AT has ended. Players can be notified. On the other hand, as exemplified by pattern 8, in a game in which the winning is lost during the AT, when the bells are aligned due to power failure, the section display LED 19 does not go out and remains lit. As a result, in a game in which the winning is lost during AT, the section display LED 19 is not turned off even if the bells are matched, so the section display LED 19 is not turned off even though the winning is lost. , the player will not be misunderstood that the AT is finished. As described above, the game can be progressed smoothly.

(2-2) further comprising winning determination means (for example, winning determination processing by the main control unit 41) for determining whether or not a winning has occurred based on the derived display result;
In a game in which the determination result of the pre-determination means is the predetermined determination result (for example, winning the bell in order of pressing), the winning determination means operates the derivation operation means in an operation mode corresponding to the predetermined determination result. In spite of this, when the predetermined display result (for example, the bells are aligned) is not derived due to the power supply to the slot machine being stopped, no error regarding the prize determination is caused (for example, as shown in FIGS. 79 and 81). Example of pattern 6 (power interruption 1) shown).

Specifically, as exemplified by pattern 6, in a game in which the pressing order bell was won during AT, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R were operated in the pressing order corresponding to the pressing order bell, Even when the bell alignment is not derived due to the power failure, the winning determination process is performed without generating an error relating to the winning determination after the power failure is restored, and the winning of the bell 1 occurs. As a result, the winning of the bell 1 is not canceled due to power interruption, and the game can proceed smoothly.

(2-3) In a game in which the determination result of the pre-determining means is the predetermined determination result (for example, winning the bell in order of pressing), a predetermined number of game values (for example, 8 cards) is derived based on the derivation of the predetermined display result. medal) is granted, the termination condition of the advantageous state (for example, acquisition of 2400 medals) regarding the granting of the game value is satisfied, and the initialization processing of the data related to the advantageous state is executed. The advantageous lighting portion is extinguished.

Specifically, when the net increase in the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section exceeds the upper limit of 2400, an advantageous section end flag indicating that the advantageous section is to be terminated is set and the section display LED 19 stored in the RAM 41c. By initializing the output buffer of , the section display LED 19 is controlled to be turned off. As a result, when the net increase in the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section exceeds the upper limit number, the section display LED 19 is turned off, so that the player can be notified that the AT has ended, and the game can proceed smoothly. can be made

(2-4) When the end condition is satisfied, a result image (for example, result images 51j and 51k in result notification) showing the result of the game in the advantageous state is displayed, and during the display of the result image, A warning image (for example, a warning image 51e) for calling the player's attention is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds).

Specifically, when the net increase in the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section exceeds the upper limit of 2400, the result is announced, and the total number of medals obtained in the advantageous section A result image showing the number of medals acquired in a series of ATs among them is displayed, and a warning image showing the text "Be careful not to get addicted to pachislot. Pachislot is a game that you can enjoy moderately." is displayed. As a result, when the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied, the result of the game can be notified to the player and attention can be drawn to the player's immersion in the game, so that the game can be progressed smoothly.

(3-1) A variable display section (eg, reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information (eg, symbols) each identifiable;
In a slot machine (e.g., slot machine 1) in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit after the variable display unit is variably displayed, and a prize can be awarded according to the display result,
Predetermining means for determining display results that allow derivation (for example, processing for performing an internal lottery by the main control unit 41 (Sb15 shown in FIG. 13));
Derivation operation means (for example, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated to derive the display result,
In a game in which the determination result of the pre-determining means is a predetermined determination result (for example, winning the bell by pressing order), an operation mode corresponding to the predetermined determination result (for example, pressing order for winning the bell 1 shown in FIG. 11) ), when a predetermined display result (for example, bells are aligned) is derived by operating the derivation operation means, specific processing (for example, payout of medals) is executed (for example, pattern 5 shown in FIG. 77). example),
In a game in which the decision result of the pre-decision means is the predetermined decision result, power supply to the slot machine is stopped even though the derivation operation means is operated in an operation mode corresponding to the predetermined decision result. Thus, the specific processing is executed even when the predetermined display result is not derived (for example, pattern 6 (power failure 1) shown in FIGS. 79 and 81),
In a game in which the determination result of the pre-determining means is a determination result different from the predetermined determination result (e.g., a lost winning), when the predetermined display result is derived by stopping power supply to the slot machine, The specific processing is not executed (for example, pattern 8 (power failure 1) shown in FIGS. 84 and 86),
In a game in which the decision result of the pre-decision means is the predetermined decision result, power supply to the slot machine is stopped even though the derivation operation means is operated in an operation mode corresponding to the predetermined decision result. Therefore, when the predetermined display result is not derived and the power supply is resumed in a state where the operation of the derivation operation means is canceled (for example, pattern 6 (power failure 1) shown in FIGS. 79 and 81). ), and in a game in which the determination result of the predetermined determination means is the predetermined determination result, the predetermined display result is derived by operating the derivation operation means in an operation mode corresponding to the predetermined determination result, and When power supply to the slot machine is stopped while operation of the withdrawal operation means continues, and then the power supply is restarted while operation of the withdrawal operation means is canceled (for example, as shown in FIGS. 80 and 81) In either pattern 6 (power failure 2), the emphasis effect (for example, winning effect by the reel backlight 28 or the side lamp 27) for emphasizing the derived display result is not executed.

Specifically, as exemplified in pattern 5, in a game in which the winning order of pressing the bell is won, the bell alignment is derived by operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R in the pressing order corresponding to the winning order of pressing the bell. When it is done, the medal is paid out. Also, as exemplified in pattern 6, in a game in which the winning order of pressing the bell is won, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated in the pressing order corresponding to the winning order of pressing the bell. Medals are paid out even when matching is not derived. As a result, in a game in which the push-order bell is won, the medals are paid out regardless of whether or not the power is cut off. Absent. On the other hand, as exemplified by pattern 8, no medals are paid out when the bells are aligned due to a power failure in a game in which the player has won a losing game. As a result, in a game in which the game is won in the wrong way, medals are not paid out even if the bells are matched, so that the inconvenience of paying out the medals even though the game is won in the wrong way can be avoided. Absent. Furthermore, as exemplified in pattern 6, in a game in which the winning order of pressing the bell was won, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R were operated in the pressing order corresponding to the winning order of pressing the bell. When the match is not derived and the power is subsequently restored from the power failure, or in a game in which the winning order of pressing the bell is won, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated in the pressing order corresponding to the winning order of pressing the bell. Emphasis on the derived symbol combination in any of the following cases: when the combination is derived, the power is cut off while the stop switch is being pressed down, and then the power is restored when the stop switch is released from being pressed. Winning effects by the reel backlight 28 and the side lamp 27 are not executed. Thereby, when the power is restored from the power failure, the processing after the power failure is restored can be smoothly advanced by not uniformly executing the prize-winning effect. As described above, the game can be progressed smoothly.

(3-2) further comprising winning determination means (for example, winning determination processing by the main control unit 41) for determining whether or not a winning has occurred based on the derived display result;
The prize-winning determination means determines that, in a game in which the determination result of the advance determination means is the predetermined determination result (for example, winning the bell in order of pressing), the derivation operation means is operated in an operation mode corresponding to the predetermined determination result. In spite of this, when the predetermined display result (for example, the bells are aligned) is not derived due to the power supply to the slot machine being stopped, no error regarding the prize determination is caused (for example, FIGS. 79, 80, Example of pattern 6 (power failure 1, power failure 2) shown in FIG.

Specifically, as exemplified in pattern 6, in a game in which the winning order of pressing the bell is won, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated in the pressing order corresponding to the winning pressing order of the bell. When the bell alignment is not derived due to the disconnection and the power is subsequently restored from the power failure, and in the game in which the winning order of pressing the bell is won, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated in the pressing order corresponding to the winning pressing order of the bell. Thus, the bell alignment is derived, and when the power is cut off while the stop switch is being pressed down, and then when the stop switch is released and the power is restored from the power cut, after the power is restored, Winning determination processing is performed without causing an error relating to winning determination, and Bell 1 wins a prize. As a result, the winning of the bell 1 is not canceled due to power interruption, and the game can proceed smoothly.

(3-3) further comprising first emphasizing effect means (eg, reel backlight 28) and second emphasizing effect means (e.g., side lamp 27) for respectively executing an emphasizing effect for emphasizing the derived display result;
After the power supply to the slot machine is restarted, neither the first emphasis effect means nor the second emphasis effect means executes the emphasis effect (for example, patterns shown in FIGS. 79, 80, and 81). 6 (power failure 1, power failure 2) example).

Specifically, as exemplified in pattern 6, in a game in which the winning order of pressing the bell is won, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated in the pressing order corresponding to the winning pressing order of the bell. When the bell alignment is not derived due to the disconnection and the power is subsequently restored from the power failure, and in the game in which the winning order of pressing the bell is won, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated in the pressing order corresponding to the winning pressing order of the bell. Thus, the bell alignment is derived, and when the power is cut off while the stop switch is being pressed down, and then when the stop switch is released and the power is restored from the power cut, after the power is restored, , not only the reel backlight 28 but also the winning effect by the side lamp 27 are not executed. Thus, when the power is restored from the power failure, not only the reel backlight 28 but also the winning performance by the side lamps 27 are uniformly not executed, so that the processing after power failure recovery can be smoothly advanced.

(4-1) Equipped with variable display units (eg, reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information (eg, symbols) each identifiable,
In a slot machine (e.g., slot machine 1) in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit after the variable display unit is variably displayed, and a prize can be awarded according to the display result,
Predetermining means for determining display results that allow derivation (for example, processing for performing an internal lottery by the main control unit 41 (Sb15 shown in FIG. 13));
Derivation operation means (for example, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated to derive the display result,
In a game in which the determination result of the pre-determining means is a predetermined determination result (for example, winning the bell by pressing order), an operation mode corresponding to the predetermined determination result (for example, pressing order for winning the bell 1 shown in FIG. 11) ), when a predetermined display result (for example, bells are aligned) is derived by operating the derivation operation means, specific processing (for example, payout of medals) is executed (for example, pattern 5 shown in FIG. 77). example),
In a game in which the decision result of the pre-decision means is the predetermined decision result, power supply to the slot machine is stopped even though the derivation operation means is operated in an operation mode corresponding to the predetermined decision result. Thus, the specific processing is executed even when the predetermined display result is not derived (for example, pattern 6 (power failure 1) shown in FIGS. 79 and 81),
In a game in which the determination result of the pre-determining means is a determination result different from the predetermined determination result (e.g., a lost winning), when the predetermined display result is derived by stopping power supply to the slot machine, The specific processing is not executed (for example, pattern 8 (power failure 1) shown in FIGS. 84 and 86),
In a case where the game in which the determination result of the pre-determining means is the predetermined determination result satisfies the end condition of an advantageous state (for example, AT), and when the predetermined display result is derived, attention is drawn to the player's attention. A warning image (for example, a warning image saying "Be careful not to get addicted. Pachislot is a game that you can enjoy moderately") is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds),
When the game in which the determination result of the pre-determining means is the predetermined determination result satisfies the end condition of being in an advantageous state, even though the derivation operation means is operated in an operation mode corresponding to the predetermined determination result, When the power supply to the slot machine is stopped and the predetermined display result is not derived, and then the power supply is resumed in a state where the operation of the derivation operation means is canceled (for example, as shown in FIGS. 79 and 81) Example of pattern 6 (power outage 1)), and when the game in which the decision result of the predetermined decision means is the predetermined decision result satisfies the end condition of an advantageous state, the operation mode corresponding to the predetermined decision result is used in the operation mode corresponding to the predetermined decision result. A state in which the predetermined display result is derived by operating the lead-out operation means, power supply to the slot machine is stopped while the operation of the lead-out operation means continues, and then the operation of the lead-out operation means is released. When the power supply is restarted in (for example, the example of pattern 6 (power interruption 2) shown in FIGS. 80 and 81), the alert image is displayed for the predetermined period.

Specifically, as exemplified by pattern 5, in a game in which the winning order of pressing the bell in the AT is won, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated in the pressing order corresponding to the winning pressing order of the bell. Medals are paid out when matching is derived. Further, as exemplified in pattern 6, in a game in which the winning order of pressing the bell in the AT is won, the power Medals are paid out even when the bell alignment is not derived by decision. As a result, in a game in which the push-order bell is won, the medals are paid out regardless of whether or not the power is cut off. Absent. On the other hand, as exemplified by pattern 8, in a game in which a winning game is won during AT, no medals are paid out when the bells are aligned due to a power failure. As a result, in a game in which the game is won in the wrong way, medals are not paid out even if the bells are matched, so that the inconvenience of paying out the medals even though the game is won in the wrong way can be avoided. Absent. Furthermore, as exemplified by pattern 6, in a game in which the winning order of pressing the bell in the AT is won, the stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R are operated in the pressing order corresponding to the winning pressing order of the bell. When the bell alignment is not derived due to the disconnection and the power is subsequently restored from the power failure, or in a game in which the winning order of pressing the bell is won, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are activated in the pressing order corresponding to the winning order of pressing the bell. When the bell alignment is derived by the operation, the power is cut off while the stop switch continues to be pressed, and the power is restored after the stop switch is released, Be careful not to get addicted. Pachislot is a game to be enjoyed moderately.” is displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds). Thus, when the power is restored from the power interruption, the attention calling image can be uniformly displayed to call the player's attention to the immersion in the game, so that the game can be progressed smoothly.

(4-2) further comprising winning determination means (for example, winning determination processing by the main control unit 41) for determining whether or not a winning has occurred based on the derived display result;
The prize-winning determination means determines that, in a game in which the determination result of the advance determination means is the predetermined determination result (for example, winning the bell in order of pressing), the derivation operation means is operated in an operation mode corresponding to the predetermined determination result. In spite of this, when the predetermined display result (for example, the bells are aligned) is not derived due to the power supply to the slot machine being stopped, no error regarding the prize determination is caused (for example, FIGS. 79, 80, Example of pattern 6 (power failure 1, power failure 2) shown in FIG.

Specifically, as exemplified in pattern 6, in a game in which the winning order of pressing the bell is won, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated in the pressing order corresponding to the winning pressing order of the bell. When the bell alignment is not derived due to the disconnection and the power is subsequently restored from the power failure, and in the game in which the winning order of pressing the bell is won, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated in the pressing order corresponding to the winning pressing order of the bell. Thus, the bell alignment is derived, and when the power is cut off while the stop switch is being pressed down, and then when the stop switch is released and the power is restored from the power cut, after the power is restored, Winning determination processing is performed without causing an error relating to winning determination, and Bell 1 wins a prize. As a result, the winning of the bell 1 is not canceled due to power interruption, and the game can proceed smoothly.

(4-3) Power supply to the slot machine is resumed, and an advantageous lighting section (eg, section After the lighting of the display LED 19) resumes, the control for displaying the alert image is started (for example, an example of pattern 6 (power interruption 1, power interruption 2) shown in FIGS. 79, 80, and 81).

Specifically, as exemplified by pattern 6, when the power is restored during the AT, first the section display LED 19 lights up as before the power failure, and then it is determined by the winning determination that a prize has been won. When the conditions for ending the advantageous section are satisfied, the section display LED 19 is extinguished, and thereafter, a warning image is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). As a result, when the power is restored from the power failure, the section display LED 19 is first restored to the state before the power failure, and then the winning judgment is performed in the same manner as the original processing without the power failure, so that the game can be played smoothly. can proceed.

(5-1) A variable display section (eg, reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information (eg, symbols) each identifiable;
In a slot machine (e.g., slot machine 1) in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit after the variable display unit is variably displayed, and a prize can be awarded according to the display result,
Predetermining means for determining display results that allow derivation (for example, processing for performing an internal lottery by the main control unit 41 (Sb15 shown in FIG. 13));
derivation operation means (for example, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated to derive display results;
Winning determination means for determining whether or not a winning has occurred based on the derived display result (for example, processing for determining winning by the main control unit 41 (Sb49 shown in FIG. 14));
In a game in which the determination result of the pre-determining means is a predetermined determination result (for example, winning the bell by pressing order), an operation mode corresponding to the predetermined determination result (for example, pressing order for winning the bell 1 shown in FIG. 11) ), when a predetermined display result (for example, bells are aligned) is derived by operating the derivation operation means, specific processing (for example, payout of medals) is executed (for example, pattern 5 shown in FIG. 77). example),
In a game in which the decision result of the pre-decision means is the predetermined decision result, power supply to the slot machine is stopped even though the derivation operation means is operated in an operation mode corresponding to the predetermined decision result. Thus, the specific processing is executed even when the predetermined display result is not derived (for example, pattern 6 (power failure 1) shown in FIGS. 79 and 81),
In a game in which the determination result of the pre-determining means is a determination result different from the predetermined determination result (e.g., a lost winning), when the predetermined display result is derived by stopping power supply to the slot machine, The specific processing is not executed (for example, pattern 8 (power failure 1) shown in FIGS. 84 and 86),
In a game in which the determination result of the prior determination means is the predetermined determination result, the predetermined display result is derived by operating the derivation operation means in an operation mode corresponding to the predetermined determination result, and the derivation operation means The power supply to the slot machine is stopped while the operation continues, and then the power supply is resumed while the operation of the derivation operation means is canceled until the winning determination is made (for example, The third specific period shown in FIG. 82) is determined by operating the derivation operation means in an operation mode corresponding to the predetermined determination result in the game in which the determination result of the predetermined determination means is the predetermined determination result. A period from when the predetermined display result is derived and the operation of the derivation operation means is canceled without stopping the power supply to the slot machine while the operation of the derivation operation means is continued until the winning determination is made ( For example, it is set to be longer than the second specific period shown in FIG.

Specifically, as exemplified in pattern 5, in a game in which the winning order of pressing the bell is won, the bell alignment is derived by operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R in the pressing order corresponding to the winning order of pressing the bell. When it is done, the medal is paid out. Also, as exemplified in pattern 6, in a game in which the winning order of pressing the bell is won, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated in the pressing order corresponding to the winning order of pressing the bell. Medals are paid out even when matching is not derived. As a result, in a game in which the push-order bell is won, the medals are paid out regardless of whether or not the power is cut off. Absent. On the other hand, as exemplified by pattern 8, no medals are paid out when the bells are aligned due to a power failure in a game in which the player has won a losing game. As a result, in a game in which the game is won in the wrong way, medals are not paid out even if the bells are matched, so that the inconvenience of paying out the medals even though the game is won in the wrong way can be avoided. Absent. Furthermore, as in the example shown in FIG. 82, in the third specific period from when the power is restored to when the main control unit 41 performs the winning determination process, after the initial setting process is performed when the power is restored from the power failure. Further, in the reel stop control process, when the power is restored from the power failure, the timer interrupt predetermined number of times waiting process is performed. It is longer than the second specific period from the time of winning to the time of performing the winning determination process. As a result, since it is possible to sufficiently secure the time required for the control accompanying the restoration to the state before the power interruption, the winning judgment process is performed after the symbol combination that causes the winning is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. Appropriate control can be performed even if the power is cut off before the As described above, the game can be progressed smoothly.

(5-2) further comprising winning determination means (for example, winning determination processing by the main control unit 41) for determining whether or not a winning has occurred based on the derived display result;
In a game in which the determination result of the pre-determination means is the predetermined determination result (for example, winning the bell in order of pressing), the winning determination means operates the derivation operation means in an operation mode corresponding to the predetermined determination result. In spite of this, when the predetermined display result (for example, the bells are aligned) is not derived due to the power supply to the slot machine being stopped, no error regarding the prize determination is caused (for example, FIGS. 79, 80, Example of pattern 6 (power failure 1, power failure 2) shown in FIG.

Specifically, as exemplified in pattern 6, in a game in which the winning order of pressing the bell is won, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated in the pressing order corresponding to the winning pressing order of the bell. When the bell alignment is not derived due to the disconnection and the power is subsequently restored from the power failure, and in the game in which the winning order of pressing the bell is won, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated in the pressing order corresponding to the winning pressing order of the bell. Thus, the bell alignment is derived, and when the power is cut off while the stop switch is being pressed down, and then when the stop switch is released and the power is restored from the power cut, after the power is restored, Winning determination processing is performed without causing an error relating to winning determination, and Bell 1 wins a prize. As a result, the winning of the bell 1 is not canceled due to power interruption, and the game can proceed smoothly.

(5-3) The winning determination means stops the power supply to the slot machine while the operation of the lead-out operation means continues, and then restarts the power supply while the operation of the lead-out operation means continues. Sometimes, the winning determination is not performed (for example, in the reel stop control process, all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped and all the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are released from being pressed, Returning to the main process, the winning determination process is performed).

Specifically, in the reel stop control process, on the condition that all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped and all the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are released, the process returns to the main process and a prize is won. Since the determination process is performed, even if the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to be pressed and the power is restored from the power failure, the winning determination process will continue unless the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are released. Not done. As a result, regardless of the presence or absence of a power failure, all reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are uniformly stopped, and all stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are released from being pressed down. Since it is performed, the game can be progressed smoothly.

(6-1) A plurality of variable display units (for example, reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information (for example, symbols) each identifiable,
A display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display portion after the variable display portion is variably displayed, and winning can occur according to a display result combination that is a combination of display results of a plurality of variable display portions. In a slot machine (for example, slot machine 1),
Pre-determining means for determining a display result combination that allows derivation (for example, a process of performing an internal lottery by the main control unit 41 (Sb15 shown in FIG. 13));
a plurality of derivation operation means (for example, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated to derive a display result on each of the plurality of variable display units;
Derivation control means (for example, reel stop control processing by the main control unit 41 (Sb48 shown in FIG. 14)) that performs control to derive the display result combination;
The decision result of the pre-determining means is more likely to give a given display result combination (for example, a combination of cherry symbols) accompanied by the giving of game values (for example, medals, credits) than in the normal state (for example, the normal state shown in FIG. 7). Special state control means for controlling to a special state (for example, CB) with a high probability of obtaining a given decision result (for example, winning all small hands) that is allowed to be derived (for example, the game state is controlled to CB by the main control unit 41 processing (Sb59 shown in FIG. 14)),
In the game during the special state in which the determination result of the pre-determining means is the award determination result, the plurality of derivation operations are performed in an operation mode corresponding to the award determination result (for example, operation timing for winning a cherry). When the given display result combination is derived by operating the means, specific processing (for example, payout of medals) is executed (for example, example of pattern 11 shown in FIG. 91),
In the game during the special state in which the decision result of the pre-determining means is the grant determination result, the slots are operated even though the plurality of derivation operation means are operated in an operation mode corresponding to the grant determination result. Even when the given display result combination is not derived because the power supply to the machine is stopped, the specific processing is executed (for example, pattern 12 (power failure 1) shown in FIGS. 92 and 94),
The derivation control means causes a specific variable display portion (for example, the left reel 2L) among the plurality of variable display portions to fluctuate in the game during the special state in which the determination result of the pre-determination means is the award determination result. During display, the specific lead-out operation means (for example, the left stop switch 8L) corresponding to the specific variable display portion among the plurality of lead-out operation means is set at the first timing (for example, as shown in FIG. 45, the cherry When the symbol is operated at the second timing (for example, the timing at which the watermelon symbol can be drawn onto the pay line LN as shown in FIG. 45), the specific derivation operation means is operated at the timing at which the symbol can be drawn onto the pay line LN. Deriving a display result that constitutes the given display result combination (for example, cherry symbol combination) with a higher probability than when operated (for example, an example of reel stop control shown in FIGS. 46 and 47),
In the game during the special state in which the decision result of the pre-determination means is the award decision result, when the specific derivation operation means is operated at the first timing, a specific effect (for example, FIG. 50 (B1), ( C1) and (D1) can be executed, but when the specific derivation operation means is operated at the second timing, the specific effect is not executed (for example, FIG. 50 ( Examples shown in B3), (C3), and (D3)).

Specifically, as exemplified in pattern 11, in a game in which all minor wins are won during CB, cherry winning is achieved by operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R at the operation timing for winning a cherry. Medals are paid out when the corresponding symbol combination is derived. Also, as exemplified by pattern 12, in a game in which all small wins were won during CB, although the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R were operated at the operation timing for winning the cherry, power failure occurred. Medals are paid out even when the symbol combination corresponding to the cherry win is not derived. As a result, in a game in which all small hands are won during CB, medals are paid out if the operation timing is correct regardless of whether there is a power failure, so medals are not paid out due to a power failure. The player never feels dissatisfied. Also, during CB, when the left reel 2L is first stopped, the player operates the left stop switch 8L at the first timing when the pattern other than the number 19 on the left reel 2L passes through the middle row, and the left reel Comparing with the case of operating the left stop switch 8L at the second timing when the number 19 "watermelon" of 2L passes through the middle row, operating the left stop switch 8L at the first timing makes it easier to win a cherry prize. . Further, when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the first timing, there is a possibility that the setting suggesting effect is executed, but when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the second timing, the setting suggesting effect is not executed. To improve interest in a game when a stop switch is operated at a first timing when the possibility of winning a prize is high, and to encourage operation at the first timing when a display result combination for winning a prize is likely to be derived. can be done. As described above, the game can be progressed smoothly.

(6-2) further comprising winning determination means (for example, winning determination processing by the main control unit 41) for determining whether or not a winning has occurred based on the derived display result;
The winning determination means is configured such that, in a game in which the determination result of the advance determination means is the predetermined determination result (e.g., all minor winnings), the derivation operation means is operated in an operation mode corresponding to the predetermined determination result. In spite of this, when the predetermined display result (for example, a symbol combination corresponding to a cherry prize) is not derived due to the power supply to the slot machine being stopped, an error regarding the prize determination is not caused (for example, a 92, FIG. 93, and FIG. 94 (example of pattern 12 (power failure 1, power failure 2)).

Specifically, as exemplified by pattern 12, in a game in which all small wins were won during CB, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R were operated at the operation timing for winning a cherry, When the combination of symbols corresponding to the cherry winning prize is not derived due to the power failure and the power failure is restored after that, and in the game in which all the small wins are won during the CB, the stop switch 8L is operated at the operation timing for winning the cherry prize. By operating 8C and 8R, a symbol combination corresponding to a cherry winning is derived, the power is cut off while the stop switch is being pressed down, and then the power is restored when the stop switch is released. In either case, after the power is restored, the winning determination process is performed without causing an error regarding the winning determination, and the winning of cherry occurs. As a result, the winning of Cherry will not be canceled due to power failure, and the game can proceed smoothly.

(6-3) After power supply to the slot machine is resumed, the specific effect is not executed (for example, pattern 12 (power interruption 1, power interruption 2) shown in FIGS. 92, 93, and 94). .

Specifically, as exemplified by pattern 12, the stop switch 8L is operated at the first timing when the 8th bell symbol is positioned on the pay line LN in the CB, and then the power is cut off. After returning from the disconnection, the setting suggestion effect is not executed. Thus, when the power failure occurs, the setting suggestion performance is not uniformly executed, so that the processing after power failure recovery can be smoothly advanced, and the game can be smoothly progressed.

(7-1) A variable display section (eg, reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information (eg, symbols) each identifiable;
In a slot machine (e.g., slot machine 1) in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit after the variable display unit is variably displayed, and a prize can be awarded according to the display result,
Predetermining means for determining display results that allow derivation (for example, processing for performing an internal lottery by the main control unit 41 (Sb15 shown in FIG. 13));
derivation operation means (for example, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated to derive display results;
basic processing means for executing basic processing (eg, main processing) (eg, main processing shown in FIG. 13 by main control unit 41);
interrupt processing means (for example, timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 29 by the main control unit 41) that periodically interrupts the basic processing and executes interrupt processing (for example, timer interrupt processing);
Specific processing means (for example, main control unit 41) for executing specific processing (for example, game program) in the basic processing;
special processing means (for example, main control unit 41) for executing special processing (for example, non-game program) different from the specific processing in the basic processing;
power failure recovery processing means (for example, initial setting processing shown in FIG. 12 by the main control unit 41) for executing power failure recovery processing (for example, initial setting processing) when power supply to the slot machine is resumed;
Minimum time timer value updating means (for example, main control unit 41 Counter update process shown in FIG. 29 by
In a game in which the determination result of the pre-determining means is a predetermined determination result (for example, winning the bell by pressing order), an operation mode corresponding to the predetermined determination result (for example, pressing order for winning the bell 1 shown in FIG. 11) ), when a predetermined display result (for example, bells are aligned) is derived by operating the derivation operation means, specific processing (for example, payout of medals) is executed (for example, pattern 5 shown in FIG. 77). example),
In a game in which the decision result of the pre-decision means is the predetermined decision result, power supply to the slot machine is stopped even though the derivation operation means is operated in an operation mode corresponding to the predetermined decision result. Thus, the specific processing is executed even when the predetermined display result is not derived (for example, pattern 6 (power failure 1) shown in FIGS. 79 and 81),
In a game in which the determination result of the pre-determining means is a determination result different from the predetermined determination result (e.g., a lost winning), when the predetermined display result is derived by stopping power supply to the slot machine, The specific processing is not executed (for example, pattern 8 (power failure 1) shown in FIGS. 84 and 86),
The minimum time timer value updating means,
While the minimum time timer value is updated during execution of the specific process, the minimum time timer value is not updated during execution of the special process,
The minimum time timer value is not updated while the power failure recovery process is being executed, and the minimum time timer value is updated again after the power failure recovery process is completed (for example, the initial setting process shown in FIG. 12). , the timer value for managing one game time is not updated by the counter updating process because the timer interrupt is prohibited at Sa01. administrative timer value is updated).

Specifically, as exemplified in pattern 5, in a game in which the winning order of pressing the bell is won, the bell alignment is derived by operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R in the pressing order corresponding to the winning order of pressing the bell. When it is done, the medal is paid out. Also, as exemplified in pattern 6, in a game in which the winning order of pressing the bell is won, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated in the pressing order corresponding to the winning order of pressing the bell. Medals are paid out even when matching is not derived. As a result, in a game in which the push-order bell is won, the medals are paid out regardless of whether or not the power is cut off. Absent. On the other hand, as exemplified by pattern 8, no medals are paid out when the bells are aligned due to a power failure in a game in which the player has won a losing game. As a result, in a game in which the game is won in the wrong way, medals are not paid out even if the bells are matched, so that the inconvenience of paying out the medals even though the game is won in the wrong way can be avoided. Absent. Furthermore, during execution of the game program, timer interrupt processing is executed to update the timer value for managing one game time. Since the one-game-time management timer value is not updated during execution of the game program, the process of updating the one-game-time management timer value and the process of the non-game program do not coexist. As described above, the game can be progressed smoothly.

(7-2) further comprising winning determination means (for example, winning determination processing by the main control unit 41) for determining whether or not a winning has occurred based on the derived display result;
The prize-winning determination means determines that, in a game in which the determination result of the advance determination means is the predetermined determination result (for example, winning the bell in order of pressing), the derivation operation means is operated in an operation mode corresponding to the predetermined determination result. In spite of this, when the predetermined display result (for example, the bells are aligned) is not derived due to the power supply to the slot machine being stopped, no error regarding the prize determination is caused (for example, FIGS. 79, 80, Example of pattern 6 (power failure 1, power failure 2) shown in FIG.

Specifically, as exemplified in pattern 6, in a game in which the winning order of pressing the bell is won, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated in the pressing order corresponding to the winning pressing order of the bell. When the bell alignment is not derived due to the disconnection and the power is subsequently restored from the power failure, and in the game in which the winning order of pressing the bell is won, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated in the pressing order corresponding to the winning pressing order of the bell. Thus, the bell alignment is derived, and when the power is cut off while the stop switch is being pressed down, and then when the stop switch is released and the power is restored from the power cut, after the power is restored, Winning determination processing is performed without causing an error relating to winning determination, and Bell 1 wins a prize. As a result, the winning of the bell 1 is not canceled due to power interruption, and the game can proceed smoothly.

(7-3) In the basic processing, it is determined whether or not the minimum time timer value is a specific value. ) (for example, the process of Sb40 in FIG. 13), and when the minimum time timer value reaches a specific value, execution of interrupt processing is prohibited and the minimum time timer value is set to the initial value. is set, and then the game progresses (for example, the process of Sb41 in FIG. 13).

Specifically, it is determined whether or not the one-game-time management timer value is a specific value (0) before the start of reel rotation in one game (Sb40), and the one-game-time management timer value is the specific value. If it is determined not to be (0), the game is not progressed until it is determined that the one-game-time management timer value is the specific value (0), and the one-game-time management timer value is set to the specific value. If it is determined to be (0), the game is allowed to proceed. As a result, the game is not progressed until it is specified that the minimum time has passed based on the timer value for managing one playing time, and the game is progressed when the minimum time has passed, whereby the minimum time per game can be achieved. can be secured, and the game can be progressed smoothly.

(8-1) A plurality of variable display units (for example, reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information (for example, symbols) each identifiable,
A display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display portion after the variable display portion is variably displayed, and winning can occur according to a display result combination that is a combination of display results of a plurality of variable display portions. In a slot machine (for example, slot machine 1),
Predetermining means (for example, processing for performing an internal lottery by the main control unit 41) for determining display results that allow derivation;
a plurality of derivation operation means (for example, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated to derive a display result on each of the plurality of variable display units;
Derivation control means (for example, processing for performing reel control by the main control unit 41) that performs control for deriving display results;
State control means for controlling one of a plurality of types of states (for example, processing for controlling the game state by the main control unit 41);
Effect means for executing the effect (for example, a process for executing the effect by the sub-control unit 91),
Of the display result combinations, a given display result combination (for example, a symbol combination of a small winning combination) accompanied by the giving of game values (for example, medals) is accompanied by the giving of a first amount (for example, 14 cards) of game values. A first given display result combination (for example, a symbol combination of a technical intervention player) and a second given display result combination (for example, cherry, watermelon, bell 1) accompanied by giving a second amount (for example, 15) of game value , Bell 2 pattern combination) and
The plurality of types of states include a normal state, a first special state (for example, CB) and a second special state (for example, BB) in which the probability that the given display result combination is allowed to be derived is higher than the normal state. and includes
The derivation control means, when a specific variable display portion (for example, the left reel 2L) among the plurality of variable display portions is variably displayed in the first special state, The specific derivation operation means (for example, the left stop switch 8L) corresponding to the specific variable display section is operated at the first timing (for example, the timing at which the cherry symbol can be drawn onto the winning line LN as shown in FIG. 45). Sometimes, the given display result combination ( For example, a combination of symbols of cherry and technical intervention) is derived (for example, an example of reel control shown in FIGS. 46 and 47),
The effect means, in the first special state, the specific lead-out operation means is the timing at which the first timing (for example, No. 8 or No. 9 of the first timing shown in FIG. 45 can be drawn onto the pay line LN). ), a specific effect (for example, an effect suggesting a set value as shown in FIG. 50 (D1)) can be executed, whereas the specific derivation operation means can execute the second timing (for example, As shown in FIG. 45, when operated at the timing when the watermelon pattern can be pulled onto the pay line LN, the specific effect cannot be executed (for example, an example of setting suggestion effect in CB shown in FIG. 50),
The derivation control means controls the first given display result combination (for example, , symbol combination of the technical intervention role), and when the specific derivation operation means is operated at the second timing, constitutes the second given display result combination (for example, the symbol combination of Bell 1). to derive the displayed result.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 46 and 47, during CB, when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the first timing at which the cherry symbol can be pulled onto the winning line LN, the watermelon symbol is placed on the winning line. It is easier to win a prize than when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the second timing when it is possible to draw on LN. Further, the setting suggesting effect can be executed when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the first timing, whereas the setting suggesting effect cannot be executed when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the second timing. . Therefore, it is possible to prompt the player to operate the left stop switch 8L at the first timing. Furthermore, during the BB, when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the first timing, 14 medals can be paid out by winning the technical intervention role, whereas the left stop switch 8L is operated at the second timing. When operated, Bell 1 wins and 15 medals can be paid out. In this way, the operation of the left stop switch 8L at the first timing that facilitates the occurrence of a prize during the CB can be used as the operation for adjusting the number of sheets during the BB, so the left stop switch 8L at the first timing It is possible to make the player aware of the operation of a plurality of types of bonuses. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by making the player concentrate on the game. Thereby, the game can be progressed smoothly.

(8-2) A plurality of variable display units (for example, reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information (for example, symbols) each identifiable,
A display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display portion after the variable display portion is variably displayed, and winning can occur according to a display result combination that is a combination of display results of a plurality of variable display portions. In a slot machine (for example, slot machine 1),
Predetermining means (for example, processing for performing an internal lottery by the main control unit 41) for determining display results that allow derivation;
a plurality of derivation operation means (for example, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated to derive a display result on each of the plurality of variable display units;
Derivation control means (for example, processing for performing reel control by the main control unit 41) that performs control for deriving display results;
State control means for controlling one of a plurality of types of states (for example, processing for controlling the game state by the main control unit 41);
Production means for executing production (for example, processing for executing production by the sub-control unit 91);
Information display means for displaying information (for example, processing for controlling display on the liquid crystal display 51 by the sub-controller 91),
The plurality of types of states include a normal state and a first special state, which is a special state (for example, a bonus) in which the probability of deriving a given display result combination involving the giving of game value is higher than in the normal state. (eg CB) and a second special state (eg BB),
The derivation control means, when a specific variable display portion (for example, the left reel 2L) among the plurality of variable display portions is variably displayed in the first special state, The specific derivation operation means (for example, the left stop switch 8L) corresponding to the specific variable display section is operated at the first timing (for example, the timing at which the cherry symbol can be drawn onto the winning line LN as shown in FIG. 45). Sometimes, the given display result combination ( For example, a combination of symbols of cherry and technical intervention) is derived (for example, an example of reel control shown in FIGS. 46 and 47),
The effect means, in the first special state, the specific lead-out operation means is the timing at which the first timing (for example, No. 8 or No. 9 of the first timing shown in FIG. 45 can be drawn onto the pay line LN). ), a specific effect (for example, an effect suggesting a set value as shown in FIG. 50 (D1)) can be executed, whereas the specific derivation operation means can execute the second timing (for example, As shown in FIG. 45, when operated at the timing when the watermelon pattern can be pulled onto the pay line LN, the specific effect cannot be executed (for example, an example of setting suggestion effect in CB shown in FIG. 50),
The condition for ending the special state includes that a specific amount of game value is awarded in the special state (for example, CB ends when 150 or more coins are paid out, and BB ends when 345 or more coins are paid out). ,
The information display means is
an obtainable amount of game value obtainable in the special state (for example, an obtainable number display 61);
an acquisition amount of game value acquired in the special state (for example, acquisition number display 63);
Result images (for example, result images 51j and 51k) that can specify the result of the game in the special state can be displayed in the information display area (for example, the display area of the liquid crystal display 51) (for example, FIG. 61 ( Display example shown in q)),
When a predetermined amount of game value is given in the special state, the display of the obtainable amount is subtracted by one unit, and the display of the obtained amount is added by one unit (for example, FIGS. 54 to 57). An example of updating the number of sheets shown in),
When the special state is terminated by the provision of a predetermined amount of game value, the subtraction of the display of the obtainable amount is finished, the addition of the display of the obtained amount is finished, and the addition of the display of the obtained amount is finished. Display the result image after the end (for example, an example of winning a bell in the final game in the CB shown in FIGS. 58 to 60, and the result notification during freezing shown in FIGS. One case).

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 46 and 47, during CB, when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the first timing at which the cherry symbol can be pulled onto the winning line LN, the watermelon symbol is placed on the winning line. It is easier to win a prize than when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the second timing when it is possible to draw on LN. Further, the setting suggesting effect can be executed when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the first timing, whereas the setting suggesting effect cannot be executed when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the second timing. . Therefore, it is possible to prompt the player to operate the left stop switch 8L at the first timing. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by making the player concentrate on the game. Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 58 to 62, when the CB ends when 150 or more medals are paid out, the subtraction of the obtainable number display 61 is finished, and then the addition of the obtained number display 63 is finished. Since the result notification is executed after that, it is possible to add the obtained number display 63 after the subtraction of the obtainable number display 61 is completed, and the addition of the obtained number display 63 can be made easy to understand. . In addition, since it is possible to make the user pay attention to the obtained number display 63, it is possible to make the viewer pay attention to the manner of display until the execution of the result notification. Thereby, the game can be progressed smoothly.

In (1-2) described above, the “effect means” includes display means for displaying images (for example, liquid crystal display 51), sound output means for outputting sound (for example, speaker 53), lighting or Any one of blinking light output means (eg, side lamp 27, reel backlight 28) may be used. Here, in the case where the "rendering means" is display means for displaying an image (for example, the liquid crystal display 51), the "rendering means" may be the same display means as the "information display means". That is, the 'rendering means' may be replaced with the 'information display means'. Note that the 'rendering means' may be display means different from the 'information display means'.

(8-3) The derivation control means
When the plurality of derivation operation means are operated in the first order (eg, forward pressing) in the first special state (eg, CB), when the specific derivation operation means is operated at the first timing, It is more advantageous for the player than when the specific derivation operation means is operated at the second timing (for example, as shown in FIG. 46, when the left stop switch is pressed forward during the CB, the left stop switch is pressed at the first timing). When 8L is operated, a cherry prize is always won, but when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the second timing, the prize may be missed).
when the specific lead-out operation means is operated at the first timing when the plurality of lead-out operation means are operated in a second order (e.g., reverse push) in the second special state (e.g., BB) A display result (for example, a cherry symbol) that constitutes the first given display result combination (for example, a symbol combination for a technical intervention player) is derived.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 46, when the forward push is performed during the CB, the left stop switch 8L is operated at the first timing to always win a cherry prize, whereas the left stop switch is operated at the second timing. When 8L is operated, winning may be lost. Also, when the reverse push is made during the BB, when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the first timing, a cherry symbol constituting the symbol combination of the technical intervention hand is derived. In this way, the operation timing (first timing) of the left stop switch 8L that is not disadvantageous during the CB is the same as the operation timing (first timing) of the left stop switch 8L for winning the technical intervention role during the BB. Yes, but the pressing order can be different between both bonuses. As a result, the game does not become monotonous, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(8-4) When the plurality of lead-out operation means are operated in the second order (eg, reverse push) in the first special state (eg, CB), the lead-out control means controls the specific lead-out operation When the means is operated at the first timing, a display result (for example, a cherry symbol) that constitutes the first given display result combination (for example, a symbol combination of the technical intervention hand) is derived.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 47, in the case of reverse pressing during CB, when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the first timing, a cherry symbol that constitutes the symbol combination of the technical intervening hand is derived. . In this way, during the CB, when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the first timing, the player is not at a disadvantage because the player always wins a cherry prize when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the first timing. When the left stop switch 8L is operated at the right timing, the technical intervening role can be won for adjusting the number of coins, so that the operation order that does not disadvantage the player and the operating order for winning the technical intervening role can be separated. can. As a result, the game does not become monotonous, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(8-5) The control period of the first special state is shorter than the control period of the second special state. ends with payment),
In the first special state, the predetermining means permits the derivation of the first given display result combination every game (for example, during CB, a minor combination including a technical intervening combination wins every game),
In the second special state, derivation of the first given display result combination is not allowed for each game by the pre-determining means, and the first given display result combination is determined by the pre-determining means only when a lottery is won. Derivation is permitted (for example, during BB, the symbol combination of the technical intervention hand can be derived only when the technical intervention hand is won in the internal lottery).

Specifically, while the CB control period is shorter than the BB control period, during the CB, a small combination including a technical intervention role is won every game, so the technical intervention role can be awarded every game. On the other hand, during BB, the technical intervening role can be won only when the technical intervening role is won. It is advantageous for those who In this way, during the CB, the player can challenge the winning of the technical intervening role every game, so that the CB, which ends earlier than the BB, is not at a disadvantage as much as possible.

(8-6) The directing means
The specific effect is executed by displaying a specific image (for example, an image of a shooting star flowing as shown in FIG. 50 (D1)) in the display area,
When executing the specific effect, the background image displayed in the display area (for example, the image showing outer space shown in FIG. 50(B1)) is changed to a white image (for example, the whiteout image shown in FIG. 50(C1)). image), the white image is switched to the specific image.

Specifically, during CB, as shown in FIG. 50(B1), an image showing outer space is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and then, as shown in FIG. A white-out effect is performed in which the display screen of 51 becomes pure white, and no image is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 . In this way, when the setting suggesting effect image is displayed, the white-out image is displayed once, so that the player can be made to pay attention to the setting suggesting effect image.

(8-7) The directing means
When the first special state or the second special state ends, a result image suggesting a game result in the first special state or the second special state (for example, result images 51j and 51k shown in FIG. 62) is displayed in the display area, and
When a win occurs in a game in which the first special state or the second special state ends (for example, the final game during a bonus), a win notification (for example, shown in FIGS. 58 to 60) for notifying the occurrence of the win After the winning effect is completed, the result image is displayed in the display area (for example, after the winning effect is completed as shown in FIG. 60, the result is reported as shown in FIG. 62). is called).

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 58 to 62, when a prize winning effect is performed due to the occurrence of a bell win in the final game of the bonus, the result notification is performed after the winning effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent the winning effect and the result notification from being mixed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively draw the player's attention to each of the winning effect and the result notification.

(9-1) Equipped with variable display units (eg, reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information (eg, symbols) each identifiable,
In a slot machine (e.g., slot machine 1) in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit after the variable display unit is variably displayed, and a prize can be awarded according to the display result,
a prize effect means (for example, a process of performing a prize effect by the sub-controller 91) that performs a prize effect (for example, the prize effects shown in FIGS. 58 to 60) for notifying the occurrence of a prize;
Result display means for displaying result images (for example, result images 51j and 51k shown in FIG. 62) showing game results in a specific state (for example, big bonus) (for example, processing for performing result notification by the sub-controller 91); ,
State transition means (for example, processing for controlling the state by the main control unit 41) for shifting the state from the specific state to the special state (for example, the RT state) after the specific state ends;
A delay control means (for example, a process for performing freeze control by the main control unit 41) that performs delay control (for example, freeze control) to delay the progress of the game,
When the winning effect is performed in a game in which the specific state ends (for example, the final game during a bonus), the delay control is performed after the winning effect ends (for example, the winning effect shown in FIGS. 58 to 60). is performed, freezing starts as shown in FIG. 61 (g)), and the result image is displayed during the execution of the delay control (for example, as shown in FIGS. Result notification is made during freezing), and after the end of the delay control, a transition to the special state is suggested (for example, as shown in FIGS. (See FIG. 67).

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 58 to 29, when a winning effect is performed by winning a bell in the final game of the bonus, a freeze is executed after the winning effect, and the result is displayed during the freezing. Notification is made. After the freeze ends, the player selects an effect in the RT state to be controlled after the bonus ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent the winning effect and the result notification from being mixed, and to show the player a smooth effect to the controlled RT after the bonus is finished. Therefore, it is possible to effectively display the result images 51j and 51k indicating the game results. Thereby, the game can be progressed smoothly.

(9-2) The slot machine 1 provides a warning display means (for example, a main A process of displaying an alert by the control unit 41),
When the winning effect is performed in a game in which the specific state ends (for example, the final game during a bonus), the delay control is performed after the winning effect ends (for example, the winning effect shown in FIGS. 58 to 60). is performed, freezing starts as shown in FIG. ), the result notification is performed during the freeze and the alert display is performed), and the transition to the special state is suggested after the end of the delay control (for example, FIG. 63 (s), (t ), selection of the RT effect is performed after the freeze ends (see FIG. 67).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 62(q), a result notification is performed during the freeze, and a warning display is also performed. As a result, it is possible to effectively prevent the player from playing excessively by performing the attention calling display at a suitable timing during the freeze.

(9-3) The result image is displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, FIGS. , is displayed when the period of timing t4 to t5 during which the door closing effect is executed has passed.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 61 and 62, after the start of the result is announced, the door image 51b is first displayed, and a door closing effect is executed such that the door image 51b is closed. Then, as shown in FIG. 67, after the door closing effect is executed for a predetermined period (the period between timings t4 and t5 shown in FIG. 67), result images 51j and 51k are displayed via spark display. Since the result images 51j and 51k are displayed when the predetermined period has passed even after the bonus is finished, the display of the result images 51j and 51k can be made conspicuous. Therefore, it is possible to draw attention to the resulting images 51j and 51k. In the example shown in FIG. 61, the predetermined period is the period during which the door closing effect is being executed. It is good also as a total period with the displayed period.

(9-4) The slot machine 1 includes an informing means (for example, the game auxiliary display 12) capable of informing information (for example, the number of payouts),
The notification of the information regarding the game performed by the notification means based on the winning occurring in the game in which the specific state ends is terminated after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the result image was displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 62(m)). After the display of the result images 51j and 51k is started and the display of the result images 51j and 51k is finished by whiteout as shown in FIG. do).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 60(e), when 15 medals are paid out in the final game during the bonus, a number indicating that 15 medals have been paid out is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. "15" is displayed on the 7-segment display. After that, while the winning effect, result notification, and attention calling display are performed, the number "15" is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, but the freeze ends after the whiteout shown in FIG. 63(r). When shifting to the selection of the RT effect, the display of the number "15" on the game auxiliary display 12 disappears as shown in FIG. 63(s). As a result, it is possible to effectively suggest a change from the bonus state to the RT state to the player by changing the payout display on the game auxiliary display 12 .

(9-5) The suggestion that the state will shift to the special state includes a selection effect for the player to select the effect state in the special state (for example, an effect for selecting the RT effect shown in FIG. 63(s)). includes
By the selection effect, the effect state in the special state is determined before the state shifts to the special state (for example, before the RT screen shown in FIG. 63 (v) is displayed, RT effect is confirmed as shown).

Specifically, an RT screen is displayed as shown in FIG. Thus, the RT effect is determined by the player's selection. As a result, the RT effect can be determined without finishing the game in the RT state.

(9-6) When the winning effect is performed in a game in which the specific state ends (for example, the final game during a bonus), the delay control is performed after the winning effect ends (for example, FIG. 58 to FIG. 58). Freezing starts as shown in FIG. 61(g) after the winning effect shown in 60 is performed), and the attention-calling image is displayed together with the result image during execution of the delay control (for example, FIG. 62(m) ~ As shown in FIG. 62(q), the result notification is performed during freezing and the attention is displayed), and the display of the attention image is finished by the end of the delay control (for example, FIG. 63 As shown in (r), the warning display ends after the whiteout), and a transition to the special state is suggested after the end of the delay control (for example, shown in FIGS. 63 (r) to (t) As shown in FIG. 67), selection of the RT effect is performed after the freeze ends.

Specifically, after the warning display is performed as shown in FIG. 62(q), whiteout is performed as shown in FIG. The calling display ends. As a result, the warning display can be ended at a suitable timing when the freezing ends.

(9-7) When a specific display result (for example, a combination of 7 patterns) is derived, the state shifts to the specific state (for example, as shown in FIG. 52, a combination of 7 patterns is derived). Bonus prizes will be generated by being done),
When the specific display result is derived, the delay control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 52(C), a combination of 7 symbols is derived and the freeze is started when the third stop release is performed. ), suggesting that the state transitions to the specific state during execution of the delay control (for example, as shown in FIGS. 52(C) to (E), a bonus winning effect is performed during the freeze) After the end of the delay control, an effect is executed for the player to select the effect state in the specific state (for example, as shown in FIG. 19(G), the bonus effect is selected after the end of freezing).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 52(C), when the 7-matched symbol combination is derived and the third stop release is performed, freezing starts by the game end processing, and FIG. As shown in E), a bonus winning effect is performed during the freeze, after which the freeze ends with a whiteout as shown in FIG. 53(F), and after the freeze ends as shown in FIG. Selection of the bonus performance is performed. As a result, it is possible to determine the effect in the bonus without completing the game in the bonus state.

(10-1) After a special image (for example, spark image 51a) different from the result image is displayed in a predetermined area (for example, the central portion of the screen of the liquid crystal display 51), the resulting images 51j and 51k are displayed in the predetermined area. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 62(l) to (q), after the spark image 51a is displayed in the central portion of the screen, the resultant images 51j and 51k are displayed in the same central portion of the screen. ). Note that the "special image" may be any image as long as it is an image that makes the display of the result images 51j and 51k conspicuous in the result notification. Unlike the character image, the special image may be an effect image or a decorative image that enhances the image to be emphasized (resulting images 51j and 51k in this embodiment). Further, when the images to be highlighted (result images 51j and 51k) are decorated with a plurality of colors, the color of the special image is preferably a single color so as to make the images to be highlighted more attractive.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 62(l) to (q), spark display is performed before result notification is performed. In the spark display, the spark image 51a is displayed in the center portion of the screen, and then in the result notification, result images 51j and 51k are displayed in the same center portion of the screen. As a result, the display of the result images 51j and 51k indicating the result of the game can be conspicuous, and the player's attention can be attracted to the result images 51j and 51k. Therefore, the resulting images 51j and 51k can be effectively displayed. Thereby, the game can be progressed smoothly.

(10-2) After the display of the door image 51b is started and before a predetermined period elapses (in the present embodiment, at the timing when the display of the door image 51b is started), a winning effect is performed. Therefore, since the winning effect is performed before the result images 51j and 51k are displayed, it is possible to prevent the player's attention from being obstructed with respect to the display of the result images 51j and 51k.

(10-3) Further, an effect related to the third stop operation that triggers the display of the door image 51b within a predetermined period of time after the start of the display of the door image 51b. A winning effect using the side lamp 27, which is means other than 51, is executed. Therefore, since the winning effect using the side lamps 27 is performed before the display of the result images 51j and 51k is performed, it is possible to prevent the player's attention from being obstructed with respect to the display of the result images 51j and 51k.

(10-4) The image in which the door image 51b is completely closed becomes the background image in the result notification. The door image 51b is displayed with a brightness lower than that of images (for example, the resulting images 51j and 51k) different from the door image 51b. Therefore, since the brightness of the background image in the result notification is lowered, the result images 51j and 51k can be made conspicuous. Therefore, it is possible to draw attention to the resulting images 51j and 51k.

(10-5) Display the resulting images 51j and 51k when the image in which the door image 51b does not move (that is, the background image of the door image 51b) is displayed because the closing of the door image 51b is completed. Therefore, the movement of the door image 51b does not hinder the display of the resulting images 51j and 51k, so that attention can be drawn to the resulting images 51j and 51k.

(10-6) Means for controlling the progress of the game, comprising a main control section 41 for transmitting commands and a sub-control section 91 for controlling effects based on the commands. The sub-controller 91 can control the liquid crystal display 51 . Also, the elapse of a predetermined period is measured from the time when the freeze command is received in the last game during the bonus (timing t4 in FIG. 67). After the elapse of the predetermined period is measured (timing t5 in FIG. 67), the liquid crystal display 51 displays result images 51j and 51k. In this way, the sub-controller 91 that controls the liquid crystal display 51 measures the elapse of the predetermined period, so that the display timing of the resulting images 51j and 51k can be easily managed.

(10-7) The sub-control unit 91 turns on the side lamp 27 during the result notification, which is an effect related to the display of the result images 51j and 51k. Further, the sub-control unit 91 turns on the side lamp 27 over the period from when the door image 51b is closed until the result image is displayed, and then turns off the side lamp 27. FIG. Therefore, since the side lamp 27 is turned off after the result notification is completed, the control load of the side lamp 27 is reduced.

(10-8) The spark image 51a is displayed so as to have a higher brightness than an image (for example, the door image 51b) different from the spark image 51a. Therefore, it is possible to attract attention to the spark image 51a, and to attract attention to the resulting images 51j and 51k displayed in the central portion of the screen where the spark image 51a is displayed.

(10-9) Execute control to display the result images 51j and 51k step by step from the first digit (display in ascending order of the number of digits) (first digit→second digit→third digit number in order). Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that a numerical value with a large number of digits is displayed.

(11-1) A plurality of variable display units (for example, reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information (for example, symbols) each identifiable,
A display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display portion after the variable display portion is variably displayed, and winning can occur according to a display result combination that is a combination of display results of a plurality of variable display portions. In a slot machine (for example, slot machine 1),
Predetermining means (for example, processing for performing an internal lottery by the main control unit 41) for determining display results that allow derivation;
a plurality of derivation operation means (for example, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated to derive a display result corresponding to each of the plurality of variable display units;
Derivation control means (for example, processing for performing reel control by the main control unit 41) that performs control for deriving display results according to the determination result of the pre-determining means and the operation of the derivation operation means;
State control means for controlling one of a plurality of types of game states (for example, processing for controlling the game state by the main control unit 41);
Effect means capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a process of executing a setting suggestion effect by the sub control unit 91),
The determination result of the pre-determination means includes an award determination result that allows derivation of an award display result combination accompanied by the award of gaming value (for example, a lottery result that permits derivation of a small winning combination),
The plurality of types of game states include a normal state and a special state (for example, CB) in which the determination result of the pre-determining means has a higher probability than the normal state as the grant determination result,
The derivation control means controls the specific variable display among the plurality of derivation operation means when a plurality of variable display portions including a specific variable display portion (for example, the left reel 2L) are variably displayed in the special state. When the specific lead-out operation means (for example, the left stop switch 8L) corresponding to the part is operated at the first timing (for example, the timing at which the cherry symbol can be drawn onto the pay line LN as shown in FIG. 45), the specific The variable display section is controlled to derive the first display result (for example, a cherry pattern), and the specific derivation operation means is operated at a second timing (for example, as shown in FIG. 45, a watermelon pattern can be drawn onto the pay line LN). When the operation is performed at a specific timing), control is performed to derive a second display result (for example, a watermelon pattern) on the specific variable display unit,
When the specific derivation operation means is operated in a state in which a plurality of variable display sections including the specific variable display section are variably displaying in the special state, and a display result is derived to the specific variable display section (for example, When the left reel 2L is first stopped), when the display result derived to the specific variable display portion is the first display result, the display result derived to the specific variable display portion is the second display result. (For example, as shown in FIG. 46, when the operation is performed at the first timing, when the derivation of "Cherry" is confirmed, the prize of "Cherry" is won. On the other hand, when the stop switches 8C and 8R are operated at the second timing, it is not possible to derive the display result combination that causes the winning.
In the special state, the effect means can execute the specific effect when the specific derivation operation means is operated at the first timing, and when the specific derivation operation means is operated at the second timing. The specific effect is not executed (for example, if the left stop switch 8L is operated at the second timing, the setting suggestion effect is not executed, and if the left stop switch 8L is operated at the first timing, the setting suggestion effect is executed. do).

Specifically, when the left reel 2L is first stopped during the CB, the player operates the left stop switch 8L at the first timing when the symbol other than the number 19 on the left reel 2L passes through the middle stage. , When the left stop switch 8L is operated at the second timing when the number 19 "watermelon" of the left reel 2L passes through the middle row, the winning occurs when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the first timing. easy to do Although the case where the left reel 2L is stopped for the first time is taken as an example, regarding the timing at which "cherry" can be pulled in particularly among the first timings, when the extraction of "cherry" is confirmed, the cherry is pulled. Since the winning is confirmed, even if the left reel 2L is stopped at the second stop, a display result combination that generates the winning is derived regardless of the timing of operating the stop switch thereafter.

Specifically, when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the first timing, there is a possibility that the setting suggestion effect is executed, while when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the second timing, the setting suggestion effect is not performed. Not executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game when the stop switch is operated at the first timing when the possibility of winning a prize is high. Further, by executing the setting suggesting effect, it is possible to prompt the user to perform the operation at the first timing at which the display result combination that will result in winning is likely to be derived. Thereby, the game can be progressed smoothly.

In the present embodiment, the setting suggesting effect is a setting suggesting effect. In addition, in the present embodiment, the left stop switch 8L is turned on at the timing when the symbol No. 8 or No. 9 provided at a position away from the symbol No. 19 on the left reel 2L passes through the middle stage of the first timing. It was assumed that the setting suggestion effect will be executed only when it is operated. However, the setting suggesting effect may be executed when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the timing when the pattern of number 10 passes through the middle stage. Also, the setting suggesting effect may be executed when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the timing when the 1st, 2nd, or 13th, 14th symbols pass through the middle stage.

(11-2) Selecting and setting one of a plurality of types of set values (for example, 1 to 6) with different advantages for the player based on the operation of the predetermined setting operation means. further comprising set value setting means (for example, main control unit 41) for
The specific effect is an effect suggesting which one of the plurality of types of setting values the setting value set by the setting value setting means is (for example, as shown in FIG. 51, the setting value is When the set value is 1 or 2, the probability that the setting suggesting effect of the first mode is executed is the highest, and when the set value is 3 to 5, the probability of executing the setting suggesting effect of the second mode is the highest, and the set value is the highest. When the number is 6, the probability that the setting suggestion effect of the third mode is executed is the highest).

Specifically, the setting suggesting effect is a effect suggesting which one of the plurality of setting values the set value is. Since the player can predict whether the advantage of the slot machine being played is high or low by executing the setting suggesting performance, the player is further encouraged to operate at the first timing when the setting suggesting performance is executed. be able to.

(11-3) The rendering means may provide the derivation operation means corresponding to the specific variable display section regardless of whether or not the derivation operation means corresponding to the variable display sections other than the specific variable display section is operated. is operated at the first timing (for example, even when the right stop switch 8R, the middle stop switch 8C, and the left stop switch 8L are operated in this order, the 8th Alternatively, if the left stop switch 8L is operated at the timing when the pattern of number 9 passes through the middle row, the setting suggesting effect may be executed).

Specifically, the sub-control unit 91 can execute the setting suggestion effect regardless of the order in which the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated. Therefore, regardless of the order in which the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated, the operation at the first timing can be encouraged.

(11-4) Each of the plurality of variable display units variably displays a plurality of pieces of identification information in a predetermined arrangement order (as the reel 2 is rotated by the reel motor, the symbols arranged on the reel 2 are displayed). displayed in the transparent window 3 while continuously changing),
The first timing is such that the specific first identification information among the plurality of identification information variably displayed on the specific variable display section (for example, the pattern of number 8 or 9 on the left reel 2L) is at a specific position (for example, middle stage), and non-specific first identification information among the plurality of identification information variably displayed on the specific variable display section (for example, symbols of numbers 1 and 2 or numbers 13 and 13 of the left reel 2L). 14 pattern) includes the timing of passing through the specific position,
The second timing is the timing at which the second identification information among the plurality of identification information variably displayed on the specific variable display section (for example, symbols of numbers 18 and 19 on the left reel 2L) passes through the specific position. and
In the special state, the effect means executes the specific effect when the operation timing of the derivation operation means corresponding to the specific variable display portion is the timing at which the specific first identification information passes the specific position. (For example, when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the timing when the symbol of No. 8 or No. 9 passes through the middle stage, the setting suggestion effect is executed), the operation timing is the non-specific first identification information is the specific position. (For example, when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the timing when the 1st, 2nd, or 13th, 14th symbols pass through the middle row, setting suggestion does not perform the performance),
The specific first identification information is arranged at a position farther from the second identification information than the non-specific first identification information (for example, the patterns of numbers 8 and 9 on the left reel 2L are both 19 On the other hand, the patterns of numbers 1 and 2 on the left reel 2L are 3 and 4 frames from the pattern of number 19, and the patterns of numbers 13 and 14 on the left reel 2L are on number 19. Only 5 or 6 frames away from the pattern).

Specifically, the sub-control unit 91 sets the left stop switch at the timing when the symbol No. 8 or No. 9 provided at a position away from the symbol No. 19 on the left reel 2L passes through the middle row in the first timing. When 8L is operated, a setting suggesting effect is executed. On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 causes the left stop switch 8L to be turned on at the timing when the 1st, 2nd, or 13th, 14th symbols close to the 19th symbol on the left reel 2L have passed through the middle row of the first timing. When operated, the setting suggestion effect is not executed.

Here, even if the left stop switch 8L is operated at the timing when the pattern of No. 8 or No. 9 on the left reel 2L passes through the middle row among the first timings, and as a result a cherry prize is won, 19 on the left reel 2L Even if the left stop switch 8L is operated at the timing when the 1st, 2nd, or 13th, 14th symbols, which are close to the 1st symbol, or the 13th and 14th symbols pass through the middle row, and as a result, the cherry wins, in any case, 15 medals are paid out. In addition, there is no difference in the likelihood of winning a prize regardless of the timing of the operation.

However, the 1st and 2nd symbols and the 13th and 14th symbols on the left reel 2L are closer to the 19th symbol than the 8th or 9th symbol. Specifically, the symbols of numbers 8 and 9 on the left reel 2L are both separated from the symbol of number 19 by 10 frames or more. On the other hand, the 1st and 2nd symbols on the left reel 2L are only 3 and 4 apart from the 19th symbol. The 13th and 14th symbols on the left reel 2L are only 5 frames and 6 frames apart from the 19th symbol.

Therefore, the time from the 13th and 14th designs passing through the middle stage to the 19th design passing through the middle stage, or the time from the 19th design passing through the middle stage to the 1st and 2nd designs The time to pass through the middle stage is shorter than the time from the passage of the 8th or 9th symbol through the middle stage to the passage of the 19th symbol through the middle stage. As a result, when trying to operate at the timing when the 1st and 2nd symbols or the 13th and 14th symbols have passed, it is more likely to operate at the timing when the 8th or 9th symbol has passed the middle row. There is a high possibility that the left stop switch 8L will be operated by mistake when the pattern of number 19 passes through the middle stage.

In this way, when the left stop switch 8L is operated at a timing at which the left stop switch 8L is less likely to be operated at the timing when the 19th symbol passes through the middle stage, the setting suggesting effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to urge the player to operate the left stop switch 8L at a timing at which the possibility of operating the left stop switch 8L at the timing when the 19th symbol passes the middle stage by mistake is low.

(11-5) The specific derivation operation means is operated in a state in which a plurality of variable display sections including the specific variable display section are variably displaying in the special state, and the first display result is displayed on the specific variable display section. When it is derived, regardless of the operation of the derivation operation means (for example, stop switches 8C and 8R) corresponding to the variable display portion during variable display, a prize is generated (for example, as a stop result of the left reel 2L If "cherry" is drawn on the winning line, the cherry wins),
When the specific derivation operation means is operated in a state in which a plurality of variable display sections including the specific variable display section are variably displaying in the special state, and the second display result is derived to the specific variable display section, Winning does not occur depending on the operation of the derivation operation means (for example, stop switches 8C and 8R) corresponding to the variable display portion during variable display (for example, when the watermelon pattern cannot be drawn on the middle reel 2C or the right reel 2R). "Watermelon" is not derived in the middle row, and the derivation of the losing item is confirmed).

Specifically, when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the second timing, it is not possible to derive a combination of display results that will result in winning depending on subsequent operations of the stop switches 8C and 8R. On the other hand, when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the first timing, regardless of subsequent operation of the stop switches 8C and 8R, it is possible to derive a combination of display results that will result in winning. As a result, winning is more likely to occur when the player is operated at the first timing than when the player is operated at the second timing.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the operation is performed at the second timing, a prize can be generated depending on the operation timing. As a result, even if the left stop switch 8L is operated at the second timing, the player can be prevented from losing.

Note that the method for making it easier to win a prize is not limited to this. For example, the timing at which a display result that does not generate a prize is derived is less when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the first timing than when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the second timing. Winning may be made easier. In addition, when comparing the first winning combination that can be won when operated at the first timing and the second winning combination that can be won when operated at the second timing, the rotation after the first timing is operated. The symbols forming the first winning combination may be made larger than the symbols forming the second winning combination among the symbols arranged on the reels that are currently playing, thereby making it easier to win a prize.

(11-6) The lead-out control means controls to lead the display result on the variable display section within a draw-in range of a predetermined maximum number of frames in which the identification information is a unit frame when the lead-out operation means is operated. (for example, you can draw a pattern in the range of 1 frame or 4 frames),
The first timing is a first specific timing (for example, the number 9 of the left reel 2L) at which the number of frames drawn when the first display result is derived is less than 1 (for example, the number of sliding frames is 0). and a first unspecified timing at which the number of frames drawn when the first display result is derived is not less than 1 and not more than the maximum number of frames (for example, the number of sliding frames is 1). (For example, the timing when the pattern of No. 8 on the left reel 2L passes through the middle row) and
The accuracy of the set value suggested in the specific effect executed when the derivation operation means is operated at the first specific timing is determined when the derivation operation means is operated at the first non-specific timing. Higher than the accuracy of the set value suggested in the specific effect to be executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. is greater than when the sliding coma number is 1).

Specifically, when the number 8 or 9 of the symbol passes through the middle stage, the setting value suggestion accuracy is higher when the number of sliding coma is 0 than when the number of coma is 1. . For example, whether or not the stop switch 8 can be operated at the timing when a specific symbol passes through a predetermined position depends on the skill of the player. For example, a player with high skill can operate the stop switch 8 aiming at the timing when the number of sliding frames becomes 0, while a player with low skill can operate the stop switch 8 aiming at the timing when the number of sliding frames becomes 0. Can not do it.

Since the same display result is derived both when the number of sliding frames is 0 and when the number of sliding frames is 1, a player with low skill may not be able to control the timing when the number of sliding frames is 0. I don't know when it will be, or when the number of sliding coma will be 1. On the other hand, a highly skilled player can specify whether the timing of his/her own operation is when the number of sliding frames becomes zero or when the number of sliding frames becomes one.

Therefore, with respect to the executed setting suggesting performance, a highly skilled player can know whether the setting suggesting performance is a setting suggesting performance with a high setting value suggestion precision or a low setting suggesting performance, whereas a low skill player does not know. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest in the game of a highly skilled player as compared to a less skilled player.

(11-7) The derivation control means, in the special state,
When the plurality of lead-out operation means are operated in a first order (for example, forward pressing), a first award display result combination accompanied by awarding of a game value (for example, medals) of a first value (for example, 15) (for example, a symbol combination with winning cherry or watermelon) and a non-winning display result combination (for example, a losing roll) in which no winning occurs, and
When the plurality of derivation operation means are operated in the second order (for example, reverse push), the first given display result combination (for example, a symbol combination with winning Bell 2) and a second value (for example, 14 to derive a display result combination of a second given display result combination (for example, a symbol combination with a winning of a technical intervention hand) accompanied by the giving of a game value of 1,000,000 yen, or the non-win display result combination. control.

Specifically, during CB, when operated by forward pressing, one of the display result combination in which 15 coins are paid out and the display result combination in which no winning occurs (losing roll). A combination is derived. On the other hand, when operated by reverse pressing, one of a combination of display results in which 15 coins are paid out, a combination of display results in which 14 coins are paid out, and a combination of display results in which no winning occurs (loss). Any display result combination is derived.

Depending on the order of operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, there is a possibility of winning any one of a plurality of small winning combinations with different payout numbers, and there is a possibility of winning only a small winning combination with one payout number. There are cases. Therefore, by changing the order of operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R according to the situation during the CB, it is possible to selectively derive the number of small wins desired to be obtained, thereby improving the amusement of the game during the CB. be able to.

(12-1) Provided with a variable display section capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable, and after variably displaying the variable display section, the variably displaying of the variable display section is stopped, thereby obtaining a display result. is derived, and in a gaming machine (for example, a slot machine 1) in which a prize can be generated according to the display result,
Specific state control means (for example, main control unit 41) that controls to a specific state (for example, CB);
a specific state ending means (for example, main control unit 41) for ending a specific state when a specific amount (for example, 150) of game values (for example, medals) is awarded;
Display means for displaying information (for example, a liquid crystal display 51),
The display means is
an obtainable amount of game value that can be obtained in a specific state (for example, an obtainable number display 61);
an acquisition amount of game value acquired in a specific state (for example, acquisition number display 63);
a total acquisition amount obtained by adding the acquisition amount of game value acquired in the specific state to the acquisition amount of game value acquired in a predetermined period before the specific state (for example, total acquisition number display 62);
When the specific state ends, it is possible to display a result image that can specify the result of the game in the specific state,
The display means further displays the total acquisition amount larger than the acquisition amount,
The display means is
When a predetermined amount of game value is awarded in a specific state, the display of the obtainable amount is subtracted by one unit (for example, the portions shown in FIGS. 54 to 57),
When a predetermined amount of game value is given in a specific state, the display of the acquired amount is added by one unit (for example, the parts shown in FIGS. 54 to 57),
When a predetermined amount of game value is given in a specific state, the display of the total amount of acquisition is added by one unit (for example, the parts shown in FIGS. 54 to 57),
The display means, when the specific state ends by giving a predetermined amount of game value, finishes subtracting the display of the obtainable amount and then finishes adding the display of the obtained amount and the total obtained amount, Display the resulting image after completing the summation of the display of the earned amount and the total earned amount (eg, FIGS. 58-62).

According to this configuration, since the addition of the display of the acquisition amount and the total acquisition amount is performed after the subtraction of the display of the obtainable amount is finished, the addition of the display of the acquisition amount and the total acquisition amount can be made easy to understand. In addition, since it is possible to draw the player's attention to the earned amount and the total earned amount, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the mode of display until the execution of the result notification. Thereby, the game can be progressed smoothly.

(12-2) After the subtraction of the obtainable number display 61 is completed, the display of the obtainable number display 61 is configured to be maintained without being changed until the result images 51j and 51k are displayed. Therefore, it is possible for the player to easily understand that the number of medals obtained by the player during the CB has reached the obtainable number.

(12-3) The effect image display area is divided into a first area 51c and a second area 51d. The first area 51c is darker in brightness than the second area 51d. Then, an obtainable number display 61, a total obtainable number display 62, and an obtainable number display 63 are displayed in the first region 51c having a dark brightness. Therefore, the player can easily recognize the obtainable number display 61 , the total obtained number display 62 , and the obtained number display 63 .

(12-4) When the number of bets is set and the game is started, the number of medals required for setting the number of bets is collectively subtracted from the display of the total number of won medals 62 and the number of won medals display 63 (this example Then, the part shown in FIG. 23). Therefore, it is possible for the player to easily understand that the required number of medals for the number of bets has been subtracted.

(12-5) The timing at which the obtainable number display 61 is decremented for each card is the same as the timing at which the total obtained number display 62 and the obtained number display 63 are added for each card (in this example, 54 to 56). Therefore, it is possible to make it easy to understand that one medal has been obtained and one medal has been subtracted.

(12-6) The timing at which the game auxiliary display 12 is added for each card is the same as the timing at which the total acquired number display 62 and the acquired number display 63 are added for each card (in this example, 54 to 56). Therefore, the display of the game auxiliary display 12 does not conflict with the total winning number display 62 and the winning number display 63, so that the player can be prevented from being confused.

(12-7) The timing at which the total acquired number display 62 is added for each card is the same as the timing at which the acquired number display 63 is added for each card (in this example, as shown in FIGS. 54 to 56). part shown). Therefore, it is possible to make it easy to understand that both the acquired number and the total acquired number are increasing.

(12-8) Extinguishing control of the lamp 60 during the advantage is started while the result notification is being performed, and the lamp 60 during the advantage is extinguished by the time CB's start operation of the next game of the final game is validated ( In this example, the portion shown in FIGS. 61 and 62). Therefore, the end of the CB can be suggested by the advantage medium lamp 60 .

(12-9) Control for extinguishing the advantageous lamp 60 is control to turn on the advantageous lamp 60 in a result notification manner different from the lighting manner during CB, and then extinguish the advantageous lamp 60 (in this example, 61 and 62). Therefore, it is possible to suggest that the advantage lamp 60 is extinguished by using a different lighting mode. That is, it can gradually suggest that the CB ends.

(12-10) When Bell 1 wins during the CB, the first prize effect is executed. Also, when the first winning of the technical intervention role occurs during the CB, the second winning performance is executed. In addition, a game in which the technical intervention player has won once (14 payouts) in a past game during the CB, and which can be the final game of the CB due to the occurrence of a prize (in this embodiment, the number of payouts is 344) When the technical intervening role wins in a game in which the number of obtainable coins becomes one after the game is over, the first winning effect is executed. (In this example, the portion shown in FIGS. 64 and 65). Therefore, it is possible to prevent conspicuous mistakes of players who could not technically intervene to acquire the maximum number of medals in the final game of CB.

(12-11) In a game that can be the final game of CB, when Bell 1 wins in a situation where the technical intervention player has not won even once (that is, when the number of acquisitions ends with the minimum number of 150), the first The flow is to execute the winning effect and then execute the result notification (in this example, the portion shown in FIG. 65). Therefore, even when the technical intervention for obtaining the maximum number of medals is not performed, the common first winning effect is executed in the final game of CB. can be prevented from standing out.

(12-12) Display a related image that is different from the resulting images 51j and 51k, and display the resulting images 51j and 51k after a predetermined period of time has passed since the related images were displayed (in this example, as shown in FIGS. 61 and 62). part shown). Therefore, the display of the result images 51j and 51k indicating the result of the game can be conspicuous, so that attention can be drawn to the result images 51j and 51k. Therefore, the resulting images 51j and 51k can be effectively displayed.

(12-13) A sound related to the display of the related image is output within a predetermined period of time after the related image is displayed (the portion shown in FIG. 67 in this example). Therefore, since the sound related to the display of the related image is output before the result images 51j and 51k are displayed, it is possible to prevent the display of the result images 51j and 51k from being obstructed by the output of the sound. .

(12-14) Execute an effect related to the display of the related image within a predetermined period of time after displaying the related image (in this example, as shown in FIGS. 61 and 62, the The part that executes the effect of lighting the lamp during the advantage). Therefore, since the effect related to the display of the related image is executed before the display of the result image is performed, it is possible to prevent the display of the result image from being obstructed by the execution of this effect.

(12-15) A plurality of resulting images are displayed step by step as the resulting images. Therefore, it is possible to attract the player's attention to each of the plurality of result images.

(12-16) Display the related image with a brightness lower than that of the image different from the related image. Therefore, since the brightness of the related image is lowered, the resultant image can be made conspicuous. Therefore, attention can be drawn to the resulting image.

(12-17) Displaying a related image in which a predetermined image (the door image 51b in this example) moves as a related image within a predetermined period of time after displaying the related image, and displaying an image in which the predetermined image does not move as the related image. (A static image of the door image 51b shown in FIG. 61(k)) is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed (in this example, the portions shown in FIGS. 61 and 62). Therefore, since the result image is displayed when the image in which the predetermined image does not move is displayed as the related image, it is possible to attract attention to the result image.

(12-18) The sub-control unit 91 measures the elapse of a predetermined period of time T by a timer after receiving a winning determination command that can specify that the condition for displaying a related image has been satisfied, and is measured, result images 51j and 51k are displayed (in this example, the portion shown in FIG. 67). Therefore, since the sub-controller 91 measures the elapse of the predetermined period, it is possible to easily manage the display timing of the result image.

(12-19) An effect related to the display of the result images 51j and 51k, in which the advantage lamp 60 is illuminated in the result display mode, and a specific period (in this example, the period of FIGS. 60(g) to 62(p)) is displayed. ), the lighting mode of the mid-advantage lamp 60 is set to a constant mode (in this example, it is turned off as shown in FIG. 62(q)). Therefore, the light emission mode of the advantageous medium lamp 60, which causes the advantageous medium lamp 60 to emit light in the result display mode, becomes a fixed form after being executed for a specific period, thereby reducing the control burden of the advantageous medium lamp 60. be.

(12-20) After displaying a special image (spark image 51a) different from the resulting images 51j and 51k in the display area of the liquid crystal display 51, the resulting images 51j and 51k are displayed in the predetermined area (in this example, FIG. 62). Therefore, since the display of the result image showing the result of the game can be conspicuous, attention can be drawn to the result image. Therefore, the resulting image can be effectively displayed.

(12-21) The special image (spark image 51a) is brighter than the resulting images 51j and 51k (in this example, the portion shown in FIG. 62). Therefore, attention can be drawn to the special image, and the result images 51j and 51k are also displayed in the area where the special image is displayed. As a result, attention can be drawn to the result images 51j and 51k. can.

(12-22) Displaying a related image (door image 51b) different from the resulting images 51j and 51k, and displaying the resulting images 51j and 51k after a predetermined period of time has passed since the related image was displayed (in this example, FIG. 61(i) to FIG. 62(q)). Therefore, since the display of the resulting images 51j and 51k can be conspicuous, attention can be drawn to the resulting images 51j and 51k.

(13-1) The slot machine is
A variable display unit (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) that can variably display a plurality of types of identification information (symbols) that can be identified,
In a slot machine (slot machine 1) in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit and a prize can be generated according to the display result,
basic processing means (main control unit 41) for performing basic processing (main processing);
interrupt processing means (main control unit 41) for periodically interrupting the basic processing (main processing) to perform interrupt processing (timer interrupt processing);
Specific processing means (main control unit 41) for performing specific processing (game program) in the basic processing (main processing);
special processing means (main control unit 41) for performing special processing (non-game program) in the basic processing (main processing);
Minimum time timer value updating means (main control 41) and
During execution of the specific process (game program), the minimum time timer value (one game time management timer value) is updated by the minimum time timer value updating means, and during execution of the special process (non-game program) , the minimum time timer value (one game time management timer value) is not updated by the minimum time timer value updating means.

According to this feature, by updating the minimum time timer value as much as possible, it is possible to smoothly progress the game, while the minimum time timer value is updated during the period when special processing related to fraud detection is being performed. is not performed, the special processing is not mixed with the processing for updating the minimum time timer value. Thereby, the game can be progressed smoothly.

(13-2) In the basic process (main process), the minimum time timer value (timer value for one game time management) is a specific value (0) at a specific opportunity (before reel rotation starts) in one game. If it is determined that the minimum time timer value (one game time management timer value) is not a specific value (0), the minimum time timer value (one game time management timer value) is The game is not progressed until it is determined to be the specific value (0), and the game is progressed when the minimum time timer value (one game time management timer value) is determined to be the specific value (0).

According to this feature, it is possible to secure the minimum time per game by not proceeding with the game until the minimum time has passed and proceeding with the game after the minimum time has passed.

(13-3) prohibiting the execution of the interrupt process (timer interrupt process) when it is determined that the minimum time timer value (timer value for one game time management) is a specific value (0); An initial value (a value corresponding to 4.1 seconds) is set to the minimum time timer value (one game time management timer value).

According to this feature, since interrupt processing is prohibited when the initial value is set to the minimum time timer value, the minimum time timer value is updated while the initial value is being set to the minimum time timer value. You can prevent it from slipping.

(13-4) A flow-down passage (medal receiving passage 29b) for guiding the game media (medals) inserted from the outside of the slot machine to the inner side (hopper tank 34a). ),
The special processing (non-game program) is passage monitoring processing (medal sensor processing) for monitoring the passage of game media (medals) flowing down the flow passage (medal receiving passage 29b).

According to this feature, the minimum time timer value is not updated during the period in which the passage monitoring process for monitoring the passage status of the game media flowing down the flow-down passage is performed. Monitoring processing is not mixed with processing for updating the minimum time timer value.

(13-5) setting error information (error code) when an abnormality is detected in the passage monitoring process (medal sensor process);
Determining whether or not the error information (error code) is set in the specific process (game program), and executing error processing when it is determined that the error information (error code) is set,
During execution of the error processing, the minimum time timer value (one game time management timer value) is updated by the minimum time timer value updating means.

According to this feature, since the minimum time timer value is updated during execution of the error processing, the game can be played smoothly after the error processing is finished.

(13-6) The error processing can be terminated without interrupting the power supply.

According to this feature, the game can be restarted smoothly even if error processing is performed.

(13-7) special game state control means (main control unit 41) for controlling to a special game state (RB, BB) advantageous to the player;
Special value (total cumulative payout number of bonuses, total cumulative continuous bonus payout number ), a special ratio display means (gaming machine information display device 50) for displaying a special ratio (accessory payout ratio, continuous accessory ratio),
The special processing (non-gaming program) stores data (total cumulative payout number, total cumulative award number, total cumulative continuous accessory payout number) for calculating the advantageous ratio (accessory payout ratio, continuous accessory rate). This is special ratio update processing (role ratio monitor data processing) to be updated.

According to this feature, the special ratio related to the performance display of the gaming machine is not updated during the period in which the special ratio update process for updating the data for calculating the special ratio is being performed. Update processing is not mixed with processing for updating the minimum time timer value.

(13-8) In the special ratio update processing (role ratio monitor data processing), it is determined whether or not the special game state (RB, BB) is being controlled, and the special game state (RB, BB) is entered. When it is determined that it is controlled, it is determined whether or not the total number of game values given to the player (total cumulative payout number) has reached the upper limit, and the upper limit has been reached. If it is determined that the special value (total cumulative payout number of accessories, total cumulative continuous accessory payout number) is not updated, and if it is determined that the upper limit value has not been reached, the special Perform a process of updating the value (total total number of payout bonuses, total total number of continuous bonus payouts).

According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the special value from being updated regardless of the situation in which the total number of game values given to the player cannot be updated.

(13-9) Derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated by the player to derive the display result;
An operation mode instruction means (navigation notification) for instructing an operation mode of the derivation operation means,
In addition to the special ratio (accessory payout ratio, continuous accessory payout ratio), the special ratio display means displays the special value (total total number of payout bonuses, total cumulative number of consecutive bonus payouts) and an instruction value (navigation It is possible to display an instruction-included ratio (instructed-accessory ratio), which is the ratio of the indicated value (cumulative instructed-accessory-issues payout number) obtained by adding the number of payouts with notification),
In the special ratio update processing (role ratio monitor data processing), it is determined whether or not the total number of game values given to the player (total accumulated payout number) has reached the upper limit value. When it is determined that it has reached, the process of updating the indicated value (cumulative number of instructed accessories paid out) is not performed, and when it is determined that the upper limit value has not been reached, the special game It is determined whether or not it is controlled to the state (BB), and when it is determined that it is controlled to the special game state (BB), the indicated value (cumulative number of instructed bonus payouts) is updated. When it is determined that the special game state (BB) is not controlled by performing the processing, it is determined whether or not an advantageous operation mode for the player has been instructed by the operation mode instruction means (navigation notification), When it is determined that an operation mode advantageous to the player has been instructed by the operation mode instruction means (navigation notification), a process of updating the indicated value (total number of instructed bonus payouts) is performed.

According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the indicated value from being updated regardless of the situation in which the total number of game values given to the player cannot be updated.

(13-10) The special process (non-game program) is a test signal output process (operation information signal output process) for outputting a test signal (stop execution position signal) to a test device for testing the slot machine. be.

According to this feature, the minimum time timer value is not updated during the period in which the test signal output processing for outputting the test signal to the testing device for testing the slot machine is performed. Test signal output processing related to testing is not mixed with processing for updating the minimum time timer value.

(13-11) pre-determining means (internal lottery) for determining whether or not to allow the occurrence of a prize;
Derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated by the player to derive the display result;
An operation mode instruction means (navigation notification) for instructing the operation mode of the derivation operation means,
In the test signal output processing (operation information signal output processing), it is determined whether or not an operation mode of the derivation operation means is instructed, and if it is determined that an operation mode of the derivation operation means is instructed, A process of outputting a test signal (stop execution position signal) designating the operation mode to be instructed is performed, and if it is determined that the operation mode of the derivation operation means is not instructed, the decision result of the pre-determination means (winning number), and outputs a test signal (stop execution position signal) designating an operation mode corresponding to the determined result (winning number) of the predetermined determination means.

According to this feature, when it is determined that the operation mode of the derivation operation means is instructed, the process of specifying the decision result of the pre-determining means can be omitted. It simplifies the process.

(13-12) In the interrupt process (timer interrupt process), update a plurality of timer values used in the specific process (game program) including the minimum time timer value (one game time management timer value). Processing (counter update processing) and processing (time monitoring update processing) for updating the timer value used in the special processing (non-game program) are performed separately.

According to this feature, the process of updating the timer value used by the special process does not coexist with the process of updating the timer value used by the specific process.

(13-13) pre-determining means (internal lottery) for determining whether or not to allow the occurrence of a prize;
Pre-determined signal output means (main control unit 41) for outputting a pre-determined signal (test signal) capable of specifying the determination result of the pre-determined means to the test device,
When the minimum time timer value (one game time management timer value) is determined to be a specific value (0), the minimum time timer value (one game time management timer value) is set to an initial value. The predetermined signal (test signal) is output when the minimum time timer value (timer value for one game time management) is set to the initial value as time is started.

According to this feature, the predetermined signal is output when the initial value is set to the minimum time timer value. is ensured.

(13-14) In the interrupt process (timer interrupt process), the process of outputting the predetermined signal (test signal) is performed before updating the minimum time timer value (one game time management timer value). conduct.

According to this feature, the update of the minimum time timer value is started after the output of the pre-determination signal is started, so that the output interval of the pre-determination signal can be surely set to be equal to or longer than the minimum time of one game.

[Modification]
Although the main embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and applications are possible. Modifications of the above embodiments applicable to the present invention will be described below.

(About patterns)
In the present embodiment, patterns 5 and 6 exemplify the patterns in which the section display LED 19 lights up regardless of the presence or absence of a power failure, exemplifying the case where the advantageous section normal shifts to AT. However, regardless of whether or not there is a power outage, the pattern in which the section display LED 19 lights up is when CZ shifts to AT or specialized zone, when the advantageous section normal shifts to the specialized zone, or when the normal section shifts to the advantageous section. Examples of pattern 5 and pattern 6 may be applied to any case where the section display LED 19 is lit, such as when the section display LED 19 is turned on.

In the present embodiment, as patterns in which the section display LED 19 is turned off regardless of the presence or absence of a power failure, as illustrated in pattern 5 and pattern 6, the limiter condition is established. However, as a pattern in which the section display LED 19 is turned off regardless of the presence or absence of a power outage, the number of games played in the advantageous section reaches 1500 and the limiter condition is satisfied, or the section such as an AT or a special zone Any end condition (for example, the number of given AT games or the number of specialized zone games is digested and the transition to CZ or advantageous section normal) is established in an advantageous state such that the display LED 19 is lit. The examples of pattern 5 and pattern 6 may be applied in any case where the display LED 19 is extinguished.

In the present embodiment, as an example of a pattern in which the winning effect is not executed after recovery from a power failure, as illustrated in pattern 6, a power failure occurs in a game in which the winning order bell is won during AT. However, as a pattern in which the prize-winning effect is not executed after recovery from power failure, power failure occurs in a game in which all minor wins are won during CB (for example, pattern 10 or pattern 11), or a minor win is won during BB. The example of pattern 6 may be applied in any case where the winning effect is executed, such as when power failure occurs in the game played.

In the present embodiment, in patterns 1 to 10, the third stop operation is the operation for the left stop switch 8L, but even if the operation for the middle stop switch 8C or the right stop switch 8R is the third stop operation, , patterns 1 to 10 may be applied.

In the present embodiment, in pattern 11 and pattern 12, the case where the CT reel is operated for the first stop has been exemplified. , pattern 11 and pattern 12 may be applied.

(Regarding the winning performance)
In the present embodiment, the side lamps 27, the reel backlights 28, and the speaker 53 are used to execute the winning effect, but any one of these notification means may be used to execute the winning effect. may Even in this case, the prize-winning effect may be prevented from being executed after the power is restored. Further, among the informing means used for the prize winning effect when power failure does not occur, the winning effect is not executed after recovery from the power outage depending on one of the informing means, whereas the other informing means may The prize-winning effect may be executed after the return of the decision.

(Regarding special conditions)
In the present embodiment, CB and BB are applied as special states, but RB (regular bonus), which is a type of bonus, and operation mode (operation order, operation timing) of stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are reported. AT (assist time), RT (replay time) where the probability of winning a replay is high, ART (assist replay time) which is AT and RT, CZ (chance zone) where the probability of giving benefits such as AT is higher than usual, etc. Other states may apply to special states.

In the present embodiment, CB is applied as the first special state, and BB is applied as the second special state. It may be applied to two special conditions.

In the present embodiment, the termination condition for each of CB and BB is that the number of payouts during the bonus reaches a predetermined upper limit number. The bonus may end when the number of times reaches a predetermined upper limit number of games, or when the number of games played during the bonus reaches a predetermined upper limit number of games. Also in this case, the end condition may be set so that the CB control period is shorter than the BB control period. For example, CB may have a smaller predetermined upper limit number of sheets and upper limit number of games than BB.

(Regarding reel control during BB)
In the case of forward pressing during BB, when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the first timing, the symbol combination of 14 cards (technical intervention role) is derived, while the left stop switch 8L is operated at the second timing. A 15-card hand (bell 1) symbol combination may be derived. Alternatively, in the case of reverse pressing during BB, when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the first timing, a symbol combination of 14 cards (technical intervention) is derived, while the left stop switch 8L is derived at the second timing. When is operated, a symbol combination of 15-card hand (bell 1) may be derived.

(Regarding the advantageous section after the bonus ends)
In the game after the bonus is finished, the AT may or may not be controlled by the AT. Specifically, an advantageous section (CZ or AT) is won by winning a bonus or winning a rare combination before a bonus is won, and the section display LED 19 is lit while being controlled to the advantageous section during the bonus. After the end of the bonus, if the advantageous section continues, the section display LED 19 continues to light, while if the advantageous section does not continue and shifts to the normal section, the section display LED 19 turns off when the bonus ends. lights out. The slot machine 1 is designed so that even if the normal section is entered and the section display LED 19 is turned off when the bonus ends, the section display LED 19 is turned on again within a predetermined number of games by shifting to the advantageous section. good too. For example, after the bonus is over, when the winning order (for example, pushing order bell) with a probability of 1/1.5 is won in the internal lottery, the zone display LED 19 lights up again in the advantageous zone. good too. Alternatively, when the advantageous section continues after the bonus is finished, the CZ is controlled after the bonus is finished and the CZ is shifted to AT within 10 games, during which the section display LED 19 continues to light and the advantageous section does not continue. In this case, after the bonus is completed, the normal section is entered and the section display LED 19 is turned off, but within 10 games, the section display LED 19 may be turned on by being controlled to the advantageous section (CZ or AT) again.

Thus, slot machine 1 may be configured as follows:
A variable display unit (for example, reels 2L, 2C, 2R) that can variably display a plurality of types of identification information (for example, symbols) that can be identified respectively,
In a slot machine (e.g., slot machine 1) in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit after the variable display unit is variably displayed, and a prize can be awarded according to the display result,
a prize effect means (for example, a process of performing a prize effect by the sub-controller 91) that performs a prize effect (for example, the prize effects shown in FIGS. 58 to 60) for notifying the occurrence of a prize;
Result display means for displaying result images (for example, result images 51j and 51k shown in FIG. 62) showing game results in a specific state (for example, big bonus) (for example, processing for performing result notification by the sub-controller 91); ,
State transition means (for example, processing for controlling the state by the main control unit 41) for shifting the state from the specific state to a special state (for example, RT) after the specific state ends;
Delay control means (for example, processing for performing freeze control by the main control unit 41) that performs delay control (for example, freeze control) to delay the progress of the game;
Attention-calling display means for displaying an attention-calling image (for example, an attention-calling image 51e shown in FIG. 62(q)) for calling the player's attention regarding the game (for example, a process of performing an attention-calling display by the main control unit 41) )When,
an informing means (for example, the game auxiliary display 12) capable of informing information (for example, the number of payouts);
a suggesting means (e.g., zone display LED 19) for executing a suggesting effect to suggest that control is being performed in an advantageous zone (e.g., CZ or AT) that is more advantageous than a normal zone;
When a specific display result (for example, a pattern combination of 7 sets) is derived, the state shifts to the specific state (for example, as shown in FIG. 52, a 7-set pattern combination is derived and a bonus winning occurs),
When the specific display result is derived, the delay control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 52(C), a combination of 7 symbols is derived and the freeze is started when the third stop release is performed. ), suggesting that the state transitions to the specific state during execution of the delay control (for example, as shown in FIGS. 52(C) to (E), a bonus winning effect is performed during the freeze) After the end of the delay control, an effect is executed for the player to select the effect state in the specific state (for example, as shown in FIG. 53(G), a bonus effect is selected after the end of the freeze),
When the winning effect is performed in a game in which the specific state ends (for example, the final game during a bonus), the delay control is performed after the winning effect ends (for example, the winning effect shown in FIGS. 58 to 60). is performed, freezing starts as shown in FIG. 61(g)), and the alert image is displayed together with the result image during the execution of the delay control (for example, FIG. 62(m) to FIG. 62(q ), the result notification is performed during the freeze, and the attention-calling display is performed), and the display of the attention-calling image ends when the delay control ends (for example, as shown in FIG. 63(r) 63 (r) to (t), after the end of the freeze, the transition to the special state is suggested (for example, RT Selection of production is performed. See Fig. 67),
The advantageous interval includes the special state (for example, becomes an advantageous interval during a bonus),
When the special state ends, the suggestive effect continues to be executed without transition from the advantageous interval to the normal interval (for example, the advantageous interval continues after the bonus ends and the interval display LED 19 continues to light). and when the suggestive effect ends by shifting from the advantageous section to the normal section (for example, after the bonus ends, the transition to the normal section causes the section display LED 19 to go out),
Even if the suggestive effect ends by shifting from the advantageous section to the normal section when the special state ends, within a predetermined period (e.g., the pressing order for winning with a probability of 1/1.5 Until the role is won, or within 10 games), the normal section is shifted to the advantageous section,
The result image is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, as shown in FIGS. Displayed when the period of timing t4 to t5 during which the door closing effect is executed) has passed,
The notification of information about the game performed by the notification means based on the winning occurring in the game in which the specific state ends is terminated after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the result image was displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 62(m)). After the display of the result images 51j and 51k is started and the display of the result images 51j and 51k is finished by whiteout as shown in FIG. do),
The suggestion that the state will shift to the special state includes a selection effect (for example, an effect to select the RT effect shown in FIG. 63 (s)) that allows the player to select the effect state in the special state,
Depending on the selection effect, the effect state in the special state is determined before the state transitions to the special state (for example, before the RT screen shown in FIG. 63(v) is displayed, RT effect is confirmed as shown).

As a result, even if the advantageous section ends after the bonus ends, the advantageous section is controlled again within the predetermined period, so that the interest in the game can be prevented as much as possible.

(About setting suggestion production)
In the present embodiment, the setting suggestion effect is performed using the liquid crystal display 51 controlled by the sub-controller 91 . A device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R, etc.) controlled by the main control unit 41 may be used to perform the setting suggestion effect. In addition, as a device controlled by the sub-controller 91, a device other than the liquid crystal display 51, such as a speaker 53, LEDs provided on the reels 2, and LEDs provided on the outer periphery of the slot machine 1, is used to perform setting suggestion effects. may be executed.

In the present embodiment, the setting suggestion effect is executed regardless of the order in which the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated. However, depending on the order in which the stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R are operated, the setting suggestion effect may not be executed.

The setting suggesting effect is not limited to being executed after the first stop operation, and may be executed at any timing such as after the second stop operation, after the third stop operation, or after releasing the third stop.

The setting suggestion effect may be executed not only during the CB, but also during the BB. In this case, in the reel control during the BB as well, a first timing and a second timing are provided as the stop timing for any reel, and when the stop switch is operated at the timing recommended to the player, the setting is made. All you have to do is perform the suggestive production. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 45, during the BB, a first timing and a second timing are provided as the stop timing of the left reel 2L. As described with reference to FIG. 49, the player operates the left stop switch 8L at the first timing to always cause the winning of the technical intervention role, thereby adjusting the number of medals to be won during the BB. be able to. During the BB, when the player operates the stop switch 8L at such a first timing, the setting suggesting performance is executed, and when the player operates the stop switch 8L at the second timing, the setting suggesting performance is executed. It may not be. The setting suggestion effect executed during the BB has the same effect content as the setting suggestion effect executed during the CB as described in FIG. 50, and the setting suggestion used during the CB as described in FIG. The same table as the effect mode table may be used. Alternatively, the setting suggestion effect executed during the BB has the same effect contents as the setting suggestion effect executed during the CB as described in FIG. 50, but is used during the CB as described in FIG. A table in which probabilities different from those in the setting suggestion rendering mode table are set may be used. Alternatively, the setting-suggestion effect executed during the BB may have different effect contents from the setting-suggestion effect executed during the CB as described with reference to FIG. (such as winning sound dedicated to technical intervention, winning image dedicated to technical intervention (character image of "great!"), etc.) may be used. In this way, it is possible to suggest to the player that it is possible to adjust the number of medals obtained in the BB due to the winning of the technical intervention role. In this manner, a common setting suggestion effect may be executed in the first special state (CB) and the second special state (BB), or different setting suggestion effects may be executed.

(Regarding the first timing and the second timing)
In the present embodiment, as an example of the first timing and the second timing, the timing of stopping the left reel 2L is taken as an example. It may be the timing to stop.

(Regarding the turn-off timing of the reel backlight)
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 60(f), the reel backlight 28 is extinguished before the result notification is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the reel backlight 28 may be extinguished after the result notification is executed, and the advantageous lamp 60 may be extinguished after the reel backlight 28 is extinguished. In this way, the end of the bonus can be gradually suggested by turning off the reel backlight 28 and the advantage lamp 60 in this order.

(Regarding subtraction of possible acquisition amount, total acquisition amount, and addition of acquisition amount)
In this embodiment, the subtraction of the obtainable amount and the addition of the total obtainable amount and the obtainable amount are started at the same time, and the subtraction of the obtainable amount is finished first, and then the total obtainable amount and the addition of the obtained amount are started. Terminated, but starts subtraction of potential earnings first, starts adding total earnings and earnings after subtraction of earnings potential, or starts subtraction of potential earnings first , by starting the addition of the total amount of acquisition and the amount of acquisition after the subtraction of the amount of acquisition is completed, the subtraction of the amount of acquisition is completed first, and then the addition of the total amount of acquisition and the amount of acquisition is completed. good too. In this case as well, the result notification is executed after the total acquisition amount and addition of the acquisition amount are completed.

In the present embodiment, the subtraction of the obtainable amount and the addition of the total obtainable amount and the obtainable amount are performed at the same timing, but the subtraction and addition may be performed at different timings (timings are shifted). In addition, although the addition of the total acquisition amount and the addition of the acquisition amount are performed at the same timing, the timing of these additions may be different (the timing may be shifted). Also, although the addition of the total winning amount and the winning amount and the addition on the game auxiliary display 12 are performed at the same timing, the timing of these additions may be different (the timing may be shifted).

Various configurations, various processes, timings of various processes, and the like in the present embodiment and modified examples described above can be appropriately combined.

It should be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the scope of the claims.

1 slot machine, 2C, 2L, 2R reels, 3 see-through window, 4 medal slot, 6
MAXBET switch, 7 start switch, 8C, 8L, 8R stop switch, 9 medal payout port, 10 checkout switch, 11 credit display device, 12 game auxiliary display device, 13 game display unit, 19 section display LED, 27 side lamp, 28 reel backlight, 41 main control section, 51 liquid crystal display, 53 speaker, 60 advantage middle lamp, 91 sub control section.

Claims (1)

Equipped with a variable display unit that can variably display multiple types of identification information that can be individually identified,
In a slot machine capable of deriving a display result by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit after variably displaying the variable display unit, and winning a prize according to the display result,
a predetermining means for determining display results to allow derivation;
derivation operation means operated to derive a display result ;
a start operation means operated to start the variable display of the variable display unit ;
Advantageous state data is set when controlled to an advantageous state,
executing a process related to the advantageous state based on the fact that the advantageous state data is set when the start operation means is operated;
determining whether or not a condition for ending the advantageous state is satisfied when the display result is derived, and executing setting processing for setting an advantageous state ending flag when it is determined that the condition for ending the advantageous state is satisfied;
After executing the setting process, if the derived display result is a display result that accompanies the giving of game value, a giving process of giving game value is executed;
After executing the granting process, it is determined whether or not the advantageous state end flag is set, and if it is determined that the advantageous state end flag is set, the advantageous state including the advantageous state data is determined. Execute the initialization process to initialize the data,
In a game in which the determination result of the pre-determination means is a predetermined determination result, when a predetermined display result is derived by operating the derivation operation means in an operation mode corresponding to the predetermined determination result, specific processing is performed . is executable and
In a game in which the decision result of the pre-decision means is the predetermined decision result, power supply to the slot machine is stopped even though the derivation operation means is operated in an operation mode corresponding to the predetermined decision result. If the predetermined display result is not derived as a result, the specific processing can be executed,
In a game in which the determination result of the prior determining means is a determination result different from the predetermined determination result, when the predetermined display result is derived by stopping power supply to the slot machine, the specific processing is executed. is impossible ,
The specifying process is a process of lighting an advantageous lighting unit related to the advantageous state,
After the power supply to the slot machine is restarted and before an operation relating to progress of the game becomes effective, a process of lighting the advantageous lighting unit based on the operation before the power supply is stopped can be executed. slot machine.

Images